400 Poh

PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK
AND
FAA APPROVED AIRPLANE
FLIGHT MANUAL
(Document No. RC050005 Revision C)
Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG)
Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing Corporation

22550 Nelson Road
Bend Municipal Airport
Bend, Oregon 97701
Phone: (541) 318-1144
Fax: (541) 318-1177
Serial Number
41XXX
Registration Number
Type Certificate No. A00003SE
THIS HANDBOOK INCLUDES THE MATERIAL REQUIRED TO BE FURNISHED TO THE PILOT

BY THE FEDERAL AVIATION REGULATIONS AND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION PROVIDED
BY THE MANUFACTURER, AND CONSTITUTES THE FAA APPROVED AIRPLANE FLIGHT
MANUAL.
This Handbook meets GAMA Specification No. 1, Specification for Pilot's

Operating Handbook, issued February 15, 1975 and revised September
1, 1984.
Approved by the Federal Aviation Administration
By: E. P. Kolano Title: Manager. Seattle Area Certification Office

(Name)
Date: 31 Mar 06 Initial Issue: _09 Dec 05__ Revised: 10 Oct 06
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Log of Normal Revisions
PILOT OPERATING HANDBOOK

LOG OF NORMAL REVISIONS
Normal Description of Revision or
Approved By
Revision Revised Pages Referenced Narrative
Date
No. Discussion Pages
-- -- Initial Revision --
Title Page, iii, vii to xvi,

2-6, 2-11 to 2-14, 2-18, 2-
19, 3-6 to 3-11, 3-21, 3-
22, 3-28, 4-6, 4-13 to 4-
17, 4-23, 4-30 to 4-37, 5- See Narrative Discussion of
A --
1, 5-7, 5-12 to 5-38, 6-A1 Revisions
to 6-A8, 6-B1 to 6-B6, 7-
1 to 7-5, 7-9 to 7-14, 7-
17, 7-18, 7-23 to 7-72, 8-
11, 8-12
Title Page, iii, vii to xvi,
1-9 to 1-11, 2-4, 2-6, 2-10
to 2-14, 3-16, 3-31, 3-34,
4-2, 4-3, 4-9 to 4-11, 4-13 See Narrative Discussion of E. P. Kolano
B
to 4-18, 4-26 to 4-38, 5-1 Revisions 03-31-06
to 5-40, 7-23 to 7-29, 7-
35, 7-42, 7-44, 7-45, 7-
48, 7-49, and 7-56
See Narrative Discussion of Shaun Ripple

C All
Revisions 21 Nov 2006
Initial Issue of Manual: December 9, 2005 RC050005

Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006 iii
Log of Normal Revisions
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
RC050005 Initial Issue of Manual: December 9, 2005

iv Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006
Log of Temporary Revisions
PILOT OPERATING HANDBOOK

LOG OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS
Temporary
Revision Revised Description of Revision or Referenced Approved By
No. and Pages Narrative Discussion Pages Date
Date

Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006 v
Log of Temporary Revisions

vi Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006
List of Effective Pages
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Reissue Added Pages Reissue Added Pages
Page Rev Page Rev Page Rev Page Rev
INTRODUCTION PAGES 1-12 C
Title C 1-13 C
ii C 1-14 C
iii C 1-15 C
iv C 1-16 C
v C 1-17 C
vi C 1-18 C
vii C 1-19 C
viii C 1-20 C
ix C SECTION 2 (Limitations)
x C 2-1 C
xi C 2-2 C
xii C 2-3 C
xiii C 2-4 C
xiv C 2-5 C
xv C 2-6 C
xvi C 2-7 C
xvii C 2-8 C
xviii C 2-9 C
xix C 2-10 C
xx C 2-11 C
SECTION 1 (General) 2-12 C
1-1 C 2-13 C
1-2 C 2-14 C
1-3 C 2-15 C
1-4 C 2-16 C
1-5 C 2-17 C
1-6 C 2-18 C
1-7 C 2-19 C
1-8 C 2-20 C
1-9 C 2-21 C
1-10 C 2-22 C
1-11 C

Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006 vii

SECTION 3 (Emergency 4-4 C
Procedures)
4-5 C
3-1 C 4-6 C
3-2 C 4-7 C
3-3 C 4-8 C
3-4 C 4-9 C
3-5 C 4-10 C
3-6 C 4-11 C
3-7 C 4-12 C
3-8 C 4-13 C
3-9 C 4-14 C
3-10 C 4-15 C
3-11 C 4-16 C
3-12 C 4-17 C
3-13 C 4-18 C
3-14 C 4-19 C
3-15 C 4-20 C
3-16 C 4-21 C
3-17 C 4-22 C
3-18 C 4-23 C
3-19 C 4-24 C
3-20 C 4-25 C
3-21 C 4-26 C
3-22 C 4-27 C
3-23 C 4-28 C
3-24 C 4-29 C
3-25 C 4-30 C
3-26 C 4-31 C
3-27 C 4-32 C
3-28 C
SECTION 5 (Performance)
SECTION 4 (Normal Procedures)
5-1 C 5-41 C
4-1 C 5-2 C 5-42 C
4-2 C 5-3 C 5-43 C
4-3 C

viii Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006


5-4 C 5-44 C 5-37 C
5-5 C 5-38 C
5-6 C 5-39 C
5-7 C 5-40 C
5-8 C 5-41 C
5-9 C 5-42 C
5-10 C 5-43 C
5-11 C 5-44 C
5-12 C SECTION 6 (Weight & Balance)
5-13 C 6-1 C 6-19 C
5-14 C 6-2 C 6-20 C
5-15 C 6-3 C
5-16 C 6-4 C
5-17 C 6-5 C
5-18 C 6-6 C
5-19 C 6-7 C
5-20 C 6-8 C
5-21 C 6-9 C
5-22 C 6-10 C
5-23 C 6-11 C
5-24 C 6-12 C
5-25 C 6-13 C
5-26 C 6-14 C
5-27 C 6-15 C
5-28 C 6-16 C
5-29 C 6-17 C
5-30 C 6-18 C
5-31 C Weight & Balance (Appendix A)
5-32 C Type of Equipment for
5-33 C Operation List
5-34 C 6-A1 C 6-A11 C
5-35 C 6-A2 C 6-A12 C
5-36 C 6-A3 C 6-A13 C

6-A4 C 6-A14 C

Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006 ix


6-A5 C 6-A15 C 7-18 C
6-A6 C 6-A16 C 7-19 C
6-A7 C 6-A17 C 7-20 C
6-A8 C 6-A18 C 7-21 C
6-A9 C 7-22 C
6-A10 C 7-23 C
Weight & Balance (Appendix B) 7-24 C
Installed Equipment List 7-25 C
6-B1 C 6-B7 C 7-26 C
6-B2 C 6-B8 C 7-27 C
6-B3 C 6-B9 C 7-28 C
6-B4 C 6-B10 C 7-29 C
6-B5 C 7-30 C
6-B6 C 7-31 C
SECTION 7 7-32 C
(Description of Airplane &
Systems) 7-33 C
7-34 C
7-1 C
7-35 C
7-2 C
7-36 C
7-3 C
7-37 C
7-4 C
7-38 C
7-5 C
7-39 C
7-6 C
7-40 C
7-7 C
7-41 C
7-8 C
7-42 C
7-9 C
7-43 C
7-10 C
7-44 C
7-11 C
7-45 C
7-12 C
7-46 C
7-13 C
7-47 C
7-14 C
7-48 C
7-15 C
7-49 C
7-16 C
7-50 C
7-17 C

x Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006


7-51 C 8-3 C
7-52 C 8-4 C
7-53 C 8-5 C
7-54 C 8-6 C
7-55 C 8-7 C
7-56 C 8-8 C
7-57 C 8-9 C
7-58 C 8-10 C
7-59 C 8-11 C
7-60 C 8-12 C
7-61 C 8-13 C
7-62 C 8-14 C
7-63 C 8-15 C
7-64 C 8-16 C
7-65 C 8-17 C
7-66 C 8-18 C
7-67 C 8-19 C
7-68 C 8-20 C
7-69 C 8-21 C
7-70 C 8-22 C
SECTION 8 SECTION 9 (Supplements)
(Handling, Servicing &
9-1 C
Maintenance)
9-2 C
8-1 C
8-2 C

Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006 xi


xii Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006
Narrative Discussion of Revisions
NARRATIVE DISCUSSION OF REVISIONS

Revision Page
Comment
Level No.
- All Initial revision.
A Title Page, Revised to indicate Revision A.
iii, vii Revised LOEP.
through xvi Revised Narrative Discussion of Revisions.
A 2-6 Revised Figure 2-3.
A Added approach operation limitation at propeller RPM of approx.
1800.
2-11 through
Added VOR and VAPP mode limitation to the Garmin GFC 700
2-14
Automatic Flight Control System Limitations section. Repaginated
pages.
A 2-18 and 2- Revised compass placard.
19 Added panel light dimmer placard. Repaginated pages.
A 3-2 Revised Table of Contents.
A Changed “Boost” to “Fuel” in the Engine Failure During Climb to
Cruise Altitude, Engine Failure During Flight Below 15,000 Ft.,
Loss of Fuel Pressure or Flow, Engine Failure With Fuel
Annunciation Illuminated below 15,000 Ft., and Engine Failure
With Fuel Annunciation Illuminated above 15,000 Ft. checklists.
Changed “boost” to “fuel”, changed “too rich” to “to full rich” in
3-6 through
3.2, and changed “to rich” to “to full rich” and “boost” to “fuel” in
3-12
the Warning, in the Procedures After an Engine Restart checklist.
Changed “Boost” to “Fuel” in the Emergency Landing Without
Engine Power, Emergency Landing With Throttle Stuck at Idle
Power, Engine Driven Fuel Pump (EDFP) – Partial Failure, and
Engine Fire on the Ground During Startup checklists. Changed
“EIS” to “System” in the In-flight Cabin Fire checklist.
A Changed “engine” to “System” in the Oxygen System Malfunction
3-17
and Carbon Monoxide Detection checklists.
A Changed “Boost” to “Fuel” in the Emergency Backup Boost Pump
3-21 and 3- title and section.
22 Changed “Boost” to “Fuel” in the Critical Issues (Backup Boost
Pump) title and section.
A Changed “engine page” to System page” in the Electrical
Problems section. Changed “engine driven boost pump” to “engine
3-28
driven fuel pump” in the Failure of Engine Driven Fuel Pump
section.
A 4-6 Revised Item 16 in the Area 1 Preflight Inspection checklist.
A Changed “Boost” to “Fuel” in the Before Takeoff, Short Field
4-13 through Takeoff, Normal Climb, Maximum Performance Climb, Cruise,
4-17 Descent, Before Landing, Short Field Landing, and Balked
Landing checklists.
A Change “EIS” to “System” in the Engine Starting section.
4-22 and 4-
Changed “auxiliary boost pumps are off” to “auxiliary fuel pump
23
is off” in the Over Priming section.

Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006 xiii

Revision Page
Comment
Level No.
A Added paragraph directing fuel pump switch be off for descent and
landing in the Descent section.
Changed “boost” to “fuel” in the Balked Landings section.
Added discussion of flat triangular leading edge tape on the wings
4-30 through and zig zag tape on bottom of horizontal tail section to the Stalls
4-37 section.
Revised the last sentence of the first paragraph in the Cold
Weather Operations section.
Changed “boost pumps” to “fuel pump” in the third paragraph of
the Hot Weather Operations section.
A Revised Figure 5-8 to indicate speeds with flat triangular leading
5-7
edge tape on the wings.
A Added Figure 5-13 for maximum rate of climb with flat triangular
5-12 to 5-38 leading edge tape on the wings. Renumbered following figures,
revised cross references and repaginated pages.
A 6-A1
Deleted Items 21-23 and 21-24. Deleted model #s and size from
through 6-
Items 34-35, 34-36, and 34-37.
A8
A 6-B1 through Deleted Items 21-23 and 21-24. Deleted model #sand size from
6-B6 Items 34-35, 34-36, and 34-37.
A 7-1 through
Revised Table of Contents
7-5
A Moved Aileron Servo Tab section if front of Elevator section.
Changed “convenience” to “inconvenience” in the Control Lock
section.
Changed “Engine Indication System (EIS) page” to “various
pages” in the Elevator and Aileron section.
Revised the Hat Switches section.
7-9 through Revised Trim Position Indicator section.
7-14 Deleted the last sentence from the Autopilot/Trim Master Switch
(A/P Trim) section.
Changed “flaps does” to “flaps switch does” in the 6th sentence of
the 2nd paragraph of the Wing Flaps section.
Revised Figure 7-3. Revised Figure 7-4.
Changed “on the left side” to “at the front” in the Front Seat
Adjustment section.
A Revised 2nd paragraph of the Baggage Door section.
7-17 and 7-
Changed “clockwise” to “inboard”, and deleted “90º
18
counterclockwise or” in the Parking Brake section.
A Added Baro-correction Warning note and AHRS Warning note to
the Garmin G1000 Integrated Cockpit System section. Added
MFD Map Scale, MFD Holding Pattern Depiction, and VOR
Frequency Display in the MFD section.
Added GCU 476 Remote Keypad.
7-23 through
Added Figure 7-6 and renumbered following figures.
7-72
Changed “Boost” to “Fuel” in the Backup Boost Pump and Vapor
Suppression section title. Changed “Boost” to “Fuel” in the Primer
section.
Added tables to the Aircraft Alerts, Caution Alerts, Annunciation
Advisory, and Message Advisory Alerts sections. Added AFCS

xiv Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006

Revision Page
Comment
Level No.
Alerts, TAWS Alerts, and TAWS System Status Annunciations
and Other Annunciations sections.
Revised the Backup Attitude Indicator section.
Revised description of the Kollsman Window in the Backup
Altimeter section.
Changed “MFD EIS page” to “MFD” in the 2nd paragraph, and to
“MFD System page” in the 3rd paragraph of the Fuel Quantity
Indication section.
Revised Figure 7-14 and renumbered it to Figure 7-15.
Changed “MFD EIS page” to “MFD System page” in the Fuel
Selector section.
Revised location of the backup pump and vapor suppression
switches in the Backup Fuel Pump and Vapor Suppression section.
Deleted “single speed” from the Airflow paragraph of the
Environmental Control System section.
Revised location of the avionics master switch in the Avionics
Master Switch paragraph of the Electrical System section.
Revised switch operation in the Overhead Reading Lights and
Instrument Flood Bar sections.
Revised Lower Instruments, Circuit Breaker and Master Switches
Panels section.
Revised the Flaps Panel and 5 Pack Switches (Press-to-Test PTT)
section and renamed it to Press-to-Test PTT Button.
Revised the Control Stick Switches and Headset Plug Positions
section.
Revised the Autopilot Disconnect/Trim Interrupt Switch section.
Revised the description of condition required for ELT activation,
and the location of the ELT switch in the Emergency Locator
Transmitter section.
Added Preflight Testing and changed “EIS page” to “System
page” in the Precise Flight Fixed Oxygen System section.
Changed “EIS” to “System” and revised description of Test/Reset
button in the CO Guardian Carbon Monoxide Detector section.
Added Reference to Garmin Cockpit Reference Guide for
operating instructions in the XM Weather (WX) Data System
section.
Revised the Ryan Model 9900BX TCAD section.
Added titles to Figure 7-24 and 7-25 and renumbered to 7-25 and
7-26.
Deleted the Acknowledge/Traffic Button section.
Changed “maximum performance” to “maximum ACCS
performance” in the 5th General Hint for ACCS Operation.
Added Warnings about use of GPS autopilot mode in the terminal
area and G1000 inability to command the autopilot to fly
procedure turns or holding patterns automatically, revised CWS
(Control Wheel Steering) Button paragraph, and added additional
information to the GA (Go Around) Button paragraphs in the
Garmin GFC 700 Automatic Flight Control System section.
Repaginated pages and revised cross references. Added pages 7-67
through 7-72.
A 8-11 and 8-
Revised Figure 8-4. Repaginated pages.
12

Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006 xv

Revision Page
Comment
Level No.
B Title Page, Revised to indicate Revision B.
through xvi Revised Narrative Discussion of Revisions.
B Revised “Limit Load” to “Limit Load Factor”, “Ultimate Load” to
1-9 to
“Ultimate Load Factor” and revised those definitions. Repaginated
1-11
pages.
B 2-1 Revised Table of Contents.
B 2-4 Revised Figure 2-2.
B Revised software version table in No. 1, Changed “G10000” to
G1000” in No. 4, changed “, flight director or manual electric
trim” to “or flight director” and added “PFT” annunciation
description in No. 6, and changed autopilot maximum and
minimum engagement speeds from “TBD” to “210” and “80”
(respectively) in No. 10 of the Garmin G1000 System Limitations
section.
Added explanation of automatic switching caution to no. 2 and
removed paragraph no. 3 of the Approach Operation Limitations in
2-10 to 2-14 the Garmin G1000 System Limitations section.
Changed “14 CFR Part 121 or Part 135” to “14 CFR Part 135” in
paragraph 2 in the GTX Mode S Transponder Limitations section.
Revised the Garmin GFC 700 Automatic Flight Control System
Limitations section.
Changed “PA” to “(Pressure Altitude)”, added oxygen system
operation verification Warning, and expanded the
lipstick/chapstick Warning in the Oxygen Limitations section.
Expanded Leading Edge Devices paragraph under the Other
Limitations section. Repaginated pages.
B 3-16 Revised Items Unavailable with a Bus Failure table..
B Changed Note regarding failures in breathing stations, cannulas,
3-34
masks and flow meters to a Warning.
B 4-2 and 4-3 Revised Table of Contents.
B Revised the Before Starting Engine, Starting Cold Engine, Starting
Hot Engine, After Engine Start, and Crosstie Operation checklists.
Revised the Warning in the Autopilot Autotrim Operations
4-9 to 4-18 checklist.
Added Warning to verify oxygen system operation to the Before
Takeoff checklist.
Revised the Normal Takeoff checklist. Repaginated pages.
B Added Oxygen System paragraph to the Before Takeoff section.
Added paragraph on ILS approaches to the Approach section.
Added Oxygen System paragraph to the Landings section.
Added “The maximum demonstrated crosswind component for
4-26 to 4-38 takeoff is 23 knots.” to the Crosswind Takeoff paragraph under the
Takeoffs section.
Added maximum demonstrated crosswind component for landing
is 23 knots to the Crosswind Landings paragraph under the
Landings section. Repaginated pages

xvi Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006

Revision Page
Comment
Level No.
B Revised Table of Contents.
Revised Figure 5-11. Changed section title “Takeoff Speed
Schedule” to “Short Field Takeoff Speed Schedule” and revised
section.
Changed title of Figure 5-12 to “Maximum rate of Climb Without
5-1 to 5-40
Flat Triangular Leading Edge Tape On The Wings”.
Replaced Figure 5-14. Added Figure 5-15. Renumbered following
figures and revised cross references.
Added statement that cruise performance is not affected by the flat
triangular leading edge tape. Added pages 5-29 and 5-30.
B Changed first Warning to Note in the Garmin G1000 Integrated
Cockpit System section.
Revised the Alerts Window paragraph under the Annunciation and
7-23 to 7-29
Alerts section.
Changed all occurrences of “Columbia 350/400” to “Columbia
400”.
B 7-35 Replaced Figure 7-14.
B 7-42 Deleted rudder hold from the Left Bus paragraph.
B 7-44 and 7-
Revised Figure 7-17 and Figure 7-18.
45
B Added Note to the Stall Warning System section that audio
7-48 and 7-
entertainment is inhibited automatically when the stall horn is
49
active.
B Expanded the lipstick/chapstick Warning in the Breathing Devices
7-56 (Masks and Cannulas) paragraph under the Precise Flight Fixed
Oxygen System section.
C Reformatted entire manual to 5.5 x 8.5. Page numbers indicated
All for Revision Level C were made prior to reformatting of the
manual; refer to Rev. B manual to compare changes.
C Title Page, Revised Title Page to indicate Revision C.
through xx Revised Narrative Discussion of Revisions.
C 2-6 Revised Figure 2-3.
C 2-7 Revised the Maximum Empty Weight from 2748 lbs. to 2708 lbs.
C 2-18 Revised compass placard.
C 3-1 to 3-3 Revised Table of Contents.
C Revised Emergency Procedure checklists to delete excess or
redundant information, and standardize terminology.
Changed “Engine Failure During Flight Above 15,000 FT.” to
“Engine Failure During Flight” under the High Altitude Negative
G Loading section. Changed “Emergency Landing Without Engine
Power” to “Forced Landing (Engine Out or Partial Power)” in the
3-6 to 3-34 Engine Does Not Restart, High Oil Temperature and Low Oil
Pressure sections. Revised the 3rd and 4th paragraphs under the
Emergency Backup Fuel Pump section. Changed cross reference
to “page 3-4, Engine Failure During Flight” in the Failure of
Turbocharger section. Revised the Under Voltage section. Revised
the last sentence in the Master Switches section. Revised the
Circuit Breaker Panel section. Revised the location of the static air

Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006 xvii

Revision Page
Comment
Level No.
source switch under the Static Air Source Blockage section.
Revised the bullet list in the first paragraph of the Oxygen System
section. Repaginated pages. Deleted pages 3-35 and 3-36.
C 4-1 to 4-3 Revised Table of Contents.
C Revised Normal Procedures checklists to delete excess or
redundant information, and standardize terminology. Revised the
Over Priming paragraph under the Engine Starting Section.
Revised the Battery Recharging section. Changed “there may be
no point” to “there is no point” in the Crosstie Operations
Checklist section. Revised the 3rd paragraph under the Engine
Runup section. Changed “is less than 35.5” to “is at or below
35.5” in the Takeoffs section. Revised the Mixture Settings
paragraph under the Cruise section. Revised the Crosswind
Landings section. Changed “106” to “95” in the Balked Landings
section. Changed “1650” to “1625” in the Control by Turbine Inlet
4-6 to 4-38
Temperature (TIT) section. Referenced Figure 5-11 in the Short
Field Takeoff Section. Deleted the 2nd to last sentence of the first
paragraph of the Power Settings paragraph and changed “rocker
switch” to “switch” in the vapor Suppression paragraph under the
Normal and Maximum Performance Climbs section.. Revised the
first sentence in the Descent section. Revised the 3rd paragraph
under the Hot Weather Operations section. Revised location of the
blue dots in the Fuel Selector section. Deleted the 2nd paragraph
under the Engine Starting section. Revised the first paragraph of
the Glideslope Flight Procedure with Autopilot section.
Repaginated pages.
C Changed “landing performance chart” to “takeoff performance
5-10
chart” in Figure 5-10.
C 5-14 and 5-
Revised Figure 5-14 and Figure 5-15.
15
C 5-31 Revised the Lean of Peak Engine Operation section.
C 6-1 Revised Table of Contents.
C Added Caution and example regarding specific weight of Aviation
Gasoline. Revised Figure 6-3. Deleted indication of an optional
6-4 to 6-20 restraint system from the Baggage Nets section. Revised the
Maximum Empty Weight section. Revised Figure 6-20.
Repaginated pages and added pages 6-19 and 6-20.
C Changed “five through eight” to “four through seven” in the Flight
Operation Requirements on the first page. Added optional Oregon
6A-1 to 6A-8 Aero seats, Artex ELT ME406, electrically driven compressor,
interlock assembly, and accessories alternator. Indicated IFR for
Items 34-10 and 34-17.
C Added optional Oregon Aero seats, Artex ELT ME406,
6B-1 to 6B-6 electrically driven compressor, interlock assembly, and accessories
alternator. Revised POH/AFM weight. Revised GTX 33 weight.
C 7-1, 7-3 to 7-
Revised Table of Contents.
6
C Revised the description of the wing cuffs in the Wings and Fuel
7-8
Tanks section.

xviii Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006

Revision Page
Comment
Level No.
C Changed “dimmer thumb-wheel” to “dimmer” in the Wing Flaps
7-13
section.
C Added Warning to the Door section. DO NOT open door during
flight. Changed “Door Open” to “DOOR OPEN” in the Latching
7-15 and 7-
Mechanism and Door Seal System sections. Changed “manifold
19
gauge” to “manifold pressure indicator” in the Throttle paragraph
under the Engine Controls section.
C Changed “pilot’s left knee” to “pilot’s right knee” and “fuel
manifold” to “intake manifold” in the Induction section.
7-21
Changed “or pressure is above 18 psi” to “or a pressure differential
greater than 18 psi is detected” in the Engine Oil section.
C Revised the description of the OXYGEN PRES message. Revised
the description of the LOW MAN PRES message. Replaced chart
7-30 to 7-33
under the AFCS Alerts section, TAWS Alerts section, and TAWS
System Status Annunciations section.
C Changed L-LOW FUEL” to “L LOW FUEL” in the Fuel Low
7-39 Annunciation Messages section. Revised the first paragraph of the
Backup Fuel Pump and Vapor Suppression section.
C Revised the Upper Instruments, and the Lower Instruments,
Circuit Breaker, and Master Switches Panels sections. Deleted the
7-46 to 7-49 first sentence of the second paragraph of the Press-to-Test PTT
Button section. Revised the first sentence of the airplane Exterior
Lighting System section. Revised Figure 7-19. Repaginated pages.
C Revised the Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) section to
include the Artex ME406 ELT. Revised the last paragraph in the
Oxygen Display section. Changed “test/reset softkey” to “reset
softkey” and two occurrences of “50” to “75” in the CO Guardian
Carbon Monoxide Detector section. Indicated the location of the
XM antenna in the XM Weather (WX) Data System section.
Indicated engine driven or electrically driven compressor. Added a
Note to delay after turning off the system before turning it back on
7-52 to 7-76
again in the System Operation paragraph of the Automatic Climate
Control System (ACCS) section. Added section System Operation
Using Ground Power describing use of ACCS to pre-cool cabin of
the aircraft. This is possible only by ACCS equipped with electric
compressor powered by ground power. Added GTA 82 Trim
Adapter to the list of LRU in the GRC 700 AFCS. Changed “GA”
to “GO AROUND” in the Additional AFCS Controls section.
Repaginated pages. Added pages 73 to 76
C 8-8 and 8-9 Revised Figure 8-3. Revised the Oxygen System Servicing section.

Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006 xix

xx Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006
Section 1
Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG) General
Section 1
General
TABLE OF CONTENTS
THREE-VIEW DRAWING OF THE AIRPLANE ....................................................................... 1-2
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................... 1-3
DESCRIPTIVE DATA .................................................................................................................. 1-4

Engine ................................................................................................................................... 1-4
Propeller ................................................................................................................................ 1-4
Fuel ........................................................................................................................................ 1-4
Oil .......................................................................................................................................... 1-4
Maximum Certificated Weights ........................................................................................... 1-5
Typical Airplane Weights ..................................................................................................... 1-5
Cabin and Entry Dimensions ................................................................................................ 1-5
Space and Entry Dimensions of Baggage Compartment ..................................................... 1-5
Specific Loadings ................................................................................................................. 1-5
ABBREVIATIONS, TERMINOLOGY, AND SYMBOLS ......................................................... 1-6

Airspeed Terminology .......................................................................................................... 1-6
Meteorological Terminology ................................................................................................ 1-7
Engine Power and Controls Terminology ............................................................................ 1-7
Airplane Performance & Flight Planning Terminology ....................................................... 1-8
Weight and Balance Terminology ........................................................................................ 1-8
Miscellaneous .....................................................................................................................1-10
REVISIONS AND CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL ............................................1-11

Supplements ........................................................................................................................1-11
Use of the terms Warning, Caution, and Note ....................................................................1-11
Meaning of Shall, Will, Should, and May ..........................................................................1-11
Meaning of Land as Soon as Possible or Practicable .........................................................1-11
CONVERSION CHARTS ...........................................................................................................1-11

Kilograms and Pounds ........................................................................................................1-12
Feet and Meters ...................................................................................................................1-13
Inches and Centimeters........................................................................................................1-14
Nautical Miles, Statute Miles, and Kilometers....................................................................1-15
Liters, Imperial Gallons, and U.S. Gallons ........................................................................1-16
Temperature Relationship (Fahrenheit and Celsius)...........................................................1-19
Fuel Weights and Conversion Relationships ......................................................................1-20

Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006 1-1
Section 1
General Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG)
THREE-VIEW DRAWING OF THE AIRPLANE
SPECIFICATIONS
2 2
Wing Area 141.2 ft. (13.1 m )
Wing Span 35.8 ft. (10.9 m)
Length 25.2 ft. (7.68 m)
Empty Weight (±) 2500 lbs. (1134 kg)
Gross Weight 3600 lbs. (1633 kg)
Stall Speed 59 KIAS 60 KCAS
Maneuvering Speed 158 KIAS 162 KCAS
Cruising Speed 181 KIAS 185 KCAS
Never Exceed Speed 230 KIAS 235 KCAS
Engine 310 HP Continental
TSIO-550-C
Propeller Hartzell
78 in. (198 cm) Constant Speed
Governor McCauley
*Note: Wingspan is 36 ft.± with position lights.
Figure 1 - 1

1-2 Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006
Section 1
Section 1
General
INTRODUCTION
This handbook is written in nine sections and includes the material required to be furnished to the
pilot by Federal Aviation Regulations and additional information provided by the manufacturer and
constitutes the FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual. Section 1 contains generalized descriptive
data about the airplane including dimensions, fuel and oil capacities, and certificated weights. There
are also definitions and explanations of symbols, abbreviations, and commonly used terminology for
this airplane. Finally, conventions specific to this manual are detailed.
NOTE
Federal Aviation Regulations require that a current Handbook be in the
airplane during flight. It is the operator’s responsibility to maintain the
Handbook in a current status. The manufacturer provides the registered
owner(s) of the airplane with revisions.
In countries other than the United States, FAA operating rules may not
apply. Operators must ensure that the aircraft is operated in accordance
with national operating rules.

Section 1
DESCRIPTIVE DATA
ENGINE
Number of Engines: 1
Engine Manufacturer: Teledyne Continental
Engine Model Number: TSIO-550-C
Engine Type: Twin-turbocharged, direct drive, air-cooled, horizontally opposed, fuel-injected, six-
cylinder engine with 552 in.3 (9.0 L) displacement
Takeoff Power: 310 BHP at 2600 RPM , 35.5 in of Hg
Maximum Continuous Power: 310 BHP at 2600 RPM
Maximum Normal Operating Power: 262 BHP (85%) at 2500 RPM, and 33.5 in of Hg
Maximum Climb Power: 310 BHP at 2600 RPM
Maximum Cruise Power: 262 BHP at 2550 RPM
PROPELLER
Propeller Manufacturer: Hartzell
Propeller Hub and Blade Model Number: HC-H3YF-1RF and F7693DF
Number of Blades: 3
Propeller Diameter: 77 in. (196 cm) minimum, 78 in. (198 cm) maximum
Propeller Type: Constant speed and hydraulically actuated, with a low pitch setting of 16.5o ± 0.2°
and a high pitch setting of 42.0o ± 1.0° (30 inch station)
FUEL
The following fuel grades, including the respective colors, are approved for this airplane.
100LL Grade Aviation Fuel (Blue)
100 Grade Aviation Fuel (Green)
Total Fuel Capacity - 106 Gallons (401 L)
Total Capacity Each Tank: 53 Gallons (201 L)
Total Usable Fuel: 49 Gallons (186 L)/tank, 98 Gallons (371 L)
Total
NOTE
Under certain atmospheric conditions, ice can form along various
segments of the fuel system. Under these conditions, isopropyl alcohol,
ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, or diethylene glycol monomethyl ether
may be added to the fuel supply. Additive concentrations shall not exceed
3% for isopropyl alcohol or 0.15% for ethylene glycol monomethyl ether
and diethylene glycol monomethyl ether (military specification MIL-I-
27686E). See Figure 8 - 1 in Section 8 for a chart of fuel additive mixing
ratios.
OIL
Specification or Oil Grade (the first 25 engine hours) – Non-dispersant mineral oil conforming to
SAE J1966 shall be used during the first 25 hours of flight operations. However, if the engine is
flown less than once a week, a straight mineral oil with corrosion preventative MIL-C-6529 for the
first 25 hours is recommended.
Specification or Oil Grade (after 25 engine hours) – Teledyne Continental Motors Specification
MHS-24. An ashless dispersant oil shall be used after 25 hours.
Viscosity Recommended for Various Average Air Temperature Ranges

Below 40°F (4°C) ⎯ SAE 30, 10W30, 15W50, or 20W50
Above 40°F (4°C) ⎯ SAE 50, 15W50, or 20W50

Section 1
Total Oil Capacity

Sump: 8 Quarts (7.6 L)
Total: 10 Quarts (9.5 L)
Drain and Refill Quantity: 8 Quarts (7.6 L)
Oil Quantity Operating Range: 6 to 8 Quarts (5.7 to 7.6 L)
NOTE
The first time the airplane is filled with oil, additional oil is required for
the filter, oil cooler, and propeller dome. At subsequent oil changes, this
additional oil is not drainable from the system, and the added oil is mixed
with a few quarts of older oil in the oil system.
MAXIMUM CERTIFICATED WEIGHTS

Ramp Weight: 3600 lbs. (1633 kg)
Takeoff Weight: 3600 lbs. (1633 kg)
Landing Weight: 3420 lbs. (1551 kg)
Baggage Weight: 120 lbs. (54.4 kg)
TYPICAL AIRPLANE WEIGHTS

The empty weight of a typical airplane offered with four-place seating, standard interior, avionics,
accessories, and equipment has a standard empty weight of about 2500 lbs. (1134 kg).
Maximum Useful Load: 1100 lbs.* (499 kg)
*(The useful load varies for each airplane. Please see Section 6 for specific details.)
CABIN AND ENTRY DIMENSIONS

Maximum Cabin Width: 48.17 inches (122 cm)
Maximum Cabin Length (Firewall to aft limit of baggage compartment):
139.6 inches (354.6 cm)
Maximum Cabin Height: 49 inches (124.5 cm)
Minimum Entry Width: 33 inches (83.8 cm)
Minimum Entry Height: 33 inches (83.8 cm)
Maximum Entry Clearance: 46 inches (116.8 cm)
SPACE AND ENTRY DIMENSIONS OF BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT

Maximum Baggage Compartment Width: 38.5 inches (97.8 cm)
Maximum Baggage Compartment Length: 52 inches (132 cm) (Including Shelf)
Maximum Baggage Compartment Height: 34.5 inches (87.6 cm)
Maximum Baggage Entry Width: 28 inches (71.1 cm) (Diagonal Measurement)
SPECIFIC LOADINGS
Wing Loading: 25.50 lbs./sq. ft
Power Loading: 11.61 lbs./hp

Section 1
ABBREVIATIONS, TERMINOLOGY, AND SYMBOLS
AIRSPEED TERMINOLOGY
CAS Calibrated Airspeed means the indicated speed of an aircraft, corrected for
position and instrument error. Calibrated airspeed is equal to true airspeed in
standard atmosphere at sea level.
KCAS Calibrated Airspeed expressed in knots.
GS Ground Speed is the speed of an airplane relative to the ground.
IAS Indicated Airspeed is the speed of an aircraft as shown on the airspeed indicator
when corrected for instrument error. IAS values published in this Handbook
assume zero instrument error.
KIAS Indicated Airspeed expressed in knots.
TAS True Airspeed is the airspeed of an airplane relative to undisturbed air, which is
the CAS, corrected for altitude, temperature and compressibility.
VH This term refers to the maximum speed in level flight with maximum continuous
power.
VO The maximum operating maneuvering speed of the airplane. Do not apply full or
abrupt control movements above this speed. If a maneuver is entered gradually at
VO with maximum weight and full forward CG, the airplane will stall at limit load.
However, limit load can be exceeded at VO if abrupt control movements are used
or the CG is farther aft.
VFE Maximum Flap Extended Speed is the highest speed permissible with wing flaps
in a prescribed extended position.
VNE Never Exceed Speed is the speed limit that may not be exceeded at any time.
VNO Maximum Structural Cruising Speed is the speed that must not be exceeded
except in smooth air and then only with caution.
VS Stalling Speed or the minimum steady flight speed at which the airplane is
controllable.
VSO Stalling Speed or the minimum steady flight speed at which the airplane is
controllable in the landing configuration.
VX Best Angle-of-Climb Speed is the airspeed that delivers the greatest gain of
altitude in the shortest possible horizontal distance.
VY Best Rate-of-Climb Speed is the airspeed that delivers the greatest gain in
altitude in the shortest possible time.

Section 1
METEOROLOGICAL TERMINOLOGY
ISA International Standard Atmosphere in which:
1. The air is a dry perfect gas;
2. The temperature at sea level (SL) is 15° C (59° F);
3. The pressure at SL is 29.92 inches of Hg (1013.2 mb);
4. The temperature gradient from SL to an altitude where the temperature
is -56.5°C (-69.7°F) is -0.00198°C (-.003564°F) per foot, and zero above
that altitude.
Standard Standard Temperature is 15°C (59ºF) at sea level pressure altitude and
Temperature decreases 2°C (3.2°F) for each 1000 feet of altitude.
OAT Outside Air Temperature is the free air static temperature obtained either from
in-flight temperature indications or ground meteorological sources, adjusted
for instrument error and compressibility effects.
Indicated Pressure The number actually read from an altimeter when the barometric subscale has
Altitude been set to 29.92 inches of Hg (1013.2 mb).
Pressure Altitude Altitude measured from standard sea level pressure (29.92 inches of Hg) by a
(PA) pressure or barometric altimeter. It is the indicated pressure altitude corrected
for position and instrument error. In this Handbook, altimeter instrument
errors are assumed to be zero.
Station Pressure Actual atmospheric pressure at field elevation.
Wind The wind velocities recorded as variables on the charts of this handbook are to
be understood as the headwind or tailwind components of the reported winds.
ENGINE POWER & CONTROLS TERMINOLOGY

BHP Brake Horsepower is the power developed by the engine.
MP Manifold Pressure is the pressure measured in the intake system of the engine
and is depicted as inches of Hg.
MCP Maximum Continuous Power is the maximum power for abnormal or

emergency operations.
Maximum The maximum power recommended for cruise.

Cruise Power
MNOP Maximum Normal Operating Power is the maximum power for all normal
operations (except takeoff). This power, in most situations, is the same as
Maximum Continuous Power.
Mixture Control The Mixture Control provides a mechanical linkage with the fuel control unit
of fuel injection engines, to control the size of the fuel feed aperture, and thus,
the air/fuel mixture. It is also a primary means to shut down the engine.
Propeller The lever used to select a propeller speed.

Control
Propeller Governor The device that regulates the RPM of the engine and propeller by increasing
or decreasing the propeller pitch, through a pitch change mechanism in the
propeller hub.

Section 1
RPM Revolutions Per Minute is a measure of engine and/or propeller speed.
Stall Strip Small triangular strips installed along the leading edge of an airplane wing to
disrupt the airflow at high angles of attack in a controlled way. The strips
improve stall characteristics and spin recovery.
Tachometer An instrument that indicates propeller rotation and is expressed as revolutions

per minute (RPM).
Throttle The lever used to control engine power, from the lowest through the highest
power, by controlling propeller pitch, fuel flow, engine speed, or any
combination of these.
TIT Gauge The Turbine Inlet Temperature indicator is the instrument used to identify the
lean fuel flow mixtures for various power settings.
Wing Cuff Specially shaped composite construction on the outboard leading edge of the
wing. The cuff increases the camber of the airfoil and improves the slow-
flight and stall characteristics of the wing.
AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE & FLIGHT PLANNING TERMINOLOGY

Demonstrated Demonstrated Crosswind Velocity is the velocity of the crosswind component
Crosswind for which adequate control of the airplane can be maintained during takeoff
Velocity and landing. The value shown is not considered limiting.
G A unit of acceleration equal to the acceleration of gravity at the surface of the

earth. The term is frequently used to quantify additional forces exerted on the
airplane and is expressed as multiples of the basic gravitational force, e.g., a
1.7-g force.
GPH Gallons Per Hour is the quantity of fuel consumed in an hour expressed in
gallons.
Limit Load Factor The limit load factor is expressed in multiples of gravity (g) which the
airplane can safely withstand. If the limit load factor is exceeded, the airplane
may be damaged.
NMPG Nautical Miles per Gallon is the distance (in nautical miles) which can be
expected per gallon of fuel consumed at a specific power setting and/or flight
configuration.
PPH Pounds Per Hour is the quantity of fuel consumed in an hour expressed in
pounds.
Unusable Fuel Unusable Fuel is the amount of fuel expressed in gallons that cannot safely be
used in flight. Unusable Fuel is the fuel remaining after a runout test has been
completed in accordance with governmental regulations.
Ultimate Load The ultimate load factor is 1.5 times the limit load factor. If the ultimate load
Factor factor is exceeded, the airplane can fail catastrophically.
Usable Fuel Usable Fuel is the quantity available that can safely be used for flight
planning purposes.
WEIGHT AND BALANCE TERMINOLOGY

Arm The Arm is the horizontal distance from the reference datum to the center of

Section 1
gravity (C.G.) of an item.
Basic Empty The Basic Empty Weight is the Standard Empty Weight plus optional
Weight equipment.
CG The Center of Gravity is the point at which the airplane will balance if
suspended. Its distance from the datum is found by dividing the total moment
by the total weight of the airplane.
CG Arm The arm obtained by adding the individual moments of the airplane and
dividing the sum by the total weight.
CG Limits The extreme center of gravity locations within which the airplane must be
operated at a given weight.
Maximum Empty This is the maximum allowable weight of the airplane when empty, before
Weight fuel, passengers, and baggage are added. Subtracting the minimum useful
load from the maximum gross weight produces the maximum empty weight.
The amount of additional equipment that can be added to the airplane is
determined by subtracting the standard empty weight from the maximum
empty weight. See page 6-16 for an example.
Maximum Gross The maximum loaded weight of an aircraft. Gross weight includes the total
Weight weight of the aircraft, the weight of the fuel and oil, and the weight of all the
load it is carrying.
Maximum Landing The maximum weight approved for landing touchdown.

Weight
Maximum Ramp The maximum weight approved for ground maneuver. (It includes the weight
Weight of the fuel used for startup, taxi, and runup.)
Maximum Takeoff The maximum weight approved for the start of the takeoff run.
Weight
Maximum Zero-Fuel The maximum weight authorized for an aircraft that does not include the
Weight weight of the fuel. This weight includes the basic empty weight plus the
weight of the passengers and baggage. The maximum zero-fuel weight can
change depending on the center of gravity location. See Figure 2 - 4 for an
example.
Minimum Flight This is the minimum weight permitted for flight operations and includes the
Weight basic empty weight plus fuel, pilot, passengers, and baggage. The minimum
flight weight can change depending on the center of gravity location. See
Figure 2 - 4 for an example.
Minimum Useful For utility category airplanes, certified for night or IFR operations, a weight
Load of 190 pounds for each installed seat plus the fuel weight for 45 minutes at
maximum continuous power.
Moment The moment of a lever is the distance, in inches, between the point at which a
force is applied and the fulcrum, or the point about which a lever rotates,
multiplied by the force, in pounds. Moment is expressed in inch-pounds.
Reference Datum This is an imaginary vertical plane from which all horizontal distances are
measured for balance purposes.

Section 1
Standard Empty This is the weight of a standard airplane including unusable fuel, full
Weight operating fluids, and full oil.
Station The Station is a location along the airplane's fuselage usually given in terms
of distance from the reference datum, i.e., Station 40 would be 40 inches from
the reference datum.
Useful Load The Useful Load is the difference between Takeoff Weight or Ramp Weight,
if applicable, and Basic Empty Weight.
MISCELLANEOUS
Flight Time - Pilot time that commences when an aircraft moves under its own power for
Airplanes the purpose of flight and ends when the aircraft comes to rest after landing.
Time in Service Time in service, with respect to maintenance time records, means the time
from the moment an aircraft leaves the surface of the earth until it touches it
at the next point of landing.

Section 1
SUPPLEMENTS
Equipment, which is not covered in Sections 1 through 8 of the Information Manual, is included in
Section 9, as applicable.
USE OF THE TERMS WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

The following conventions will be used for the terms, Warning, Caution, and Note.
WARNING
The use of a Warning symbol means that information which follows is of
critical importance and concerns procedures and techniques which could
cause or result in personal injury or death if not carefully followed.
CAUTION
The use of a Caution symbol means that information which follows is of
significant importance and concerns procedures and techniques which
could cause or result in damage to the airplane and/or its equipment if
not carefully followed.
NOTE
The use of the term “NOTE” means the information that follows is
essential to emphasize.
MEANING OF SHALL, WILL, SHOULD, AND MAY

The words shall and will are used to denote a mandatory requirement. The word should denotes
something that is recommended but not mandatory. The word may is permissive in nature and
suggests something that is optional.
MEANING OF LAND AS SOON AS POSSIBLE OR PRACTICABLE

The use of these two terms relates to the urgency of the situation. When it is suggested to land as
soon as possible, this means to land at the nearest suitable airfield after considering weather
conditions, ambient lighting, approach facilities, and landing requirements. When it is suggested to
land as soon as practicable, this means that the flight may be continued to an airport with superior
facilities, including maintenance support, and weather conditions.
CONVERSION CHARTS
On the following pages are a series of charts and graphs for conversion to and from U.S. weights and
measures to metric and imperial equivalents. The charts and graphs are included to help pilots who
live in countries other than the United States or pilots from the United States who are traveling to or
within other countries.

Section 1
KILOGRAMS AND POUNDS
CONVERTING KILOGRAMS TO POUNDS

Kilograms 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 2.205 4.409 6.614 8.818 11.023 13.228 15.432 17.637 19.842
10 22.046 24.251 26.455 28.660 30.865 33.069 35.274 37.479 39.683 41.888
20 44.092 46.297 48.502 50.706 52.911 55.116 57.320 59.525 61.729 63.934
30 66.139 68.343 70.548 72.753 74.957 77.162 79.366 81.571 83.776 85.980
40 88.185 90.390 92.594 94.799 97.003 99.208 101.413 103.617 105.822 108.026
50 110.231 112.436 114.640 116.845 119.050 121.254 123.459 125.663 127.868 130.073
60 132.277 134.482 136.687 138.891 141.096 143.300 145.505 147.710 149.914 152.119
70 154.324 156.528 158.733 160.937 163.142 165.347 167.551 169.756 171.961 174.165
80 176.370 178.574 180.779 182.984 185.188 187.393 189.597 191.802 194.007 196.211
90 198.416 200.621 202.825 205.030 207.234 209.439 211.644 213.848 216.053 218.258
100 220.462 222.667 224.871 227.076 229.281 231.485 233.690 235.895 238.099 240.304
Example: Convert 76 kilograms to pounds. Locate the 70 row in the first column and then move right,
horizontally to Column No. 6 and read the solution, 167.551 pounds.
Figure 1 - 2
CONVERTING POUNDS TO KILOGRAMS

Pounds 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0.454 0.907 1.361 1.814 2.268 2.722 3.175 3.629 4.082
10 4.536 4.990 5.443 5.897 6.350 6.804 7.257 7.711 8.165 8.618
20 9.072 9.525 9.979 10.433 10.886 11.340 11.793 12.247 12.701 13.154
30 13.608 14.061 14.515 14.969 15.422 15.876 16.329 16.783 17.236 17.690
40 18.144 18.597 19.051 19.504 19.958 20.412 20.865 21.319 21.772 22.226
50 22.680 23.133 23.587 24.040 24.494 24.948 25.401 25.855 26.308 26.762
60 27.216 27.669 28.123 28.576 29.030 29.483 29.937 30.391 30.844 31.298
70 31.751 32.205 32.659 33.112 33.566 34.019 34.473 34.927 35.380 35.834
80 36.287 36.741 37.195 37.648 38.102 38.555 39.009 39.463 39.916 40.370
90 40.823 41.277 41.730 42.184 42.638 43.091 43.545 43.998 44.452 44.906
100 45.359 45.813 46.266 46.720 47.174 47.627 48.081 48.534 48.988 49.442
Example: Convert 40 pounds to kilograms. Locate the 40 row in the first column and then move right one column to
Column No. 0 and read the solution, 18.144 kilograms.
Figure 1 - 3

Section 1
FEET AND METERS
CONVERTING METERS TO FEET

Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 3.281 6.562 9.843 13.123 16.404 19.685 22.966 26.247 29.528
10 32.808 36.089 39.370 42.651 45.932 49.213 52.493 55.774 59.055 62.336
20 65.617 68.898 72.178 75.459 78.740 82.021 85.302 88.583 91.864 95.144
30 98.425 101.706 104.987 108.268 111.549 114.829 118.110 121.391 124.672 127.953
40 131.234 134.514 137.795 141.076 144.357 147.638 150.919 154.199 157.480 160.761
50 164.042 167.323 170.604 173.885 177.165 180.446 183.727 187.008 190.289 193.570
60 196.850 200.131 203.412 206.693 209.974 213.255 216.535 219.816 223.097 226.378
70 229.659 232.940 236.220 239.501 242.782 246.063 249.344 252.625 255.906 259.186
80 262.467 265.748 269.029 272.310 275.591 278.871 282.152 285.433 288.714 291.995
90 295.276 298.556 301.837 305.118 308.399 311.680 314.961 318.241 321.522 324.803
100 328.084 331.365 334.646 337.927 341.207 344.488 347.769 351.050 354.331 357.612
Example: Refer to Figure 1-2 and Figure 1-3 for examples of how to use these types of tables.
Figure 1 - 4
CONVERTING FEET TO METERS

Feet 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0.305 0.610 0.914 1.219 1.524 1.829 2.134 2.438 2.743
10 3.048 3.353 3.658 3.962 4.267 4.572 4.877 5.182 5.486 5.791
20 6.096 6.401 6.706 7.010 7.315 7.620 7.925 8.230 8.534 8.839
30 9.144 9.449 9.754 10.058 10.363 10.668 10.973 11.278 11.582 11.887
40 12.192 12.497 12.802 13.106 13.411 13.716 14.021 14.326 14.630 14.935
50 15.240 15.545 15.850 16.154 16.459 16.764 17.069 17.374 17.678 17.983
60 18.288 18.593 18.898 19.202 19.507 19.812 20.117 20.422 20.726 21.031
70 21.336 21.641 21.946 22.250 22.555 22.860 23.165 23.470 23.774 24.079
80 24.384 24.689 24.994 25.298 25.603 25.908 26.213 26.518 26.822 27.127
90 27.432 27.737 28.042 28.346 28.651 28.956 29.261 29.566 29.870 30.175
100 30.480 30.785 31.090 31.394 31.699 32.004 32.309 32.614 32.918 33.223
Figure 1 - 5

Section 1
INCHES AND CENTIMETERS

CONVERTING CENTIMETERS TO INCHES
Centimeters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0.394 0.787 1.181 1.575 1.969 2.362 2.756 3.150 3.543
10 3.937 4.331 4.724 5.118 5.512 5.906 6.299 6.693 7.087 7.480
20 7.874 8.268 8.661 9.055 9.449 9.843 10.236 10.630 11.024 11.417
30 11.811 12.205 12.598 12.992 13.386 13.780 14.173 14.567 14.961 15.354
40 15.748 16.142 16.535 16.929 17.323 17.717 18.110 18.504 18.898 19.291
50 19.685 20.079 20.472 20.866 21.260 21.654 22.047 22.441 22.835 23.228
60 23.622 24.016 24.409 24.803 25.197 25.591 25.984 26.378 26.772 27.165
70 27.559 27.953 28.346 28.740 29.134 29.528 29.921 30.315 30.709 31.102
80 31.496 31.890 32.283 32.677 33.071 33.465 33.858 34.252 34.646 35.039
90 35.433 35.827 36.220 36.614 37.008 37.402 37.795 38.189 38.583 38.976
100 39.370 39.764 40.157 40.551 40.945 41.339 41.732 42.126 42.520 42.913
Figure 1 - 6
CONVERTING INCHES TO CENTIMETERS

Inches 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 2.54 5.08 7.62 10.16 12.70 15.24 17.78 20.32 22.86
10 25.40 27.94 30.48 33.02 35.56 38.10 40.64 43.18 45.72 48.26
20 50.80 53.34 55.88 58.42 60.96 63.50 66.04 68.58 71.12 73.66
30 76.20 78.74 81.28 83.82 86.36 88.90 91.44 93.98 96.52 99.06
40 101.60 104.14 106.68 109.22 111.76 114.30 116.84 119.38 121.92 124.46
50 127.00 129.54 132.08 134.62 137.16 139.70 142.24 144.78 147.32 149.86
60 152.40 154.94 157.48 160.02 162.56 165.10 167.64 170.18 172.72 175.26
70 177.80 180.34 182.88 185.42 187.96 190.50 193.04 195.58 198.12 200.66
80 203.20 205.74 208.28 210.82 213.36 215.90 218.44 220.98 223.52 226.06
90 228.60 231.14 233.68 236.22 238.76 241.30 243.84 246.38 248.92 251.46
100 254.00 256.54 259.08 261.62 264.16 266.70 269.24 271.78 274.32 276.86
Figure 1 - 7

Section 1
NAUTICAL MILES, STATUTE MILES, AND KILOMETERS
Nautical Statute Kilo- Nautical Statute Kilo- Nautical Statute Kilo-

Miles Miles meters Miles Miles meters Miles Miles meters
5 6 9 175 202 324 345 397 639
10 12 19 180 207 333 350 403 648
15 17 28 185 213 343 355 409 657
20 23 37 190 219 352 360 415 667
25 29 46 195 225 361 365 420 676
30 35 56 200 230 370 370 426 685
35 40 65 205 236 380 375 432 695
40 46 74 210 242 389 380 438 704
45 52 83 215 248 398 385 443 713
50 58 93 220 253 407 390 449 722
55 63 102 225 259 417 395 455 732
60 69 111 230 265 426 400 461 741
65 75 120 235 271 435 405 466 750
70 81 130 240 276 444 410 472 759
75 86 139 245 282 454 415 478 769
80 92 148 250 288 463 420 484 778
85 98 157 255 294 472 425 489 787
90 104 167 260 299 482 430 495 796
95 109 176 265 305 491 435 501 806
100 115 185 270 311 500 440 507 815
105 121 194 275 317 509 445 512 824
110 127 204 280 322 519 450 518 833
115 132 213 285 328 528 455 524 843
120 138 222 290 334 537 460 530 852
125 144 232 295 340 546 465 535 861
130 150 241 300 345 556 470 541 870
135 155 250 305 351 565 475 547 880
140 161 259 310 357 574 480 553 889
145 167 269 315 363 583 485 559 898
150 173 278 320 369 593 490 564 907
155 178 287 325 374 602 495 570 917
160 184 296 330 380 611 500 576 926
165 190 306 335 386 620 505 582 935
170 196 315 340 392 630 510 587 945
Figure 1 - 8

Section 1
LITERS, IMPERIAL GALLONS, AND U.S. GALLONS
CONVERTING LITERS TO IMPERIAL GALLONS

Liters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0.22 0.44 0.66 0.88 1.10 1.32 1.54 1.76 1.98
10 2.20 2.42 2.64 2.86 3.08 3.30 3.52 3.74 3.96 4.18
20 4.40 4.62 4.84 5.06 5.28 5.50 5.72 5.94 6.16 6.38
30 6.60 6.82 7.04 7.26 7.48 7.70 7.92 8.14 8.36 8.58
40 8.80 9.02 9.24 9.46 9.68 9.90 10.12 10.34 10.56 10.78
50 11.00 11.22 11.44 11.66 11.88 12.10 12.32 12.54 12.76 12.98
60 13.20 13.42 13.64 13.86 14.08 14.30 14.52 14.74 14.96 15.18
70 15.40 15.62 15.84 16.06 16.28 16.50 16.72 16.94 17.16 17.38
80 17.60 17.82 18.04 18.26 18.48 18.70 18.92 19.14 19.36 19.58
90 19.80 20.02 20.24 20.46 20.68 20.90 21.12 21.34 21.56 21.78
100 22.00 22.22 22.44 22.66 22.88 23.10 23.32 23.54 23.76 23.98
Figure 1 - 9
CONVERTING IMPERIAL GALLONS TO LITERS

Imperial
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Gallons
0 0.00 4.55 9.09 13.64 18.18 22.73 27.28 31.82 36.37 40.91
10 45.46 50.01 54.55 59.10 63.64 68.19 72.74 77.28 81.83 86.37
20 90.92 95.47 100.01 104.56 109.10 113.65 118.20 122.74 127.29 131.83
30 136.38 140.93 145.47 150.02 154.56 159.11 163.66 168.20 172.75 177.29
40 181.84 186.39 190.93 195.48 200.02 204.57 209.12 213.66 218.21 222.75
50 227.30 231.85 236.39 240.94 245.48 250.03 254.58 259.12 263.67 268.21
60 272.76 277.31 281.85 286.40 290.94 295.49 300.04 304.58 309.13 313.67
70 318.22 322.77 327.31 331.86 336.40 340.95 345.50 350.04 354.59 359.13
80 363.68 368.23 372.77 377.32 381.86 386.41 390.96 395.50 400.05 404.59
90 409.14 413.69 418.23 422.78 427.32 431.87 436.42 440.96 445.51 450.05
100 454.60 459.15 463.69 468.24 472.78 477.33 481.88 486.42 490.97 495.51
Figure 1 - 10


Section 1
LITERS, IMPERIAL GALLONS, AND U.S. GALLONS (Continued)
CONVERTING LITERS TO U.S. GALLONS

Liters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0.00 0.26 0.53 0.79 1.06 1.32 1.59 1.85 2.11 2.38
10 2.64 2.91 3.17 3.43 3.70 3.96 4.23 4.49 4.76 5.02
20 5.28 5.55 5.81 6.08 6.34 6.60 6.87 7.13 7.40 7.66
30 7.93 8.19 8.45 8.72 8.98 9.25 9.51 9.77 10.04 10.30
40 10.57 10.83 11.10 11.36 11.62 11.89 12.15 12.42 12.68 12.94
50 13.21 13.47 13.74 14.00 14.27 14.53 14.79 15.06 15.32 15.59
60 15.85 16.11 16.38 16.64 16.91 17.17 17.44 17.70 17.96 18.23
70 18.49 18.76 19.02 19.28 19.55 19.81 20.08 20.34 20.61 20.87
80 21.13 21.40 21.66 21.93 22.19 22.45 22.72 22.98 23.25 23.51
90 23.78 24.04 24.30 24.57 24.83 25.10 25.36 25.62 25.89 26.15
100 26.42 26.68 26.95 27.21 27.47 27.74 28.00 28.27 28.53 28.79
Figure 1 - 11
CONVERTING U.S. GALLONS TO LITERS

U.S. Gallons 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0.00 3.79 7.57 11.36 15.14 18.93 22.71 26.50 30.28 34.07
10 37.85 41.64 45.42 49.21 52.99 56.78 60.56 64.35 68.13 71.92
20 75.70 79.49 83.27 87.06 90.84 94.63 98.41 102.20 105.98 109.77
30 113.55 117.34 121.12 124.91 128.69 132.48 136.26 140.05 143.83 147.62
40 151.40 155.19 158.97 162.76 166.54 170.33 174.11 177.90 181.68 185.47
50 189.25 193.04 196.82 200.61 204.39 208.18 211.96 215.75 219.53 223.32
60 227.10 230.89 234.67 238.46 242.24 246.03 249.81 253.60 257.38 261.17
70 264.95 268.74 272.52 276.31 280.09 283.88 287.66 291.45 295.23 299.02
80 302.80 306.59 310.37 314.16 317.94 321.73 325.51 329.30 333.08 336.87
90 340.65 344.44 348.22 352.01 355.79 359.58 363.36 367.15 370.93 374.72
100 378.50 382.29 386.07 389.86 393.64 397.43 401.21 405.00 408.78 412.57
Figure 1 - 12


Section 1
LITERS, IMPERIAL GALLONS, AND U.S. GALLONS (Continued)
CONVERTING IMPERIAL GALLONS TO U.S. GALLONS

Imperial
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Gallons
0 0.00 1.20 2.40 3.60 4.80 6.01 7.21 8.41 9.61 10.81
10 12.01 13.21 14.41 15.61 16.81 18.02 19.22 20.42 21.62 22.82
20 24.02 25.22 26.42 27.62 28.82 30.03 31.23 32.43 33.63 34.83
30 36.03 37.23 38.43 39.63 40.83 42.04 43.24 44.44 45.64 46.84
40 48.04 49.24 50.44 51.64 52.84 54.05 55.25 56.45 57.65 58.85
50 60.05 61.25 62.45 63.65 64.85 66.06 67.26 68.46 69.66 70.86
60 72.06 73.26 74.46 75.66 76.86 78.07 79.27 80.47 81.67 82.87
70 84.07 85.27 86.47 87.67 88.87 90.08 91.28 92.48 93.68 94.88
80 96.08 97.28 98.48 99.68 100.88 102.09 103.29 104.49 105.69 106.89
90 108.09 109.29 110.49 111.69 112.89 114.10 115.30 116.50 117.70 118.90
100 120.10 121.30 122.50 123.70 124.90 126.11 127.31 128.51 129.71 130.91
Figure 1 - 13
CONVERTING U.S. GALLONS TO IMPERIAL GALLONS

U.S. Gallons 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0.00 0.83 1.67 2.50 3.33 4.16 5.00 5.83 6.66 7.49
10 8.33 9.16 9.99 10.82 11.66 12.49 13.32 14.16 14.99 15.82
20 16.65 17.49 18.32 19.15 19.98 20.82 21.65 22.48 23.32 24.15
30 24.98 25.81 26.65 27.48 28.31 29.14 29.98 30.81 31.64 32.47
40 33.31 34.14 34.97 35.81 36.64 37.47 38.30 39.14 39.97 40.80
50 41.63 42.47 43.30 44.13 44.96 45.80 46.63 47.46 48.30 49.13
60 49.96 50.79 51.63 52.46 53.29 54.12 54.96 55.79 56.62 57.45
70 58.29 59.12 59.95 60.79 61.62 62.45 63.28 64.12 64.95 65.78
80 66.61 67.45 68.28 69.11 69.95 70.78 71.61 72.44 73.28 74.11
90 74.94 75.77 76.61 77.44 78.27 79.10 79.94 80.77 81.60 82.44
100 83.27 84.10 84.93 85.77 86.60 87.43 88.26 89.10 89.93 90.76
Figure 1 - 14


Section 1
TEMPERATURE RELATIONSHIPS (FAHRENHEIT AND CELSIUS)

Fahrenheit Celsius Fahrenheit Celsius Fahrenheit Celsius
-40F -40C 145F 63C 330F 166C
-35F -37C 150F 66C 335F 168C
-30F -34C 155F 68C 340F 171C
-25F -32C 160F 71C 345F 174C
-20F -29C 165F 74C 350F 177C
-15F -26C 170F 77C 355F 179C
-10F -23C 175F 79C 360F 182C
-5F -21C 180F 82C 365F 185C
0F -18C 185F 85C 370F 188C
5F -15C 190F 88C 375F 191C
10F -12C 195F 91C 380F 193C
15F -9C 200F 93C 385F 196C
20F -7C 205F 96C 390F 199C
25F -4C 210F 99C 395F 202C
30F -1C 215F 102C 400F 204C
35F 2C 220F 104C 405F 207C
40F 4C 225F 107C 410F 210C
45F 7C 230F 110C 415F 213C
50F 10C 235F 113C 420F 216C
55F 13C 240F 116C 425F 218C
60F 16C 245F 118C 430F 221C
65F 18C 250F 121C 435F 224C
70F 21C 255F 124C 440F 227C
75F 24C 260F 127C 445F 229C
80F 27C 265F 129C 450F 232C
85F 29C 270F 132C 455F 235C
90F 32C 275F 135C 460F 238C
95F 35C 280F 138C 465F 241C
100F 38C 285F 141C 470F 243C
105F 41C 290F 143C 475F 246C
110F 43C 295F 146C 480F 249C
115F 46C 300F 149C 485F 252C
120F 49C 305F 152C 490F 254C
125F 52C 310F 154C 495F 257C
130F 54C 315F 157C 500F 260C
135F 57C 320F 160C 505F 263C
140F 60C 325F 163C 510F 266C
Figure 1 - 15


Section 1
FUEL WEIGHTS AND CONVERSION RELATIONSHIPS

The table below summarizes the weights and conversion relationships for liters, U.S. Gallons, and
Imperial Gallons. The chart values are only to two decimal places. The table is intended to provide
approximate values for converting from one particular quantity of measurement to another.
Weight Converting To Converting To Converting To Liters

Quantity
Kg. Lbs. U.S. Gallons Imperial Gallons
Liters 0.72 1.58 26% of the liter quantity 22% of the liter quantity
1.2 times the number of 4.55 times the number of
Imperial Gallons 3.72 7.2
Imperial Gallons Imperial Gallons
83% of the U.S. Gallon 3.78 times the number of
U.S. Gallons 2.72 6.0
quantity U.S. Gallons
Figure 1 - 16


Section 2
Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG) Limitations
Section 2
Limitations
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................... 2-2
LIMITATIONS............................................................................................................................... 2-3
Airspeed Limitations ............................................................................................................. 2-3
Airspeed Indicator Markings ................................................................................................. 2-3
Powerplant Limitations.......................................................................................................... 2-4
Powerplant Fuel and Oil Data ............................................................................................... 2-4
Oil Grades Recommended for Various Average
Temperature Ranges ..................................................................................................... 2-4
Oil Temperature............................................................................................................ 2-4
Oil Pressures ................................................................................................................. 2-4
Approved Fuel Grades.................................................................................................. 2-4
Fuel Flow ......................................................................................................................2-4
Vapor Suppression........................................................................................................ 2-4
Powerplant Instrument Markings .......................................................................................... 2-4
Propeller Data and Limitations.............................................................................................. 2-5
Propeller Diameters ...................................................................................................... 2-5
Propeller Blade Angles at 30 Inches Station ................................................................ 2-5
Weight Limits ........................................................................................................................ 2-6
Other Weight Limitations ...................................................................................................... 2-6
Center of Gravity Limits........................................................................................................ 2-6
Center of Gravity Table ......................................................................................................... 2-6
Maneuvering Limits............................................................................................................... 2-6
Utility Category ............................................................................................................ 2-6
Approved Acrobatic Maneuvers............................................................................................ 2-7
Spins....................................................................................................................................... 2-6
Flight Load Factor Limits...................................................................................................... 2-7
Utility Category ............................................................................................................ 2-8
Kinds of Operation Limits and Pilot Requirements .............................................................. 2-8
Icing Conditions..................................................................................................................... 2-8
Fuel Limitations..................................................................................................................... 2-8
Garmin G1000 System Limitations.......................................................................................2-8
Approach Operation Limitations................................................................................2-10
GTX 33 Mode S Transponder Limitations..........................................................................2-10
Garmin GFC 700 Automatic Flight Control System Limitations.......................................2-10
Oxygen Limitations .............................................................................................................2-11
Ryan Model 9900BX TCAD Limitations ...........................................................................2-11
Other Limitations.................................................................................................................2-10
Altitude .......................................................................................................................2-12
Flap Limitations..........................................................................................................2-12
Passenger Seating Capacity ........................................................................................2-12
Leading Edge Devices ................................................................................................2-12
PLACARDS..................................................................................................................................2-13
General .................................................................................................................................2-13
Interior Placards...................................................................................................................2-13
Exterior Placards..................................................................................................................2-18

Section 2
Limitations Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG)
Section 2
Limitations
INTRODUCTION
Section 2 contains the operating limitations of this airplane. The Federal Aviation Administration
approves the limitations included in this Section. These include operating limitations, instrument
markings, and basic placards necessary for the safe operation of the airplane, the airplane’s engine,
the airplane’s standard systems, and the airplane’s standard equipment.
NOTE
This section covers limitations associated with the standard systems and
equipment in the airplane. Refer to Section 9 for amended operating
procedures, limitations, and related performance data for equipment
installed via an STC.

Section 2
LIMITATIONS
AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS
The airspeed limitations below are based on the maximum gross takeoff weight of 3600 lbs (1633
kg). The maximum operating maneuvering speeds (VO) and applicable gross weight limitations are
shown in Figure 2 - 1.
SPEED KCAS KIAS REMARKS

Max. Operating Maneuvering Speed
2600 Pounds Gross Weight 138* 135*
2600 Pounds Gross Weight @ FL250 96 93
Do not apply full or abrupt control
VO 3600 Pounds Gross Weight 162* 158* movements above this speed.
3600Pounds Gross Weight @ FL250 123 120
*Decrease 3 knots for each 1000 ft. above
12,000 feet (Press. Alt.)
Maximum Flap Extended Speed (Down or Do not exceed this speed with full flaps.
40O Flap Setting) Takeoff flaps can be extended at 130
VFE 120* 117*
*Decrease 2.4 knots for each 1000 ft. KCAS (127 KIAS).
above 12,000 feet (Press. Alt.) Do not use flaps above 14,000 ft.
Max. Structural Cruising Speed 185* 181*

Max. Structural Cruising Speed @ FL250 140 137 Do not exceed this speed except in smooth
VNO
*Decrease 3.5 knots for each 1000 ft. air and then only with caution.
above 12,000 feet (Press. Alt.)
Never Exceed Speed 235* 230*
Never Exceed Speed @ FL250 178 174
VNE Do not exceed this speed in any operation.
*Decrease 4.4 knots for each 1000 ft.
above 12,000 feet (Press. Alt.)
Figure 2 - 1
AIRSPEED INDICATOR MARKINGS

The airspeed is shown on both the PFD and backup airspeed indicator. The airspeed on the PFD is
indicated with an airspeed tape and colored bands (see discussion in Section 7). The backup airspeed
indicator has four colored arcs on the outer circumference. The meaning and range of each band and
arc is tabulated in Figure 2 - 2.
KIAS VALUE
MARKING SIGNIFICANCE
OR RANGE
Full Flap Operating Range - Lower limit is maximum weight stalling speed
White
60 – 117* in the landing configuration. Upper limit is maximum speed permissible
Band/Arc with flaps extended.
Green Normal Operating Range - Lower limit is maximum weight stalling speed
Band/Arc 73 – 181* with flaps retracted. Upper limit is maximum structural cruising speed.
Yellow 181 – 230* Operations must be conducted with caution and only in smooth air.
Band/Arc
Red Line 230* Maximum speed for all operations
*Decrease the airspeed shown on the backup airspeed indicator by amount listed in Figure 2 - 1 for
each 1000 ft. above 12,000 ft. (Pressure Altitude). The PFD displays corrected airspeed
automatically.
Figure 2 - 2


Section 2
POWERPLANT LIMITATIONS
Number of Engines: One (1)
Engine Manufacturer: Teledyne Continental
Engine Model Number: TSIO-550-C
Recommended Time Between Overhaul: 2000 Hours (Time in Service)
Maximum Power: 310 BHP at 2600 RPM
Maximum Manifold Pressure: 35.5 inches of Hg
Minimum Power Setting Above 18,000 ft.: 15 inches of Hg and 2200 RPM
Maximum Recommended Cruise: 262 BHP (85%)
Maximum Cylinder Head Temperature: 460°F (238°C)
Maximum Turbine Inlet Temperature: 1750ºF (954°C)/1850ºF (1010°C) for 30 sec.
POWERPLANT FUEL AND OIL DATA

Oil Grades Recommended for Various Average Air Temperature Ranges
Above 40°F (4°C) ⎯ SAE 50, 15W50, or 20W50
Oil Temperature
Maximum Allowable: 240ºF (116°C)
Recommended takeoff minimum: 100°F (38°C)
Recommended flight operations: 170°F to 220°F (76.7°C to 104.4°C)
Oil Pressures
Normal Operations: 30-60 psi (pounds per square inch)
Idle, minimum: 10 psi
Maximum allowable (cold oil): 100 psi
Approved Fuel Grades
Fuel Flow
Normal Operations: 13 to 25 GPH (49 to 95 LPH)
Idle, minimum: 2 to 3 GPH (7 to 11 LPH)
Maximum allowable: 38.5 GPH (146 LPH)
Vapor Suppression
Required Usage:
• The Vapor Suppression rocker switch is required to be on above 18,000 ft.
• The Vapor Suppression rocker switch must be turned ON if TIT is rising above 1460ºF at
full power with the mixture full rich (at any altitude). Vapor suppression may be turned
off below 18,000 ft if power has been reduced below 85% and engine temperatures have
stabilized.

Section 2
POWERPLANT INSTRUMENT MARKINGS

The following table, Figure 2 - 3, shows applicable color-coded ranges for the various powerplant
gauges displayed on the MFD.
WHITE
GREEN
RED LINE YELLOW RANGE
RANGE RED LINE
INSTRUMENT Minimum RANGE Limited Normal Limit
Limit Warning Time Operating
Operations
Minimum for idle 2500 – 2600 2000 – 2500
Tachometer N/A RPM 2600 RPM
600 RPM* RPM
15 – 33.5 In. of
33.5 – 35.5 In. Hg
Manifold Pressure N/A N/A 35.5 In. of Hg
of Hg
(No Placard)
Minimum for
220ºF – 240ºF 100ºF – 170ºF 170ºF – 220ºF 240ºF
Oil Temperature takeoff 100ºF*
(38°C) (104°C – 116°C) (38°C – 77°C) (77°C – 104°C) (116°C)
10 – 30 psi 100 psi

Minimum for idle
Oil Pressure N/A and 30 – 60 psi
10 psi (Cold Oil)
60 – 100 psi
A red line at
“zero” indicates
the remaining
Fuel Quantity four gallons in N/A N/A N/A N/A
each tank cannot
be used safely in
flight.
10 – 25 GPH 40 GPH (151
Fuel Flow (38 – 83 LPH) LPH)
100ºF – 240ºF
(38°C – 116°C)
Cylinder Head 240ºF – 420ºF
N/A N/A 460ºF (238°C)
Temperature (116°C – 216°C)
420ºF – 460ºF
(216°C – 238°C)
1750ºF (954°C)
Turbine Inlet 1650ºF – 1750ºF 1000ºF – 1650ºF
N/A N/A (1850ºF (1010°C)
Temperature (538°C – 954°C) (538°C – 899°C)
for 30 sec. limit)*
* These temperatures, pressures, or RPM are not marked on the gauge. However, it is important information that the pilot
must be aware of.
Figure 2 - 3
PROPELLER DATA AND LIMITATIONS

Number of Propellers: 1
Propeller Manufacture: Hartzell
Propeller Hub and Blade Model Numbers: HC-H3YF-1RF and F7693DF
Propeller Diameters
Minimum: 77 in. (196 cm)
Maximum: 78 in. (198 cm)
Propeller Blade Angle at 30 inch Station
Low: 16.5° ± 0.2°
High: 42.0° ± 1.0°

Section 2
WEIGHT LIMITS Utility Category

Maximum Ramp Weight: 3600 lbs. (1633 kg)
Maximum Empty Weight: 2708 lbs. (1228 kg)
Maximum Takeoff Weight: 3600 lbs. (1633 kg)
Maximum Landing Weight: 3420 lbs. (1551 kg)
Maximum Baggage Weight:* 120 lbs. (54.4 kg)
*The baggage compartment has two areas, the main area and the hat rack area. The combined weight
in these areas cannot exceed 120 pounds (54.4 kg). The main area is centered at station 166.6 with
maximum weight allowance of 120 pounds (54.4 kg). The hat rack area, which is centered at station
199.8, has a maximum weight allowance of 20 pounds (9.1 kg). When loading baggage in the main
baggage compartment, Zone A (the forward portion of the main baggage area) must always be
loaded first. See page 6-13 for a diagram of loading stations and baggage zones.
OTHER WEIGHT LIMITATIONS

TYPE OF FORWARD DATUM AFT DATUM POINT VARIATION
WEIGHT POINT AND WEIGHT AND WEIGHT
LIMITATION
Minimum Flying
Weight 105 inches and 2600 lbs. 112 inches and 2900 lbs. Straight Line
Maximum Zero Fuel 107.2 inches and 3300 lbs. 112 inches and 3300 lbs. Straight Line
Weight
Reference Datum: The reference datum is located one inch aft of the tip of the propeller spinner. As
distance from the datum increases, there is an increase in weight for each of the two limitation
categories. The variation is linear or straight line from the fore to the aft positions.
Figure 2 - 4
CENTER OF GRAVITY LIMITS
Figure 2 - 5 specifies the center of gravity limits for utility category operations. The variation along
the arm between the forward and aft datum points is linear or straight line. The straight-line variation
means that at any given point along the arm, an increase in moments changes directly according to
the variations in weight and distance from the datum.
CENTER OF GRAVITY TABLE

CATEGORY FORWARD DATUM AFT DATUM VARIATION
POINT AND WEIGHT POINT AND WEIGHT
Utility 105 inches at 2600 to 2900 lbs. 112 inches Straight Line
Category 108.8 inches at 3600 lbs. 2900 to 3600 lbs.
Reference Datum: The reference datum is located one inch aft of the tip of the propeller spinner.
This location causes all arm distances and moments (the product of arm and weight) to be
positive values.
Figure 2 - 5
MANEUVER LIMITS
Utility Category – This airplane is certified in the utility category. Only the acrobatic maneuvers
shown in Figure 2 - 6 are approved.

Section 2
APPROVED ACROBATIC MANEUVERS
MANEUVER ENTRY SPEED
Chandelles 150 KIAS
Lazy Eights 150 KIAS
Steep Turns 150 KIAS
Stalls Slow Deceleration*
* Ensure that maximum fuel imbalance does

not exceed 10 gallons (38 L).
Figure 2 - 6
While there are no limitations to the performance of the acrobatic maneuvers listed in Figure 2 - 6, it
is recommended that the pilot not exceed 60º of bank since this will improve the service life of the
gyros. Also, it is important to remember that the airplane accelerates quite rapidly in a nose down
attitude, such as when performing a lazy eight.
SPINS
The intentional spinning of the aircraft is prohibited. Flight tests have shown that the aircraft will
recover from a one turn spin in less than one additional turn after the application of recovery controls
for all points in the weight and balance envelope, up to the maximum certified altitude. The
recommended recovery inputs are: power idle, rudder full against the spin, elevator full forward and
aileron full against the spin. If the flaps are extended, they should be retracted after the spin rotation
is stopped to avoid exceeding the flap speed limit during pull out. When rotation stops, the aircraft
will be in a steep nose down attitude. Airspeeds up to 160 KIAS are possible during a 3 g pull out.
Above 126 KIAS it may be possible to pull more than 3.7 g’s in light weight conditions. Care should
be taken, under such conditions, to avoid overstressing the airframe. A steady state spin may be
encountered if pro-spin control inputs are held for 1 ½ turns or more. Steady state spins entered
above 20,000 feet at heavy weight and aft CG conditions will take the most turns to recover. If a
steady state spin is entered, making and holding the recommended recovery inputs will produce the
fastest recovery.
WARNING
The intentional spinning of the aircraft is prohibited.
WARNING
If a spin is entered with the flaps extended, they should be retracted after
the spin rotation is stopped to avoid exceeding the flap speed limit during
recovery.
WARNING
If a steady state spin is entered, holding the recommended recovery
inputs of power idle, rudder full against the spin, elevator full forward
and aileron full against the spin will produce the fastest recovery. When
recovering from a steady state spin, the aircraft may exceed the typical
one turn recovery time, and additional turns may be experienced until the
aircraft recovers from the spin.

Section 2
FLIGHT LOAD FACTOR LIMITS

Utility Category - Maximum flight load factors for all weights are:
Flaps Position Max. Load Factor

Up (Cruise Position) +4.4g and -1.76g
Down (Landing Position) +2.0g and -0.0g
KINDS OF OPERATION LIMITS AND PILOT REQUIREMENTS

The airplane has the necessary equipment available and is certified for daytime and nighttime VFR
and IFR operations with only one pilot. The operational minimum equipment and instrumentation
for the kinds of operation are detailed in Part 91 of the FARs.
ICING CONDITIONS
Flight into known icing is prohibited.
FUEL LIMITATIONS
Total Capacity: 106 US Gallons (401 L)
Total Capacity Each tank: 53 US Gallons (201 L)
Total Usable Fuel: 49 US Gallons (186 L)/in each tank (98 US Gallons (371 L) Total)
Maximum Fuel Imbalance: 10 US gallons (38 L) between left and right fuel tanks
GARMIN G1000 SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

1. The G1000 must utilize the following or later FAA approved software versions:
Sub-System Software Version

PFD 5.01
MFD 5.01
COM 7.00
GCU 2.01
GDC 2.05
GMA 2.11
GDL 3.02.00
GMU 2.01
AHRS 2.03
ADC 2.05
GIA 4.30
GEA 2.07
GPS 3.03
GRS 2.06
GSA 3.01
The database version is displayed on the MFD power-up page immediately after system power-
up and must be acknowledged. The remaining system software versions can be verified on the
AUX group sub-page 5, “AUX - SYSTEM STATUS”.
2. IFR enroute, oceanic and terminal navigation predicated upon the G1000 GPS Receiver is
prohibited unless the pilot verifies the currency of the database or verifies each selected
waypoint for accuracy by reference to current approved navigation data.
3. Instrument approach navigation predicated upon the G1000 GPS Receiver must be
accomplished in accordance with approved instrument approach procedures that are retrieved

Section 2
from the GPS equipment database. The GPS equipment database must incorporate the current
update cycle or be verified for accuracy using current approved navigation data.
a. Instrument approaches utilizing the GPS receiver must be conducted in the approach
mode and Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) must be available at the
Final Approach Fix.
b. Accomplishment of ILS, LOC, LOC-BC, LDA, SDF, MLS or any other type of approach
not approved for GPS overlay with the G1000 GPS position data is not authorized.
c. Use of the G1000 VOR/ILS receiver to fly approaches not approved for GPS require
VOR/ILS navigation data to be valid on the PFD display.
d. When an alternate airport is required by the applicable operating rules, it must be served
by an approach based on other than GPS navigation, the aircraft must have the
operational equipment capable of using that navigation aid, and the required navigation
aid must be operational.
e. VNAV information may be utilized for advisory information only. Use of VNAV
information for Instrument Approach Procedures does not guarantee step-down fix
altitude protection, or arrival at approach minimums in normal position to land. VNAV
also does not guarantee compliance with intermediate altitude constraints between the top
of descent and the waypoint where the VNAV path terminates in terminal or enroute
operations.
4. If not previously defined, the following default settings must be made in the “SYSTEM
SETUP” menu of the G1000 prior to operation (refer to Pilot's Cockpit Reference Guide for
procedure if necessary):
a. DIS, SPD kt (sets navigation units to “nautical miles” and “knots”)
b. f
ALT, VS t fpm (sets altitude units to “feet” and “feet per minute”)
c. MAP DATUM WGS 84 (sets map datum to WGS-84, see note below)
d. POSITION deg-min (sets navigation grid units to decimal minutes)
example: dd.mm.ss: 45° 30’ 30” in decimal minutes are: 45° 30.5’
NOTE
In some areas outside the United States, datums other than WGS-84 or
NAD-83 may be used. If the G1000 is authorized for use by the
appropriate Airworthiness authority, the required geodetic datum must
be set in the G1000 prior to its use for navigation.
5. Operation is prohibited north of 70°N and south of 70°S latitudes. In addition, operation is
prohibited in the following two regions: 1) north of 65°N between 75°W and 120°W longitude
and 2) south of 55°S between 120°E and 165°E longitude.
6. The GFC 700 Automatic Flight Control System preflight test must be successfully completed
prior to use of the autopilot or flight director. A white “PFT” annunciation will display for 2 to
3 seconds and clear upon successful completion of the test. An unsuccessful test will display a
red “PFT” annunciation that will not automatically clear.
7. A pilot with the seat belt fastened must occupy the left pilot’s seat during all autopilot
operations.
8. The autopilot must be off during takeoff and landing. The autopilot must be disengaged below
200’ AGL during approach operations and minimum engagement height on takeoff is 400’
AGL. Cruise engagement minimum height is 1000’ AGL.
9. Autopilot operation with the G1000 in the reversionary (Display Backup) mode is limited to
training operations and display failure operations.
10. Autopilot maximum engagement speed – 210 KIAS
Autopilot minimum engagement speed – 80 KIAS
Electric Trim maximum operating speed – VNE
11. Maximum fuel imbalance with autopilot engaged – 10 gallons (approximately 61 pounds)

Section 2
Approach Operation Limitations:

1. The GFC 700 autopilot is approved for Category I precision instrument approaches and non-
precision approaches only.
2. CAUTION: CDI automatic source switching to the ILS on Nav 1 or 2 must be set to manual
for instrument approaches conducted with the autopilot coupled. Upon selection of Nav 1 or 2,
APR mode or NAV mode will have to be reselected for capture. If the CDI source is changed
when the autopilot is engaged in NAV mode, the autopilot lateral mode will revert to roll
attitude hold mode (ROL) and NAV mode must be manually reselected by the pilot.
The caution above on automatic switching is the result of potential shifting of the GPS
"localizer" vs. the actual ILS localizer position. This generally is not an issue, but there is a
slight possibility that an offset between the two could cause a problem with the automatic
switching which would not successfully capture the localizer.
GTX 33 MODE S TRANSPONDER LIMITATIONS
NOTE
If the optional Ryan TCAD is installed, TIS will not be available.
1. Display of TIS traffic information is advisory only and does not relieve the pilot responsibility
to “see and avoid” other aircraft. Aircraft maneuvers shall not be predicated on the TIS
displayed information.
2. Display of TIS traffic information does not constitute a TCAS I or TCAS II collision avoidance
system as required by 14 CFR Part 135.
3. Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) states that “When an Air Traffic Control
(ATC) clearance has been obtained, no pilot-in-command (PIC) may deviate from that
clearance, except in an emergency, unless he obtains an amended clearance.” Traffic
information provided by the TIS up-link does not relieve the PIC the responsibility to see and
avoid traffic and receive appropriate ATC clearance.
GARMIN GFC 700 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

1. Operation of the autopilot is prohibited below 80 KIAS and above 210 KIAS. Reduce the
autopilot maximum operating speed by 2.8 KIAS for each 1000 feet above 12,000 feet MSL.
The autopilot maximum operating speed at 25,000 ft is 174 KIAS
2. Operation of the autopilot less than 400 feet above ground level is prohibited for takeoff.
3. Operation of the autopilot during takeoff and landing is prohibited.
4. Category I and non-precision approaches authorized.
5. Altitude loss during a malfunction and recovery are as follows in Figure 2 - 7.
Configuration Bank Angle Altitude Loss Recovery Delay

Climb 40º -230 feet 3 Seconds
Cruise 50º -400 feet 3 Seconds
Descent 50º -430 feet 3 Seconds
Maneuvering 10º -20 feet 1 Second
Approach 12º -94 feet 1 Second
Figure 2 - 7
6. VOR and VAPP autopilot/flight director modes may not provide adequate tracking guidance.
In the event that VOR or VAPP modes do not track the selected course adequately, disengage
the autopilot and flight director and fly the course using raw data.

Section 2
OXYGEN LIMITATIONS
1. A4 Flowmeter and standard cannulas may be used for altitudes up to 18,000 ft (Pressure
Altitude).
2. Cannulas may only be used by persons not experiencing nasal congestion.
3. A4 Flowmeter with oxygen mask may be used for altitudes up to 25,000 ft (Pressure Altitude)
ONLY.
4. Oxygen masks are required above 18,000 ft (Pressure Altitude).
WARNING
Prior to takeoff on a flight where the oxygen system is anticipated to be used,
verify the proper operation of the system and masks assuring oxygen flow.
WARNING
Do not use oxygen when utilizing lipstick, chapstick, petroleum jelly or any
product containing oil or grease. These substances become highly flammable in
oxygen rich conditions.
NOTE
If the pilot has nasal congestion or other breathing conditions, flight at altitudes
where oxygen is required should be avoided, and a mask with microphone should
be used.
RYAN MODEL 9900BX TCAD LIMITATIONS

1. Display of TCAD traffic information is advisory only and does not relieve the pilot
responsibility to “see and avoid” other aircraft. Aircraft maneuvers shall not be predicated on
the TCAD displayed information.
2. Display of TCAD traffic information does not constitute a TCAS I or TCAS II collision
avoidance system as required by 14 CFR Part 121 or Part 135.
3. Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR) states that “When an Air Traffic Control
(ATC) clearance has been obtained, no pilot-in-command (PIC) may deviate from that
clearance, except in an emergency, unless he obtains an amended clearance.” Traffic
information provided by the TCAD does not relieve the PIC the responsibility to see and avoid
traffic and receive appropriate ATC clearance.
4. The TCAD only displays intruders equipped with operative transponders. TCAD provides no
indication of traffic conflicts with aircraft without transponders.
5. Airframe Shadowing –Microwave energy can be obstructed by the airframes of both the host
and threat aircraft. A shadowing occurs when the signals must pass around metal structures.
a. TCAD is designed to operate optimally when the host TCAD antenna and the threat
transponder antenna are in line of sight. With the TCAD antenna top and bottom
mounted, the optimal condition generally exists when threats are above, to approximately
15 degrees below, the host aircraft. When the threat is further below the host aircraft, or
during turns, signals can be attenuated, causing display of greater than actual indicated
nautical miles (iNM). Transponder antenna placement on the threat aircraft and flight
maneuvers also have an effect. Whenever a detected threat is below the aircraft, consider
airframe shadowing when analyzing the data.
b. For a threat to remain in the shadowed region, a lengthy and parallel track between host
and threat is necessary, such as final approach to a runway when the threat is below your
aircraft.
c. Airframe shadowing does not affect the accuracy of altitude separation information.
6. Transponder signals can be reflected by nearby structures. This can result in unreliable altitude
and iNM indications, especially near hangars or buildings. This condition occurs primarily
when the host aircraft is on the ground, since the top mounted TCAD antenna is less exposed
to reflections while in flight.
Section 2
7. When two aircraft are interrogated at the same instant, the replies received by TCAD can be
mixed, degrading the ability to decode the replies. This is more likely to occur in higher
density areas, when both aircraft are illuminated at the same moment by the same radar. By
using degarbling techniques, the processor can often provide data on the closest threat. In some
instances, both aircraft will be decoded, and in other instances, accurate decoding is
impossible. This means the traffic may not be displayed on TCAD at all. By keeping the shield
size small in high-density areas, the potential for garbled replies is minimized.
8. If the communication link between the TCAD and the intruder transponder is not established,
the intruder will not be displayed.
9. A poor transponder transmitter on the intruder aircraft, a geometry where the antennas are
shadowed from each other, and high traffic density can limit detection range.
10. When the host aircraft is above 12,000 feet pressure altitude, non-Mode C intruders are not
tracked.
OTHER LIMITATIONS
Altitude – The maximum flight altitude is 25,000 MSL with an FAA approved oxygen installation
and 14,000 MSL without oxygen installed. See FAR Part 91 for applicable oxygen requirements.
Flap Limitations
Flaps may not be extended at altitudes above 14,000 ft PA.
Approved Takeoff Range: 12°
Approved Landing Range: 12° and 40°
Passenger Seating Capacity – The maximum passenger seating configuration is four persons (one
pilot and three passengers).
Leading Edge Devices – All leading edge devices (stall strips, leading edge tape, flat triangular
leading edge tape, and zig zag tape) must be installed and in good condition for flight.

Section 2
PLACARDS
GENERAL
Federal Aviation Regulations require that a number of different placards be prominently displayed
on the interior and exterior of the airplane. The placards contain information about the airplane and
its operation that is of significant importance. The placard is placed in a location proximate to the
item it describes. For example, the fuel capacity placard is near the tank filler caps. The placards and
their locations are shown on the following pages as they appear on the interior and exterior of the
airplane.
INTERIOR PLACARDS
Near Pilot and Copilot Interior Door Handles
Near Door Handle on Passenger Side


Section 2
On Crash Ax
On Parking Brake Handle
On the Upper Left Side of the Tower Assembly


Section 2
On Left Panel Behind Pilot’s Control Stick
On Instrument Panel to Left of Backup Attitude Indicator
Engraved On Fuel Selector Knob and Upper Plate
LEFT RIGHT
OFF OFF
On Top Front of Center Console


Section 2
On Right Panel Behind Copilot's Control Stick
On Flaps Panel
On the Compass
Without Electric A/C With Electric A/C
The magnetic direction indicator is calibrated for level flight with

the engine, radios, and strobes operating.
On Oxygen Distribution Manifold in Forward Overhead Panel

Section 2
Under All Seats
Under Left Rear Seat Next to Leveling Washer
On Baggage Compartment Door Joggle
On Oxygen Fill Port Set into Hat Shelf
In Aft Cabin on Aft Baggage Bulkhead
On Air Conditioning System Bay Access Cover
UPON REINSTALLATION ENSURE THIS ACCESS PANEL IS SEALED

TO PREVENT CARBON MONOXIDE FROM ENTERING THE CABIN

Section 2
EXTERIOR PLACARDS
Near Pilot and Passenger Door Handles
On Flaps Near Wing Root (Both Sides)
Near Fill Cap of Fuel Tank
Under Each Wing Near Fuel Drains
FOR DRAINING OF WING FUEL SUMP:

TO OPEN: PRESS CUP GENTLY INTO BOTTOM OF VALVE TO
DRAIN REQUIRED AMOUNT OF FUEL.
TO CLOSE: REMOVE CUP AND VALVE WILL CLOSE.
TO DRAIN WING TANKS: REFER TO MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
On Main Wheel Pants

Section 2
On Exterior of Fuselage – Forward of Wing on Copilot’s Side
On Forward Portion of Nose Gear Fairing
TURN LIMIT
On Nose Gear Wheel Pant (if installed)
On Nose Gear Wheel Pant or

Nose Gear Fairing (if nose gear wheel pant not installed)
On Oil Filler Access Door


Section 2
On Exterior of Fuselage – Forward of Wing on Pilot’s Side
On Exterior of Gascolator Door (Underside of Fuselage)


Section 2
On Interior of Gascolator Door
On Ground Power Supply Plug Cover
24


Section 2

Section 3
Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG) Emergency Procedures
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................... 3-3

Airspeeds for Emergency Operations.................................................................................... 3-3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES CHECKLISTS ........................................................................... 3-4

Engine Failure During Takeoff.............................................................................................. 3-4
Engine Failure Immediately After Takeoff (Below 400 feet AGL) ..................................... 3-4
Engine Failure During Flight................................................................................................. 3-4
Loss of Oil Pressure............................................................................................................... 3-4
Procedures After an Engine Restart ...................................................................................... 3-4
Forced Landing (Engine Out or Partial Power...................................................................... 3-5
Precautionary Landing With Engine Power .......................................................................... 3-6
Engine Driven Fuel Pump (EDFP) – Partial Failure............................................................. 3-6
Ditching.................................................................................................................................. 3-6
Engine Fire On The Ground During Startup ......................................................................... 3-7
Engine Fire In Flight.............................................................................................................. 3-7
Electrical Fire In Flight.......................................................................................................... 3-8
Cabin Fire In Flight (Fuel/Hydraulic Fluid).......................................................................... 3-8
Wing Fire In Flight ................................................................................................................ 3-8
Spin Recovery........................................................................................................................ 3-9
Inadvertent Icing ................................................................................................................... 3-9
Landing With a Flat Main Gear Tire .................................................................................... 3-9
Landing With a Flat Nose Tire ............................................................................................3-10
SpeedBrake™ System Malfunction ....................................................................................3-10
Electrical System Overcharging ..........................................................................................3-10
Alternator Failure – Electrical System Discharging ...........................................................3-10
Left or Right Bus Failure/Crosstie Discharges Working Bus.............................................3-11
Electric Trim/Autopilot Failure ...........................................................................................3-11
Partial Restoration of Disabled Trim System......................................................................3-12
Malfunction of Autopilot.....................................................................................................3-12
Malfunction of Autopilot Autotrim .....................................................................................3-12
Broken or Stuck Throttle Cable...........................................................................................3-12
Oxygen System Malfunction ...............................................................................................3-12
Carbon Monoxide Detection ...............................................................................................3-12
Something Stuck in or Interfering With a Doorjamb ..........................................................3-13
Evacuating the Airplane ......................................................................................................3-13
Circuit Breaker Panel...........................................................................................................3-14
AMPLIFIED EMERGENCY PROCEDURES............................................................................3-15

Engine Failure and Forced Landings...................................................................................3-15
General........................................................................................................................3-15
Engine Failure After Takeoff (Below 400 feet AGL)................................................3-15
Engine Failure After Takeoff (Above 400 feet AGL) ...............................................3-15
In-Flight Engine Failure .............................................................................................3-15
Best Glide Speed Versus Minimum Rate of Descent Speed .....................................3-16
Emergency Backup Fuel Pump ..................................................................................3-16
Critical Issues (Backup Fuel Pump) ...........................................................................3-16
Engine Restarts ...........................................................................................................3-17
Engine Does Not Restart ............................................................................................3-17
Forced Landing with the Throttle Stuck in the Idle Position.....................................3-18
Stuck Throttle with Enough Power to Sustain Flight.................................................3-18
Flight Controls Malfunctions...............................................................................................3-18

Section 3
Emergency Procedures Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG)
General ........................................................................................................................3-18
Aileron or Rudder Failure...........................................................................................3-18
Elevator Failure...........................................................................................................3-18
Trim Tab Malfunctions 3-19
Fires......................................................................................................................................3-19
General ........................................................................................................................3-19
Engine Fires ................................................................................................................3-19
Cabin Fires ..................................................................................................................3-20
Lightning Strike ...................................................................................................................3-20
Engine and Propeller Problems ...........................................................................................3-20
Engine Roughness.......................................................................................................3-20
High Altitude Negative G Loading ............................................................................3-20
High Cylinder Head Temperatures.............................................................................3-20
High Oil Temperature.................................................................................................3-21
Low Oil Pressure ........................................................................................................3-21
Failure of Turbocharger..............................................................................................3-21
Failure of Engine Driven Fuel Pump..........................................................................3-21
Propeller Surging or Wandering.................................................................................3-22
Electrical Problems ..............................................................................................................3-22
Under Voltage.............................................................................................................3-23
Alternator Failure........................................................................................................3-23
Load Shedding ............................................................................................................3-23
Over Voltage...............................................................................................................3-23
Master Switches..........................................................................................................3-23
Complete Left or Right Bus Failure ....................................................................................3-23
General ........................................................................................................................3-23
Crosstie Switch ...........................................................................................................3-24
Summary of Buses ......................................................................................................3-24
Static Air Source Blockage..................................................................................................3-25
Spins.....................................................................................................................................3-25
Multi-Function Display........................................................................................................3-25
Primary Flight Display.........................................................................................................3-26
Autopilot ..............................................................................................................................3-26
Oxygen System ....................................................................................................................3-26
General ........................................................................................................................3-26
Cabin Fire....................................................................................................................3-27
Emergency Exit....................................................................................................................3-27
General ........................................................................................................................3-27
Doors...........................................................................................................................3-27
Seat Belts ....................................................................................................................3-27
Exiting (Cabin Door(s) Operable) ..............................................................................3-27
Exiting (Cabin Doors Inoperable) ..............................................................................3-27
Inverted Exit Procedures......................................................................................................3-27
General ........................................................................................................................3-27
Exterior Emergency Exit Release...............................................................................3-27
Crash Ax ..............................................................................................................................3-28

Section 3
Section 3
Emergency Procedures
INTRODUCTION
The emergency procedures are included before the normal procedures, as these items have a higher
level of importance. The owner of this handbook is encouraged to copy or otherwise tabulate the
following emergency procedures in a format that is usable under flight conditions. Plastic laminated
pages printed on both sides and bound together are preferable. Such a checklist is included as part of
the airplane’s delivery package. Complete Emergency Procedures Checklists shall be carried in the
aircraft at all times in a location that is easily accessible to the pilot-in-command.
Many emergency procedures require immediate action by the pilot-in-command, and corrective
action must be initiated without direct reference to the emergency checklist. Therefore, the pilot-in-
command must memorize the appropriate corrective action for these types of emergencies. In this
instance, the Emergency Procedures Checklist is used as a crosscheck to ensure that no items are
excluded and is used only after control of the airplane is established. When the airplane is under
control and the demands of the situation permit, the Emergency Procedures Checklist should be used
to verify that all required actions are completed.
In all emergencies, it is important to communicate with Air Traffic Control (ATC) or the appropriate
controlling entity within radio range. However, communicating is secondary to controlling the
airplane and should be done, if time and conditions permit, after the essential elements of handling
the emergency are performed.
AIRSPEEDS FOR EMERGENCY OPERATIONS
Engine Failure After Takeoff Maximum Glide (Flaps Up)

Wing Flaps Up (Cruise Position) 108 KIAS 3600 lbs. (1633 kg) Gross Weight 108 KIAS
Wing Flaps Takeoff Position 95 KIAS 2700 lbs. (1224 kg) Gross Weight 96 KIAS
Maneuvering Speed Minimum Rate of Descent (Flaps Up)
3600 lbs. (1633 kg) Gross Weight *158 KIAS 3600 lbs. (1633 kg) Gross Weight 87 KIAS
2600 lbs. (1270 kg) Gross Weight *135 KIAS 2700 lbs. (1224 kg) Gross Weight 82 KIAS
*Decrease 3 knots for each 1000-ft
above 12,000 ft (Press. Alt.)
Precautionary Landing Approach Speed without Power
(With engine power, flaps in the 80 KIAS Wing Flaps Up (Cruise Position) 98 - 108 KIAS
landing position) Wing Flaps Landing Position 80 - 90 KIAS
Figure 3 - 1


Section 3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES CHECKLISTS

ENGINE FAILURE DURING TAKEOFF
1. Throttle ⎯ IDLE
2. Brakes ⎯ APPLY STEADY PRESSURE (Release momentarily if skidding occurs.)
3. Wing Flaps ⎯ UP
4. Backup Fuel Pump ⎯ OFF
5. Mixture ⎯ CUTOFF
6. Fuel Selector ⎯ OFF
7. Ignition Switch ⎯ OFF
8. Left and Right Master Switches ⎯ OFF
ENGINE FAILURE IMMEDIATELY AFTER TAKEOFF (Below 400 Feet AGL)

1. Airspeed ⎯ 108 KIAS (with flaps in the up position)*
95 KIAS (with flaps in the takeoff position)*
6. Wing Flaps ⎯ LANDING POSITION (If airspeed and height above the ground permit full
extension of flaps. Otherwise, the maximum flap extension practicable should be used
depending on airspeed and height above the ground.)
*Obtain this airspeed if altitude permits; otherwise lower the nose, maintain current airspeed,
and land straight ahead.
ENGINE FAILURE DURING FLIGHT

1. Airspeed ⎯ BEST GLIDE (108 KIAS with flaps up)
2. Vapor Suppression ⎯ ON
3. Mixture ⎯ FULL RICH
4. Fuel Selector ⎯ SWITCH TANKS
5. Heated Induction Air ⎯ ON
6. Ignition Switch ⎯ VERIFY SET TO R/L
7. Backup Fuel Pump ⎯ ARM
7.1. Engine Does Not Restart
7.1.1. Backup Fuel Pump ⎯ OFF
7.1.2. Throttle ⎯ HALF WAY OUT
7.1.3. Mixture ⎯ FULL LEAN THEN RICHEN UNTIL ENGINE STARTS
7.1.4. Engine Does Not Restart ⎯ PERFORM “FORCED LANDING”
CHECKLIST
8. Engine Restarts ⎯ PERFORM “PROCEDURES AFTER AN ENGINE RESTART”
CHECKLIST
LOSS OF OIL PRESSURE

8. Oil Temperature ⎯ CHECK WITHIN PROPER RANGES 170° to 220°F (77° to 104 °C)
8.1. If oil temperature is within operating range ⎯ LAND AS SOON AS POSSIBLE
8.2. If oil temperature is above the operating range
8.2.1. Throttle ⎯ REDUCE to the minimum required power
8.2.2. LAND AS SOON AS POSSIBLE
8.2.3. BE PREPARED FOR LOSS OF ENGINE POWER AND PREPARE FOR
AN EMERGENCY LANDING
PROCEDURES AFTER AN ENGINE RESTART


Section 3
1. Airspeed ⎯ APPROPRIATE TO THE SITUATION

2. Throttle⎯ MINIMUM FOR LEVEL FLIGHT AT SAFE SPEED (Until the engine warms
up.)
3. Failure Analysis ⎯ DETERMINE CAUSE (Proceed to 3.1, 3.2, or 3.3 as applicable.)
3.1. Improper Fuel Management⎯ If the engine failure cause is improper fuel
management, set the backup fuel pump to OFF, adjust power and mixture as
necessary, and resume flight.
3.2. Engine Driven Fuel Pump Failure⎯ If fuel management is correct, failure of the
engine driven fuel pump or a clogged fuel filter is probable. If practicable, reduce
power to 75% or less and land as soon as possible. Do not set the mixture to full rich
for descent or landing. Refer to the amplified discussion on page 3-16.
3.3. Improper Mixture Setting⎯ If fuel management is correct and the engine driven fuel
pump is working properly, it is possible the mixture is either too lean or too rich. If
above 15,000 ft, it is likely the mixture is too rich and may need to be leaned. If below
15,000 ft, the mixture may be too lean and should be richened.
WARNING
If the backup fuel pump is in use during an emergency, proper leaning
procedures are important. During the descent and approach to landing
phases of the flight, DO NOT set the mixture to full rich as prescribed in
the normal before landing procedures, and avoid closing the throttle
completely. If a balked landing is necessary, coordinate the simultaneous
application of mixture and throttle. Please see the amplified discussion on
page 3-16.
FORCED LANDING (ENGINE OUT OR PARTIAL POWER)

1. Glide
1.1. Airspeed ⎯ BEST GLIDE (Figure 3 - 4)
1.2. Propeller Control—FULL AFT
1.3. Wing Flaps⎯UP
1.4. Radio⎯TRANSMIT MAYDAY (121.5. Give estimated position and intentions.)
1.5. Transponder ⎯ SQUAWK 7700
1.6. ELT⎯ACTIVATE (If off airport.)
1.7. Seat Belts and Shoulder Harnesses ⎯ FASTENED AND SECURE
1.8. Loose objects ⎯ SECURE
1.9. Backup Fuel Pump and Vapor Suppression ⎯ OFF
2. Landing
2.1. Mixture ⎯ IDLE CUTOFF (If the engine is developing partial power, delay this as
long as possible.)
2.2. Fuel Selector ⎯ OFF
2.3. Ignition Switch ⎯ OFF
2.4. Wing Flaps (When landing is assured.) ⎯ AS REQUIRED (Full flaps recommended
for landing.)
2.5. SpeedBrake™ Switch ⎯ OFF/DOWN POSITION
2.6. Left and Right Master Switches ⎯ OFF
2.7. Landing Flare⎯ INITIATE AT APPROPRIATE POINT TO ARREST DESCENT
RATE, AND TOUCHDOWN AT NORMAL LANDING SPEEDS
2.8. Stopping ⎯ APPLY HEAVY BRAKING


Section 3
WARNING
Two special conditions associated with forced landings are specifically
applicable to the Columbia 400 (and are different from many other
General Aviation airplanes). These differences must be clearly
understood.
1. Because the trim tabs and flaps are electrically operated, setting the
master switches to OFF should be delayed until the pilot is certain
that further use of the trim, particularly the elevator trim, and the
flaps are not required.
2. Do not open the cabin doors in flight. The air loads placed on the
doors in flight will damage them and can cause separation from the
airplane. A damaged or separated door will alter the flight
characteristics of the airplane and possibly damage other control
surfaces.
PRECAUTIONARY LANDING WITH ENGINE POWER

1. Seat Belts and Shoulder Harnesses ⎯ FASTENED AND SECURE
2. Loose Objects ⎯ SECURE
3. Wing Flaps ⎯ TAKEOFF POSITION
4. Airspeed ⎯ 95 to 105 KIAS
5. Select a landing area⎯ FLY OVER AREA (Determine the wind direction and survey the
terrain. Note obstructions and most suitable landing area. Climb to approximately 1000 feet
above ground level (AGL), and retract flaps when at a safe altitude and airspeed. Set up a
normal traffic pattern for a landing into the wind.)
6. Avionics Master Switch ⎯ OFF
7. Wing Flaps ⎯ LANDING POSITION (When on final approach.)
8. Airspeed ⎯ 80 KIAS
9. Left and Right Master Switches ⎯ OFF (Just before touchdown.)
10. Landing ⎯ LAND AS SLOW AS PRACTICABLE IN A NOSE UP ATTITUDE
11. Mixture ⎯ IDLE CUTOFF
13. Stopping ⎯ APPLY HEAVY BRAKING
ENGINE DRIVEN FUEL PUMP (EDFP) – PARTIAL FAILURE

(Fuel pressure too high to activate backup pump. Intermittent power – No fuel pump annunciation)
1. Vapor Suppression ⎯ ON
2. Backup Fuel Pump ⎯ ARMED
3. Throttle ⎯ FULL OPEN
4. Primer Button⎯ ENGAGE AND DISENGAGE (If holding in the primer switch restores fuel
flow/power, the partial EDFP failure is confirmed. Release the switch and proceed to Step 5.)
5. Mixture⎯ TOWARDS IDLE CUTOFF (At a fuel pressure of 5.5 psi, the backup pump
should engage, which will restore fuel flow and engine power.)
6. Mixture ⎯ TOWARDS RICH (Degree of richness depends on altitude; see Chapter 5.)
DITCHING
1. Radio⎯ TRANSMIT MAYDAY (121.5. Give estimated position and intentions.)
3. Seat Belts and Shoulder Harnesses ⎯ FASTENED AND SECURE
4. Wing Flaps ⎯ LANDING POSITION
5. SpeedBrake™ Switch ⎯ OFF/DOWN POSITION
6. Descent⎯ ESTABLISH MINIMUM DESCENT (Set airspeed to 87 KIAS, and use power to
establish minimum descent, ±200 feet/minute. See 8.2 below for landings without power.)


Section 3
7. Approach⎯ In high winds and heavy swell conditions, approach into the wind. In light winds
and heavy swell conditions, approach parallel to the swell. If no swells exist, approach into
the wind.
8. Touchdown Alternatives
8.1. Touchdown (Engine power available)⎯ Maintain minimum descent attitude. Apply
power to slow or stop descent if necessary. When over a suitable touchdown area,
reduce power and slowly settle into the water in a nose up attitude near the stalling
speed.
8.2. Touchdown (No engine power available)⎯ Use an 80 to 85 KIAS approach speed
down to the flare-out point, and then glide momentarily to get a feel for the surface.
Allow the airplane to settle into the water in a nose up attitude near the stalling speed.
9. Evacuation of Airplane ⎯ Evacuate the airplane through the pilot or passenger doors. It may
be necessary to allow some cabin flooding to equalize pressure on the doors. If the pilot or
passenger doors are inoperative, use the crash ax/hatchet (located below the front seat on the
pilot’s side) to break either window on the main cabin doors. For more information see the
Crash Ax discussion on page 3-28.
10. Flotation Devices ⎯ DEPLOY FLOTATION DEVICES
NOTE
Over glassy smooth water, or at night without sufficient light, even
experienced pilots can misjudge altitude by 50 feet or more. Under such
conditions, carry enough power to maintain a nose up attitude at 10 to 20
percent above stalling speed until the airplane makes contact with the
water.
NOTE
In situations that require electrical system shutdown under poor ambient
light conditions, cabin illumination is available through use of the
overhead flip lights. The flip lights are connected directly to the battery
and will operate provided there is adequate battery power.
ENGINE FIRE ON THE GROUND DURING STARTUP

If flames are observed in the induction or exhaust system, use the following procedures.
4. Throttle ⎯ FULL OPEN
5. Ignition Switch ⎯ HOLD IN START POSITION (Until fire is extinguished.)
6. Parking Brake ⎯ RELEASE (If the parking brake is engaged.)
7. Fire Extinguisher ⎯ OBTAIN FROM CABIN AND EVACUATE AIRPLANE
8. Follow-up ⎯ If fire is present, extinguish it. Inspect for damage and make the appropriate
repairs or replacements.
NOTE
Sometimes a fire will occur on the ground because of improper starting
procedures. If circumstances permit, move the airplane away from the
ground fire by pushing aft on the horizontal stabilizer, and then
extinguish the ground fire. This must only be attempted if the ground
fire is small and sufficient ground personnel are present to move the
airplane.
ENGINE FIRE IN FLIGHT

1. Backup Fuel Pump and Vapor Suppression ⎯ OFF
2. Mixture ⎯ OFF


Section 3

4. Throttle ⎯ CLOSED
6. Heating System ⎯ OFF
7. Propeller Control ⎯ FULL AFT
8. Right Master Switch ⎯ OFF (Left master ON for Comm/Nav and PFD.)
9. Airspeed⎯ 170 to 180 KIAS (If fire is not extinguished at this speed, increase speed to a
level that extinguishes the fire if sufficient altitude exists.)
10. Landing ⎯ PERFORM “FORCED LANDING” CHECKLIST
ELECTRICAL FIRE IN FLIGHT

1. All Heating and Ventilating Controls ⎯ ON
3. Oxygen System ⎯ OFF (On MFD System page, altitude permitting—see discussion on page
3-20.)
4. Guarded Oxygen Manual Valve ⎯ OFF
5. A/P Trim System Switch on Overhead ⎯ OFF
6. Fire Extinguisher ⎯ DISCHARGE IN AREA OF THE FIRE
7. Post Fire Details ⎯ OPEN VENTILATION (If fire is extinguished.)
8. Phased System Power-up⎯Determine if electrical power is necessary for the safe
continuation of the flight. If it is required, proceed with items 9 and 10 below.
10. Left and Right Master Switches ⎯ ON
11. Flight ⎯ LAND AS SOON AS POSSIBLE.
CABIN FIRE IN FLIGHT (Fuel/Hydraulic Fluid)

1. All Heating and Ventilating Controls ⎯ ON
4. Oxygen Switch ⎯ OFF (On MFD System page, altitude permitting—see discussion on page
3-20.)
5. Guarded Oxygen Manual Valve ⎯ OFF (on overhead)
6. Fire Extinguisher ⎯ DISCHARGE IN AREA OF THE FIRE
7. When Fire is Extinguished⎯ VENTILATE CABIN (Turn on master switch, cabin fan, open
ventilation, and deactivate door seals.)
8. Landing ⎯ PERFORM “FORCED LANDING” CHECKLIST
WARNING
The fire extinguishing substance is toxic, and the fumes must not be
inhaled for extended periods. After discharging the extinguisher, the
cabin must be ventilated. If oxygen is available, put masks on and start
oxygen flow. Oxygen must only be used after it is determined that the fire
is extinguished.
WING FIRE IN FLIGHT

1. Pitot Heat Switch ⎯ OFF
2. Strobe and Position Lights ⎯ OFF
3. Landing and Taxi Lights ⎯ OFF
4. Flight Action ⎯ Do not perform a sideslip. A sideslip will vent fuel from the low wing or
direct flames towards the fuselage. Land the airplane as soon as possible. Use wing flaps only
if essential for a safe landing.


Section 3
SPIN RECOVERY
1. Throttle ⎯ IDLE
2. Rudder ⎯ FULL AGAINST THE SPIN
3. Elevator ⎯ FULL FORWARD
4. Ailerons ⎯ FULL AGAINST THE SPIN
5. Wing Flaps ⎯ RETRACT
6. Flight Action ⎯ When rotation stops, neutralize controls, then pull out of steep dive to
achieve normal attitude. Pulling out of the dive will produce 2 to 3 g’s and airspeeds up to 160
KIAS.
WARNING
Recovery from a spin may require up to one additional turn with normal
use of controls for recovery.
WARNING
INADVERTENT ICING
1. Detection⎯ CHECK SURFACES (The stall strips and wing cuffs are good inspection points
for evidence of structural icing.)
2. Pitot Heat and Propeller Heat ⎯ ON
3. Course ⎯ REVERSE COURSE
4. Altitude ⎯ CHANGE (To a level where the temperature is above freezing.)
5. Defroster ⎯ Divert all heated air to the defroster.
6. Propeller Control ⎯ INCREASE (Higher propeller speeds will mitigate ice accumulation.)
7. Manifold Pressure ⎯ MONITOR (A drop in manifold pressure may be an indication of
induction icing; increase throttle settings as required.)
8. Heated Induction Air ⎯ ON (Operate if induction icing is evident or suspected.)
9. Alternate Static Source ⎯ (Open if static source icing is evident or suspected.)
10. Flight Characteristics ⎯ ADD MARGIN OF SAFETY (An ice buildup on the wings and
other surfaces will increase stalling speeds. Add a margin to approach and landing speeds.)
11. Approach Speed ⎯ Appropriate for the amount of ice accumulation and flap setting. If there
is a heavy ice buildup on the windshield, a gentle forward slip or small S-turns may improve
forward visibility by allowing use of the side windows.
12. Landing Attitude⎯ LIMITED FLARE (Land at a higher speed and in a flat attitude sufficient
to prevent the nose wheel from touching the ground first.)
WARNING
When flying in areas where inadvertent icing is possible, i.e., areas of
visible moisture that are not forecasted to have icing conditions, turn on
the pitot heat at least five minutes before entering the areas of visible
moisture.
LANDING WITH A FLAT MAIN GEAR TIRE

1. Approach ⎯ NORMAL


Section 3
3. Touchdown⎯ Land on the side of the runway corresponding to the good tire. Touch down on
the inflated tire first and maintain full aileron deflection towards the good tire, keeping the flat
tire off the ground for as long as possible. Be prepared for abnormal yaw in the direction of
the flat tire.
4. Taxiing ⎯ Do not attempt to taxi. Stop the aircraft and perform a normal engine shutdown.
LANDING WITH A FLAT NOSE TIRE

1. Approach ⎯ NORMAL
3. Touchdown⎯ Touch down on the main landing gear tires first. Maintain sufficient back
elevator deflection to keep the nose tire off the ground for as long as possible.
4. Taxiing ⎯ Do not attempt to taxi. Stop the aircraft and perform a normal engine shutdown.
TM
SPEEDBRAKE SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
1. SpeedBrakeTM Switch ⎯ OFF/DOWN POSITION
2. SpeedBrakeTM Circuit Breaker ⎯ PULL
NOTE
If the SpeedBrake™ System should malfunction or perform improperly,
do not attempt to identify or analyze the problem. If the malfunction
results in an abnormal change in the pitch and/or roll axis, immediately
regain control of the airplane by the input of control forces that override
the SpeedBrake™ failure(s). Do not, under any circumstances, re-engage
a SpeedBrake™ System that has malfunctioned until the problem is
corrected.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM OVERCHARGING* (Both alternators stay on-line, ammeter shows

excessive charge, and voltmeter has high voltage indication.)
1. Defective Alternator Switch ⎯ OFF
2. Crosstie Switch ⎯ ON
3. Flight⎯ If the electrical system is restored, continue with flight. If the electrical system is not
restored, land as soon as practicable.
*NOTE
The voltage regulator will trip the alternator off-line in conditions of over
voltage, i.e., greater than 31.0 volts. If this happens the annunciation
window on the PFD will indicate the alternator is out. The most likely
cause is transitory spikes or surges tripped the alternator off-line.
ALTERNATOR FAILURE—ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DISCHARGING (Ammeter shows a

discharging condition on the left or right bus, and the PFD annunciations window displays “L Alt
Off” or “R Alt Off”)
1. Crosstie Switch ⎯ OFF
2. Affected Alternator Master Switch ⎯ CYCLE OFF THEN ON
3. Alternator Annunciation Message (Follow either step 3.1 or 3.2 below)
3.1. Alternators Annunciation Message Clears ⎯ If after recycling the system, the alternator
annunciation message clears, proceed with normal operations.
3.2. Alternator Annunciation Remains Displayed ⎯ If after recycling the system the
alternator annunciation message remains displayed or trips the alternator off-line
again, follow steps 4 - 6 below.
4. Affected Alternator Master Switch ⎯ OFF


Section 3
6. Good Alternator⎯ ENSURE PROPER OPERATION (If the “Alt Off” message is displayed,
reduce loads or increase RPM until the annunciation clears and the batteries are in a charging
state.)
7. Electrical System ⎯ If the electrical system is not restored, land as soon as practicable.
LEFT OR RIGHT BUS FAILURE/CROSSTIE DISCHARGES WORKING BUS

(Activating the crosstie switch causes the current sensor of the working bus to discharge
significantly, e.g., the left bus was showing a positive charge prior to activating the crosstie switch.)
2. Master Switch of the failed bus ⎯ OFF
3. Review the following table for items that are on the failed bus and make appropriate
allowances.
ITEMS UNAVAILABLE WITH A BUS FAILURE
Left Bus Items Right Bus Items

Aileron Trim Strobe Lights
Pitot Heat Taxi Light
SpeedBrakes Right Voltage Regulator
Position Lights Door Seal/Power Point
Landing Light Carbon Monoxide Detector
Left Voltage Regulator Oxygen
Fan Display Keypad
Air Conditioning
4. Depending on which bus failed (left or right) and the dictates of the current conditions, i.e.,
day, night, IMC, VMC, land the airplane as soon as practicable or possible.
ELECTRIC TRIM/AUTOPILOT FAILURE (sudden and unexplained changes in control stick

force.)
1. Flight ⎯ MANUALLY CONTROL THE AIRCRAFT
2. Red Autopilot Disconnect/Trim Interrupt Button on Control Stick– PRESS
3. A/P Trim System Switch in Overhead ⎯ OFF
4. Power Settings ⎯ REDUCE TO 50% BHP OR LESS (Or to a setting that relieves forces.)
5. Airspeed ⎯ 100 to 110 KIAS (Or to speed that relieves forces.)
6. Circuit Breakers ⎯ PULL AS REQUIRED
7. Flight⎯ TERMINATE AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE OR POSSIBLE (This depends on the
magnitude of control force(s) required to maintain a normal flight attitude.)
8. Landing⎯ PREPARE FOR CONTROL FORCE CHANGES (When power is reduced and
airspeed is reduced, there can be substantial changes in the required control pressures.)
WARNING
In a runaway trim emergency the two most important considerations are
to (1) IMMEDIATELY turn off the trim system and (2) maintain control
of the airplane. The airplane will not maintain level flight and/or proper
directional control without pilot input to the affected flight control(s). If
excessive control force is required to maintain level flight, land as soon as
possible. Pilot fatigue can be increased significantly in this situation with
the potential for making the landing difficult.


Section 3
PARTIAL RESTORATION OF A DISABLED TRIM SYSTEM

1. A/P Trim System Switch in Overhead ⎯ ON
2. Malfunction Analysis ⎯ DETERMINE AXIS OF MALFUNCTION
3. Circuit Breaker(s) ⎯ SET PROPERLY FUNCTIONING AXIS BREAKER TO ON
MALFUNCTION OF AUTOPILOT
1. Flight ⎯ MANUALLY CONTROL THE AIRCRAFT
2. Autopilot Disconnect Switch on Control Stick⎯ PRESS (If the autopilot does not disconnect
proceed to step 3.)
3. Pitch Trim Switch ⎯ MOVE (If the autopilot does not disconnect proceed to step 4.)
4. A/P Trim System Switch on Overhead ⎯ OFF (If the autopilot does not disconnect proceed
to step 5.)
5. Circuit Breaker ⎯ PULL BREAKER TO THE OFF POSITION
MALFUNCTION OF AUTOPILOT AUTOTRIM

1. Flight ⎯ MANUALLY CONTROL AIRCRAFT AND DISCONNECT THE AUTOPILOT
2. Manual Electric Trim (MET) – VERIFY PROPER OPERATION WITH TRIM SWITCH ON
CONTROL STICK. IF MET OPERATES IMPROPERLY, PERFORM STEP 3.
3. AP Switch on MFD ⎯ SET TO OFF TO DISABLE THE SYSTEM
BROKEN OR STUCK THROTTLE CABLE (With enough power for continued flight.)
1. Continued Flight ⎯ LAND AS SOON AS POSSIBLE
2. Airport Selection ⎯ ADEQUATE FOR POWER OFF APPROACH
3. Descent ⎯ CONTROL WITH PROPELLER CONTROL
4. Fuel Selector ⎯ SET TO FULLER TANK
5. Approach Airspeed ⎯ 93 KIAS (With flaps in the up position)
90 KIAS (With flaps in the landing position)
6. Seat Belts ⎯ FASTENED AND SECURE
8. Wing Flaps⎯AS REQUIRED (Full flaps should be extended only when reaching the runway
is assured.)
9. Mixture (Reaching the runway is assured.) ⎯ IDLE CUTOFF
10. Touchdown ⎯ MAIN WHEELS FIRST, GENTLY LOWER NOSE WHEEL
11. Braking ⎯ AS REQUIRED
OXYGEN SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

1. Oxygen System ⎯ OFF THEN ON (On MFD System page.)
2. Guarded Oxygen Manual Valve ⎯ OFF THEN ON
3. Flow Meters ⎯ VERIFY FLOW TO BREATHING DEVICES
4. If no oxygen flowing:
4.1. Descend ⎯ 12,500 ft or below (In a safe and controlled manner.)
4.2. Oxygen Switch ⎯ OFF (On MFD System page.)
CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTION (When optional CO detector is installed, annunciation

displays, and aural warning sounds.)
1. System Softkey on the MFD ⎯ PRESS
2. CO RST Softkey ⎯ PRESS (If alert continues go to step 3.)
3. Heater ⎯ OFF
4. Vents ⎯ ON
5. Airspeed ⎯INCREASE TO GREATER THAN 120 KIAS
6. Oxygen ⎯ DON (If installed.)
7. Flight ⎯ LAND AS SOON AS POSSIBLE


Section 3
NOTE
The red annunciation will stay displayed until the CO level drops below 75 ppm.
Do not recycle the unit through the circuit breaker, as there is a three minute
delay for the CO sensor to stabilize.
SOMETHING STUCK IN OR INTERFERING WITH A DOOR JAMB

1. Affected Door ⎯ DO NOT OPEN THE DOOR IN FLIGHT
WARNING
Do not open any of the airplane doors in flight. The doors are not designed to be
opened in flight; subsequent airloads on an opened door will forcefully pull it
completely open and detach it from the airplane.
2. Flight ⎯ LAND AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE
EVACUATING THE AIRPLANE

1. Seat Belts⎯REMOVE (Do not remove seat belts until the airplane comes to a
complete stop, unless there is a compelling reason to do otherwise. If the onset of
the emergency is anticipated, ensure the seat belt is as tight as possible. See
discussion on page 3-27.)
2. Doors⎯USE BOTH IF POSSIBLE AND REQUIRED (Do not open doors in
flight.)
3. Crash Ax⎯USE AS REQUIRED (If the cabin doors are inoperable, break out a
cabin door window. See crash ax discussion on page 3-28.)
4. Exiting the Airplane⎯AS APPROPRIATE (If possible, use both doors. Generally,
it is best to go aft unless there are compelling reasons to do otherwise. See
discussion on page 3-27.)
5. Assistance⎯AS APPROPRIATE (If possible, necessary, and not life threatening,
render assistance to others in the airplane.)
6. Congregating Point ⎯ DESIGNATE (Pilot and passengers should have a
designated congregating point, say 100 feet aft of the airplane.)


Section 3
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL

Many of the above emergency procedures involve resetting or pulling circuit breakers, which
requires a good understanding of the panel’s location and layout. The circuit breaker panel is located
forward of the pilot’s front seat on the lower side-panel. A picture of the circuit breaker panel and a
table listing each circuit breaker is provided in Figure 3 - 2. See Figure 7 – 18 on page 7-42 for a
diagram of the electrical system.
Engine Integ Stby

Essential PFD AHRS ADC Com 1
Airframe Avion 1 ADI
Panel L Bus Fuel Stall R Bus Elv

Essential ● Flaps
Lights Relays Pump Warn Relays Trim
Position Landing Left Speed Rudder Aileron Pitot
Left Bus ● Fan
Lights Lights Volt Reg Brakes Hold Trim Heat
Strobe Taxi Right Disp CO Door
Right Bus ● ● ● ●
Lights Lights Volt Reg Keypad Detect Seal P/P
Audio Integ Avionics
Avionics Com 2 ● Xpnder Traffic Autopilot MFD Weather ●
Mkr Avion 2 Fan
Note 1: A ● indicates that the circuit breaker position is unused but reserved for future optional equipment.
Note 2: The actual arrangement may vary slightly depending on the optional equipment installed.
Figure 3 - 2


Section 3
AMPLIFIED EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

ENGINE FAILURE AND FORCED LANDINGS
General – The most important thing in any emergency is to maintain control of the airplane. If an
engine failure occurs during the takeoff run, the primary consideration is to safely stop the airplane
in the remaining available runway. The throttle is reduced first to prevent momentary surging of the
engine. Raising the flaps reduces lift, which improves ground friction and facilitates braking. In
emergencies involving loss of power, it is important to minimize fire potential, which includes
shutting down or closing the electrical and fuel systems.
Engine Failure After Takeoff (Below 400 feet AGL) – With an engine failure immediately after
takeoff, time is of the essence. The most important consideration in this situation is to maintain the
proper airspeed. The airplane will be in a climb attitude and when the engine fails, airspeed decays
rapidly. Therefore, the nose must be lowered immediately and a proper glide speed established
according to Figure 3 - 3. It may not be possible to accelerate to the best distance glide speed due to
altitude limitations. In this instance, lower the nose, maintain current airspeed, and land straight
ahead.
It is unlikely there will be enough altitude to do any significant maneuvering; only gentle turns left
or right to avoid obstructions should be attempted. If there are no obstructions, it is best to land
straight ahead unless there is a significant crosswind component. Flaps should be applied if airspeed
and altitude permit since they can provide a 10+ knot reduction in landing speed.
Engine Failure After Takeoff (Above 400 feet AGL) – With an engine failure after takeoff, there
may be time to employ modified restarting procedures. Still, the most important consideration in this
situation is to maintain the proper airspeed. The airplane will be in a climb attitude and when the
engine fails, airspeed decays rapidly. Therefore, the nose must be lowered immediately and a proper
glide speed established according to Figure 3 - 3. It may not be possible to accelerate to the best
distance glide speed due to altitude limitations. In this instance, lower the nose, maintain current
airspeed, and land straight ahead.
In-Flight Engine Failure – The extra time afforded by altitude may permit some diagnosis of the
situation. The first item is to establish the proper rate of descent at the best glide speed for the
situation, as shown in Figure 3 - 3. If altitude and other factors permit, an engine restart should be
attempted. The checklist items 2 through 7, Engine Failure During Flight, on page 3-4, ensure that
the fuel supply and ignition are available. The most likely cause of engine failure is poor fuel
management. The two more frequent errors are forgetting to change the fuel selector or, during an
extended descent, failure to readjust the mixture.
Best Distance Glide Min. Rate Glide

(Most Distance) (Min. rate of descent)
Gross Weight KIAS KIAS
3600 lbs. (1633 kg) 108 87

2700 lbs. (1224 kg) 96 82
Figure 3 - 3


Section 3
Best Glide Speed Versus Minimum Rate of Descent Speed – The best distance glide speed will
provide the most distance covered over the ground for a given altitude loss, while the minimum rate
of descent speed, as its name suggests, will provide the least altitude lost in a given time period. The
best distance glide speed might be used in situations where a pilot, with an engine failure but several
thousand feet above the ground, is attempting to reach a distant airport. The minimum rate of descent
could be used in a situation when the pilot is over the desired landing spot and wishes to maximize
the time aloft for checklists and restart procedures.
Emergency Backup Fuel Pump – The backup fuel pump is intended for use during an emergency
situation when failure of the engine driven pump has occurred. The switch that controls this
operation is on the flap panel. The labeling on the switch reads BACKUP PUMP ARMED. The
switch is normally in the ARMED position for takeoff and climb to cruise altitude and in the OFF
position for cruise, descent, and approach to landing. The top of the switch is engraved with the
word OFF and is readable only when the switch is off.
If the engine driven pump malfunctions, ensure the backup fuel pump is in the ARMED position,
and the backup fuel pump will turn on automatically when the fuel pressure is less than about 5.5
psi. This condition will also activate a yellow caution message “FUEL PUMP” in the PFD
annunciation window and an associated aural message “FUEL PUMP ON”. There may be
degradation in the smoothness of engine operation as well. With the backup pump operating, fuel is
not as precisely metered, compared to the normal engine driven system, and frequent mixture
adjustments are necessary when changes are made to the power settings. In particular, avoid large
power changes, since an over-rich or over-lean mixture will affect the proper operation of the
engine. With a failed engine driven pump, full power should be available, but power should be
reduced below 85% as soon as practical.
In the unlikely event of an engine driven fuel pump failure and a backup fuel pump relay failure, the
primer switch may be held down to effectively restore fuel flow.
In general, as power is reduced below the 75% of BHP level, there must be a corresponding leaning
of the mixture. On an approach to landing, the normal checklist procedures must be modified to
exclude setting the mixture to full rich. It is best to make a partial power approach with full flaps,
and only reduce power when over the runway. If a balked landing is necessary, coordinate the
simultaneous application of mixture and throttle.
At power settings above the 85% level, the engine will operate with a very lean mixture. At full
throttle, the engine will produce approximately 100% of its rated BHP. In this situation, the fuel-air
mixture is lean of peak, and higher cylinder head temperatures and TIT readings will result from
extended use in the condition. Full throttle operations must be kept to a minimum and only used to
clear an obstacle, execute a balked landing, or other similar situations that require use of all available
power.
Critical Issues (Backup Fuel Pump) – One of the more critical times for an engine driven fuel
pump failure is when the engine is at idle power, such as a descent for landing. There are two
reasons that make this situation more serious compared with other flight phases. (1) The airplane is
more likely to be at a lower altitude, which limits time for detection, analysis, and corrective
measures. (2) With the engine at idle power, there is no aural indication of engine stoppage. If the
engine failure is a result of fuel starvation with a fuel pressure less than 5.5 psi, then the FUEL
PUMP message in the PFD annunciation window will provide a visual indication.
There is a latching relay that basically controls the logic of the system. For example, it turns the
backup pump on, when the backup boost switch is in the ARMED position and the fuel pressure
drops below 5.5 psi. Moreover, if the backup system is automatically turned on while the vapor
suppression is on, it will suspend operation of the vapor suppression. Most functions in the system
are integrated with the latching relay, and failure of this relay will result in failure of the system.


Section 3
However, the FUEL PUMP message is independent of this system and will operate anytime the fuel
pressure is less than 5.5 psi.
In a situation involving a double failure, i.e., a malfunction of the engine driven pump and the
latching relay, the FUEL PUMP message will be displayed. Since the primer and backup fuel pump
are one and the same, the pilot can bypass the latching relay by holding the primer switch in the
depressed position. In this particular situation, this would restore engine power and permit
continuation of the flight and a landing, which must be done as soon as possible. Of course, the pilot
must continually depress the primer switch, which increases the cockpit workload.
CAUTION
Do not shut down an engine for practice or training purposes. If engine
failure is to be simulated, it shall be done by reducing power. A few
minutes of exposure to temperatures and airspeeds at flight altitudes can
have the same effect on an inoperative engine as hours of cold-soaking in
sub-Arctic conditions.
Gliding Distance
(Zero Wind – Best Distance Glide)
14000
12000
10000
Altitude (FT)
8000
6000
4000
2000
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
Ground Distance (NM)
Propeller control pulled to low rpm, flaps up, 108 KIAS, L/Dmax = 13/1
Figure 3 - 4
Engine Restarts – If the engine restarts, two special issues must be considered: (1) If the airplane
was in a glide for an extended period of time at cold ambient air temperatures, the engine should be
operated at lower RPM settings for a few minutes until the oil and cylinder temperatures return to
normal ranges if possible. (2) If the engine failure is not related to pilot error, i.e., poor fuel
management or failure to enrich the mixture during a long descent from a high altitude, then a
landing should be made as soon as possible to determine the cause of the engine failure.
Engine Does Not Restart – If the engine does not restart, then a forced landing without power must
be completed as detailed earlier in this section on page 3-5, Forced Landing (Engine Out or Partial
Power). Maintaining the best distance glide speed provides the maximum distance over the ground
with the least altitude loss. The preceding graph Figure 3 - 4 provides information on ground
distance covered for a given height above the ground.


Section 3
Forced Landing with the Throttle Stuck in the Idle Position – If the throttle is stuck at idle or
near idle power, then a forced landing must be performed. The procedures are somewhat similar to
those associated with a complete power loss. However, powerplant shutdown should be delayed as
long as safely practicable since the stuck throttle may be spontaneously cured. Changes in altitude,
temperature, and other atmospheric conditions associated with the descent may combine to alleviate
the stuck throttle condition. On the other hand, the problem could be the result of a broken throttle
cable, which has no immediate cure. Regardless of the cause, the pilot lacks both the time and
resources to properly analyze the cause. Running the engine until the last practicable moment, within
the confines of safety, is the most prudent course of action.
It is possible that the throttle may stick at a power setting that is above idle, but at insufficient brake
horsepower to sustain level flight. At the same time, this condition may restrict the desired rate of
descent. In this situation, the pilot can use the propeller control to control power.
Stuck Throttle with Sufficient Power to Sustain Flight – If the throttle sticks at a power setting
that produces enough power for continued flight then a landing should be made as soon as possible.
Power may be partially controlled with the use of the mixture control or propeller (RPM) control. If
the airplane is near the ground, climb to an altitude that provides a greater margin of safety, provided
there is sufficient power to do so. Do not begin the descent for landing until the airplane is near or
over the airport. Again, as mentioned in the previous paragraph, the pilot can set the mixture control
to idle cutoff to momentarily stop the operation of the engine. If cylinder head temperatures fall
below 240º, restart the engine as necessary by enriching the mixture. A checklist for a stuck throttle
condition that will sustain flight is discussed on page 3-12.
FLIGHT CONTROLS MALFUNCTIONS

General – The elevator and aileron controls are actuated by pushrods, which provide direct positive
response to the input of control pressures. The rudder is actuated by cable controls. The pushrod
system makes the likelihood of a control failure in the roll and pitch axis remote.
Aileron or Rudder Failure – The failure of the rudder or ailerons does not impose a critical
situation since control around either the vertical and longitudinal axes can still be approximately
maintained with either control surface. Plan a landing as soon as practicable on a runway that
minimizes the crosswind component. Remember that the skidding and slipping maneuvers inherent
in such an approach will increase the airplane’s stall speed, and a margin for safety should be added
to the approach airspeed.
Elevator Failure – In the event of a failure of the elevator control system, the airplane can be
controlled and landed using the elevator trim tab. The airplane should be landed as soon as possible
with priority given to an airport with a long runway. En route, establish horizontal flight at 65% to
75% power. When within 15 miles of the landing airport, slow to 120 KIAS, set the flaps to the
takeoff position, and establish a timed shallow descent. If possible, make a straight in approach to
landing adjusting the descent with power. On final approach, set the flaps to the landing position and
re-trim the airplane to a 500 fpm descent at about 80 KIAS. Do not make further adjustment to the
elevator trim, and avoid excessive power adjustments. On the final approach to landing, make small
power changes to control the descent. Do not reduce power suddenly at the flare-out point as this
will cause an excessive nose down change and may cause the airplane to land on the nose wheel
first. At the flare-out point, coordinate the reduction of power with the full nose-up application of
elevator trim.


Section 3
TRIM TAB MALFUNCTIONS

The airplane has two axis electrically powered trim tabs. There is an autopilot/trim system on/off
switch located on the right side of the overhead rocker switch panel, which turns off power to the
actuators in both axes and the autopilot. If a runaway trim condition is encountered in flight,
characterized by sudden and unexplained changes in control forces, the red autopilot disconnect/trim
interrupt button must be depressed and held and the autopilot/trim system switch must immediately
be set to the OFF position. If the pilot wishes to restore part of the system’s trim, the following
procedure should be used.
1. After the trim system switch has been set to OFF, the trim circuit breakers (elevator and
aileron) should be pulled to the OFF position.
2. Turn the autopilot/trim system switch to the ON position.
3. Based on the forces experienced during the trim runaway, determine which tab is least likely to
have caused the runaway and which tab is most likely to have caused the runaway.
4. Set the circuit breakers least likely to have caused the runaway to the ON position. The pilot
should be prepared to set the autopilot/trim system switch to the OFF position in the event the
diagnosis is incorrect and the faulty trim actuator is brought back on line. In most situations,
the pilot should be able to easily determine which trim axis experienced the runaway condition.
WARNING
In a runaway trim emergency the two most important considerations are
to (1) IMMEDIATELY press and hold the red autopilot disconnect/trim
interrupt button on the stick and turn off the trim system and (2)
maintain control of the airplane. The airplane will not maintain level
flight and/or proper directional control without pilot input to the affected
flight control(s). If excessive control force is required to maintain level
flight, the flight must be terminated as soon as possible. Pilot fatigue can
increase significantly in this situation with the potential for making the
landing more difficult.
The left bus supplies the power to the aileron actuator motor, and the right bus supplies the power to
the elevator actuator motor. In the event of a power failure, the trim tabs will not operate, and the
settings in place before the failure will be maintained until power is restored. Flight under these
conditions or during a trim runaway condition should not impose a significant problem. Atypical
control forces will be required and the flight should be terminated as soon as possible or practicable
(depending on flight conditions) to mitigate pilot fatigue. Remember that during touchdown, when
power is reduced and airspeed decays, there can be substantial changes in the required control
forces.
FIRES
General – Fires in flight (either engine, electrical, or cabin) are inherently more critical; however,
the likelihood of such an occurrence is extremely rare. The onset of an in-flight fire can, to some
degree, be forestalled through diligent monitoring of the engine instruments and vigilance for
suspicious odors. Fires on the ground can be mitigated through proper starting techniques,
particularly when the engine is very cold.
Engine Fires – The most common engine fires occur on the ground and are usually the result of
improper starting procedures. The immoderate use of the primer pump is a primary reason since this
causes engine flooding. In situations of extensive primer pump use, the excess fuel drains from the
intake ports and puddles on the ground. If this happens, the aircraft should be moved away from the
puddle. Otherwise, the potential exists for the exhaust system to ignite the fuel puddle on the ground.
Inadvertent engine flooding is likely during situations where the engine has been cold-soaked at
temperatures below 25°F (-4°C) for over two hours. See cold weather operations on page 4-29.


Section 3
Cabin Fires – Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for use of the fire extinguisher. For more
information on using the fire extinguisher see the discussion on page 7-52. Once a cabin fire is
extinguished, it is important to ventilate the cabin as soon as possible. The residual smoke and toxins
from the fire extinguisher must not be inhaled for extended periods. The ventilation system should
be operated at full volume with the cabin fan on. Deactivating the door seals enhances the ventilation
process.
Oxygen should be turned off in the event of a cabin fire and only used after it is determined that the
fire is extinguished. However, good pilot judgment should be used when flying at altitudes where
oxygen is required to weigh the effects of lack of oxygen with the potential fire hazard. Once the fire
is extinguished and if oxygen is available, put masks on and start the oxygen flow. If fire cannot be
extinguished, open the guard on the oxygen system in the overhead panel, place the manual valve in
the OFF position, and press the oxygen softkey on the MFD to the OFF position.
LIGHTNING STRIKE
In order to prevent as much damage as possible to the electrical system, components, and avionics in
the event of a lightning strike, surge protection has been built into the Columbia 400’s electrical
system. This surge protection comes from large MOVs (metal oxide varistor) soldered in behind the
circuit breaker panel. The Columbia 400 system has one MOV on the avionics bus and one on the
essential bus. The MOVs are located behind the circuit breaker panel and are not accessible by the
pilot in-flight. It is imperative that after a lightning strike, the MOVs are replaced before the next
flight.
CAUTION
After a lightning strike, the MOVs must be replaced before the next flight.
If the aircraft is struck by lightning in flight, the MOVs will have likely prevented significant
damage to the electrical components. The most likely damage will be to the equipment on the
extreme ends of the airplane, such as the strobe and anti-collision lights. After the lightning strike,
the pilot should reset all tripped circuit breakers. If any of the circuit breakers trip off again, they
should not be reset a second time. The pilot should then determine which equipment is operating
properly, and adjust the flight accordingly.
ENGINE AND PROPELLER PROBLEMS

Engine Roughness – The most common cause of a rough running engine is an improper mixture
setting. Adjust the mixture in reference to the power setting and altitude in use. Do not immediately
go to a full rich setting since the roughness may be caused by too rich of a mixture. If adjusting the
mixture does not correct the problem, reduce throttle until roughness becomes minimal, and perform
a magneto check.
Check operations on the individual left and right magnetos. If the engine operates smoothly when
operating on an individual magneto, adjust power as necessary and continue. However, do not
operate the engine in this manner any longer than necessary. Land as soon as possible for
determination and repair of the problem. If individual magneto operations do not improve
performance, set the magneto switch to R/L, and land as soon as possible for engine repairs.
High Altitude Negative G Loading – Per the TCM model specification, the TSIO-550 Series
aircraft engines are not approved for continuous negative or zero g operations. Short duration
negative g operations such as gust loading will have small or no effect on engine operation.
Sustained negative g loading at altitudes above 17,000 ft. may result in partial or total loss of engine
power. Engine recovery may require pilot intervention by leaning the mixture to restart. Sustained
negative g loading may cause the unporting of the oil pick-up tube. The resulting loss of oil pressure
will allow the wastegate controller to move to the open position thereby rapidly decreasing manifold
pressure at high altitude. This rapid decrease in manifold pressure can cause an overly rich mixture


Section 3
resulting in partial or total loss of engine power. If the engine stops running follow the procedures
described on page 3-4, Engine Failure During Flight.
High Cylinder Head Temperatures – High cylinder head temperatures are often caused by
improper leaning at high power setting or vapor formation in the fuel lines (indicated by rising TIT).
Be sure the mixture is adjusted for the power setting and altitude in use and turn vapor suppression
on. Put the aircraft in a gentle descent to increase airspeed. If cylinder head temperatures cannot be
maintained within the prescribed limits, land as soon as possible to have the problem evaluated and
repaired.
High Oil Temperature – A prolonged high oil temperature indication is usually accompanied by a
drop in oil pressure. If oil pressure remains normal, then the cause of the problem could be a faulty
gauge or thermo-bulb. If the oil pressure drops as temperature increases, put the aircraft in a gentle
descent to increase airspeed. If oil temperature does not drop after increasing airspeed, reduce power
and land as soon as possible.
CAUTION
If the above steps do not restore oil temperature to normal, severe
damage or an engine failure can result. Reduce power to idle, and select
a suitable area for a forced landing. Follow the procedures described on
page 3-5, Forced Landing (Engine Out or Partial Power). The use of
power must be minimized and used only to reach the desired landing
area.
Low Oil Pressure – If oil pressure drops below 30 psi at normal cruise power settings without
apparent reason and the oil temperature remains normal, monitor both oil pressure and temperature
closely, and land as soon as possible for evaluation and repair. If a drop in oil pressure from
prescribed limits is accompanied by a corresponding excessive temperature increase, engine failure
should be anticipated. Reduce power and follow the procedures described on page 3-5, Forced
Landing (Engine Out or Partial Power). The use of power must be minimized and used only to reach
the desired landing area.
CAUTION
The engine oil annunciation is set to illuminate when the oil pressure is
less than 5 psi, which provides important information for ground
operations. It is not designed to indicate the onset of potential problems in
flight.
Failure of Turbocharger – Turbocharger failure may be evidenced by the inability of the engine to
develop manifold air pressure above the ambient pressure. The engine will revert to “normally
aspirated” and can be operated but will produce less than its rated horsepower. If turbocharger
failure occurs before takeoff, do not fly the aircraft. If a failure occurs in flight, readjust mixture as
necessary to obtain fuel flow appropriate to manifold air pressure and RPM.
An interruption in fuel flow or manifold pressure to the engine will result in turbocharger “run-
down”. At high altitude, merely restoring fuel flow may not cause the engine to restart, because
without turbocharger boost, the mixture will be excessively rich. If the engine does not fire, there
will be insufficient mass flow through the exhaust to turn the turbine. This condition may lead one to
suspect a turbocharger failure. Follow the procedures described on page 3-4, Engine Failure During
Flight. Engine starting will be apparent by a surge of power. As the turbocharger begins to operate,
manifold pressure will increase and mixture can be adjusted accordingly. If manifold pressure does
not increase then the turbocharger has failed.


Section 3
WARNING
If turbocharger failure is a result of a loose, disconnected or burned
through exhaust, then a serious fire hazard exists.
Failure of Engine Driven Fuel Pump – In the event the engine driven fuel pump fails in flight or
during takeoff, there is an electrically operated backup fuel pump located in the wing area. The first
indication of failure of the engine driven pump is a drop in fuel flow followed by a FUEL
annunciation and a loss of engine power.
The backup pump is normally in the ARMED position for takeoff and climb and will be activated if
fuel pressure drops below 5.5 psi. In the cruise and descent configurations, the pump arming is
normally in the OFF position. At the first indication of engine driven pump failure (fuel pump
warning annunciation, low fuel pressure, or rough engine operations), set the throttle to full open,
and set the backup pump switch to the ARMED position. Thereafter, it must remain in this position
and a landing must be made as soon as practicable to repair the engine driven fuel pump. Please see
an amplified discussion on page 3-16.
NOTE
When operating at high altitudes, 15,000 MSL or above, in hot weather, it
may be necessary to set the vapor suppression switch to ON. Operation of
the vapor suppression will lower engine temperatures and reduce the
chance of formation of vapor in the fuel lines. Operation of the vapor
suppression may be required at lower altitudes when the ambient
temperature is significantly above normal. Vapor suppression must be
turned on if TIT is rising above 1460ºF at full power and the mixture is
set to full rich (at any altitude). Vapor suppression may be turned off
below 18,000 MSL if power has been reduced below 85% and engine
temperatures have stabilized.
Propeller Surging or Wandering – If the propeller has a tendency to surge up and down or the
RPM settings seem to slowly and gently vary (propeller wandering), set the propeller control full
forward. Propeller surging may be caused by one or more of the following conditions.
1. There may be excessive leakage in the transfer bearing. The governor may not be able to get
enough oil pressure, which causes a delay in propeller responsiveness. By the time the
propeller responds to earlier governor inputs, they have changed, resulting in propeller
wandering.
2. Dirty oil is another cause. Contaminants in engine oil cause blockage of close tolerance
passages in the governor, leading to erratic operations.
3. Excessive play in the linkage between the governor and cockpit control can lead to erratic
operations.
NOTE
Propeller surging or wandering in most instances does not limit the safe
continuation of the flight. However, to preclude the occurrence of more
serious problems, the issue should be corrected in a timely manner, i.e., at
the conclusion of the flight. If the surging or wandering is excessive, then
a landing should be made as soon as practicable.
ELECTRICAL PROBLEMS
The potential for electrical problems can be reduced by systematic monitoring of the voltmeter, and
ammeter readings on the MFD. The onset of most electrical problems is indicated by abnormal
readings from any or all of these gauges. The dual ammeter, which is presented on vertical bar
gauges, measures the condition of the battery output/input and alternator output while the voltmeter
indicates the condition of the airplane’s electrical system on a bar graph on the MFD System page.


Section 3
The MFD System page shows bus voltage, as well as battery and alternator current on bar graphs
with a boundary around the group marked “electrical”.
Under Voltage – If there is an electrical demand above what can be produced by the alternator on
either the right or left bus, the battery temporarily satisfies the increased requirement and a battery
discharging condition exists. For example, if either alternator should fail, the associated battery
carries the entire electrical demand of the affected bus. As the battery charge is expended, the
voltage to the system will read something less than the optimum 24 volts. At approximately 8 volts,
most electrical components on the affected bus will cease to work or will operate erratically and
unreliably. For Garmin G1000 installations, minimum voltage for proper operation is 9 volts.
Anytime the electrical demand is greater than what can be supplied by the alternator at any RPM on
either the left or right bus, the battery is in a discharging state. The PFD annunciation window will
display “L Alt Off” or “R Alt Off” when that bus drops below 24 volts. The alternator will continue
to output as much as it can for the RPM the engine is producing. Reducing loads on the affected bus
or increasing RPM will clear the “L Alt Off” or “R Alt Off” annunciation message and the battery
will be in a charging state. If the discharging state is not corrected, in time, there is a decay in the
voltage available to the electrical system of the airplane and systems will cease to operate.
Alternator Failure – If the left or right alternator has an internal failure, i.e., it cannot be recycled
and the annunciation remains displayed, the alternator side of the split master switch for the
appropriate alternator should be set to the OFF position. A relay will disconnect it from its bus and
prevent battery drain if the failure is associated with an internal short. The crosstie switch should
then be turned on to allow the good alternator to carry the entire load on both buses.
Load Shedding – If the under voltage condition cannot be fixed either by turning on the crosstie
switch or reducing the electrical load to the system, land as soon as possible or as soon as practicable
depending on flight conditions. All nonessential electrical and avionics equipment must be turned
off.
Over Voltage – The voltage regulator is designed to trip the left or right alternator off-line in
conditions of over voltage, i.e., greater than 31.0 volts. When this happens a message on the PFD
will indicate the left or right alternator is offline. The most likely cause is transitory spikes or surges
tripping the alternator off-line in the electrical system. If the alternator is not automatically
disconnected in an over voltage situation, the voltage regulator is probably faulty. In this situation,
the pilot must manually turn off the alternator, otherwise, damage to the electrical and avionics
equipment is likely. There is increased potential for an electrical fire in an uncorrected over voltage
situation.
Master Switches – The system’s two master switches are located in the master switch panel in the
overhead with the bus crosstie and avionics master switches. This manual refers to each of the left
and right split-rocker switches as a master switch (left master switch and right master switch).
Although these switches are not technically “master” switches, as they do not control the entire
system, it is a common term used to prevent confusion. Each switch is a split-rocker design with the
alternator switch on the left side and the battery switch on the right side. Pressing the top of the
alternator portion of the split-switch turns on both switches, and pressing the bottom of the battery
portion of the split-switch turns off both switches. The battery side of the switch is used on the
ground for checking electrical devices and will limit battery drain since power is not required for
alternator excitation. The alternator switches are used individually (with the battery on) to recycle
the alternators and are turned off during load shedding.
COMPLETE LEFT OR RIGHT BUS FAILURE

General – Normally, a pilot can anticipate the onset of a complete electrical failure. Items like an
alternator failure and a battery discharging state usually precedes the total loss of electrical power on
the left or right bus. At the point the pilot first determines the electrical system is in an uncorrectable
state of decay, appropriate planning should be initiated. Turning on the crosstie switch should restore


Section 3
the bus to normal operation. If turning on the crosstie switch negatively affects the good bus, the
crosstie switch should be turned off and only the remaining bus should be used. The checklist should
be reviewed for items that are on the failed bus and rendered inoperative. The table shown in Figure
3 - 5 lists the equipment driven by each bus.
Crosstie Switch – The crosstie switch is the white switch located between the left and right master
switches. This switch is to remain in the OFF position during normal operations. The crosstie switch
is only closed, or turned on, when the aircraft is connected to ground power or in the event of an
alternator failure. This switch will join the left and right buses together for ground operations when
connected to ground power. In the event of a left or right alternator failure, this switch will join the
two buses allowing the functioning alternator to carry the load on both buses and charge both
batteries.
SUMMARY OF BUSES
Bus Bus Component Circuit Breaker
• Audio/Voice 5 amp
• Integrated Avionics #2 5 amp
• Com #2 5 amp
AVIONICS
• Transponder 5 amp
BUS
• Avionics Fan 3 amp

• Traffic 3 amp
• Autopilot 5 amp
• MFD 5 amp
• Weather 3 amp
• Aileron Trim 2 amp
• Pitot Heat 7.5 amp
LEFT BUS
• SpeedBrakes 3 amp
• Position Lights 5 amp
• Landing Light 5 amp
• Left Voltage Regulator 5 amp
• Fan 5 amp
• Strobe Lights 10 amp
• Taxi Light 4 amp
RIGHT BUS
• Right Voltage Regulator 5 amp

• Door Seal/Power Point 5 amp
• Carbon Monoxide Detector 2 amp
• Oxygen 3 amp
• Display Keypad 2 amp
• Air Conditioning 15 amp
• Attitude Horizon 5 amp
• Elevator Trim 2 amp
• Panel Lights 7.5 amp
• PFD 5 amp
• AHRS 5 amp
ESSENTIAL BUS
• Air Data Computer 5 amp

• Engine Airframe 5 amp
• Com #1 5 amp
• Left Bus Relays 1 amp
• Fuel Pump 5 amp
• Stall Warning 2 amp
• Flaps 10 amp
• Standby Attitude Horizon 3 amp
• Right Bus Relays 1 amp
BATTERY
• Hobbs Meter 3 amp

BUS
• ELT 3 amp
• Courtesy Lights 3 amp
Figure 3 - 5


Section 3
STATIC AIR SOURCE BLOCKAGE

The static source for the airspeed indicator, the altimeter, the rate of climb indicator, and encoder is
located on the right side of the airplane’s fuselage, between the cabin door and the horizontal
stabilizer. The location of the static port is in an area of relatively undisturbed air. Because of the
airplane’s composite construction, the static source is less susceptible to airframe longevity error
inherent with aluminum airplanes.
If the normal static source is blocked, an alternate static source, which uses pressure within the
cabin, can be selected. Access for the alternate static source is on the tower to the right of the pilot’s
knee and is labeled ALT STATIC. To access the alternate static source, rotate the static control knob
clockwise until it locks in the ALT position. When the alternate static source is in use, the
indications of the airspeed indicator and altimeter will vary slightly. Airspeed calibration charts are
in Section 5 and begin on page 5-3. No altimeter calibrations are shown since the error is less than
50 feet.
SPINS
The intentional spinning of the aircraft is prohibited. Flight tests have shown that the aircraft will
recover from a one turn spin in less than one additional turn after the application of recovery controls
for all points in the weight and balance envelope, up to the maximum certified altitude. The
recommended recovery inputs are: power idle, rudder full against the spin, elevator full forward and
aileron full against the spin. If the flaps are extended, they should be retracted after the spin rotation
is stopped to avoid exceeding the flap speed limit during pull out. When rotation stops, the aircraft
will be in a steep nose down attitude. Airspeeds up to 160 KIAS are possible during a 3 g pull out.
Above 126 KIAS it may be possible to pull more than 3.7 g’s in light weight conditions. Care should
be taken, under such conditions, to avoid overstressing the airframe. A steady state spin may be
encountered if pro-spin control inputs are held for 1 ½ turns or more. Steady state spins entered
above 20,000 feet at heavy weight and aft CG conditions will take the most turns to recover. If a
steady state spin is entered, making and holding the recommended recovery inputs will produce the
fastest recovery.
WARNING
The intentional spinning of the aircraft is prohibited.
WARNING
If a spin is entered with the flaps extended, they should be retracted after
the spin rotation is stopped to avoid exceeding the flap speed limit during
recovery.
WARNING
MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY
If the MFD should malfunction or perform improperly, you may continue to utilize those portions of
the MFD data that are not in question. Moving map errors may be associated with a RAIM alarm
indicating the loss of adequate GPS position containment. Data or functions that have failed are
typically remove and replaced with a red X in the appropriate area.


Section 3
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY

If the malfunction results in improper information from the air data computer and/or an abnormal
display of attitude information, use the standby instruments on the left side of the cockpit. The loss
of air data (altitude, airspeed) is indicated by the affected indicator being removed from the display
and replaced with a red X. Loss of attitude data (pitch, roll, heading) is indicated by the affected
indicator being removed from the display and replaced with a red X.
Those functions that do not have a red X may still be usable.
AUTOPILOT
If the autopilot should malfunction or perform improperly, do not attempt to identify or analyze the
problem. If the malfunction results in an abnormal change in the pitch and/or roll axis, immediately
regain control of the airplane by the disengaging the autopilot using either the pilot’s or copilot’s red
disengagement button located on the stick. Do not, under any circumstances, reengage an autopilot
that has malfunctioned until the problem is corrected.
Loss of instruments or components of the G1000 system will affect the GFC 700 Autopilot as
follows:
Loss of the AHRS will cause the autopilot to disconnect. The autopilot will be
inoperative.
Loss of the heading function of the AHRS will result in loss of the HDG mode. If in
heading mode at the time, the autopilot will revert to a basic roll mode (ROL)
Loss of the MFD will not cause the autopilot to disconnect, and will remain engaged with
limited functionality, but the autopilot cannot be re-engaged after disconnect by the pilot.
Loss of the PFD will cause the autopilot to disconnect. The autopilot will be inoperative.
Loss of air data computer information will cause the autopilot to disconnect. The
autopilot will be inoperative.
Loss of either GIA will cause the autopilot to disconnect. The autopilot will be
inoperative.
OXYGEN SYSTEM
General – The Garmin G1000 and oxygen system have monitoring logic to notify the pilot via the
PFD annunciations and aural tone if any of the following advisory conditions exist:
The system has not been activated above approximately 12,000 ft pressure altitude.
There is an inadequate quantity of oxygen (system pressure less than 250 psig) with the
system turned on.
The oxygen outlet pressure is not within range for proper operation.
Low pressure at the distribution manifold (Outlet Pressure less than 16.5 psig).
Oxygen system ON while on the ground.
Check the oxygen display on the Engine Indication page on the MFD for more detailed information.
WARNING
Failures in the breathing stations, cannulas, masks, and flow meters are not
indicated on the display panel or annunciations unless it causes one of the three
alarms to activate.
Failures that the pilot may rectify in flight are leaks downstream of the distribution manifold, which
may consist of misadjusted or pinched flexible lines, or replacement of failed flow devices in the
system. These failures can be indicated by the outlet pressure display at the bottom of the oxygen
panel and by inadequate flows as indicated by the flow meter or flow indicators.


Section 3
NOTE
If oxygen is flowing into the cabin and the oxygen system master softkey on the
MFD will not turn the oxygen system off, the guarded overhead switch can be
used to terminate the flow of oxygen to the cabin in the event of an emergency as
required by the pilot.
Cabin Fire – See the discussion on page 3-20 for information on the use of oxygen after a cabin fire.
EMERGENCY EXIT
General – It is impossible to cover all the contingencies of an emergency situation. The pilot-in-
command must analyze all possible alternatives and select a course of action appropriate to the
situation. The discussion on the following pages is intended as a generalized overview of
recommended actions and issues associated with emergency egress.
Doors – In most emergencies, the main cabin doors are used as exit points. The operation of these
doors is discussed on page 7-13, and there are placards near the door handles, which explain their
operation. In addition, the Passenger Briefing Card discusses the operation of the cabin doors in an
emergency situation. It is important that passengers are familiar with their operation since the pilot
may be incapacitated during emergency exiting operations.
Seat Belts – The seat belt should not be removed until the airplane has come to a complete stop,
unless there are compelling reasons to do otherwise. At other times, such as when the airplane has
come to rest in an area of treetops, leaving the belts fastened might be the best course of action.
When the seat belts are removed, it is helpful if the pilot and passengers stow them in a manner that
minimizes interference with airplane egress patterns.
Exiting (Cabin Door(s) Operable) – If possible, use both cabin doors as exit points. In the event of
a wing fire, exit on the side away from the fire. The front seat passengers should normally exit first
and then, if appropriate, render assistance to the rear seat occupants. When outside and on the wing,
move to the rear of the airplane, over the trailing edge of the wing, all other things being equal. If
practicable, all passengers and the pilot should have a designated congregating point. For example,
100 feet aft of the airplane.
Exiting (Cabin Doors Inoperable) – If the cabin doors are inoperable, there is a crash ax (hatchet)
located under the pilot’s seat that can be used to break out one of the cabin door windows. Please see
the crash ax discussion on page 3-28.
INVERTED EXIT PROCEDURES

General – In emergencies where the airplane has come to rest in an inverted position, the gull wing
doors will not open sufficiently to exit the airplane. If this happens, there is a crash ax below the
pilot’s front seat that can be used to break either of the cabin door windows. Use the following
procedure.
1. Release the seat belt. The pilot should position himself or herself in a manner that minimizes
injury before releasing the seat belt.
2. Remove crash ax from its holder.
3. If the airplane is situated with one wing down and touching the ground and one wing up,
break the cabin door window on the up-wing side. If the wings are about level, break the door
window that offers the best access. See crash ax discussion on page 3-28.
4. Exit the airplane and/or render assistance to passengers as required.
Exterior Emergency Exit Release – There is an emergency exit door hinge release that can be
activated by ground personnel in the event the pilot and passengers are incapacitated. The release
strap loop is located on the bottom of the airplane near the left wing saddle inside the same
compartment that contains the gascolator.


Section 3
It is important for the pilot to understand the procedures for using the exterior release. In some
instances, the pilot may be incapacitated but conscious and able to offer verbal instructions to ground
personnel. The following procedures are applicable to exterior removal of the door by ground
personnel.
1. Open the gascolator compartment by pressing the two spring buttons.
2. Move the door latching mechanism of the pilot’s door to the open position.
3. Pull up sharply on the emergency strap loop door hinge release.
4. Pull on the door release handle to open the door a few inches, and then move the door latching
mechanism to the locked position. This will prevent the door from closing and provide an
adequate handhold for removing the door.
5. Using both hands, grasp the left and right edges of the door, near the middle, and pull it away
from the fuselage.
6. Rock wing to assist in the removal of the door.
WARNING
Do not pull the emergency release strap loop to test its operation. An
operational test is specified during the airplane’s annual inspection. If the
door release is inadvertently activated, the airplane is unsafe to fly, and
an appropriately trained and certificated mechanic must rearm the
system.
CRASH AX
A crash ax is located under the pilot’s seat for use in the event the cabin door and the emergency
door releases cannot be used. The blade of the ax points down and is inserted in an aluminum sheath,
and the unit is secured with a Velcro strip. To use the ax, open the Velcro fastener and remove the ax
from its sheath.
It generally works best to strike the corner edge of the window near the doorframe. Several smart
blows to the window area around the perimeter of the doorframe will remove enough pieces so that
the middle portion of the window can be removed with a few heavy blows. Once the major portion
of the window is removed and if time and circumstances permit, use the ax blade to smooth down
the jagged edges around the doorframe. This will minimize injury when egressing the airplane
through the window.
WARNING
The crash ax/hatchet is a required item for the safe operation of the
airplane. It must be installed and secured in its sheath during all flight
operations. Do not use the crash ax for any other purposes, such as
chopping wood, since it can diminish the effectiveness of the tool.


Section 4
Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG) Normal Procedures
Section 4
Normal Procedures
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................... 4-3

Indicated Airspeeds for Normal Operations.......................................................................... 4-3
NORMAL PROCEDURES CHECKLISTS................................................................................... 4-4

Preflight Inspection................................................................................................................ 4-4
Before Starting Engine .......................................................................................................... 4-6
Starting Cold Engine.............................................................................................................. 4-7
Starting Hot Engine ............................................................................................................... 4-7
Starting Engine with Ground Power Cart.............................................................................. 4-8
After Engine Start .................................................................................................................. 4-8
Crosstie Operation ................................................................................................................. 4-9
SpeedBrake™ Ground Operations ........................................................................................4-9
Autopilot Autotrim Operations..............................................................................................4-9
Ground Operation of Air Conditioning ...............................................................................4-10
Before Taxi ..........................................................................................................................4-10
Taxiing .................................................................................................................................4-10
Before Takeoff.....................................................................................................................4-10
Minor Spark Plug Fouling ...................................................................................................4-11
Normal Takeoff....................................................................................................................4-12
Short Field Takeoff..............................................................................................................4-12
Crosswind Operations..........................................................................................................4-12
Normal Climb ......................................................................................................................4-12
Maximum Performance Climb ............................................................................................4-12
Cruise ...................................................................................................................................4-13
Descent.................................................................................................................................4-13
Expedited Descent ...............................................................................................................4-14
Approach..............................................................................................................................4-14
Before Landing ....................................................................................................................4-14
Normal Landing...................................................................................................................4-14
Short Field Landing .............................................................................................................4-14
Balked Landing....................................................................................................................4-15
After Landing.......................................................................................................................4-15
Shutdown .............................................................................................................................4-15
AMPLIFIED PROCEDURES ......................................................................................................4-16

Preflight Inspection..............................................................................................................4-16
Wing Flaps..................................................................................................................4-16
Aileron Servo Tab.......................................................................................................4-16
Fuel Drains..................................................................................................................4-16
Stall Warning Vane.....................................................................................................4-16
Fuel Vents ...................................................................................................................4-16
Fuel Selector ........................................................................................................................4-17
Fuel Quantity .......................................................................................................................4-17
Static Wicks .........................................................................................................................4-17
Before Starting Engine ........................................................................................................4-18
Fresh Air Vents...........................................................................................................4-18
Three Point Restraints (Seat Belts and Shoulder Harnesses).....................................4-18
Child Restraints ..........................................................................................................4-18


Section 4
Normal Procedures Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG)
Engine Starting.....................................................................................................................4-18
Normal Starting...........................................................................................................4-18
Under Priming.............................................................................................................4-19
Over Priming...............................................................................................................4-19
Battery Recharging ..............................................................................................................4-19
Ground Power Operations ..........................................................................................4-19
Left Battery Inoperative..............................................................................................4-19
Right Battery Inoperative ...........................................................................................4-20
Crosstie Operations Checklist..............................................................................................4-20
Passenger Briefing Card ......................................................................................................4-20
Control Position Versus Wind Component (Table) ............................................................4-21
Taxiing .................................................................................................................................4-21
Before Takeoff .....................................................................................................................4-21
Engine Temperatures ..................................................................................................4-21
Engine Runup .............................................................................................................4-22
Door Seals...................................................................................................................4-22
Oxygen System ...........................................................................................................4-22
Takeoffs ...............................................................................................................................4-22
Normal Takeoff...........................................................................................................4-22
Short Field Takeoff.....................................................................................................4-22
Crosswind Takeoff......................................................................................................4-23
Normal and Maximum Performance Climbs ......................................................................4-23
Best Rate of Climb Speeds .........................................................................................4-23
Cruise Climb ...............................................................................................................4-23
Best Angle of Climb Speeds.......................................................................................4-23
Power Settings ............................................................................................................4-23
Vapor Suppression......................................................................................................4-24
Normal Operations above 18,000 Ft....................................................................................4-24
Cruise ...................................................................................................................................4-24
Flight Planning............................................................................................................4-24
Mixture Settings..........................................................................................................4-24
Control by Turbine Inlet Temperature (TIT) .............................................................4-24
Door Seals...................................................................................................................4-25
Inoperative Door Seal Dump Valve ...........................................................................4-25
Descent.................................................................................................................................4-25
Approach..............................................................................................................................4-26
Glideslope Flight Procedure with Autopilot ..............................................................4-26
Landings...............................................................................................................................4-26
Normal Landings ........................................................................................................4-26
Short Field Landings...................................................................................................4-27
Crosswind Landings ...................................................................................................4-27
Balked Landings .........................................................................................................4-27
Heavy Braking ............................................................................................................4-27
Oxygen System ...........................................................................................................4-27
Shutdown .............................................................................................................................4-27
Stalls.....................................................................................................................................4-28
Practicing Stalls ..........................................................................................................4-28
Loading and Stall Characteristics ...............................................................................4-29
Spins.....................................................................................................................................4-29
Cold Weather Operations ....................................................................................................4-29
Hot Weather Operations ......................................................................................................4-31
Noise Abatement..................................................................................................................4-31


Section 4
Section 4
Normal Procedures
INTRODUCTION
Section 4 contains checklists for normal procedures. As mentioned in Section 3, the owner of this
handbook is encouraged to copy or otherwise tabulate the following normal procedures checklists in
a format that is usable under flight conditions. Plastic laminated pages printed on both sides and
bound together (if more than one sheet) are preferable. The first portion of Section 4 contains
various checklists appropriate for normal operations. The last portion of this section contains an
amplified discussion in a narrative format.
INDICATED AIRSPEEDS FOR NORMAL OPERATIONS

The speeds tabulated below, Figure 4 - 1, provide a general overview for normal operations and are
based on a maximum certificated gross weight of 3600 pounds. At weights less than maximum
certificated gross weight, the indicated airspeeds are different. The pilot should refer to Section 5 for
specific configuration data.
Takeoff Flaps Setting Airspeed

Normal Climb Out Up Position 110 KIAS
Short Field Takeoff to 50 feet Takeoff Position 80 KIAS
Climb To Altitude Flaps Setting Airspeed
Normal (Best Engine Cooling) Up Position 110 KIAS
Best Rate of Climb at Sea Level Up Position 110 KIAS
Best Rate of Climb at 10,000 Feet Up Position 110 KIAS
Best Angle of Climb at Sea Level Up Position 82 KIAS
Best Angle of Climb at 10,000 Feet Up Position 86 KIAS
Approach To Landing Flaps Setting Airspeed
Normal Approach Up Position 105-110 KIAS
Normal Approach Down Position 85-90 KIAS
Short Field Landing Down Position 80 KIAS
Balked Landing (Go Around) Flaps Setting Airspeed
Apply Maximum Power Takeoff Position 90 KIAS
Apply Maximum Power Landing Position 82 KIAS
Maximum Recommended Turbulent Air
Flaps Setting Airspeed
Penetration Speed
Up Position 162 KIAS
3600 lbs. (1633 kg)
Up Position 138 KIAS
2600 lbs. (1179 kg)
Maximum Demonstrated Crosswind Velocity* Flaps Setting Airspeed
Takeoff Takeoff Position 23 Knots
Landing Landing Position 23 Knots
* The maximum demonstrated crosswind velocity assumes normal pilot technique and a wind with a fairly
constant velocity and direction. The maximum demonstrated crosswind component of 23 knots is not considered
limiting. See pages 4-58, 4-81, 4-90, and 5-11 for a discussion of techniques and a computation table.
Figure 4 - 1


Section 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES CHECKLISTS

PREFLIGHT INSPECTION
Figure 4-2 depicts the major inspection points, and the arrow shows the sequence for inspecting each
point. The inspection sequence in Figure 4 - 2 runs in a clockwise direction; however, it does not
matter in which direction the pilot performs the preflight inspection so long as it is systematic. The
inspection should be initiated in the cockpit from the pilot’s side of the airplane.
Figure 4 - 2
Area 1 (The Cabin)

1. Pitot Tube Cover ⎯ REMOVE AND STORE
2. Required Aircraft Documents ⎯ AVAILABLE IN THE AIRPLANE
7. Left Battery Switch ⎯ ON (Press right side of split rocker switch.)
8. Right Battery Switch ⎯ ON (Press right side of split rocker switch.)
9. A/P Trim System Switch in Overhead ⎯ CHECK
10. Flaps ⎯ TAKEOFF THEN LANDING POSITION
11. Trim Tabs ⎯ NEUTRAL
12. Fuel Quantity Indicators ⎯ CHECK FUEL QUANTITY
13. Fuel Annunciation ⎯ NOT DISPLAYED
14. Oxygen System ⎯CHECK IF REQUIRED
14.1. Avionics Switch ⎯ON
14.2. Oxygen System⎯ON, CHECK QUANTITY, ENSURE SYSTEM RETAINS
PRESSURE, VERIFY PROPER OXYGEN FLOW AT ALL BREATHING
DEVICES
14.3. Oxygen System ⎯ OFF


Section 4
14.4. Avionics Switch ⎯ OFF

15. Pitot Heat, Propeller Heat, and Exterior Lights⎯ ON AS REQUIRED, CHECK
OPERATION (See Note and Warning that follows.)
16. Stall Warning Vane⎯ CHECK WARNING HORN
17. Pitot Heat, Propeller Heat, and Exterior Lights ⎯ OFF
18. Left and Right Battery Switches ⎯ OFF
19. Circuit Breakers ⎯ CHECK IN
NOTE
The heated pitot housing should be warm to the touch in a minute or so,
and it should not be operated for more than one to two minutes when the
airplane is in the static condition. For this reason the operational check
must be performed out of sequence.
The pitot heat system includes a relay which will keep it from getting too
hot on the ground. Full pitot heat is only available during flight.
WARNING
The pitot tube can get hot within one minute, and care must be used when
touching the housing. The technique used for testing the hotness of an
iron should be employed.
Area 2 (Left Wing Flap, Trailing Edge and Wing Tip)

1. Flap ⎯ CHECK (Proper extension and security of hardware.)
2. Left Wing Tie-Down ⎯ REMOVE
3. Aileron ⎯ CHECK (Movement, condition, and security of hardware.)
4. Aileron Servo Tab ⎯ CHECK FOR PROPER OPERATION
5. Static Wicks (2) ⎯ CHECK FOR INSTALLATION AND CONDITION
6. Wing Tip ⎯ CHECK (Look for damage; check security of position and anti-collision lights.)
Area 3 (Left Wing Leading Edge, Fuel Tank, and Left Tire)
1. Leading Edge, Leading Edge Tape, Triangular Shaped Leading Edge Tape, and Stall Strips ⎯
CHECK (Look for damage.)
2. Fuel Vent ⎯ CHECK FOR OBSTRUCTIONS
3. Landing Light ⎯ CHECK (Look for lens cracks and check security.)
4. Fuel Quantity ⎯ CHECK VISUALLY AND SECURE FILLER CAP
5. Stall Warning Vane ⎯ CHECK FOR FREE MOVEMENT AND ENSURE NOT BENT
6. Wing Fuel Drain ⎯ CHECK FOR CONTAMINATION (Preceding first flight of the day or
after refueling.)
7. Left Main Strut and Tire ⎯ CHECK (Remove wheel chocks, check tire for proper inflation,
check gear strut for evidence of damage, bushing in place.)
8. Main Fuel Drain ⎯ CHECK FOR CONTAMINATION (Preceding first flight of the day or
after refueling.)
9. Gascolator Access Door and Inspection Panels ⎯ CHECK (Security of hardware.)
Area 4 (Nose Section)

1. Left Windscreen, Cowl, and Exhaust ⎯ CHECK (Condition and security of hardware.)
2. Engine Oil ⎯ CHECK LEVEL (Maintain between 6 and 8 quarts, and fill to 8 quarts for
extended flights.)
3. Engine Oil Filler Cap and Accessory Door ⎯ CAP AND ACCESSORY DOOR SECURE
4. Propeller and Spinner ⎯ CHECK (Look for nicks, security, and evidence of oil leakage.)
5. Alternator Belt ⎯ CHECK (Condition and tension.)
6. Nose Wheel Strut ⎯ CHECK INFLATION (Approximately 3 to 4 inch of chrome strut must
be visible.)

Section 4
7. Nose Tire ⎯ CHECK (Remove wheel chocks, check tire for proper inflation.)
8. Right Windscreen, Cowl, Cabin Air Inlet, and Exhaust ⎯ CHECK (Condition, air inlet duct
connected, no obstructions, and security of hardware.)
Area 5 (Right Wing Leading Edge, Fuel Tank, and Right Tire)
1. Wing Fuel Drain ⎯ CHECK FOR CONTAMINATION (Preceding first flight of the day or
after refueling.)
2. Right Main Strut and Tire ⎯ CHECK (Remove wheel chocks, check tire for proper inflation,
check gear strut for evidence of damage.)
3. Leading Edge, Leading Edge Tape, Triangular Shaped Leading Edge Tape, and Stall Strips ⎯
CHECK (Look for damage.)
4. Fuel Quantity ⎯ CHECK VISUALLY AND SECURE FILLER CAP
5. Fuel Vent ⎯ CHECK FOR OBSTRUCTIONS
6. Pitot Tube ⎯CHECK FOR OBSTRUCTIONS
Area 6 (Right Wing Tip, Trailing Edge, Wing Flap, and Right Fuselage Area)
1. Wing Tip ⎯ CHECK (Look for damage; check security of position and anti-collision lights.)
2. Aileron ⎯ CHECK (Movement, condition, and security of hardware.)
3. Aileron Trim Tab ⎯ CHECK FOR NEUTRAL POSITION
5. Right Wing Tie-Down ⎯ REMOVE
6. Flap ⎯ CHECK (Visually check for proper extension and security of hardware.)
7. Antennas Bottom of Fuselage ⎯ CHECK FOR SECURITY
8. Static Port ⎯ CHECK FOR BLOCKAGE
Area 7 (Tail Section)

1. Leading Edge of Horizontal and Vertical Surfaces ⎯ CHECK (Look for damage.)
2. Leading Edge Tape and Zig Zag Tape ⎯CHECK (Attached and in good condition.)
3. Antennas Vertical Stabilizer ⎯ CHECK FOR SECURITY
4. Rudder/Elevator Hardware ⎯ CHECK (General condition and security.)
5. Rudder Surface ⎯ CHECK (Freedom of movement.)
6. Fixed Elevator Surfaces ⎯ CHECK SECURE, CHECK CLEARANCE TO RUDDER AT
FULL DEFLECTION
7. Elevator Surface ⎯ CHECK (Freedom of movement.)
8. Elevator Trim Tab ⎯ CHECK FOR NEUTRAL POSITION
9. Ventral Fin ⎯ CHECK FOR SECURITY AND LOWER EDGE DAMAGE
11. Tail Tie-Down ⎯ REMOVE
Area 8 (Aft Fuselage and Cabin)

1. Baggage Door ⎯ CHECK CLOSED AND LOCKED
2. Fire Extinguisher ⎯ CHECK FOR PRESENCE AND SECURITY
3. Crash Ax/Hatchet ⎯ CHECK FOR PRESENCE AND SECURITY
BEFORE STARTING ENGINE

1. Preflight Inspection ⎯ COMPLETE
2. Fresh Air Vents ⎯ CLOSED FOR ENGINE START
3. Seat Belts and Shoulder Harnesses ⎯ SECURE (Stow all unused seat belts.)
4. Fuel Selector ⎯ SET TO LEFT OR RIGHT TANK
6. Crosstie Switch ⎯ VERIFY OFF
7. Brakes ⎯ TESTED AND SET


Section 4
8. Circuit Breakers ⎯ CHECK IN

9. Oxygen Masks and Cannulas ⎯ CHECK (Kinks in hose, rips or tears.)
10. Passenger Briefing Card ⎯ ADVISE PASSENGERS TO REVIEW
CAUTION
There is a significant amount of electric current required to start the
engine. For this reason, the avionics master switch must be set to the OFF
position during starting to prevent possible serious damage to the
avionics equipment.
STARTING COLD ENGINE

1. Mixture ⎯ RICH
2. Propeller ⎯ HIGH RPM
3. Vapor Suppression ⎯ OFF
4. Induction Heated Air ⎯ OFF
5. Throttle ⎯ CLOSED, THEN OPEN APPROXIMATELY ONE INCH
6. Left and Right Battery Switches ⎯ ON
7. Anti-Collision/Position Lights ⎯ ON AS REQUIRED
8. Primer Switch ⎯ PUSH IN (Approximately 5 seconds)
9. Throttle ⎯ CLOSED, THEN OPEN 1/8 INCH to 1/4 INCH
10. Check Propeller Area ⎯ CLEAR (Ensure people/equipment are not in the propeller area.)
11. Ignition Switch ⎯ START
12. Throttle ⎯ ADJUST IDLE (900 to 1000 RPM)
13. Oil Pressure ⎯ CHECK (Ensure the oil pressure gauge reads between 30 to 60 psi.)
CAUTION
If no oil pressure is noted within 30 seconds, shut down the engine and investigate
the cause. Operating the engine without oil pressure may result in engine
malfunction or stoppage.
14. Left and Right Alternator Switches ⎯ ON
STARTING HOT ENGINE

3. Throttle ⎯ CLOSED
5. Left and Right Battery Switches ⎯ ON
7. Vapor Suppression ⎯ ON FOR 30 TO 60 SECONDS, THEN OFF
8. Mixture ⎯ RICH
9. Primer Switch ⎯ PUSH IN (Approximately 3 seconds.)
10. Throttle ⎯ CLOSED, THEN OPEN APPROXIMATELY 1/4 INCH
NOTE
It may be necessary to leave the vapor suppression on during starting
(steps 7 – 10) and turn it off approximately one minute after engine start.
NOTE
If the engine is only moderately warm it may be necessary to push the
primer switch for a few seconds before starting.


Section 4
13. Throttle ⎯ IDLE (900 to 1000 RPM)

15. Left and Right Alternator Switches ⎯ ON
STARTING ENGINE WITH GROUND POWER CART
CAUTION
When starting with a ground power cart, the battery conditions cannot be
monitored during the start cycle. Do not start the engine if both batteries are
completely dead. Recharge or replace the batteries if weak or dead; before flight.
1. Left and Right Master Switches ⎯ VERIFY OFF

3. Auxiliary Power ⎯ CONNECTED AND ON (Use a 24 volt DC source.)
5. Aircraft Buses ⎯ VERIFY POWERED UP (Do not turn on any BATT or ALT Switch.)
7. Mixture ⎯ RICH
9. Vapor Suppression ⎯ OFF
11. Throttle ⎯ CLOSED, THEN OPEN APPROXIMATELY ONE INCH
12. Primer Switch ⎯ PUSH IN (Approximately 5 seconds.)
13. Throttle ⎯ CLOSED, THEN OPEN 1/8 INCH TO 1/4 INCH
CAUTION
If the engine starter is engaged for 30 seconds and the engine will not start,
release the starter switch, and allow the starter motor to cool for three to five
minutes. Release the starter as soon as the engine fires. Never engage the starter
while the propeller is still turning.
CAUTION
The master switches should not be turned on until after the engine has started
and the ground power plug has been removed.
16. Throttle ⎯ ADJUST IDLE (900 to 1000 RPM)

18. Auxiliary Power ⎯ SIGNAL LINE SERVICE TO TURN OFF AND DISCONNECT
20. Left and Right Master Switches ⎯ ON
21. Before Moving ⎯ CLEAR (Wait for the line service technician to clear you to move.)
AFTER ENGINE START

1. Avionics Master Switch ⎯ ON
2. Engine Indication Systems ⎯ CHECK
3. Ammeters ⎯ CHECK (Ensure alternator annunciation message is not displayed and the
ammeters are indicating the left and right batteries are charging.)
4. MFD Fuel Remaining ⎯ INITIALIZE
5. Radios and Required Avionics ⎯ SET AS REQUIRED
5.1. COM Radios ⎯ SET


Section 4
5.2. NAV Radios ⎯ SET

5.3. PFD and Backup Altimeters ⎯ SET
5.4. FMS Flight Plan ⎯ LOADED
5.5. Altitude and Heading Bugs ⎯ SET
5.6. Transponder ⎯ SET CODE
6. Oxygen Quantity ⎯ ΝΟΤΕ
CROSSTIE OPERATION
1. Left Master Switch ⎯ OFF (Ensure the essential and avionics buses are energized.)
2. L BUS OFF Annunciation ⎯ DISPLAYED
3. Crosstie Switch ⎯ ON (Ensure the right ammeter is showing charge and load increase for the
left and right buses.)
4. L BUS OFF Annunciation ⎯ CLEARS
6. Left Master Switch ⎯ ON
7. Right Master Switch ⎯ OFF (Ensure the essential and avionics buses are energized.)
8. R BUS OFF Annunciation ⎯ DISPLAYED
9. Crosstie Switch ⎯ ON (Ensure the left ammeter is showing charge and load increase for the
left and right buses.)
10. R BUS OFF Annunciation ⎯ CLEARS
12. Right Master Switch ⎯ ON
TM
SPEEDBRAKE GROUND OPERATIONS
1. SpeedBrake™ Switch ⎯ ON/UP POSITION
2. SPEED BRAKES Annunciation ⎯ DISPLAYED
3. SpeedBrake™ Switch ⎯ OFF/DOWN POSITION (Ensure both SpeedBrakesTM are
retracted.)
4. SPEED BRAKES Annunciation ⎯ CLEARS
NOTE
The SpeedBrake™ system should be functionally checked for proper
operation prior to flight. The independent electrical clutches need to be
synchronized by SpeedBrake™ activation before flight and/or after
SpeedBrake™ circuit breaker pull. If the SpeedBrakes™ remain slightly
extended, this indicates SpeedBrake™ failure and the SpeedBrake™
circuit breaker should be pulled.
AUTOPILOT AUTOTRIM OPERATIONS

1. Autopilot ⎯ ENGAGE
2. Control Stick ⎯ APPLY FORWARD PRESSURE (Ensure trim runs Nose Up after 3
seconds.)
3. Control Stick ⎯ APPLY AFT PRESSURE (Ensure trim runs Nose Down after 3 seconds.)
4. Electric Trim Switch ⎯ MOVE UP AND DOWN, ENSURE AUTOPILOT DISCONNECTS
(Trim should operate in the commanded direction.)
5. Autopilot ⎯ ENGAGE
6. HDG Bug ⎯ SYNC
7. Autopilot ⎯ SELECT HDG MODE
8. HDG Bug ⎯ VERIFY CONTROL STICK MOVEMENT
9. Depress Autopilot Disconnect/Trim Interrupt Switch on Control Stick ⎯ ENSURE
AUTOPILOT DISCONNECTS
10. Trim ⎯ TRIM FOR TAKEOFF (Ensure all controls for freedom of motion and ensure the
autopilot is disconnected.)


Section 4
WARNING
If the Autotrim fails any portion of the above check procedures, do not attempt to
use the autopilot until the fault is corrected.
GROUND OPERATION OF AIR CONDITIONING

1. Control Head ⎯ SELECT MODE AND TEMPERATURE DESIRED
2. Engine RPM ⎯ KEEP RPM AT OR ABOVE 1000 RPM
3. Ammeters ⎯ MONITOR BATTERIES (Decrease electrical load if a discharge is displayed.)
BEFORE TAXI
1. Engine Instruments ⎯ CHECK (Within proper ranges.)
2. Fuel Gauges ⎯ CHECK PROPER INDICATION
3. Ammeters ⎯ CHARGING
4. Wing Flaps ⎯ TAKEOFF, THEN UP (Cruise Position)
5. Radio Clearance ⎯ AS REQUIRED
6. Taxi Light ⎯ AS REQUIRED
7. Brakes ⎯ RELEASE
TAXIING
1. Brakes ⎯ CHECK FOR PROPER OPERATION
2. PFD and Backup Flight Instruments ⎯ CHECK FOR PROPER OPERATION
3. Turn Coordinator (PFD) ⎯ CHECK FOR PROPER OPERATION
4. Directional Gyro (PFD) ⎯ CHECK FOR PROPER OPERATION
BEFORE TAKEOFF (Runup)

1. Runup Position ⎯ MAXIMUM HEADWIND COMPONENT
2. Parking Brake/Foot Brakes ⎯ SET or HOLD
3. Flight Controls ⎯ FREE AND CORRECT
4. Crosstie Switch ⎯ VERIFY OFF
5. Autopilot (A/P) Trim System Switch in Overhead⎯ VERIFY ON
6. Autopilot⎯ VERIFY DISENGAGED
7. Trim Tabs ⎯ SET FOR TAKEOFF
8. PFD and Backup Flight Instruments ⎯ CROSSCHECK AND SET
9. Fuel Selector ⎯ SET OUT OF DETENT (Ensure that 2 seconds after the annunciation
displays the aural warning is played.)
10. Alerts Softkey on PFD ⎯ PRESS (Ensure aural warning stops.)
11. Fuel Selector ⎯ SET TO FULLER TANK
12. Cabin Doors ⎯ CLOSED AND LATCHED (Verify that red annunciation message is not
displayed.)
13. Passenger Side Door Lock ⎯ IN THE UNLOCKED POSITION
14. Engine Runup ⎯ OIL TEMPERATURE CHECK (Above 100°F)
15. Throttle ⎯ 1700 RPM
16. Ignition Switch ⎯ L POSITION (25 RPM drop minimum, 150 RPM drop maximum, EGTs
should rise.)
17. Ignition Switch ⎯ R POSITION (25 RPM drop minimum, 150 RPM drop maximum, 50
RPM difference between L and R, EGTs should stay stable.)
18. Ignition Switch ⎯ R/L POSITION (EGTs should drop.)
19. Propeller ⎯ CHECK OPERATION (Cycle two or three times with a 300 to 500 RPM drop.)
20. Engine Instruments and Ammeter ⎯ CHECK (Within proper ranges.)
21. Batteries ⎯ VERIFY CHARGE CONDITION BEFORE TAKEOFF (At 1700 RPM, the
battery charge rate should be less than 10 amps for each battery.)


Section 4
22. Throttle⎯ VERIFY IDLE, THEN 900 TO 1000 RPM

23. Illuminated Switch Bulb Test ⎯ ALL LAMPS ILLUMINATED
24. Radios ⎯ SET, CROSSCHECK NAV INDICATORS
25. Flight Director ⎯ AS REQUIRED
26. Transponder ⎯ VERIFY CODE
28. SpeedBrake™ Switch ⎯ VERIFY OFF/DOWN POSITION
29. Doors ⎯ LATCHED AND DETENTED
30. PFD Annunciation Window ⎯ ALL MESSAGES ADDRESSED
31. Door Seals ⎯ ON
33. Oxygen System ⎯ ON
34. Mask or Cannula ⎯ DON
35. Flowmeters ⎯ CHECK AND ADJUST TO PLANNED CRUISE ALTITUDE (Ensure that
the internal metering ball moves freely and oxygen is flowing to the delivery devices.)
36. Time ⎯ NOTE
WARNING
The absence of RPM drop when checking magnetos may indicate a
malfunction in the ignition circuit resulting in a hot magneto, i.e., one that
is not grounding properly. Should the propeller be moved by hand (as
during preflight inspection) the engine might start and cause death or
injury. This type of malfunction must be corrected before operating the
engine.
CAUTION
Do not underestimate the importance of pre-takeoff magneto checks.
When operating on single ignition, some RPM drop should always occur.
Normal indications are 25 to 75 RPM and a slight engine roughness as
each magneto is switched off. A drop in excess of 150 RPM may indicate a
faulty magneto or fouled spark plugs.
NOTE
When checking the oxygen flowmeter, the reading is taken at the
midpoint of the ball. Ensure the flowmeter is held vertically when
adjusting flow rate or reading.
MINOR SPARK PLUG FOULING (Minor plug fouling can usually be cleared as follows.)
1. Brakes ⎯ HOLD BRAKES MANUALLY
2. Throttle⎯ 2200 RPM
3. Mixture ⎯ ADJUST FOR MAXIMUM PERFORMANCE (Move towards idle cutoff until
RPM peaks, and hold for 10 seconds. Return mixture to full rich.)
4. Throttle⎯ 1700 RPM
5. Magnetos ⎯ RECHECK (50 RPM difference with a maximum drop of 150 RPM.)
6. Throttle ⎯ IDLE (900 to 1000 RPM)
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine at a speed of more than 2000 RPM longer than
necessary to test engine operations and observe engine instruments.
Proper engine cooling depends on forward speed. Discontinue testing if
temperature or pressure limits are approached.


Section 4
NORMAL TAKEOFF
1. Landing/Taxi Lights ⎯ AS REQUIRED
5. Pitot Heat and Propeller Heat ⎯ AS REQUIRED
6. Throttle ⎯ ADVANCE SLOWLY TO FULL POWER (2600 RPM) (Watch manifold
pressure for indication of overboost.)
7. Elevator Control ⎯ LIFT NOSE AT 75 KIAS
8. Climb Speed ⎯ ACCELERATE TO BEST RATE OF CLIMB SPEED OF 110 KIAS
9. Wing Flaps ⎯ RETRACT (At 400 feet AGL and at or above 95 KIAS.)
SHORT FIELD TAKEOFF (Complete “Before Takeoff” checklist first)

1. Landing/Taxi Lights⎯ AS REQUIRED
3. Brakes ⎯ APPLY
6. Throttle⎯ ADVANCE SLOWLY TO FULL POWER (2600 RPM)
8. Elevator Control ⎯ MAINTAIN LEVEL NOSE ATTITUDE
9. Rotate Speed ⎯ 64 to 75 KIAS (Speed per Figure 5 - 11. 5º nose up pitch attitude.)
10. Climb Speed ⎯ 74 to 84 KIAS (Speed per Figure 5 - 11. Until clear of obstacles.)
NOTE
If usable runway length is adequate, it is preferable to use a rolling start
to begin the takeoff roll as opposed to a standing start at full power.
Otherwise, position the airplane to use all of the runway available.
CROSSWIND OPERATIONS
Crosswind takeoffs and landings require a special technique but not specific procedures and, as such,
do not require a dedicated checklist. Please see the amplified discussion on pages 4-23 and 4-27 for
applicable crosswind techniques.
NOTE
If the cross control method is used during a crosswind approach, the
resulting slight sideslip causes the airspeed to read up to 5 kts higher or
lower, depending on the direction of the sideslip.
NORMAL CLIMB
1. Airspeed ⎯ ACCELERATE TO BEST RATE OF CLIMB SPEED OF 110 KIAS (See cruise
climb discussion of page 4-23.)
2. Power Settings ⎯ ADJUST AS NECESSARY
3. Fuel Selector ⎯ SET TO RIGHT OR LEFT TANK (As appropriate.)
4. Mixture ⎯ FULL RICH ABOVE 85% POWER
6. Vapor Suppression ⎯ ON (Above 18,000 ft.)
MAXIMUM PERFORMANCE CLIMB

1. Airspeed ⎯ 110 KIAS (All altitudes.)
2. Power Settings ⎯ 2600 RPM AND FULL THROTTLE


Section 4
3. Fuel Selector ⎯ SET TO RIGHT OR LEFT TANK (As appropriate.)

6. Vapor Suppression ⎯ ON (Above 18,000 ft.)
CRUISE
1. Throttle ⎯ SET AS APPROPRIATE TO ACHIEVE 85% POWER OR LESS (Refer to the
cruise performance charts.)
2. Propeller ⎯ SET AS APPROPRIATE TO ACHIEVE 85% POWER OR LESS (Refer to the
cruise performance charts.)
3. Mixture ⎯ LEAN AS REQUIRED (Use TIT gauge to set 1625°F or performance charts in
Section 5. Above 65% power, only rich of peak operation is permitted.)
5. Changing Fuel Tanks ⎯ PERFORM STEPS 5.1 AND 5.2.
6. Vapor Suppression ⎯ SET TO ON DURING FUEL TANK CHANGEOVERS
7. Fuel Selector⎯ CHANGE AS REQUIRED (The maximum permitted fuel imbalance is 10
gallons (38 L).)
8. Landing/Taxi Lights⎯ AS REQUIRED
9. Oxygen Quantity ⎯ CHECK PERIODICALLY (Approximately every 20 minutes.)
10. Oxygen Outlet Pressure ⎯ CHECK PERIODICALLY (Approximately every 20 minutes.)
11. Flowmeter or Flow Indicator ⎯ CHECK PERIODICALLY FOR OXYGEN FLOW
(Approximately every 10 minutes.)
12. Altitude Change ⎯ ADJUST FLOW DEVICES TO NEW ALTITUDE
13. Physiological Requirement ⎯ ADJUST FLOW DEVICE TO HIGHER ALTITUDE
NOTE
Do not pull the throttle back to idle without leaning the mixture
appropriately above 18,000 ft (Critical altitude, the engine does not
produce full manifold pressure above the critical altitude). The reduced
air density is causing an over-rich condition at idle, which floods the
engine and can make it quit. If it does quit, it is possible to restart the
engine at any altitude by leaning the mixture. Above 18,000 ft. the
minimum manifold pressure is 15 in. Hg; minimum RPM is 2,200.
NOTE
The vapor suppression must be turned on before changing the selected
fuel tank. After proper engine operations are established, the pump is
turned off (except above 18,000 ft. when the pump stays on).
When changing power, the sequence control usage is important. Monitor

the TIT gauge to avoid exceeding 1750°F limit. To increase power, first
increase the mixture (not necessarily to full rich), then increase RPM with
the propeller control and then increase manifold pressure with the
throttle control. To decrease power, decrease manifold pressure first with
the throttle control and then decrease RPM with the propeller control.
When engine temperatures have stabilized, lean mixture to desired TIT.
WARNING
Continuous overboost operation may damage the engine and require
engine inspection.
DESCENT
1. Fuel Selector ⎯ RIGHT OR LEFT TANK (As appropriate.)
2. Power Settings ⎯ AS REQUIRED
3. Mixture ⎯ AS REQUIRED


Section 4

5. Vapor Suppression ⎯ OFF (Below 18,000 ft.)
6. PFD and Backup Altimeters ⎯ SET
7. Altitude Bug ⎯ SET
EXPEDITED DESCENT
1. Power Setting ⎯ 2400 RPM and approximately 25 INCHES of MANIFOLD PRESSURE
2. SpeedBrakeTM Switch ⎯ ON/UP POSITION
4. SpeedBrakeTM Switch ⎯ OFF/DOWN POSITION (To retract SpeedBrakesTM.)
APPROACH
1. Approach⎯ LOADED INTO FLIGHTPLAN
2. PFD Baro Min ⎯ SET
3. GPS Raim/Map Integrity ⎯ VERIFY
4. PFD OBS/SUSP Softkey ⎯ REVIEW and BRIEF USAGE DURING APPROACH
5. PFD CDI Button ⎯ SELECT NAV SOURCE
6. Nav Aids ⎯TUNED AND IDENTIFIED
7. Approach Course ⎯ SET
8. PFD and Backup Altimeters ⎯ SET
NOTE
Passing FAF, new course may be needed.
BEFORE LANDING
1. Seat Belts and Shoulder Harnesses ⎯ SECURE (Both pilot and passengers.)
3. Fuel Selector⎯ RIGHT OR LEFT TANK (As appropriate.)
6. Autopilot ⎯ DISENGAGED (If applicable.)
NORMAL LANDING
1. Approach Airspeed ⎯ AS REQUIRED FOR CONFIGURATION
Flaps (Cruise Position) ...........................................95 to 100 KIAS
Flaps (Takeoff Position)...........................................90 to 95 KIAS
Flaps (Landing Position) ..........................................85 to 90 KIAS
2. Trim Tabs ⎯ ADJUST AS REQUIRED
3. Touchdown ⎯ MAIN WHEELS FIRST
4. Landing Roll ⎯ GENTLY LOWER NOSE WHEEL
5. Braking ⎯ AS REQUIRED
SHORT FIELD LANDING (Complete “BEFORE LANDING” Checklist first.)

2. Initial Approach Airspeed ⎯ 90 KIAS
3. Minimum Approach Speed ⎯ 73 to 82 KIAS (Per
4. Figure 5 - 35.)
5. Trim Tabs ⎯ ADJUST AS REQUIRED
6. Power ⎯ REDUCE AT THE FLARE POINT
7. Touchdown ⎯ MAIN WHEELS FIRST
8. Landing Roll ⎯ LOWER NOSE WHEEL SMOOTHLY AND QUICKLY


Section 4
9. Braking and Flaps ⎯ APPLY HEAVY BRAKING AND RETRACT FLAPS (Up position.)
BALKED LANDING (Go Around)

1. Throttle ⎯ FULL (At 2600 RPM.)
2. SpeedBrakes™ Switch ⎯ OFF/DOWN POSITION
5. Climb ⎯ POSITIVE (Establish Positive Rate of Climb.)
6. Backup Fuel Pump ⎯ ARM
AFTER LANDING
1. Wing Flaps ⎯ UP (Cruise Position)
2. SpeedBrakes™ Switch ⎯ OFF/DOWN POSITION
3. Door Seal, Pitot Heat, and Propeller Heat ⎯ OFF
4. Transponder ⎯ VERIFY STANDBY/GROUND MODE
6. Time ⎯ NOTE
SHUTDOWN
1. Parking Brake ⎯ SET
2. Throttle ⎯ IDLE (900 RPM)
3. Oxygen System ⎯ OFF
4. ELT ⎯ CHECK NOT ACTIVATED
5. Trim Tabs ⎯ SET TO NEUTRAL
6. Time ⎯ COOLDOWN COMPLETE
7. Avionics Master Switch ⎯ OFF (Ensure shutdown.)
8. Electrical/Environmental Equipment ⎯ OFF
11. Ignition Switch ⎯ OFF (After engine stops.)
12. Anti-Collision/Position Lights ⎯ OFF
CAUTION
Allow the engine to idle at 900 RPM for 5 minutes before shutdown in order to
cool the turbochargers. Taxi time can be counted as cooling time.


Section 4
AMPLIFIED PROCEDURES
PREFLIGHT INSPECTION
The purpose of the preflight inspection is to ascertain that the airplane is physically capable of
completing the intended operation with a high degree of safety. The weather conditions, length of
flight, equipment installed, and daylight conditions, to mention a few, will dictate any special
considerations that should be employed.
For example, in cold weather, the pilot needs to remove even small accumulations of frost or ice
from the wings and control surfaces. Additionally, the hinging and actuating mechanism of each
control surface must be inspected for ice accumulation. If the flight is initiated in or will be
completed at nighttime, the operation of the airplane’s lighting system must be inspected. Flights at
high altitude have special oxygen considerations for the pilot and passengers. Clearly, a pilot must
consider numerous special issues depending on the circumstances and conditions of flight. The
preflight checklist provided in this handbook covers the minimum items that must be considered.
Other items must be included as appropriate, depending on the flight operations and climatic
conditions.
Wing Flaps – Extending the wing flaps as part of the preflight routine permits inspection of the
attachment and actuating hardware. The pilot can also roughly compare that the flaps are equally
extended on each side. The flaps are not designed to serve as a step. Stepping on the flaps places
unnatural loads in excess of their design and can cause damage. If the flaps are extended during the
preflight inspection, it is unlikely that an uninformed passenger will use them as a step.
Aileron Servo Tab – The aileron servo tab on the trailing edge of the left aileron assists in
movement of the aileron. The servo tab is connected to the aileron in a manner that causes the tab to
move in a direction opposite the movement of the aileron. The increased aerodynamic force applied
to the tab helps to move the aileron and reduces the level of required force to the control stick.
During the preflight inspection, it should be noted that movement of the left aileron, up or down,
produces an opposite movement of the servo tab. When the aileron is in the neutral position, the
servo tab should be neutral.
Fuel Drains – The inboard section of each tank contains a fuel drain near the lowest point in each
tank. The fuel drain operates with a typical sampling device and can be opened intermittently for a
small sample or it can be locked open to remove a large quantity of fuel. The accessory door for the
gascolator/fuel strainer is located under the fuselage, on the left side, near the wing saddle. It is a
conventional drain device that operates by pushing up on the valve stem. The access door in this area
must be opened to access the gascolator.
During the preflight inspection, the fuel must be sampled from each drain before flying to check for
the proper grade of fuel, water contamination and fuel impurities. The test must be performed before
the first flight of the day and after each refueling. If the system has water contamination, it will form
as a bubble in the bottom of the collection reservoir while sediment appears as floating specks. If
fuel grades are mixed, the sample will be colorless. If contamination is detected, continue to draw
fuel until the samples are clear. If fuel grades were mixed, the entire fuel system may require
draining. See page 8-6 for an expanded discussion of fuel contamination.
Stall Warning Vane – The stall warning vane located on the leading edge of the left wing should be
checked to ensure freedom of movement and that the vane is not bent or otherwise damaged.
Fuel Vents – The airplane has a fuel vent for each wing tank. The vents are wedge shaped recesses
built into an inspection cover. They are located under each wing approximately five feet inboard
from the wing tip. The vents are installed to ensure that air pressure inside the tank is the same as the
outside atmospheric pressure. The vents should be open and free of dirt, mud, and other types of
clogging substances.


Section 4
FUEL SELECTOR
The fuel system design does not favor the use of one fuel tank over the other. The various checklists
used in this manual specify “Set to Left or Right Tank.” During takeoff and landing operations, it is
recommended that the fuel selector be set to the fuller tank if there are no compelling reasons to do
otherwise. Under low fuel conditions, selecting the fuller tank may provide a more positive fuel
flow, particularly in turbulent air. The vapor suppression must be operated while changing the
selected fuel tank. However, switching the fuel tanks at low altitudes above the ground is normally
not recommended unless there is a compelling reason to do otherwise.
When a tank is selected and the selector is properly seated in its detent, one of two blue dots on the
fuel indicator illuminate to indicate which tank is selected. If a dot is not illuminated, then the
selector handle is not properly seated in the detent. In addition, if the fuel selector is not seated or is
in the OFF position, a red FUEL VALVE indication is displayed on the PFD annunciation window.
FUEL QUANTITY
The Columbia 400 fuel quantity measuring system described on page 7-34 provides a fairly accurate
indication of the onboard fuel. The system has two sensors in each tank, and flat spots in the
indicating system are minimized. Still, the gauges must never be used in place of a visual inspection
of each tank. A raised metal tab is installed in the bottom of each tank, directly below the filler neck,
which limits inadvertent damage to the bottom of the tank from a fuel nozzle.
If the level of the fuel barely covers this tab, the tank contains about 25 gallons (95 L) of fuel. While
this is not a certified fuel level, it does provide the pilot with an approximate indication of fuel
quantity. For example, to carry about 50 gallons (189 L) of fuel on a particular flight, each tank
should be filled to the point that covers these tabs. However, since this level will vary from airplane
to airplane, the best procedure is to establish the precise quantity by having empty tanks filled to the
level of the tabs from a metered fuel supply. For fuel quantities above the level of the tabs, a
measuring stick can be made that indicates precise quantities.
Since the tab is directly below the filler hole, it is suggested that the measuring stick be placed on
these tabs when this procedure is used to determine fuel quantity. Of course, this means that it is not
possible to visually sample levels less than approximately 25 gallons (95 L). However, setting the
sampling device in the tanks at an angle to avoid the tabs will skew indications on the stick. If such a
stick is made, it must be of sufficient length to preclude being dropped into the tank.
Here are a few final suggestions regarding the measuring stick. (1) Marks on the stick should be
etched into the wood or labeled with a paint that is impermeable to aviation fuel. (2) Remember, that
sticking the tanks may not be a precise indication, and a margin for safety should be added. (3) It is a
good idea to make a reference mark at the top of the measuring device that indicates the position of
the top of the filler neck. If the reference mark on the stick goes below the tank neck when it is
inserted in the tank, the measuring stick is resting on the bottom of the tank, rather than on the tab.
STATIC WICKS
The static wicks are designed to discharge accumulated static electricity created by the airplane’s
movement through the air. Because the Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG) cruises at high speeds, the
wicks are the solid type with a carbon interior and a plastic exterior. The static wick can be broken
without obvious exterior indications. To check the wick’s integrity, hold its trailing edge between the
thumb and forefinger, and gently move it left and right about two inches. If the unit flexes at point A
as shown in Figure 4 - 3, the wick is broken and should be replaced.
Figure 4 - 3


Section 4
In some instances, the owners and/or operators prefer to remove the wicks after each flight to
prevent breakage during storage. If the wicks are removed, they must be reinstalled before each
flight. Flight without the wicks can cause the loss of, or problems with communications and
navigation. See Section 7, page 7-53 for more information.
BEFORE STARTING ENGINE

Fresh Air Vents – The fresh air eyeball vents for all unoccupied seats shall be closed when the pilot
is the only person in the airplane. This is because, in the event of an engine fire, all ventilation must
be turned off. Turning off inaccessible fresh air ventilation while attending to the demands of the
emergency makes the situation more difficult.
Three Point Restraints (Seat Belts and Shoulder Harnesses) – The pilot-in-command is usually
diligent about securing his or her restraint device; however, it is important to ensure that each
passenger has their belt properly fastened. The lower body restraints on all seats are adjustable.
However, they may not be similar to airline or automotive restraint devices. A passenger may have
the seat belt fastened but not properly adjusted. See page 7-12 for a detailed discussion. The use of
seat belts is also explained on the Passenger Briefing Card.
Stow the restraint devices on unoccupied seats to prevent fouling during emergency exiting of the
airplane. Unoccupied rear seat restraints should be drawn to the smallest size possible and the male
and female ends of the buckle engaged in the rear seat positions. The front seat passenger restraint
buckle must not be engaged, even if the seat is unoccupied.
Child Restraints – The use of seat belts and child restraint systems (car seats) for children and
infants is somewhat more complicated. The FARs state that a child may be held by an adult who is
occupying an approved seat, provided that the person being held has not reached his or her. second
birthday and does not occupy or use any restraining device. If a restraining device is used, the FARs
require a type approved under one of the following conditions.
1. Seats manufactured to U.S. standards between January 1, 1981, and February 25, 1985 must
bear the label: “This child restraint system conforms to all applicable federal motor vehicle
safety standards.”
2. Seats manufactured to U.S. standards on or after February 26, 1985 must bear two labels: “This
child restraint system conforms to all applicable federal motor vehicle safety standards” and
“This restraint is certified for use in motor vehicles and aircraft” in red lettering.
3. Seats that do not meet the above requirements must bear either a label showing approval of a
foreign government or a label showing that the seat was manufactured under the standards of
the United Nations.
Approved child restraint systems usually limit the maximum child weight and height to 40 lbs. (18
kg) and 40 inches (102 cm), respectively. Placing higher weights in the seat exceeds the intended
design of the child restraint system, and the only alternative is use of a passenger seat restraint.
However, use of the diagonal torso restraint for a small child presents special issues since the
shoulder strap may not fit across the child’s shoulder and upper chest.
For a child under 55 inches (140 cm) tall, The Academy of Pediatrics (AOP) recommends the use of
a lap belt, and to put the shoulder strap behind the child. This is not as protective as an adjustable
lap/shoulder combination would be. In fact, use of the lap belt alone has been associated with a
number of different injuries. According to the AOP, the least desirable alternative is to put the
shoulder strap under one arm.
ENGINE STARTING
Normal Starting – Under normal conditions there should be no problems with starting the engine.
The most common pilot mistake is over priming of the engine. The engine is primed by introducing
fuel to the intake ports. The start should then be initiated immediately. As the engine starts it is


Section 4
important to advance the throttle slowly to maintain the proper fuel-air mixture. Abnormal
atmospheric conditions require special procedures and techniques for starting the airplane. Please
refer to Warm and Cold Weather Operations later in this section, which begins on page 4-29.
Under Priming – If the engine does not start in three or four revolutions of the propeller, the engine
may not be adequately primed. This condition is also characterized by seemingly normal smokeless
start of four or five revolutions of the propeller followed by a sudden stop, as though the mixture
were in idle cutoff. When the engine first starts to quit, hold the primer switch on for a few seconds
until the engine runs smoothly. If this does not work, the cause of the excessively lean mixture after
starting may be related to an assortment of atmospheric conditions rather than improper priming
procedures. Repeat the starting procedure but allow a few extra seconds of priming.
Over Priming – If the engine starts intermittently and is followed by puffs of black smoke, over
priming is the most likely cause. The black smoke means the mixture is too rich and the engine is
burning off the excess fuel. The condition also occurs in hot weather where the decreased air density
causes an excessively rich mixture. If this should happen, ensure that the vapor suppression and
backup fuel pump are off, set the mixture to idle cutoff, advance the throttle to full, and restart the
engine. When the engine starts, advance the mixture to full rich and reduce the throttle setting to
idle.
CAUTION
Over priming can cause a flooded intake resulting in a hydrostatic lock
and subsequent engine malfunction or failure. If the engine is
inadvertently or accidentally over primed, allow all the fuel to drain from
the intake manifold before starting the engine.
BATTERY RECHARGING
Ground Power Operations – A ground power unit can be connected to the airplane in the event the
normal battery system is inoperative or inadequate. An inoperative battery could occur if the master
switches were not secured at the end of the previous flight or in very cold weather. The master
switches must be turned on when using a ground power unit to charge the batteries. The ammeter
must be monitored when recharging the batteries, as damage to the batteries can occur if the voltage
from the ground power unit is too high. The master switches must be turned off before removing the
ground power plug. If the master switches are turned on before the ground power plug is removed,
the cables going to the plug will stay energized. If one, or both, of the batteries is completely dead,
the master relay will not energize for ground power charging. In this case the battery(ies) must be
removed for charging.
CAUTION
The ammeter must be monitored when recharging the batteries, as damage
to the batteries can occur if the voltage from the ground power unit is too
high.
Left Battery Inoperative – If the flip lights are inadvertently left on for an extended period of time,
the left battery will drain. In this event one of two procedures can be used to recharge the battery.
NOTE
When observing the recharging progress of a battery, two things should
be considered. If the ammeter continuously has a high indication with
little or no decrease in the charging amperage, the battery has a short. If
the ammeter continuously indicates zero, the battery has an open cell. In
either event, the battery needs to be replaced.
1. Ground Power Available – The battery can be recharged using a ground power unit when
monitoring the ammeter. This will normally take about 30 minutes. The battery should indicate
five amps or less of current draw before charging operations are suspended.


Section 4
2. Ground Power Not Available – If a ground power unit is not available, the airplane can be
started using the right battery. Turn off the flip light for 15 to 20 minutes. This time is needed
for the battery to bounce back and develop enough charge to energize the left battery relay. If
the flip light has been on for several days or the battery is old, it may not bounce back, and the
battery must be removed from the aircraft and charged withy a battery charger.
Use the normal starting procedures checklist, which includes turning on the right master
switch. It is not necessary to use the crosstie switch to start the airplane. When the starter is
engaged, it will only energize the right starter contactor, since there is no battery power to
energize the left contactor.
Once the engine is running, the crosstie switch must be turned on to charge the left battery.
Check the charge condition of the batteries at 1700 RPM. If the battery charging current is less
than 10 amps for each battery, the batteries are sufficiently charged.
Right Battery Inoperative – It is possible that the right master was not secured and inadvertently
left on. In this case, the right battery would be discharged. The right battery may be charged in the
same manner as the left battery.
CROSSTIE OPERATIONS CHECKLIST

The Crosstie Operations Checklist is performed prior to the Before Taxi Checklist. If the crosstie
system is not operational, there is no point in completing the remaining checklists. In addition,
completing the checklist at this point will limit the time spent in the runup area where other aircraft
are waiting to depart. The checklist is important because it checks the integrity of the crosstie
system. In particular, it verifies the operation of all four diodes (two on the avionics bus and two on
the essential bus), and ensures that these two buses have neither a shorted or open circuit.
PASSENGER BRIEFING CARD

There are a number of items with which the passengers must be familiar. These items can easily be
covered through use of the Passenger Briefing Cards that are included in the airplane as part of the
delivery package. It is recommended that passengers be advised of the briefing cards’ location
before taxiing the airplane. This will provide ample time for the passengers to review the cards
before takeoff. The information contained on the briefing cards is shown below.
1. Seat Belt – Federal Aviation Regulations require each passenger to use the installed restraint
devices during taxi, takeoff, and landing. Use of the three-point restraint system is
accomplished by grasping the male end of the buckle, drawing the lap webbing and diagonal
harness across the lower and upper torso, and inserting it into the female end of the buckle.
There is a distinctive snap when the two parts are properly connected. To release the belt,
press the red button on the female portion of the buckle.
2. Seat Belt and Harness Adjustment – Adjusting two devices in the lap-webbing loop varies
the length of the lap belt. One end of the adjustment loop contains a dowel, and the other has a
small strap. Draw the dowel and strap together to enlarge the lap belt size, and draw them
apart to tighten the lap belt. The upper torso restraints are connected to an inertia reel and no
adjustment is required.
3. Headsets – If there are headsets for the passenger seating positions, their use is
recommended. Comfort is enhanced in terms of noise fatigue, and the use of headsets
facilitates intercom communications. To use the voice-activated microphone, position the
boom mike about one quarter of an inch from the mouth, and speak in a normal voice.
4. Emergency Exit Procedures (Cabin Doors) – In most emergencies, the cabin doors are used
for exiting the airplane. The interior door handles are located near the bottom-aft portion of
the cabin doors. To open a door, pull the handle away from the door and lift up until the
handle is slightly past the horizontal position. There are placards on the interior doors labeled
“Open” and “Closed” with direction arrows.
5. Crash Ax/Hatchet – A crash ax is located under the pilot’s seat for use in the event the
normal cabin and the emergency door releases are inoperable. To use the ax, open the Velcro


Section 4
fastener, and remove the ax from its sheath. It generally works best to strike the corner edge
of the window near the doorframe. Several smart blows to the window area around the
perimeter of the doorframe will remove enough pieces so that the middle portion of the
window can be removed with a few heavy blows. Once the major portion of the window is
removed and if time and circumstances permit, use the ax blade to smooth down the jagged
edges around the doorframe. This will minimize injury when exiting the airplane through the
window.
6. Oxygen System Operation – The pilot will notify you when use of oxygen is required. The
pilot will explain use of the equipment and applicable emergency procedures.
7. No Smoking – There is no smoking permitted in the airplane, no ashtrays are provided for
smoking, and the airplane is not certified as such. It is a violation of Federal Aviation
Regulations to smoke in this airplane.
CONTROL POSITIONS VERSUS WIND COMPONENT

The airplane is stable on the ground. The low wing design minimizes the tipping tendency from
strong winds while taxiing. Still, the proper positioning of control surfaces during taxiing will
improve ground stability in high wind conditions. The following table, Figure 4 - 4, summarizes
control positions that should be maintained for a given wind component.
Wind Component Aileron Position Elevator Position

Left Left Wing Aileron Up Neutral
Quartering Headwind (Move Aileron Control to the Left) Hold Elevator Control in Neutral Position
Right Right Wing Aileron Up Neutral
Quartering Headwind (Move Aileron Control to the Right) Hold Elevator Control in Neutral Position
Left Left Wing Aileron Down Down Elevator
Quartering Tailwind (Move Aileron Control to the Right) (Move Elevator Control Forward)
Right Right Wing Aileron Down Down Elevator
Quartering Tailwind (Move Aileron Control to the Left) (Move Elevator Control Forward)
Figure 4 - 4
TAXIING
The first thing to check during taxiing is the braking system. This should be done a few moments
after the taxi roll is begun. Apply normal braking to verify that both brakes are operational. The
operation of the turn coordinator and directional gyro can be checked during taxiing provided
enough time has elapsed for the instruments to become stable, normally two to three minutes. Make
a few small left and right S-turns, and check the instruments for proper operation.
When taxiing, minimize the use of the brakes. Since the airplane has a free castoring nose wheel,
steering is accomplished with light braking. Avoid the tendency to ride the brakes by making light
steering corrections as required and then allowing the feet to slide off the brakes and the heels to
touch the floor. Avoid taxiing in areas of loose gravel, small rocks, etc., since it can cause abrasion
and damage to the propeller. If it is necessary to taxi in these areas, maintain low propeller speeds. If
taxiing from a hard surface through a small area of gravel, obtain momentum before reaching the
gravel.
The aircraft should never be taxied while the doors are in the full up position. The doors may be
opened six to eight inches during taxi, which can be controlled by grasping the arm rest or looping
the door strap around the arm.
BEFORE TAKEOFF
Engine Temperatures – The control of engine temperatures is an important consideration when
operating the airplane on the ground. The efficient aerodynamic design and closely contoured


Section 4
cowling around the engine maximizes cooling in flight. However, care must be used to preclude
overheating during ground operations. Before starting the engine runup check, be sure the airplane is
aligned for the maximum headwind component. Conversely, when the ambient temperature is low,
time may be needed for temperatures to reach normal operating ranges. Do not attempt to run up the
engine until the oil temperature reaches 100°F (38°C).
Engine Runup – The engine runup is performed at 1700 RPM. To check the operation of the
magnetos, move the ignition switch first to the L position and note the RPM drop. Return the switch
to the R/L position, and then move the switch to the R position to check the RPM drop. Return the
switch to the R/L position. The difference between the magnetos when operated individually cannot
exceed 50 RPM, and the maximum drop on either magneto cannot be greater than 150 RPM.
To check the propeller operation, move the propeller control to the low RPM position for a few
seconds until a 300 to 500 RPM drop is registered on the tachometer. Return the propeller control to
the high RPM position and ensure that engine speed returns to 1700 RPM. Repeat this procedure two
or three times to circulate warm oil into the propeller hub.
While the engine is set to 1700 RPM, check the engine instruments to verify that all indications are
within normal limits.
Check the charge condition of the batteries at 1700 RPM. If the battery charging current is less than
10 amps, for each battery, the batteries are sufficiently charged.
Door Seals – The door seal switch is not turned on until the baggage door and both cabin doors are
latched, usually just before takeoff. If the Door Open annunciation is illuminated and/or the aural
warning is annunciating that the door is open, then one of the doors is not completely closed and the
door seal system will not operate.
Oxygen System – To assure proper operation of the oxygen system, insert a mask into the overhead
distribution manifold. Verify the overhead switch is in the ON position (guard closed.) Verify the
overhead master switches and avionics switch are ON. Select the SYSTEM key on the MFD. Select
the Oxygen key on the SYSTEM page ON, and verify the PFD displays a white advisory indicating
"OXYGEN ON". Open the flowmeter on the oxygen mask and verify steady oxygen flow (flow ball
in the mid-position or greater,) for at least 5 seconds. Verify the PFD does not display a caution
annunciation for low oxygen manifold pressure (OXYGEN PRES), and oxygen outlet pressure
indicates normally.
TAKEOFFS
Normal Takeoff – In all takeoff situations, the primary consideration is to ascertain that the engine
is developing full takeoff power. This is normally checked in the initial phase of the takeoff run. The
engine should operate smoothly and provide normal acceleration. The engine RPM should read 2600
RPM and the manifold pressure should be near anticipated output. Ensure that the engine is not over-
boosting (manifold pressure is at or below 35.5 in. of Hg).
Avoid the tendency to ride the brakes by making light steering corrections as required and then
allowing the feet to slide off the brakes and the heels to touch the floor. For normal takeoffs (not
short field) on surfaces with loose gravel and the like, the rate of throttle advancement should be
slightly less than normal. While this extends the length of the takeoff run somewhat, the technique
permits the airplane to obtain momentum at lower RPM settings, which reduces the potential for
propeller damage. Using this technique ensures that the propeller blows loose gravel and rocks aft of
the propeller blade. Rapid throttle advancement is more likely to draw gravel and rocks into the
propeller blade.
Short Field Takeoff – The three major items of importance in a short field takeoff are developing
maximum takeoff power, maximum acceleration, and utilization of the entire runway available. Be


Section 4
sure the mixture is properly set for takeoff if operating from a high altitude airport. During the
takeoff run, do not raise the nose wheel too soon since this will impede acceleration. Finally, use the
entire runway that is available; that is, initiate the takeoff run at the furthest downwind point
available. Use a rolling start if possible, provided there is adequate usable runway. If a rolling start is
practicable, any necessary mixture adjustment should be made just before initiating the takeoff run.
The flaps are set to the takeoff position. After liftoff, maintain the speed per Figure 5 - 11 until the
airplane is clear of all obstacles. Once past all obstacles, accelerate to the best rate of climb speed
(110 KIAS), and raise the flaps. If no obstacles are present, accelerate the airplane to the best rate of
climb speed, and raise the flaps when at a safe height above the ground.
Crosswind Takeoff – Crosswind takeoffs should be made with takeoff flaps. When the take off run
is initiated, the aileron is fully deflected into the wind. As the airplane accelerates and control
response becomes more positive, the aileron deflection should be reduced as necessary. Accelerate
the airplane to approximately 75 knots, and then quickly lift the airplane off the ground. When
airborne, turn the airplane into the wind as required to maintain alignment over the runway and in
the climb out corridor. Maintain the best angle of climb speed (82 to 86 KIAS) until the airplane is
clear of all obstacles. Once past all obstacles, accelerate to the best rate of climb speed (110 KIAS);
at or above 400 feet AGL, raise the flaps. The maximum demonstrated crosswind component for
takeoff is 23 knots.
NORMAL AND MAXIMUM PERFORMANCE CLIMBS

Best Rate of Climb Speeds – The normal climb speed of the airplane, 110 KIAS, produces the most
altitude gain in a given time period while allowing for proper engine cooling and good forward
visibility. The best rate of climb airspeed is used in situations which require the most altitude gain in
a given time period, such as after takeoff when an initial 2,000 feet or so height above the ground is
desirable as a safety buffer. In another situation, ATC might require the fastest altitude change
possible. The mixture should always be full rich in climbs.
Cruise Climb – Climbing at speeds above 115 KIAS is preferable, particularly when climbing to
higher altitudes, i.e., those that require more than 6,000 feet of altitude change. A 500 FPM rate
climb at cruise power provides better forward visibility and engine cooling. The engine should not
be leaned during climb.
CAUTION
Do not lean the engine during climb.
Best Angle of Climb Speeds – The best angle of climb airspeed (VX) for the airplane is 82 KIAS at
sea level to 86 KIAS at 10,000 feet, with flaps in the up position. The best angle of climb airspeed
produces the maximum altitude change in a given distance and is used in a situation where clearance
of obstructions is required. When using the best angle of climb airspeed, the rate at which the
airplane approaches an obstruction is reduced, which allows more space in which to climb. For
example, if a pilot is approaching the end of a canyon and must gain altitude, the appropriate VX
speed should be used. Variations in the VX speeds from sea level to 10,000 feet are more or less
linear, assuming ISA conditions.
Power Settings – Use maximum continuous power until the airplane reaches a safe altitude above
the ground. Ensure the propeller RPM does not exceed the red line limitation. It is recommended to
use full throttle and 2600 RPM in climb because this setting provides the engine with extra fuel for
cooling at the slower airspeeds. When changing power, the sequence control usage is important. To
decrease power, decrease manifold pressure first with the throttle control and then decrease RPM
with the propeller control. The engine’s turbochargers keep manifold pressure constant from MSL to
approximately 18,000 ft.


Section 4
NOTE
During normal climb operations above 18,000 feet, a minimum engine
condition of 2,200 RPM and 15 in.Hg of manifold air pressure are
required to insure proper turbocharger operation is maintained. If engine
operation below 15 in.Hg of manifold air pressure is necessary, the fuel
mixture must be properly leaned or engine stoppage will result.
WARNING
engine inspection.
Vapor Suppression – The vapor suppression switch must be turned on in the following situations:
• Operations above 18,000 ft.

• If TIT is rising above 1460ºF at full power with the mixture full rich (at any altitude).
Once engine temperatures have stabilized and if the aircraft is below 18,000 ft, the vapor
suppression switch may be turned off.
The vapor suppression switch should also be turned on any time the engine is not running smooth or
it is suspected there is vapor in the lines. Vapor in the lines is most likely to happen in hot weather or
at high altitudes.
NORMAL OPERATIONS ABOVE 18,000 FT

During normal climb, cruise and descent operations above 18,000 ft., a minimum engine condition
of 2200 RPM and 15 in.Hg of manifold air pressure are required to insure proper turbocharger
operation is maintained. If engine operation below 15 in.Hg of manifold air pressure is necessary,
the fuel mixture must be properly leaned or engine stoppage will result.
CRUISE
Flight Planning – Several considerations are necessary in selecting a cruise airspeed, power setting,
and altitude. The primary issues are time, range, and fuel consumption. High cruise speeds shorten
the time en route, but at the expense of decreased range and increased fuel consumption.
Cruising at higher altitudes increases true airspeed and improves fuel consumption, but the time and
fuel used to reach the higher cruise altitude must be considered. Clearly, numerous factors are
weighed to determine what altitude, airspeed, and power settings are optimal for a particular flight.
Section 5 in this manual contains detailed information to assist the pilot in the flight planning
process.
In general, the airplane cruises at 50% to 85% of available power. The maximum recommended
cruise power setting is 85%. The minimum cruise power setting is 40%, but higher power settings
may be required in colder weather to maintain minimum engine temperatures.
Mixture Settings – In cruise flight and cruise climb, care is needed to ensure that engine instrument
indications are maintained within normal operating ranges. After reaching the desired altitude and
engine temperatures stabilize (usually within five minutes), the mixture must be adjusted. The
engine driven fuel pump references deck pressure and adjusts mixture automatically for deck
pressure and altitude effects. The pilot is responsible to lean the mixture in cruise for lower fuel
flow.


Section 4
Control by Turbine Inlet Temperature (TIT) – When leaning the mixture using TIT, the pilot
should use the TIT gauge on the MFD. At power settings below 85% power, starting at full rich
mixture, lean slowly while observing the TIT. When changing the mixture to lean of peak, it is
acceptable to have TIT indications temporarily in the yellow range, but indications must return to the
normal range upon leaning completion. Best power is obtained at 1625ºF. Above 65% power, the
engine must be operated rich of peak to avoid exceeding the TIT limit. Below 65% power the engine
can be leaned past peak and be operated 50ºF lean of peak TIT. Lean of peak operation improves the
efficiency of the airplane and provides about 30ºF lower CHT at the same RPM/MAP combination.
Fuel flow can be used as a reference to judge the resulting power setting, but should not be used for
leaning.
CAUTION
Do not lean the engine when operating above 85% power. At power
settings above 85%, the mixture must be full rich. Do not lean the engine
during climb.
CAUTION
To prevent detonation, when increasing power, enrich mixture, advance
RPM, and adjust throttle setting, in that order. When reducing power,
retard throttle, then adjust RPM and mixture.
CAUTION
When leaning the mixture, it is acceptable to have TIT indications
temporarily in the yellow range to detect peak. Once leaning is complete,
the temperatures are in the normal range.
WARNING
engine inspection.
Door Seals – Normally, the door seal switch remains in the On position for the entire flight. If the
system pressure drops below 12 psi, the air pump will cycle on until pressure is restored. If the pump
runs continuously, it is an indication that a seal is damaged and incapable of holding pressure. In this
situation, the door seal system should not be operated until repairs are made.
Inoperative Door Seal Dump Valve – If the door seal dump valve should fail, the door seal system
can still be operated. However, the door seals must not be turned on until after takeoff and must be
turned off before landing. This procedure ensures rapid egress from the airplane in an emergency
situation. Moreover, opening the doors with the seals inflated can damage the inflatable gaskets. For
more information on the door seals and dump valve refer to page 7-14.
DESCENT
The primary considerations during the descent phase of the flight are to maintain the engine
temperatures within normal indications. The descent from altitude is best performed through gradual
power reductions and gradual enrichment of the mixture. Avoid long descents at low manifold
pressure as the engine can cool excessively and may not accelerate properly when power is
reapplied. If long, rapid descents are made, the speed brakes (if installed) should be deployed rather
than reducing the power significantly.
The fuel pump switch should only be in the “armed” position for takeoff and climb. It should be off
for descent and landing; during very low power operation and improper fuel system setup it may be
possible that the fuel pressure will drop below the 5.5 psi limit at which time the fuel pump will
come on. If this happens, the engine will flood and quit.


Section 4
If power must be reduced for long periods, set the propeller to the minimum low RPM setting, and
adjust manifold pressure as required to maintain the desired descent. If the outside air temperature is
extremely cold, it may be necessary to add drag to the airplane by lowering the flaps so that
additional power is needed to maintain the descent airspeed. Do not permit the cylinder head
temperature to drop below 240°F (116°C) for more than five minutes.
WARNING
During longer descents it is imperative that the pilot occasionally clear
the airplane’s engine by application of partial power. This helps keep the
engine from over cooling and verifies that power is available. If the
engine quits during a glide, there may be no positive instrument
indication or annunciation of this condition, and with power reduced,
there is no aural indication.
APPROACH
On the downwind leg, adjust power to maintain 110 KIAS to 120 KIAS with the flaps retracted.
When opposite the landing point, reduce power, set the flaps to the takeoff position, and reduce
speed to about 90 KIAS. On the base leg, set the flaps to the landing position, and reduce speed to 85
or 90 KIAS. Be prepared to counteract the ballooning tendency which occurs when full flaps are
applied. On final approach, maintain airspeed of 80 to 85 KIAS depending on crosswind condition
and/or landing weight. Reduce the indicated airspeed to 80 knots as the touchdown point is
approached.
Glideslope Flight Procedure with Autopilot – Approach the glideslope intercept point (usually the
OM) with the flaps set to the takeoff position at 100 to 115 KIAS (recommended approach speed in
turbulence is 110 KIAS or greater) and with the aircraft stabilized in altitude hold mode. At the
glideslope intercept, adjust power for the desired airspeed. For best tracking results make power
adjustment in small, smooth increments to maintain desired airspeed. At 200 feet AGL disconnect
the autopilot and continue to manually fly the aircraft to the missed approach point or the decision
height (See Limitations Section). If a missed approach is required, the autopilot may be re-engaged
after the aircraft has been reconfigured for and established in a stabilized climb above 400 feet AGL.
When making ILS approaches in the Columbia aircraft the pilot should plan to intercept the
approach between 100 to 115 KTS. Once established and the glideslope intercept is achieved, the
flaps should be placed in the T.O. position and the aircraft slowed to 100 KTS. At the FAF (final
approach fix), full flaps should be applied and the aircraft slowed to 90 KTS. This technique will
typically require a power setting in excess of 1900 RPM. Power settings resulting in approximately
1800-1850 RPM should be avoided as this propeller speed may intermodulate with the glideslope
reception resulting in continuous minor control stick motion during coupled approaches and
continuous minor glideslope deviation indications during coupled and non-coupled, or hand-flown,
ILS approaches.
LANDINGS
Normal Landings – Landings under normal conditions are performed with the flaps set to the
landing position. The landing approach speed is 85 to 90 KIAS depending on gross weight and wind
conditions. The approach can be made with or without power; however, power should be reduced to
idle before touchdown. The use of forward and sideslips are permitted if required to dissipate excess
altitude. Remember that the slipping maneuver will increase the stall speed of the airplane, and a
margin for safety should be added to the approach airspeed.
CAUTION
Avoid sideslips with full flaps, as there is potential for the aircraft to pitch down
unintentionally.


Section 4
CAUTION
Avoid rapid throttle movement in order to reduce manifold pressure overboost.
Smooth throttle movements allow the turbochargers to keep pace with the engine
operating conditions.
The landing attitude is slightly nose up so that the main gear touches the ground first. After
touchdown, the back-pressure on the elevator should be released slowly so the nose gear gently
touches the ground. Brakes should be applied gently and evenly to both pedals. Avoid skidding the
tires or holding brake pressure for sustained periods.
Short Field Landings – In a short field landing, the important issues are to land just past the
beginning of the runway at minimum speed. The initial approach should be made at 85 to 90 KIAS
and reduced to 80 KIAS when full flaps are applied. A low-power descent, from a slightly longer
than normal final approach, is preferred. It provides more time to set up and establish the proper
descent path. If there is an obstacle, cross over it at the speed indicated in the landing schedule in
Figure 5 - 36 on page 5-41. Maintain a power on approach until just prior to touchdown. Do not
extend the landing flare; rather, allow the airplane to land in a slight nose up attitude on the main
landing gear first. Lower the nose wheel smoothly and quickly, and apply heavy braking. However,
do not skid the tires. Braking response is improved if the flaps are retracted after touchdown.
Crosswind Landings – When landing in a strong crosswind, use a slightly higher than normal
approach speed, and avoid the use of landing flaps unless required because of runway length. If
practicable, use an 85 to 90 KIAS approach speed with the flaps in the takeoff position. A power
descent, from a slightly longer than normal final approach, is preferred. It provides more time to set
up and establish the proper crosswind compensation. Maintain runway alignment either with a crab
into the wind, a gentle forward slip (upwind wing down), or a combination of both. Touch down on
the upwind main gear first by holding aileron into the wind. As the airplane decelerates, increase the
aileron deflection. Apply braking as required. Raising the flaps after landing will reduce the lateral
movement caused by the wind and also improves braking. The maximum demonstrated crosswind
component for landing is 23 knots.
Sideslipping the airplane will cause the airspeed to read up to 5 kts higher or lower, depending on
the direction of the sideslip. This occurs because the static air source for the airplane is only on one
side of the fuselage.
Balked Landings – In a balked landing or a go-around, the primary concerns are to maximize
power, minimize drag, and establish a climb. Initiate a go-around by the immediate but smooth full
application of power. If the flaps are in the landing position, reduce them to the takeoff positions
once a positive rate of climb is established at 80 KIAS. Increase speed to VY. When the airplane is a
safe distance above the surface and at 106 KIAS or higher, arm the backup fuel pump and retract the
flaps to the up position.
Heavy Braking – After heavy braking, especially when the airplane is near gross weight, allow the
brakes to cool for about 20 minutes before additional heavy braking. The brakes may overheat if
there is repeated heavy braking without adequate cooling time.
Oxygen System – After landing, select the Oxygen system OFF, and verify the valve closed by
leaving a mask inserted into the overhead outlet, releasing the outlet pressure. If oxygen continues to
flow after 5 seconds, the oxygen valve has failed to close.
SHUTDOWN
The engine should be idled at 900 RPM for five minutes minimum after landing (part of this may be
taxi time) in order to give the turbochargers time to cool down while oil is still circulated to the
bearings. If the engine is shutdown hot, the oil left in the turbochargers will be heated to the
temperature of the turbochargers (in excess of 1000ºF) and cannot properly lubricate. If engine RPM


Section 4
must be raised above 1200 RPM during the cool down period, the five minute cool down period
must be restarted.
STALLS
The stall characteristics of the airplane are influenced by the stall strips and the leading edge tape on
the wings and on the horizontal surface of the tail. If there is any damage to the stall strips or the
leading edge tape, do not attempt to stall the airplane.
Airplanes equipped with flat triangular leading edge tape on the wings and/or zig zag tape on the
bottom surface of the horizontal tail will have improved stall characteristics at all flap settings. The
triangular tape influences the boundary layer at high angles of attack. The zig zag tape influences
elevator authority at large elevator up deflections.
Practicing Stalls – Stalls and slow flight should be practiced at safe altitudes to allow for recovery.
Any of these maneuvers should be practiced at an altitude in excess of 6,000 feet above ground
level.
As stall attitude is approached, be alert. Take prompt corrective action to avoid the stall or if you are
practicing stalls, react the moment the stall buffet occurs. In addition the following is recommended:
1. Do not carry passengers.
2. Be certain that the aircraft’s center of gravity is as far forward as possible without
exceeding the approved flight envelope.
3. Be certain that both the student pilot and instructor pilot have a full set of operable
controls including toe brakes.
4. Conduct such practice at altitudes in excess of 6,000 ft above ground level.
5. Air conditioning and other nonessential electrical systems should be turned off to prevent
battery discharge during low engine RPM operations.
6. Increased fresh air ventilation may be needed to ensure pilot comfort at the lower
airspeeds during slow flight or stalls practice.
For unaccelerated stalls (a speed decrease of one knot/second or less), the stall recovery should be
initiated at the first indication of the stall or the so-called “break” that occurs while in the nose high
pitch position. A drop in attitude that cannot be controlled or maintained with the elevator control
normally indicates this break. The maximum altitude loss during power off stalls is approximately
300 ft. to 400 ft.
There are fairly benign stall characteristics when the airplane is loaded with a forward CG. In most
cases, there is not a discernable break even though the control stick is in the full back position. In
this situation, after two seconds of full aft stick application, stall recovery should be initiated. To
recover from a stall, simultaneously release back-pressure, and apply full power; then level the
wings with the coordinated application of rudder and aileron.
Accelerated stalls can occur at higher-than-normal airspeeds due to abrupt and/or excessive control
applications. These stalls may occur in steep turns, pull-ups, or other abrupt changes in flight path.
Accelerated stalls usually are more severe than unaccelerated stalls and are often unexpected
because they occur at higher-than-expected airspeeds. The recovery from accelerated stalls (a speed
change of three to five knots/second) is essentially the same as unaccelerated stalls. The primary
difference is the indicated stall speed is usually higher and the airplane’s attitude may be lower than
normal stalling attitudes.
Stalling speeds, of course, are controlled by flap settings, center of gravity location, gross weight,
and the rate of change in angle of attack. A microswitch in the left wing, which sounds an aural
warning, is actuated when the critical angle of attack is approached. Stall speed data at various
configurations are detailed on page 5-7.


Section 4
Loading and Stall Characteristics – The center of gravity location and lateral fuel imbalance
affects the airplane’s stall handling characteristics. It was noted above that stall characteristics are
docile with a forward CG. However, as the center of gravity moves aft, the stall handling
characteristics, in terms of lateral stability, will deteriorate. On the Columbia 400, it is particularly
noticeable at higher power settings with flaps in the landing position. Lateral loading is also an issue,
particularly with an aft CG. When the airplane is at the maximum permitted fuel imbalance of 10
gallons, stall-handling characteristics are degraded.
The loading of the airplane is an important consideration since, for example, most checkouts are
performed with two pilots and no baggage, which results in a forward CG and fairly benign stall
characteristics. It is recommended, during the checkout and indoctrination phase for the Columbia
400 (LC41-550FG), that the pilot investigates stall performance at near gross weight with a CG
towards the aft limit of the envelope. This training, of course, should be under the supervision of a
qualified and certificated flight instructor.
SPINS
Spins may be dangerous and are prohibited in Columbia aircraft.
Spins are preceded by a stall. A prompt and decisive stall recovery protects against inadvertent spins.
Should a spin be encountered inadvertently, spin recovery should be initiated immediately.
This airplane is equipped with a stall warning device which gives advance aural warning of
impending stalls. Do not operate this airplane with this system and device not in full operational
condition.
The airplane, as certified by the Federal Aviation Administration, will recover from a one-turn spin
at all weight and CG combinations in the approved weight and balance envelope. Recovery may
require up to one additional turn with normal use of controls for recovery: power idle, rudder against
the spin, elevator forward, and ailerons against the spin. If the flaps are extended, they should be
retracted as soon as possible to avoid exceeding the flap speed limit during recovery. When rotation
stops, the airplane will be in a steep nose down attitude. Pulling out of the dive will produce 2 to 3
g’s and airspeeds up to 160 KIAS.
WARNING
Recovery from a spin may require up to one additional turn with normal
use of controls for recovery: power idle, rudder against the spin, elevator
forward, and ailerons against the spin. If the flaps are extended, they
should be retracted as soon as possible to avoid exceeding the flap speed
limit during recovery.
COLD WEATHER OPERATIONS

Engine starting during cold weather is generally more difficult than during normal temperature
conditions. These conditions, commonly referred to as “cold soaking,” causes the oil to become
more viscous or thicker. Cold weather also impairs the operation of the batteries. The thick oil, in
combination with decreased battery effectiveness, makes it more difficult for the starter to crank the
engine. At low temperatures, aviation gasoline does not vaporize readily, further complicating the
starting procedure. False starting (failure to continue running after starting) often results in the
formation of moisture on spark plugs due to condensation. This moisture can freeze and must be
eliminated either by applying heat to the engine or removing and cleaning the spark plugs. Cold
starting can be improved if the primer switch is kept depressed during engine start or by arming the
backup fuel pump, which turns on high boost until the engine is running.
CAUTION
Superficial application of preheat to a cold-soaked engine can cause
damage to the engine since it may permit starting but will not warm the


Section 4
oil sufficiently for proper lubrication of the engine parts. The amount of
damage will vary and may not be evident for several hours of operation.
In other situations, a problem may occur during or just after takeoff
when full power is applied.
The use of a preheater is required to facilitate starting during cold weather and is required when the
engine has been cold soaked at temperatures of 20°F (-7°C) or below for more than two hours. Be
sure to use a high volume hot air heater. Small electric heaters that are inserted into the cowling
opening do not appreciably warm the oil and may result in superficial preheating.
Apply the hot air primarily to the oil sump, filter, and cooler area for 15 to 30 minutes, and turn the
propeller by hand through six to eight revolutions at 5 to 10 minute intervals. Periodically feel the
top of the engine, and when some warmth is noted, apply heat directly to the upper portion of the
engine for five minutes to heat the fuel lines and cylinders. This will ensure proper vaporization of
the fuel when the engine is started. Occasionally transfer the source of heat from the sump to the
upper part of the engine. Start the engine immediately after completing the preheating process. Since
the engine is warm, use the normal starting procedures.
WARNING
Failure to properly pre-heat a cold soaked engine could result in oil
congealing within the engine, oil hoses, and oil cooler with subsequent loss
of oil pressure, possible internal damage to the engine and subsequent
engine failure.
CAUTION
Do not leave engine mounted preheaters on for more than 24 hours prior
to flight. Continuous operation of engine mounted preheaters may result
in aggressive corrosive attack to the engine internally.
WARNING
To prevent the possibility of serious injury or death, always treat the
propeller as though the ignition switch is set to the ON position. Before
turning the propeller by hand, use the following procedures. Verify the
magnetos switch is set to off, the throttle is closed, and the mixture is set
to idle cutoff. It is recommended the airplane be chocked, tied down, with
the pilot’s cabin door open to allow easy access to the engine controls.
After starting the engine, set the idle to 1000 RPM or less until an increase in oil temperature is
noted. Since the oil in the oil pressure gauge line may be congealed, as much as 30 seconds may
elapse before oil pressure is indicated. If pressure is not indicated within one minute, shut the engine
down and determine the cause. Monitor oil pressure closely, and watch for sudden increases or
decreases in oil pressure. If necessary, reduce power below 1000 RPM to maintain oil pressure
below 100 psi. If the oil pressure drops suddenly to below 30 psi, shut the engine down, and inspect
the lubricating system. If no damage or leaks are noted, preheat the engine for an additional 10 to 15
minutes.
Before takeoff, when performing the runup check, it may be necessary to incrementally increase
engine RPM to prevent oil pressure from exceeding 100 psi. At 1700 RPM, adjust the propeller
control to the full decrease position until minimum RPM is observed. Repeat this procedure three or
four times to circulate warm oil into the propeller dome. Check magnetos and other items in the
normal manner. When the oil temperature has reached 100°F and oil pressure does not exceed 60 psi
at 2500 RPM, the engine has warmed sufficiently to accept full rated power. During takeoff and
climb, the fuel flow may be high; however, this is normal and desirable since the engine will develop
more horsepower in the substandard ambient temperatures.


Section 4
NOTE
In cold weather below freezing, ensure engine oil viscosity is SAE 30,
10W30, 15W50, or 20W50. In case of temporary cold weather,
consideration should be given to hangaring the airplane between flights.
HOT WEATHER OPERATIONS

Flight operations during hot weather usually present few problems. It is unlikely that ambient
temperatures at the selected cruising altitude will be high enough to cause problems. The airplane
design provides good air circulation under normal flight cruise conditions. However, there are some
instances where abnormally high ambient temperatures need special attention. These are:
1. Starting a hot engine
2. Ground operations under high ambient temperature conditions
3. Takeoff and initial climb out.
After a hot engine is stopped, the temperature of its various components begins to stabilize. Engine
parts with good airflow will cool faster. In some areas, where conduction is high and circulation is
low, certain engine parts will increase in temperature. In particular, the fuel injection components
(especially the fuel injection pump) will become heat-soaked and may cause the fuel in the system to
become vaporized.
During subsequent starting attempts the fuel pump will be pumping a combination of fuel and fuel
vapor. Until the entire system is filled with liquid fuel, difficult starting and unstable engine
operations can normally be expected. To correct this problem, set the fuel selector to either tank,
close the throttle, set the mixture to idle cutoff, and operate the primer for approximately 3 seconds;
proceed with normal starting procedures. It may be necessary to leave the vapor suppression on
during starting and turn it off approximately one minute after engine start.
Ground operations during high ambient temperature conditions should be kept to a minimum. In
situations which involve takeoff delays, or when performing the Before Takeoff Checklist, it is
imperative that the airplane is pointed into the wind. During climb out, it may be necessary to climb
at a slightly higher than normal airspeed and turn the vapor suppression on. Be sure the mixture is
set properly to full rich, and do not operate at maximum power for any longer than necessary.
Temperatures should be closely monitored and sufficient airspeed maintained to provide cooling of
the engine.
NOTE
Heat soaking is usually the highest between 30 minutes and one hour
after shutdown. At some point after the first hour the unit will stabilize,
though it may take as long as two or three hours (total time from
shutdown) depending on wind, temperature, and the airplane’s
orientation (upwind or downwind) when it was parked. Restarting
attempts will be most difficult in the period 30 minutes to one hour after
shutdown.
NOISE ABATEMENT
Many general aviation pilots believe that noise abatement is an issue reserved for the larger transport
type airplanes. While larger airplanes clearly generate a greater decibel level, the pilot operating a
small single or multiengine propeller driven airplane should, within the limits of safe operations, do
all that is possible to mitigate the impact of noise on the environment. In some instances, the noise
levels of small airplanes operating at smaller general aviation airfields are more noticeable. This is
because at larger airports with frequent large airplane activity, there is an expectation of airplane
ambient noise.
The general aviation pilot can enhance the opinion of the general public by demonstrating a concern
for the environment in terms of noise pollution. To this end, common sense and courteousness


Section 4
should be used as basic guidelines. Part 91 of the Federal Air Regulations (FARs) permit an altitude
of 1,000 feet above the highest obstacle over congested areas. However, an altitude of 2,000, where
practicable and within the limits of safety, should be used. Similarly, during the departure and
approach phases of the flight, avoid prolonged flight at lower heights above the ground. At airports
where there are established noise abatement procedures in the takeoff corridor, the short field takeoff
procedure should be used. This is a courteous thing to do even though the noise abatement procedure
might be applicable only to turbine-powered aircraft. The certificated level for the Columbia 400
(LC41-550FG) at 3600 lbs. (1633 kg) gross weight is 81.5 dB(A). The FAA has made no
determination that these noise levels are acceptable or unacceptable for operations at any airport.


Section 5
Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG) Performance
Section 5
Performance
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................... 5-3

Airspeed Calibration (Flaps Up Position) ...................................................................................... 5-4
Airspeed Calibration (Flaps Takeoff Position) .............................................................................. 5-4
Airspeed Calibration (Flaps Landing Position).............................................................................. 5-5
Equivalent Airspeed Calibration 12,000 ft..................................................................................... 5-5
Equivalent Airspeed Calibration 18,000 ft..................................................................................... 5-6
Temperature Conversion................................................................................................................. 5-7
Stall Speeds ..................................................................................................................................... 5-7
Stalling Speeds................................................................................................................................ 5-8
SpeedBrakes™................................................................................................................................ 5-8
Crosswind, Headwind, and Tailwind Component.......................................................................... 5-8
Short Field Takeoff Distance (12º - Takeoff Flaps).....................................................................5-11
Short Field Takeoff Speed Schedule ............................................................................................5-13
Maximum Rate of Climb (Without Flat Triangular Leading Edge Tape on the Wings).............5-14
Maximum Rate of Climb (With Flat Triangular Leading Edge Tape on the Wings)..................5-15
Time, Fuel, and Distance to Climb (No Flat Triangular Leading Edge Tape) ............................5-16
Time, Fuel, and Distance to Climb (With Flat Triangular Leading Edge Tape) .........................5-17
Cruise Performance Overview......................................................................................................5-18
Cruise Performance Sea Level Pressure Altitude.........................................................................5-19
Cruise Performance 2000 Ft Pressure Altitude ............................................................................5-20
Cruise Performance 10000 Ft Pressure Altitude ..........................................................................5-24
Lean of Peak Engine Operation....................................................................................................5-33
Range Profile ................................................................................................................................5-34
Endurance Profile..........................................................................................................................5-35
Holding Considerations ................................................................................................................5-36
Time, Fuel, and Distance for Cruise Descend..............................................................................5-37
Short Field Landing Distance (40º - Landing Flaps)....................................................................5-39
Landing Speed Schedule...............................................................................................................5-41
Sample Problem ............................................................................................................................5-41
Oxygen System Duration Charts ..................................................................................................5-43
A4 Flowmeter with Cannula or Masks.......................................................................5-43
Automatic Climate Control System (ACCS) ...............................................................................5-43


Section 5
Performance Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG)


Section 5
INTRODUCTION
The performance charts and graphs on the following pages are designed to assist the pilot in
determining specific performance characteristics in all phases of flight operations. These phases
include takeoff, climb, cruise, descent, and landing. The data in these charts were determined
through actual flight tests of the airplane. At the time of the tests, the airplane and engine were in
good condition and normal piloting skills were employed.
There may be slight variations between actual results and those specified in the tables and graphs.
The condition of the airplane, as well as runway condition, air turbulence, and pilot techniques, will
influence actual results. Fuel consumption assumes proper leaning of the mixture and control of the
power settings. The combined effect of these variables may produce differences as great as 10%.
The pilot must apply an appropriate margin of safety in terms of estimated fuel consumption and
other performance aspects, such as takeoff and landing. Fuel endurance data include a 45-minute
reserve at the specified cruise power setting. When it is appropriate, the use of a table or graph is
explained or an example is shown on the graph.
When using the tables that follow, some interpolation may be required. If circumstances do not
permit interpolation, then use tabulations that are more conservative. The climb and descent charts
are based on sea level, and some minor subtraction is required for altitudes above sea level.
AIRSPEED CALIBRATION
KIAS ERROR KCAS

Less than 70 +1 Less than 71
71 to 112 +2 73 to 114
113 to 154 +3 116 to 157
155 to 200 +4 159 to 204
Greater than 200 +5 Greater than 205
Figure 5 - 1


Section 5
Airspeed Calibration – Normal and Alternate Static Source

Flaps – Up Position (0°)
250
240
Example: 157 KIAS is equal to 152 KCAS
230
220
when using the alternate static source.
210
200
Knots Indicated Airspeed (KIAS)
190
180 Alternate Static Source
170
160
150
140 Normal Static Source
130
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250
Knots Calibrated Airspeed (KCAS)
Figure 5 - 2

Flaps – Takeoff Position (12°)
140
Example: 81 KCAS is equal to 77 KIAS

130 when using the alternate static source.
120
110
100
Normal Static Source
90
70
60
50
50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140
Figure 5 - 3


Section 5

Flaps – Landing Position (40°)
130
Example: 70 KIAS is equal to 71 KCAS

120 when using the normal static source.
110
100
90 Normal Static Source
80
60
50
50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
Figure 5 - 4
Equivalent Airspeed Calibration

12,000 ft
270
260
250
240
230
220
210
200
190
180
170
160
150
140
140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270
Knots Equivalent Airspeed (KEAS)
Figure 5 - 5


Section 5
Equivalent Airspeed Calibration

18,000 ft
270
260
250
240
230
220
210
200
190
180
170
160
150
140
140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270
Knots Equivalent Airspeed (KEAS)
Figure 5 - 6


Section 5
TEMPERATURE CONVERSION
TEMPERATURE CONVERSION
50
40
30
20
10
CELSIUS
0
--40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
-10
-20
-30
-40
FAHRENHEIT
Figure 5 - 7
STALL SPEEDS
Figure 5 - 8 shows the stalling speed of the airplane for various flap settings and angles of bank. To
provide a factor of safety, the tabulated speeds are established using maximum gross weight and the
most forward center of gravity (CG), i.e., 3600 pounds with the CG located 108.8 inches from the
datum. This configuration will produce a higher stalling speed when compared with the speed that
would result from a more rearward CG or a lesser gross weight at the same CG. While an aft CG
lowers the stalling speed of the airplane, the benign stalling characteristics attendant with a forward
CG are noticeably diminished. Please see stall discussion on page 4-28. The maximum altitude loss
during power off stalls is about 500 feet. Nose down attitude change during stall recovery is


Section 5
generally less than 5° but may be up to 15°. Example: Using the table below, stall speeds of 64
KIAS and 65 KCAS are indicated for 30° of bank with landing flaps.
STALLING SPEEDS
ANGLE OF BANK
CONDITIONS
(Most Forward Center of Gravity – Power Off – Coordinated Flight)
Weight 0° 30° 45° 60°
Flap Setting KIAS KCAS KIAS KCAS KIAS KCAS KIAS KCAS
Flaps - Cruise 72 73* 73 74* 76 77* 78 79* 85 85* 87 87* 101 102* 103 104*
3600 lbs.
(1633 kg) Flaps - Takeoff 65 67* 66 68* 70 72* 71 73* 77 79* 79 81* 92 95* 94 97*
Flaps - Landing 59 60* 60 61* 64 65* 65 66* 70 71* 72 73* 83 84* 85 86*
* Flat Triangular leading edge tape applied to the wings.

Figure 5 - 8
SPEEDBRAKES™
When SpeedBrakes™ are installed it is important to be aware of the following performance changes
that may result when the speed brakes are deployed.
1. During takeoff with the SpeedBrakes™ inadvertently deployed, expect an extended takeoff
roll and reduction in rate of climb until the SpeedBrakes™ are retracted.
2. During cruise flight with the SpeedBrakes™ deployed, expect the cruise speed and range to be
reduced 20%.
3. In the unlikely event of one SpeedBrake™ cartridge deploying while the other remains
retracted, a maximum of 1/4 to 1/3 of corrective aileron travel, and up to 20 lbs. of additional
rudder pressure are required for coordinated flight from stall through VNE. Indication of this
condition will be noted by an annunciation message with the SpeedBrakes™ switch ON.
4. Deployed SpeedBrakes™ have minor to no effect on stall speed and stall characteristics.


Section 5
CROSSWIND, HEADWIND, AND TAILWIND COMPONENT
Off Runway Centerline

10º 20º 30º 40º 50º 60º 70º 80º
Degrees Wind Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component
in knots of in knots of in knots of in knots of in knots of in knots of in knots of in knots of
Headwind or
Headwind or
Headwind or
Headwind or
Headwind or
Headwind or
Headwind or
Headwind or
Crosswind
Crosswind
Crosswind
Crosswind
Crosswind
Crosswind
Crosswind
Crosswind
Tailwind
Tailwind
Tailwind
Tailwind
Tailwind
Tailwind
Tailwind
Tailwind
5 1 5 2 5 2 4 3 4 4 3 4 3 5 2 5 1
10 2 10 3 9 5 9 6 8 8 6 9 5 9 3 10 2
WIND VELOCITY
15 3 15 5 14 7 13 10 11 11 10 13 8 14 5 15 3
KNOTS
20 3 20 7 19 10 17 13 15 15 13 17 10 19 7 20 3
25 4 25 9 23 12 22 16 19 19 16 22 13 23 9 25 4
30 5 30 10 28 15 26 19 23 23 19 26 15 28 10 30 5
35 6 34 12 33 17 30 22 27 27 22 30 18 33 12 34 6
40 7 39 14 38 20 35 26 31 31 26 35 20 38 14 39 7
This table is used to determine the headwind, crosswind, or tailwind component. For example, a 15-knot wind,
55° off the runway centerline, has a headwind component of 9 knots and a crosswind component of 12 knots.
For tailwind components, apply the number of degrees the tailwind is off the centerline and read the tailwind
component in the headwind/tailwind column. A 20-knot tailwind, 60º off the downwind runway centerline, has
a tailwind component of 10 knots and a crosswind component of 17 knots.
Figure 5 - 9


Section 5
R050005 Initial Issue of Manual: December 9, 2005


Section 5
SHORT FIELD TAKEOFF DISTANCE (12º - TAKEOFF FLAPS)
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS EXAMPLE

Power Takeoff Power Set Before Brake Release OAT 25°C
Flaps 12° (Takeoff position) Pressure Altitude (PA) 4000 ft
Runway Paved, Level, Dry Surface Takeoff Weight 3500 lbs
Takeoff Speed See Speed Schedule in Figure 5 - 11. Headwind Component 10 Knots
Ground Roll = 1400 ft (427 m)
50 ft Obstacle = 2050 ft (625 m)
Runway Slope Correction: Add 1% to ground roll for every 0.1° (0.2%) of uphill slope. For operation on a known level, smooth,
mowed grass runway, which is either wet or dry but does not include standing water, the ground roll distance obtained from this
takeoff performance chart must be multiplied by a factor of 1.3 to obtain the correct field length. In the above example, the ground
roll distance would be 1.3 x 1400 ft = 1820 ft (555 m). The total distance to clear a 50-ft obstacle would be 2470 ft (753 m) in this
instance.
Figure 5 - 10


Section 5
Section 5
SHORT FIELD TAKEOFF SPEED SCHEDULE

The following chart should be used in conjunction with the takeoff distance chart in Figure 5 - 10 to
determine the proper takeoff speed based on aircraft weight.
Short Field Takeoff Speed Schedule

90
85
80
75
Speed, KIAS
Speed at 50 ft. obstacle
70
65
60
Speed at Rotation
55
50
2800 2900 3000 3100 3200 3300 3400 3500 3600 3700
Takeoff Weight, lb.
Figure 5 - 11


Section 5
MAXIMUM RATE OF CLIMB (Without Flat Triangular Leading Edge Tape On The
Wings
RATE OF CLIMB RATE OF CLIMB RATE OF CLIMB
(FT/MIN) (FT/MIN) (FT/MIN)
Pressure 3000 lb (1361 kg) 3300 lb (1497 kg) 3600 lb (1633 kg)
Altitude 106 KIAS 108 KIAS 110 KIAS
(Feet)
ISA ISA ISA ISA ISA ISA
ISA ISA ISA
-20 C +30 C -20 C +30 C -20 C +30 C
0 1920 1635 1230 1780 1515 1145 1645 1400 1055
1000 1920 1635 1230 1785 1515 1145 1645 1400 1055
2000 1925 1635 1235 1785 1515 1150 1650 1400 1060
3000 1925 1635 1235 1785 1515 1150 1650 1400 1060
4000 1925 1635 1230 1785 1515 1147 1650 1400 1060
5000 1930 1635 1230 1790 1515 1145 1650 1400 1055
6000 1930 1635 1225 1790 1515 1143 1652 1400 1055
7000 1930 1635 1225 1790 1515 1141 1655 1400 1055
8000 1935 1635 1220 1795 1515 1140 1655 1400 1050
9000 1935 1635 1220 1795 1515 1140 1655 1400 1050
10000 1935 1635 1220 1795 1515 1135 1655 1400 1050
11000 1940 1635 1215 1800 1515 1135 1660 1400 1045
12000 1940 1635 1215 1800 1517 1132 1660 1400 1045
13000 1940 1635 1210 1790 1506 1120 1650 1390 1035
14000 1945 1635 1210 1780 1495 1110 1640 1380 1025
15000 1945 1635 1210 1770 1485 1095 1630 1370 1015
16000 1905 1594 1170 1740 1460 1070 1610 1345 990
17000 1865 1555 1135 1715 1435 1050 1585 1325 970
18000 1825 1515 1100 1690 1410 1025 1560 1300 945
19000 1770 1465 1050 1640 1360 980 1515 1255 905
20000 1715 1415 1005 1590 1315 935 1470 1215 865
21000 1665 1365 955 1545 1270 895 1425 1170 825
22000 1590 1295 895 1475 1205 835 1360 1110 770
23000 1515 1225 830 1405 1140 775 1295 1050 715
24000 1420 1140 750 1315 1055 700 1215 975 645
25000 1325 1050 670 1230 975 625 1135 900 580
Figure 5 - 12


Section 5
MAXIMUM RATE OF CLIMB (With Flat Triangular Leading Edge Tape On The Wings )
RATE OF CLIMB RATE OF CLIMB RATE OF CLIMB
(FT/MIN) (FT/MIN) (FT/MIN)
Pressure 3000 lb (1361 kg) 3300 lb (1497 kg) 3600 lb (1633 kg)
Altitude 106 KIAS 108 KIAS 110 KIAS
(Feet)
ISA ISA ISA ISA ISA ISA
ISA ISA ISA
-20 C +30 C -20 C +30 C -20 C +30 C
0 1805 1520 1115 1665 1400 1030 1530 1285 940
1000 1805 1520 1115 1670 1400 1030 1530 1285 940
2000 1810 1520 1120 1670 1400 1035 1535 1285 945
3000 1810 1520 1120 1670 1400 1035 1535 1285 945
4000 1810 1520 1115 1670 1400 1032 1535 1285 945
5000 1815 1520 1115 1675 1400 1030 1535 1285 940
6000 1815 1520 1110 1675 1400 1028 1537 1285 940
7000 1815 1520 1110 1675 1400 1026 1540 1285 940
8000 1820 1520 1105 1680 1400 1025 1540 1285 935
9000 1820 1520 1105 1680 1400 1025 1540 1285 935
10000 1820 1520 1105 1680 1400 1020 1540 1285 935
11000 1825 1520 1100 1685 1400 1020 1545 1285 930
12000 1825 1520 1100 1685 1402 1017 1545 1285 930
13000 1825 1520 1095 1675 1391 1005 1535 1275 920
14000 1830 1520 1095 1665 1380 995 1525 1265 910
15000 1830 1520 1095 1655 1370 980 1515 1255 900
16000 1790 1479 1055 1625 1345 955 1495 1230 875
17000 1750 1440 1020 1600 1320 935 1470 1210 855
18000 1710 1400 985 1575 1295 910 1445 1185 830
19000 1655 1350 935 1525 1245 865 1400 1140 790
20000 1600 1300 890 1475 1200 820 1355 1100 750
21000 1550 1250 840 1430 1155 780 1310 1055 710
22000 1475 1180 780 1360 1090 720 1245 995 655
23000 1400 1110 715 1290 1025 660 1180 935 600
24000 1305 1025 635 1200 940 585 1100 860 530
25000 1210 935 555 1115 860 510 1020 785 465
Figure 5 - 13


Section 5
TIME, FUEL, AND DISTANCE TO CLIMB (No Flat Triangular Leading Edge Tape)
Pressure Climb Speed Rate of Climb Time Fuel Used Distance

Altitude KIAS FPM Min Gal. (L) NM
0 110 1400 0.0 0.0 (0.0) 0
1000 110 1400 0.7 0.5 (1.8) 1
2000 110 1400 1.4 0.9 (3.5) 3
3000 110 1400 2.1 1.4 (5.3) 4
4000 110 1400 2.9 1.9 (7.0) 5
5000 110 1400 3.6 2.3 (8.8) 7
6000 110 1400 4.3 2.8 (10.5) 8
7000 110 1400 5.0 3.3 (12.3) 10
8000 110 1400 5.7 3.7 (14.1) 11
9000 110 1400 6.4 4.2 (15.8) 13
10000 110 1400 7.1 4.6 (17.6) 14
11000 110 1400 7.9 5.1 (19.3) 16
12000 110 1400 8.6 5.6 (21.1) 17
13000 110 1390 9.3 6.0 (22.9) 19
14000 110 1380 10.0 6.5 (24.6) 21
15000 110 1370 10.7 7.0 (26.4) 22
16000 110 1345 11.5 7.5 (28.3) 24
17000 110 1325 12.2 8.0 (30.1) 26
18000 110 1300 13.0 8.5 (32.0) 28
19000 110 1255 13.8 9.0 (34.0) 30
20000 110 1215 14.6 9.5 (36.0) 32
21000 110 1170 15.5 10.1 (38.2) 34
22000 110 1110 16.4 10.7 (40.3) 36
23000 110 1050 17.3 11.3 (42.7) 39
24000 110 975 18.4 11.9 (45.2) 42
25000 110 900 19.5 12.7 (47.9) 45
Associated Conditions
Power ..........................................................................................................2600 RPM

Flaps................................................................................................................... Cruise
Mixture..................................................................At recommended leaning schedule
Temp. ........................................................................................... Standard Day (ISA)
Wind............................................................................................................Zero Wind
Time .......................................Include 45 seconds for takeoff and acceleration to VY.
Figure 5 - 14


Section 5
TIME, FUEL, AND DISTANCE TO CLIMB (With Flat Triangular Leading Edge Tape)
Pressure Climb Speed Rate of Climb Time Fuel Used Distance

Altitude KIAS FPM Min Gal. (L) NM
0 110 1285 0.0 0.0 (0.0) 0
1000 110 1285 0.8 0.5 (1.9) 1
2000 110 1285 1.6 1.0 (3.8) 3
3000 110 1285 2.3 1.5 (5.7) 4
4000 110 1285 3.1 2.0 (7.7) 6
5000 110 1285 3.9 2.5 (9.6) 7
6000 110 1285 4.7 3.0 (11.5) 9
7000 110 1285 5.4 3.5 (13.4) 11
8000 110 1285 6.2 4.0 (15.3) 12
9000 110 1285 7.0 4.6 (17.2) 14
10000 110 1285 7.8 5.1 (19.1) 16
11000 110 1285 8.6 5.6 (21.1) 17
12000 110 1285 9.3 6.1 (23.0) 19
13000 110 1275 10.1 6.6 (24.9) 21
14000 110 1265 10.9 7.1 (26.8) 22
15000 110 1255 11.7 7.6 (28.8) 24
16000 110 1230 12.5 8.1 (30.8) 26
17000 110 1210 13.3 8.7 (32.8) 28
18000 110 1185 14.2 9.2 (34.9) 30
19000 110 1140 15.1 9.8 (37.1) 32
20000 110 1100 16.0 10.4 (39.3) 35
21000 110 1055 16.9 11.0 (41.6) 37
22000 110 995 17.9 11.7 (44.1) 40
23000 110 935 19.0 12.4 (46.8) 43
24000 110 860 20.2 13.1 (49.6) 46
25000 110 785 21.4 13.9 (52.7) 49
Associated Conditions
Power.....................................................................................................................2600 RPM
Flaps ............................................................................................................................. Cruise
Mixture ............................................................................At recommended leaning schedule
Temp....................................................................................................... Standard Day (ISA)
Wind ......................................................................................................................Zero Wind
Time..................................................Include 45 seconds for takeoff and acceleration to VY.
Figure 5 - 15


Section 5
CRUISE PERFORMANCE OVERVIEW

The tables on pages 5-19 through 5-32 contain cruise data to assist in the flight planning process.
This information is tabulated for even thousand altitude increments and ranges from Sea Level feet
to 25,000 feet. Interpolation is required for the odd number altitudes, i.e., 5000 feet, 7000 feet, etc.,
as well as altitude increments of 500 feet, such as 7500 and 9500.
The tables assume proper leaning at the various operating horsepowers. Between 65% and 85% of
brake horsepower, the mixtures should be leaned through use of the turbine inlet temperature (TIT)
gauge. Please refer to page 4-24 in this handbook for proper leaning techniques.
KTAS values in the tables are valid without the nose wheel pant installed. If the nose wheel pant is
installed add 4 kts to the KTAS values.
The maximum recommended cruise setting is 85% of brake horsepower. The mixture must not be
leaned above settings that produce more than 85% of brake horsepower. During cruise power
settings above 65%, ambient temperature conditions need to be considered. In hot weather and high
altitudes, it may be necessary to set the fuel flow to a lower TIT to maintain cylinder head
temperatures within the recommended range for cruise.
The cruise performance is not affected by the flat triangular leading edge tape.


Section 5
CRUISE PERFORMANCE SEA LEVEL PRESSURE ALTITUDE

-5°C 15°C 45°C
(20°C Below Standard) (Standard (30°C Above Standard)
Temperature)
RPM MP % BHP GPH LPH KTAS % BHP GPH LPH KTAS % BHP GPH LPH KTAS
2500 31.5 91 26 97 182 85 23 87 182 76 20 75 180
30 86 24 90 179 80 21 81 178 71 18 69 176
29 83 23 85 177 77 20 77 176 68 17 66 173
27 77 20 77 172 71 18 69 170 62 16 60 167
25 71 18 69 166 65 16 62 164 56 14 54 160
24 68 17 65 163 62 16 59 161 53 13 51 156
22 61 15 58 157 55 14 53 154 46 12 45 148
20 54 14 52 150 48 12 47 146 39 10 40 140
2400 33 90 26 97 182 84 23 87 182 75 20 74 179

31 85 23 88 178 79 21 79 177 70 18 68 174
30 82 22 84 176 76 20 75 175 67 17 65 172
28 77 20 76 171 71 18 68 170 62 16 59 166
26 70 18 68 166 64 16 62 164 55 14 53 159
25 67 17 65 163 61 15 59 161 52 13 51 156
23 61 15 58 157 55 14 53 154 46 12 45 148
20 51 13 49 146 45 12 44 143 36 10 37 136
2300 34 88 25 93 180 82 22 83 180 73 19 71 177

33 86 23 89 178 80 21 80 178 71 18 68 175
31 81 21 81 174 75 19 73 173 66 17 63 170
29 75 20 74 170 69 18 67 168 60 15 58 165
27 70 18 67 165 64 16 61 163 55 14 53 158
26 67 17 64 162 61 15 58 160 52 13 50 155
24 61 15 58 157 55 14 53 154 46 12 45 148
21 51 13 50 147 45 12 45 143 36 10 38 136
3600 lbs. (1633 kg) Gross Weight
Recommended Mixture Setting. Data in these charts are based on this leaning schedule
discussed on page 4-24.
Best Power
EXAMPLE PROBLEM AND SOLUTION

Conditions Solution
Cruise Altitude ................................. 1000 feet % of BHP ............................................. 65%
Temperature ............................................13°C Fuel Consumption....... 16.0 GPH (62 LPH)
Manifold Pressure.......................... 25 inch Hg True Airspeed...........................165.5 Knots
RPM ......................................................... 2500
Determine
1. ......................................................% of BHP
2. .............................Fuel Consumption (GPH)
3. ............................................... True Airspeed
Figure 5 - 16


Section 5
CRUISE PERFORMANCE 2000 FEET PRESSURE ALTITUDE

-9°C 11°C 41°C
(20°C Below Standard) (Standard Temperature) (30°C Above Standard)
2500 31.5 91 26 97 185 85 23 87 185 76 20 75 183
30 86 24 90 182 80 21 81 182 71 18 69 179
29 83 23 85 180 77 20 77 179 68 17 66 176
27 77 20 77 175 71 18 69 173 62 16 60 170
25 71 18 69 169 65 16 62 167 56 14 54 163
24 68 17 65 166 62 16 59 164 53 13 51 159
22 61 15 58 160 55 14 53 157 46 12 45 151
20 54 14 52 152 48 12 47 149 39 10 40 143
2400 33 90 26 97 185 84 23 87 185 75 20 74 183

31 85 23 88 181 79 21 79 180 70 18 68 178
30 82 22 84 179 76 20 75 178 67 17 65 175
28 77 20 76 174 71 18 68 173 62 16 59 169
26 70 18 68 169 64 16 62 167 55 14 53 162
25 67 17 65 166 61 15 59 164 52 13 51 159
23 61 15 58 160 55 14 53 157 46 12 45 151
20 51 13 49 149 45 12 44 145 36 10 37 139
2300 34 88 25 93 184 82 22 83 183 73 19 71 181

33 86 23 89 182 80 21 80 181 71 18 68 178
31 81 21 81 178 75 19 73 176 66 17 63 173
29 75 20 74 173 69 18 67 172 60 15 58 168
27 70 18 67 168 64 16 61 166 55 14 53 161
26 67 17 64 165 61 15 58 163 52 13 50 158
24 61 15 58 159 55 14 53 157 46 12 45 151
21 51 13 50 149 45 12 45 146 36 10 38 139
Best Power

Conditions Solution
Cruise Altitude .......................................2000 feet % of BHP 73%
Temperature ..................................................22°C Fuel Consumption 18.5 GPH (73 LPH)
Manifold Pressure................................ 29 inch Hg True Airspeed 177.5 Knots
RPM............................................................... 2700
Determine
1. .......................................................... % of BHP
2. ................................. Fuel Consumption (GPH)
3. ....................................................True Airspeed
Figure 5 - 17

Section 5
CRUISE PERFORMANCE 4000 FT PRESSURE ALTITUDE

-13°C 7°C 37°C
2500 31.5 91 26 97 189 85 23 87 189 76 20 75 187
30 86 24 90 186 80 21 81 185 71 18 69 182
29 83 23 85 183 77 20 77 182 68 17 66 179
27 77 20 77 178 71 18 69 177 62 16 60 173
25 71 18 69 172 65 16 62 170 56 14 54 166
24 68 17 65 169 62 16 59 167 53 13 51 162
22 61 15 58 162 55 14 53 160 46 12 45 154
20 54 14 52 155 48 12 47 152 39 10 40 146
2400 33 90 26 97 189 84 23 87 188 75 20 74 186

31 85 23 88 185 79 21 79 184 70 18 68 181
30 82 22 84 182 76 20 75 181 67 17 65 178
28 77 20 76 177 71 18 68 176 62 16 59 172
26 70 18 68 172 64 16 62 170 55 14 53 165
25 67 17 65 169 61 15 59 167 52 13 51 162
23 61 15 58 162 55 14 53 160 46 12 45 154
20 51 13 49 152 45 12 44 148 36 10 37 141
2300 34 88 25 93 187 82 22 83 186 73 19 71 184

33 86 23 89 185 80 21 80 184 71 18 68 182
31 81 21 81 181 75 19 73 180 66 17 63 176
29 75 20 74 176 69 18 67 175 60 15 58 171
27 70 18 67 171 64 16 61 169 55 14 53 165
26 67 17 64 168 61 15 58 166 52 13 50 161
24 61 15 58 162 55 14 53 160 46 12 45 154
21 51 13 50 152 45 12 45 149 36 10 38 142
Best Power

Conditions Solution
Cruise Altitude ........................................ 4000 feet % of BHP 87%
Temperature ....................................................-9°C Fuel Consumption 24.5 GPH (92 LPH)
Manifold Pressure................................. 33 inch Hg True Airspeed 188 Knots*
RPM ................................................................ 2400
*As a rule, always round to the more
Determine conservative number when using the
1. ............................................................% of BHP various performance tables in this
2. ...................................Fuel Consumption (GPH) handbook.
3. ..................................................... True Airspeed
Figure 5 - 18

Section 5

-17°C 3°C 33°C
2500 31.5 91 26 97 193 85 23 87 192 76 20 75 190
30 86 24 90 189 80 21 81 188 71 18 69 186
29 83 23 85 187 77 20 77 186 68 17 66 183
27 77 20 77 181 71 18 69 180 62 16 60 176
25 71 18 69 175 65 16 62 173 56 14 54 169
24 68 17 65 172 62 16 59 170 53 13 51 165
22 61 15 58 165 55 14 53 163 46 12 45 157
20 54 14 52 158 48 12 47 155 39 10 40 149
2400 33 90 26 97 192 84 23 87 192 75 20 74 190

31 85 23 88 188 79 21 79 187 70 18 68 184
30 82 22 84 186 76 20 75 185 67 17 65 182
28 77 20 76 181 71 18 68 179 62 16 59 175
26 70 18 68 175 64 16 62 173 55 14 53 169
25 67 17 65 172 61 15 59 170 52 13 51 165
23 61 15 58 165 55 14 53 163 46 12 45 157
20 51 13 49 154 45 12 44 151 36 10 37 144
2300 34 88 25 93 191 82 22 83 190 73 19 71 187

33 86 23 89 189 80 21 80 188 71 18 68 185
31 81 21 81 184 75 19 73 183 66 17 63 180
29 75 20 74 180 69 18 67 178 60 15 58 174
27 70 18 67 174 64 16 61 172 55 14 53 168
26 67 17 64 171 61 15 58 169 52 13 50 164
24 61 15 58 165 55 14 53 163 46 12 45 157
21 51 13 50 155 45 12 45 151 36 10 38 145
Recommended Mixture Setting. Data in these charts are based on this leaning schedule discussed
on page 4-24.
Best Power

Conditions Solution
Cruise Altitude ........................................ 6000 feet % of BHP............................................... 49%
Temperature ...................................................33°C Fuel Consumption ..... 12.5 GPH (48.0 LPH)
Manifold Pressure ................................. 23 inch Hg True Airspeed ............................... 161 Knots
RPM ................................................................ 2500
Determine
1. .............................................................% of BHP
2. ................................... Fuel Consumption (GPH)
3. ......................................................True Airspeed
Figure 5 - 19

Section 5

-21°C -1°C 29°C
2500 31.5 91 27 101 200 85 24 90 199 76 20 77 196
30 86 25 93 196 80 22 83 195 71 19 71 192
29 83 23 88 193 77 21 79 192 68 18 68 189
27 77 21 79 188 71 19 71 186 62 16 61 182
25 71 19 71 181 65 17 64 179 56 14 55 174
24 68 18 67 178 62 16 60 175 53 14 52 170
22 61 16 60 171 55 14 54 168 46 12 46 162
20 54 14 53 163 48 13 48 159 39 11 40 153
2400 33 90 26 100 200 84 24 90 199 75 20 77 196

31 85 24 91 195 79 22 82 194 70 18 70 190
30 82 23 86 192 76 21 78 191 67 18 66 187
28 77 21 78 187 71 19 70 185 62 16 60 181
26 70 19 70 181 64 17 63 178 55 14 54 174
25 67 18 67 177 61 16 60 175 52 14 52 170
23 61 16 60 171 55 14 54 168 46 12 46 162
20 51 13 50 159 45 12 45 155 36 10 38 148
2300 34 88 25 96 197 82 23 86 197 73 19 73 194

33 86 24 92 195 80 22 82 194 71 19 70 191
31 81 22 84 191 75 20 75 189 66 17 65 185
29 75 20 76 186 69 18 69 184 60 16 59 179
27 70 18 69 180 64 17 63 178 55 14 54 173
26 67 17 66 177 61 16 60 174 52 13 51 169
24 61 16 60 170 55 14 54 167 46 12 46 162
21 51 13 51 159 45 12 45 156 36 10 38 149
on page 4-24.
Best Power

Conditions Solution
Cruise Altitude ...........................................8000 feet % of BHP 86%*
Temperature ....................................................... -2°C Fuel Consumption 25 GPH (93 LPH)
Manifold Pressure .....................................29 inch Hg True Airspeed 196 Knots
RPM ................................................................... 2500
*This power setting is above the
Determine maximum recommended cruise setting of
1. ................................................................ % of BHP 85% and does not represent a
2. .......................................Fuel Consumption (GPH) recommended mixture setting.
3. ......................................................... True Airspeed
Figure 5 - 20

Section 5

-25°C -5°C 25°C
2500 31.5 91 27 101 205 85 24 90 204 76 20 77 200
30 86 25 93 201 80 22 83 199 71 19 71 195
29 83 23 88 198 77 21 79 196 68 18 68 192
27 77 21 79 191 71 19 71 189 62 16 61 185
25 71 19 71 185 65 17 64 182 56 14 55 178
24 68 18 67 181 62 16 60 178 53 14 52 174
22 61 16 60 174 55 14 54 171 46 12 46 166
20 54 14 53 166 48 13 48 163 39 11 40 157
2400 33 90 26 100 205 84 24 90 203 75 20 77 200

31 85 24 91 200 79 22 82 198 70 18 70 194
30 82 23 86 197 76 21 78 195 67 18 66 191
28 77 21 78 191 71 19 70 188 62 16 60 184
26 70 19 70 184 64 17 63 182 55 14 54 177
25 67 18 67 181 61 16 60 178 52 14 52 174
23 61 16 60 174 55 14 54 171 46 12 46 166
20 51 13 50 162 45 12 45 159 36 10 38 154
2300 34 88 25 96 203 82 23 86 201 73 19 73 197

33 86 24 92 200 80 22 82 198 71 19 70 195
31 81 22 84 195 75 20 75 193 66 17 65 189
29 75 20 76 189 69 18 69 187 60 16 59 183
27 70 18 69 183 64 17 63 181 55 14 54 176
26 67 17 66 180 61 16 60 178 52 13 51 173
24 61 16 60 173 55 14 54 171 46 12 46 166
21 51 13 51 163 45 12 45 159 36 10 38 154
Best Power

Conditions Solution
Cruise Altitude ........................................ 9000 feet % of BHP 77%
Temperature ....................................................-9°C Fuel Consumption 21 GPH (79 LPH)
Manifold Pressure................................. 29 inch Hg True Airspeed 194 Knots
RPM ................................................................ 2500
Determine
1. ............................................................% of BHP
2. ...................................Fuel Consumption (GPH)
3. ..................................................... True Airspeed
Figure 5 - 21

Section 5

-29°C -9°C 21°C
2500 31.5 91 27 10 209 85 24 90 207 76 20 77 204
30 86 25 1 204 80 22 83 203 71 19 71 199
29 83 23 93 201 77 21 79 199 68 18 68 196
27 77 21 88 195 71 19 71 193 62 16 61 189
25 71 19 79 188 65 17 64 186 56 14 55 181
24 68 18 71 184 62 16 60 182 53 14 52 178
22 61 16 67 177 55 14 54 174 46 12 46 170
20 54 14 60 169 48 13 48 166 39 11 40 161
53
2400 33 90 26 209 84 24 90 207 75 20 77 204
31 85 24 10 203 79 22 82 201 70 18 70 198
30 82 23 0 200 76 21 78 198 67 18 66 195
28 77 21 91 194 71 19 70 192 62 16 60 188
26 70 19 86 187 64 17 63 185 55 14 54 181
25 67 18 78 184 61 16 60 182 52 14 52 177
23 61 16 70 177 55 14 54 174 46 12 46 170
20 51 13 67 165 45 12 45 162 36 10 38 157
60
2300 34 88 25 50 206 82 23 86 204 73 19 73 201
33 86 24 204 80 22 82 202 71 19 70 198
31 81 96 22 198 75 20 75 196 66 17 65 193
29 75 92 20 193 69 18 69 191 60 16 59 187
27 70 84 18 187 64 17 63 184 55 14 54 180
26 67 76 17 183 61 16 60 181 52 13 51 177
24 61 69 16 177 55 14 54 174 46 12 46 169
21 51 66 13 166 45 12 45 163 36 10 38 158
60
51
Best Power

Conditions Solution
Cruise Altitude .......................................12000 feet % of BHP 61%
Temperature ..................................................... -9°C Fuel Consumption 16 GPH (60 LPH)
Manifold Pressure ..................................26 inch Hg True Airspeed 181 Knots
RPM..................................................................2300
Determine
1. ............................................................. % of BHP
2. .................................... Fuel Consumption (GPH)
3. .......................................................True Airspeed
Figure 5 - 22

Section 5

-33°C -13°C 17°C
2500 31.5 91 27 101 211 85 24 91 212 76 21 78 210
30 86 25 94 208 80 22 85 208 71 19 72 205
29 83 24 89 205 77 21 80 205 68 18 69 202
27 77 21 80 199 71 19 72 198 62 16 62 194
25 71 19 72 193 65 17 65 191 56 15 55 186
24 68 18 68 190 62 16 61 187 53 14 52 181
22 61 16 60 182 55 14 54 179 46 12 46 172
20 54 14 53 173 48 13 48 169 39 10 40 161
2400 33 90 27 101 211 84 24 91 211 75 21 78 210

31 85 24 92 206 79 22 83 206 70 19 71 204
30 82 23 87 204 76 21 79 204 67 18 67 200
28 77 21 79 199 71 19 71 197 62 16 61 193
26 70 19 71 193 64 17 64 191 55 14 55 185
25 67 18 68 189 61 16 61 187 52 14 52 181
23 61 16 60 182 55 14 54 179 46 12 46 172
20 51 13 50 169 45 12 45 165 36 10 37 156
2300 34 88 25 96 209 82 23 87 209 73 20 75 207

33 86 24 93 207 80 22 84 207 71 19 72 204
31 81 22 85 203 75 20 77 202 66 17 66 198
29 75 20 78 198 69 18 70 196 60 16 60 192
27 70 19 70 192 64 17 63 190 55 14 54 184
26 67 18 67 189 61 16 60 186 52 14 51 180
24 61 16 60 182 55 14 54 178 46 12 46 171
21 51 13 51 170 45 12 45 165 36 10 37 157
on page 4-24.
Best Power
Figure 5 - 23

Section 5

-37°C -17°C 13°C
2500 31.5 91 27 101 216 85 24 91 216 76 21 78 215
30 86 25 94 212 80 22 85 212 71 19 72 210
29 83 24 89 210 77 21 80 209 68 18 69 207
27 77 21 80 204 71 19 72 203 62 16 62 200
25 71 19 72 198 65 17 65 196 56 15 55 192
24 68 18 68 194 62 16 61 192 53 14 52 188
22 61 16 60 187 55 14 54 184 46 12 46 178
20 54 14 53 178 48 13 48 175 39 10 40 168
2400 33 90 27 101 215 84 24 91 216 75 21 78 215

31 85 24 92 211 79 22 83 211 70 19 71 209
30 82 23 87 209 76 21 79 208 67 18 67 206
28 77 21 79 203 71 19 71 202 62 16 61 199
26 70 19 71 197 64 17 64 196 55 14 55 191
25 67 18 68 194 61 16 61 192 52 14 52 187
23 61 16 60 187 55 14 54 184 46 12 46 178
20 51 13 50 174 45 12 45 171 36 10 37 164
2300 34 88 25 96 213 82 23 87 214 73 20 75 212

33 86 24 93 212 80 22 84 212 71 19 72 210
31 81 22 85 207 75 20 77 207 66 17 66 204
29 75 20 78 202 69 18 70 201 60 16 60 197
27 70 19 70 196 64 17 63 195 55 14 54 190
26 67 18 67 193 61 16 60 191 52 14 51 186
24 61 16 60 187 55 14 54 184 46 12 46 178
21 51 13 51 175 45 12 45 171 36 10 37 164
on page 4-24.
Best Power
Figure 5 - 24

Section 5

-41°C -21°C 9°C
2500 31.5 91 27 102 217 85 25 95 219 76 21 79 220
30 86 25 95 214 80 23 87 216 71 20 76 216
29 83 24 91 212 77 22 83 213 68 19 72 213
27 77 22 83 207 71 20 76 208 62 17 64 207
25 71 19 72 201 65 18 68 202 56 15 57 200
24 68 18 68 198 62 17 64 198 53 15 57 196
22 61 17 64 192 55 15 57 191 46 13 49 189
20 54 15 57 185 48 14 53 184 39 12 45 180
2400 33 90 27 102 217 84 24 91 219 75 21 79 220

31 85 25 95 213 79 22 83 214 70 19 72 215
30 82 24 91 211 76 21 79 212 67 18 68 212
28 77 21 79 206 71 19 72 207 62 17 64 206
26 70 19 72 201 64 18 68 201 55 15 57 199
25 67 18 68 198 61 17 64 198 52 15 57 196
23 61 17 64 192 55 15 57 191 46 13 49 189
20 51 14 53 182 45 13 49 180 36 11 42 176
2300 34 88 26 98 215 82 23 87 217 73 20 76 217

33 86 25 95 214 80 22 83 215 71 19 72 215
31 81 23 87 210 75 21 79 211 66 18 68 210
29 75 21 79 205 69 19 72 206 60 16 61 205
27 70 19 72 200 64 17 64 200 55 15 57 199
26 67 18 68 198 61 17 64 197 52 14 53 195
24 61 17 64 192 55 15 57 191 46 13 49 188
21 51 14 53 182 45 13 49 180 36 11 42 177
on page 4-24.
Best Power
Figure 5 - 25

Section 5

-45°C -25°C 5°C
(20°C Below Standard) (Standard Temperature) (30°C Above
Standard)
2500 31.5 91 27 103 221 85 25 93 222 76 21 80 223
30 86 25 96 217 80 23 86 219 71 20 74 219
29 83 24 91 215 77 22 82 216 68 19 71 216
27 77 22 82 210 71 20 74 211 62 17 64 210
25 71 19 74 204 65 18 67 205 56 15 58 204
24 68 18 70 201 62 17 64 201 53 15 55 201
22 61 17 63 195 55 15 57 195 46 13 49 194
20 54 15 56 188 48 14 51 188 39 12 44 186
2400 33 90 27 103 221 84 24 92 222 75 21 79 223

31 85 25 93 216 79 22 84 218 70 19 73 218
30 82 24 89 214 76 21 80 215 67 18 69 215
28 77 21 81 209 71 19 73 210 62 17 63 210
26 70 19 73 204 64 18 66 204 55 15 58 204
25 67 18 70 201 61 17 63 201 52 15 55 200
23 61 17 63 195 55 15 57 195 46 13 49 194
20 51 14 54 185 45 13 49 184 36 11 41 182
2300 34 88 26 98 219 82 23 89 220 73 20 76 221

33 86 25 94 217 80 22 85 218 71 19 73 218
31 81 23 86 213 75 21 78 214 66 18 68 214
29 75 21 79 208 69 19 72 209 60 16 62 208
27 70 19 72 203 64 17 66 203 55 15 57 203
26 67 18 69 201 61 17 63 201 52 14 54 200
24 61 17 63 195 55 15 57 195 46 13 49 193
21 51 14 54 185 45 13 49 185 36 11 41 183
on page 4-24.
Best Power
Figure 5 - 26

Section 5

-49°C -29°C 1°C
2500 31.5 91 27 103 226 85 25 93 228 76 21 80 229
30 86 25 96 222 80 23 86 224 71 20 74 225
29 83 24 91 220 77 22 82 221 68 19 71 222
27 77 22 82 215 71 20 74 216 62 17 64 216
25 71 19 74 209 65 18 67 210 56 15 58 209
24 68 18 70 206 62 17 64 206 53 15 55 206
22 61 17 63 200 55 15 57 200 46 13 49 199
20 54 15 56 193 48 14 51 193 39 12 44 191
2400 33 90 27 103 226 84 24 92 227 75 21 79 228

31 85 25 93 221 79 22 84 223 70 19 73 223
30 82 24 89 219 76 21 80 220 67 18 69 221
28 77 21 81 214 71 19 73 215 62 17 63 215
26 70 19 73 209 64 18 66 209 55 15 58 209
25 67 18 70 206 61 17 63 206 52 15 55 206
23 61 17 63 200 55 15 57 200 46 13 49 199
20 51 14 54 190 45 13 49 189 36 11 41 188
2300 34 88 26 98 224 82 23 89 225 73 20 76 226

33 86 25 94 222 80 22 85 223 71 19 73 224
31 81 23 86 218 75 21 78 219 66 18 68 219
29 75 21 79 213 69 19 72 214 60 16 62 214
27 70 19 72 208 64 17 66 208 55 15 57 208
26 67 18 69 205 61 17 63 206 52 14 54 205
24 61 17 63 199 55 15 57 200 46 13 49 199
21 51 14 54 190 45 13 49 190 36 11 41 188
Recommended Mixture Setting. Data in these charts are based on this leaning schedule discussed on
page 4-24.
Best Power
Figure 5 - 27

Section 5

-53°C -33°C -3°C
2500 31.5 91 27 103 228 85 25 93 232 76 21 80 235
30 86 25 96 225 80 23 86 229 71 20 74 231
29 83 24 91 223 77 22 82 226 68 19 71 228
27 77 22 82 219 71 20 74 221 62 17 64 222
25 71 19 74 214 65 18 67 216 56 15 58 215
24 68 18 70 211 62 17 64 212 53 15 55 212
22 61 17 63 205 55 15 57 206 46 13 49 204
20 54 15 56 198 48 14 51 198 39 12 44 195
2400 33 90 27 103 228 84 24 92 232 75 21 79 235

31 85 25 93 224 79 22 84 228 70 19 73 230
30 82 24 89 223 76 21 80 226 67 18 69 227
28 77 21 81 219 71 19 73 221 62 17 63 221
26 70 19 73 214 64 18 66 215 55 15 58 215
25 67 18 70 211 61 17 63 212 52 15 55 211
23 61 17 63 205 55 15 57 206 46 13 49 204
20 51 14 54 195 45 13 49 194 36 11 41 190
2300 34 88 26 98 226 82 23 89 230 73 20 76 233

33 86 25 94 225 80 22 85 228 71 19 73 230
31 81 23 86 222 75 21 78 224 66 18 68 226
29 75 21 79 218 69 19 72 220 60 16 62 220
27 70 19 72 213 64 17 66 215 55 15 57 214
26 67 18 69 211 61 17 63 212 52 14 54 211
24 61 17 63 205 55 15 57 205 46 13 49 203
21 51 14 54 195 45 13 49 194 36 11 41 191
on page 4-24.
Best Power
Figure 5 - 28

Section 5

-55°C -35°C -5°C
2500 31.5 91 27 103 231 85 25 93 235 76 21 80 238
30 86 25 96 228 80 23 86 232 71 20 74 234
29 83 24 91 226 77 22 82 229 68 19 71 231
27 77 22 82 222 71 20 74 224 62 17 64 225
25 71 19 74 217 65 18 67 218 56 15 58 218
24 68 18 70 214 62 17 64 215 53 15 55 214
22 61 17 63 208 55 15 57 208 46 13 49 206
20 54 15 56 201 48 14 51 200 39 12 44 197
2400 33 90 27 103 231 84 24 92 235 75 21 79 238

31 85 25 93 227 79 22 84 231 70 19 73 233
30 82 24 89 226 76 21 80 228 67 18 69 230
28 77 21 81 221 71 19 73 224 62 17 63 224
26 70 19 73 217 64 18 66 218 55 15 58 218
25 67 18 70 214 61 17 63 215 52 15 55 214
23 61 17 63 208 55 15 57 208 46 13 49 206
20 51 14 54 197 45 13 49 196 36 11 41 193
2300 34 88 26 98 229 82 23 89 233 73 20 76 236

33 86 25 94 228 80 22 85 231 71 19 73 233
31 81 23 86 224 75 21 78 227 66 18 68 228
29 75 21 79 221 69 19 72 222 60 16 62 223
27 70 19 72 216 64 17 66 217 55 15 57 217
26 67 18 69 213 61 17 63 214 52 14 54 213
24 61 17 63 208 55 15 57 208 46 13 49 206
21 51 14 54 198 45 13 49 197 36 11 41 194
on page 4-24.
Best Power
Figure 5 - 29


Section 5
LEAN OF PEAK ENGINE OPERATION

The TSIO-550C engine can be operated lean of peak at lower power settings. At higher power
settings the TIT limit could be exceeded during the leaning process, in general leaning past peak TIT
is only possible below about 65% power (varies with ambient conditions). Starting from full rich, the
power increases about 1% as “Best Power” mixture is reached. For cruise operation, best power is at
or near 1625ºF TIT rich of peak. If the mixture is leaned further past peak EGT (TIT), the power
drops 8-12%. “Best Economy” is reached at about 50ºF lean of peak. Because of the drop in power,
speed will be reduced. Once a lean of peak mixture setting is reached, the RPM and manifold
pressure can be increased carefully. By increasing the manifold pressure while operating lean of
peak (do not exceed 29 in.Hg), the power loss from leaning can be compensated. For continuous
operation, TIT should be at or below 1625ºF. Figure 5 - 31 below shows a comparison of fuel flows
for best power and best economy and is valid for one RPM (about 2400 RPM). At higher RPM the
fuel flow is slightly higher or slightly lower at lower RPM respectively. The power setting in Figure
5 - 31 is actual power.
Columbia 400 Fuel Flow over Power Setting

25
23
Best Power TSIO-550C
21 x Lean of Peak TSIO-550C
19
Fuel Flow [gph]
17
x
15 x
x
13 x
x
11
7
Power Setting [%]
5
40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90
Figure 5 - 30


25000
5-34
24000
23000
Section 5
22000
RC050005
21000
Performance
20000
19000
RANGE PROFILE
18000
17000
85%
16000 80%

15000
75%
14000
70%
13000
65%
12000
60%
11000
55%
ALTITUDE - FEET
10000
45%
9000
8000
7000
6000
Figure 5 - 31
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000 1050 1100 1150 1200
RANGE - NAUTICAL MILES
Conditions Assumptions Note
3600 lbs. (1633 kg) Max. Gross Weight Chart assumes applicable BHP is The chart includes fuel for starting the
Standard Temperature maintained to maximum flight altitude engine, taxi, takeoff, and climb to altitude.
Proper Leaning The 45 minute reserve allowance is based
Full Fuel Tanks – 98 Gallons (371 L) on the applicable percentage of BHP for 45
minutes.
Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006

Initial Issue of Manual: December 9, 2005

Example: At a pressure altitude of 11,000 feet, with an 85% BHP best power setting, the range is approximately 675 nm.
25000
24000
23000
22000
21000
20000
19000
18000
17000
85%

16000
80%
ENDURANCE PROFILE
15000
75%
14000
70%
13000 65%
12000
60%
11000
55%
ALTITUDE - FEET
10000
45%
9000
Initial Issue of Manual: December 9, 2005

Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006
8000
7000
6000
5000
Figure 5 - 32
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
3 4 5 6 7 8
ENDURANCE - HOURS
Conditions Assumptions Note
3600 lbs. (1633 kg) Max. Gross Weight Chart assumes applicable BHP is The chart includes fuel for starting the
Standard Temperature maintained to maximum flight altitude engine, taxi, takeoff, and climb to altitude.
Proper Leaning The 45 minute reserve allowance is based
Full Fuel Tanks – 98 Gallons (371 L) on the applicable percentage of BHP for 45
minutes.
5-35
RC050005
Performance
Section 5
Example: At a pressure altitude of 9,000 feet, with a 75% BHP best power setting, the endurance is approximately 4.05 hours.
Section 5
HOLDING CONSIDERATIONS
When holding is required, it is recommended that takeoff flaps be used with an indicated airspeed of
120± knots. Depending on temperature, gross weight, and RPM, the manifold pressure will range
from about 13 to 17 inches. The fuel consumption has wide variability as well and can range from
about 8 to 10 GPH (30.3 to 37.9 LPH). The graph below, Figure 5 - 33, provides information to
calculate either fuel used for a given holding time or the amount of holding time available for a set
quantity of fuel.
The graph is based on a fuel consumption of 9 GPH (34.1 LPH) and is included here to provide a
general familiarization overview. Under actual conditions, most pilots can perform the calculation
for fuel used or the available holding time without reference to the graph. Moreover, the graph is
only an approximation of the average anticipated fuel consumption. There will be wide variability
under actual conditions.
In the example below, a 35-minute holding time will use about 5.2 gallons (19.7 L) of fuel.
Conversely, if only 8 gallons (30.3 L) of fuel are available for holding purposes, the maximum
holding time is 53 minutes before other action must be taken. Note that this is about the amount of
fuel remaining in a tank when the low-level fuel warning light illuminates.
HOLDING TIME
(9.0 GPH)
12.0
10.0
FUEL USED - GALLONS
8.0
6.0
4.0
2.0
0.0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
TIME - MINUTES
Figure 5 - 33


Section 5
TIME, FUEL, AND DISTANCE FOR CRUISE DESCENT

The table below, Figure 5 - 34, has information to assist the pilot in estimating cruise descent times,
fuel used, and distance traveled from cruise altitude to sea level or to the elevation of the destination
airport. For descents from cruise altitude to sea level, locate the cruise altitude for the descent rate in
use, and read the information directly. These data are determined for a weight of 3600 lb. (1633 kg),
flaps up, 2600 RPM, standard temperature, and zero winds.
For example, a descent at 500 FPM from 9000 feet to sea level will take approximately 18 minutes
(50 – 32 = 18), consume 5 gallons of fuel (14 - 9 = 5), and 57 miles (175 – 118 = 57) will be
traveled over the ground under no wind conditions. For descent from cruise altitude to a field
elevation above seal level, subtract the performance data numbers for the field elevation data from
the cruise altitude.
Pressure Descent Speed Rate of Descent Fuel Flow Time Fuel Used Distance
Altitude KIAS FPM GPH (LPH) Min Gal. (L) NM
25000 159 500 19.0 (72.0) 0.0 0 (0) 0
24000 160 500 18.8 (71.2) 2.0 1 (4) 8
23000 161 500 18.6 (70.4) 4.0 1 (4) 16
22000 161 500 18.3 (69.3) 6.0 2 (8) 24
21000 162 500 18.1 (68.5) 8.0 2 (8) 32
20000 163 500 17.9 (67.8) 10.0 3 (11) 39
19000 164 500 17.7 (67.0) 12.0 4 (15) 47
18000 164 500 17.4 (65.9) 14.0 4 (15) 54
17000 165 500 17.2 (65.1) 16.0 5 (19) 62
16000 166 500 17.0 (64.3) 18.0 5 (19) 69
15000 167 500 17.0 (64.3) 20.0 6 (23) 76
14000 167 500 17.0 (64.3) 22.0 7 (26) 83
13000 168 500 17.0 (64.3) 24.0 7 (26) 90
12000 169 500 17.0 (64.3) 26.0 8 (30) 97
11000 170 500 17.0 (64.3) 28.0 8 (30) 104
10000 170 500 17.0 (64.3) 30.0 9 (34) 111
9000 171 500 16.8 (63.6) 32.0 9 (34) 118
8000 172 500 16.7 (63.2) 34.0 10 (38) 124
7000 173 500 16.5 (62.5) 36.0 10 (38) 131
6000 173 500 16.3 (61.7) 38.0 11 (42) 137
5000 174 500 16.2 (61.3) 40.0 12 (45) 144
4000 175 500 16.0 (60.6) 42.0 12 (45) 150
3000 176 500 16.0 (60.6) 44.0 13 (49) 157
2000 177 500 16.0 (60.6) 46.0 13 (49) 163
1000 178 500 16.0 (60.6) 48.0 14 (53) 169
0 179 500 16.0 (60.6) 50.0 14 (53) 175
Figure 5 - 34


Section 5
This Page Intentionally left Blank


Section 5
SHORT FIELD LANDING DISTANCE (40º - LANDING FLAPS)
ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS EXAMPLE

Power As required to maintain 3° OAT 25°C
approach
Flaps 40° Pressure Altitude (PA) 4000 ft
Runway Paved, Level, Dry Surface Takeoff Weight 3200 lb.
Approach Speed See Speed Schedule Headwind Component 10
Braking Maximum Ground Roll = 1240 ft (378 m)
50 ft Obstacle = 2600 ft (793 m)
Runway Slope Correction: Add 1% to ground roll for every 0.1° (0.2%) of downhill slope.
For operation on a known level, smooth, mowed grass runway, which is either wet or dry but does not include standing water, the ground roll distance
obtained from this landing performance chart must be multiplied by a factor of 1.6 to obtain the correct field length. In the above example, the ground roll
distance would be 1.6 x 1240 ft = 1984 ft (605 m). The total distance to clear a 50-ft obstacle would be 3344 ft (1020 m) in this instance.
Figure 5 - 35


Section 5
Section 5
LANDING SPEED SCHEDULE

The following chart should be used in conjunction with the landing distance chart in
Figure 5 - 35 to determine the proper landing speed based on aircraft weight.
Landing Speed Schedule
95
Speed at 50 ft. obstacle (VREF)
for Normal Landing
90
85
80
Speed at 50 ft. obstacle (VREF)
for Short Field Landing
75
Speed, KIAS
70
65
Speed at Touchdown
60
55
Stall Speed
50
Maximum Landing
Weight: 3420 lb.
45
2600 2700 2800 2900 3000 3100 3200 3300 3400 3500
Landing Weight, lb.
Figure 5 - 36
SAMPLE PROBLEM
Airplane Configuration Cruise Environment
Takeoff Weight ... 3600 lbs. (1633 kg) Maximum Gross Weight Distance of Trip .........................................412 Nautical Miles
Usable Fuel .................................................. 98 Gallons (371 L) Pressure Cruise Altitude .......................................... 8000 Feet
Cruise Power..........................................80% BHP/2500 RPM
Ambient Air Temperature ............................. -1°C (Standard)
En Route Winds ....................................... 30 Knot Headwind
Takeoff Environment Landing Environment
Airport Pressure Altitude......................................... 3500 Feet Airport Pressure Altitude ....................................... 2000 Feet
Ambient Air Temperature ......... 25°C (17°C above standard) Ambient Air Temperature ...... 30°C (16.5°C above standard)
Headwind Component ............................................. 30 Knots Landing Runway Number .................................................. 36
Runway Length ...................................................... 3000 Feet Wind Direction & Velocity ......................... 040º at 25 Knots
Obstacle at the end of the runway................................ 50 Feet Runway Length ...................................................... 3000 Feet
Climb to Cruise Altitude....................Max. Continuous Power Obstacle at approach end of the runway ......................... None


Section 5
SOLVE FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS
No. Item Solution Comments

What is the takeoff ground run Problem is different than example
1. distance at the departure 1150± Feet arrows, i.e., takeoff weight - 3600
airport? lbs. and headwind - 30 knots.
What is the total takeoff
Major indices are 200 feet and
distance at the departure airport
2. 1750± Feet minor indices (not printed on the
(ground run and obstacle
graph) are 100 feet.
clearance)?
The fuel required to reach a
Assume a climb to cruise pressure altitude of 4000 and 8000
altitude is started at a pressure feet is 1.7 and 3.4 gallons,
1.7 Gallons
3. altitude of 4000 feet. What is respectively. The difference
(6.4 L)
the approximate fuel used to between these two altitudes yields
reach cruise altitude? 1.7 gallons. No adjustment for non-
standard temperature is possible.
Using the technique described in
What distance over the ground
No. 3 subtract the 4000 pressure
is covered in the climb under 6 NM
4. altitude distance/time from the
no wind conditions.? What is 2.9 Minutes
8000 pressure altitude
the approximate time?
distance/time.
What is the fuel flow at the 22 GPH
5. Taken directly from chart.
8000 foot cruise altitude? (83 LPH)
What is the true airspeed at the
6. 8000 foot cruise altitude (to the 195 knots Taken directly from chart.
nearest whole knot)?
Using the cruise and range
Notice that range and endurance
profiles, what are the 715 NM
7. are significantly reduced when
approximate miles covered and 3.6 Hours
operating at higher power settings.
time aloft at 80% BHP?
Assume a 500 FPM descent is The airport elevation is 2000 feet
used for arrival at the and the descent is from 8000 feet;
destination airport. At what hence, calculations should compare
8. distance from the airport 33 NM 8000 feet with 3000, which is 1000
should the descent begin to feet above the surface. See the
arrive at 1000 feet above the instruction on page 5-37 for
surface? descents to airports above sea level.
What are the crosswind and 16 kts xwind The wind is 40º off the runway
9. headwind components at the 19 kts centerline. See Figure 5 - 9 for a
destination airport? hdwnd detailed explanation.
In No. 10 above, the headwind
What is the landing distance
component is 19 knots. Insert this
required at the destination
10. 1100± Feet information along with the airport
airport, with landing flaps, at
elevation and temperature into
maximum landing weight?
Figure 5 - 35.


Section 5
OXYGEN SYSTEM DURATION CHARTS

The chart shown in Figure 5 - 37 should be used to determine the amount of oxygen available when
using the A4 Flowmeter with cannulas or masks.
A4 FLOWMETER WITH CANNULA OR MASKS

Oxygen System Usage Duration - A4 FlowMeter - STD Cannula
99% Confidence Tolerance (42 Cu. Ft. Serviced to 1,800 PSIG)
24
22
Usage Altitude (Ft * 1,000)
20
18
16
14
12
10
0
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Hours of Available O2
1 PERSON 2 PERSONS 3 PERSONS 4 PERSONS
Notes: Bottle capacity has been reduced 5% for safety.
Figure 5 - 37
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (ACCS)

When Automatic Climate Control System (ACCS) is installed it is important to be aware of the
following performance changes that may result. If the Automatic Climate Control System is not
operating properly, all or any of the following factors may change. It is the pilot’s responsibility to
monitor fuel burn, time in flight and time to destination during all flight operations and make
appropriate decisions to maintain a safe flight.
Takeoffs – Brake Horsepower (BHP) reduction, with the ACCS operating the compressor, during
takeoff, has been determined to be 5 BHP or less than 2% of total BHP. If runway conditions are
short, soft or grass, and if pressure altitude, temperature or humidity is high, it is recommended that
the ACCS be switched to the “Compressor Off” mode during the takeoff portion of the flight by
pressing the button until the adjacent indicator light is out.
Normal and Maximum Performance Climbs – The Maximum Rate of Climb performance has
been determined to be approximately 14 ft. per minute lower with the air conditioning compressor
operating and the system operating properly. The pilot should compute fuel burn, range, and
endurance data based on this reduced rate of climb factor. For maximum performance the ACCS
should be switched to the “Compressor Off” mode during the climb portion of the flight by pressing
the button until the adjacent indicator light goes out.
Cruise – Flight tests have determined that the cruise performance with the air conditioning
compressor operating is reduced by 2%. The pilot should compute fuel burn, range, and endurance
data based on this reduced cruise factor. If maximum performance is desired, the ACCS should be
switched to the “Compressor Off” mode during the cruise portion of the flight by pressing the
button until the adjacent indicator light is out.


Section 5


Section 6
Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG) Weight & Balance - Equipment List
Section 6
Weight & Balance
and
Equipment List
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................... 6-3

Weight and Balance Procedures ............................................................................................ 6-3
Equipment List....................................................................................................................... 6-3
PROCEDURES FOR WEIGHING & DETERMINING EMPTY CG

General ................................................................................................................................... 6-4
Airplane Configuration.......................................................................................................... 6-4
Airplane Leveling .................................................................................................................. 6-5
Using the Permanent Reference Point................................................................................... 6-6
Measurements ........................................................................................................................ 6-7
Converting Measurements to Arms....................................................................................... 6-8
Weights and Computations.................................................................................................... 6-8
Example of Empty Center of Gravity (CG) Determination .................................................. 6-9
Changes in the Airplane’s Configuration ............................................................................6-10
Determining Location (FS) of Installed Equipment
in Relation to Datum.................................................................................................6-10
Weight and Balance Forms.........................................................................................6-10
Updating the Form......................................................................................................6-10
PROCEDURES FOR DETERMINING GROSS WEIGHT AND LOADED CG

Useful Load and Stations.....................................................................................................6-11
Baggage ...............................................................................................................................6-11
Baggage Configuration Table..............................................................................................6-12
Baggage Nets .......................................................................................................................6-12
Summary of Loading Stations .............................................................................................6-13
Computing the Loaded Center of Gravity (CG)..................................................................6-13
Sample Problem – Calculator Method .......................................................................6-14
Sample Problem – Graphical Method ........................................................................6-14
Weight and Balance Limitations .........................................................................................6-15
Other Weight Limitations ....................................................................................................6-16
Maximum Empty Weight ....................................................................................................6-16
Front Seat Moment Computations Graph ...........................................................................6-17
Rear Seat Moment Computations Graph.............................................................................6-17
Fuel Moment Computations Graph .....................................................................................6-18
Baggage Moment Computations Graph ..............................................................................6-18
Center of Gravity Envelope.................................................................................................6-19
EQUIPMENT LIST GENERAL ................................................................................................. 6-A1

Install Code ........................................................................................................................ 6- A1
Chapter Numbers ............................................................................................................... 6- A1
Flight Operations Requirements........................................................................................ 6- A1
Headsets ............................................................................................................................ 6- A1
EQUIPMENT FOR TYPES OF OPERATION LIST -APPENDIX A ..................................... 6-A3


Section 5
Chapters 21-24 .................................................................................................................... 6-A3

Chapter 25 ........................................................................................................................... 6-A7
Chapters 26-31 .................................................................................................................... 6-A9
Chapter 32 .........................................................................................................................6-A11
Chapter 33 .........................................................................................................................6-A12
Chapter 34 .........................................................................................................................6-A13
Chapter 35 .........................................................................................................................6-A17
Chapters 52-77 ..................................................................................................................6-A18
INSTALLED EQUIPMENT LIST (IEL) - APPENDIX B......................................................... 6-B1
TABULATED AFTER-MARKET EQUIPMENT LIST (TAMEL)

Follows IEL
WEIGHT & BALANCE RECORD ........................................................................ Follows TAMEL


Section 6
Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG) Weight & Balance - Equipment List
Section 6
Weight & Balance and Equipment List
INTRODUCTION
Weight and Balance Procedures – This section, after the introduction, is divided into three parts.
The first part contains procedures for determining the empty weight and empty center of gravity of
the airplane. Its use is intended primarily for mechanics and companies or individuals who make
modifications to the airplane. While the procedures are not directly applicable for day-to-day pilot
use, the information will give the owner or operator of the airplane an expanded understanding of the
weight and balance procedures.
The procedures for determining the empty weight and empty CG are excerpted from the
maintenance manual and included in this manual to aid those who need to compute this information
but do not have access to a maintenance manual. This section also contains procedures for
maintaining and updating weight and balance changes to the airplane. While a mechanic or others
who make changes to the airplane’s configuration normally update the section, the pilot, owner,
and/or operator of the airplane are responsible for ensuring that the information is maintained in a
current status. The last entry on this table should contain the current weight and moments for this
airplane.
The second part of this section is applicable to pilots, as it has procedures for determining the weight
and balance for each flight. This part details specific procedures for airplane loading, how loading
affects the center of gravity, plus a number of charts and graphs for determining the loaded center of
gravity.
For pilot purposes, in the Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG), the zero datum point is one inch aft of the
tip of the propeller spinner. All measurements from this point are positive or aft of the datum point
and are expressed in inches. The tip of the propeller is at -1 inch. It is important to remember that the
weight and balance for each airplane varies somewhat and depends on a number of factors. The
weight and balance information detailed in this manual only applies to the airplane specified on the
cover page.
This weight and balance information is part of the FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM).
Under the provision of Part 91 of the Federal Aviation Regulations no person can operate a civil
aircraft unless there is available in the aircraft a current AFM. It is the responsibility of the pilot-in-
command to ensure that the airplane is properly loaded.
Equipment List – The final portion of this section contains the equipment list. The equipment list
includes standard and optional equipment and specifies both the weight of the installed item and its
arm, i.e., distance from the datum. This information is useful in computing the new empty weight
and CG when items are temporarily removed for maintenance or other purposes. In addition,
equipment required for a particular flight operation is tabulated. The equipment is generally
organized and listed in accordance with ATA maintenance manual chapter numbering specifications.


Section 6
Weight & Balance Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG)
PROCEDURES FOR WEIGHING & DETERMINING

EMPTY CG
GENERAL
To determine the empty weight and center of gravity of the airplane, the airplane must be in a level
area and in a particular configuration.
AIRPLANE CONFIGURATION (Empty Weight)

1. The airplane empty weight includes eight quarts of oil (dipstick reading), unusable fuel,
hydraulic brake fluid, and installed equipment.
2. Defuel the airplane per instructions in Chapter 12 of the maintenance manual.
3. Ensure the oil sump is filled to eight quarts (cold engine). Check the reading on the dipstick
and service as necessary.
4. Place the pilot’s and front passenger’s seat in the full aft position.
5. Retract the flaps to the up or 0° position.
6. Center the controls to the neutral static position.
7. Ensure all doors, including the baggage door, are closed when the airplane is weighed.
CAUTION
It is not recommended to weigh an airplane with full fuel and subtract the
weight of the fuel to obtain empty weight because the weight of fuel varies with
temperature. If this method of weight determination is used, fuel weight
should be calculated conservatively. Use the specific weight of fuel at ambient
temperature. See table and example below.
6.4
6.2
Specific Weight, Lbs./U.S.
6
5.8
5.6
5.4
5.2
5
4.8
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Temperature, ºF
Average Specific Weight of Aviation Gasoline (Mil-F-5572 Grade 100/130 Type)

Versus Temperature
The following is offered as an example only. It is important to remember that the aircraft weight in
the example does not apply to a specific airplane.


Section 6
Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG) Weight & Balance
Example:
Unconservative Calculation
Conventionally used fuel specific weight (6 lbs./U. S. gal.)
Total Aircraft weight with fuel = 3038 lbs.
Weight of fuel (98 gal. x 6 lbs./U. S. gal.) = 588 lbs.
Airplane empty weight (3038 lbs – 588 lbs.) = 2450 lbs.
Conservative Calculation
Fuel specific weight at 60 ºF (5.83 lbs./U. S. gal.)
Total Aircraft weight with fuel = 3038 lbs.
Weight of fuel (98 gal. x 5.83 lbs./U. S. gal.) = 571 lbs.
Airplane empty weight (3038 lbs – 571 lbs.) = 2467 lbs.
AIRPLANE LEVELING
Because there are no perfectly level reference areas on the airplane and the use of Smart Levels is
not common, the airplane is leveled by use of a plumb bob suspended over a fixed reference point
under the rear seats. Moreover, since the use of jacks with load cells is not prevalent, the wheel
scales method is described in this manual. The following steps specify the procedures for installing
the plumb bob and leveling the airplane. These steps must be completed before taking readings from
the wheel scales.
1. The airplane must be weighed in a level area.
2. Remove the left rear seat cushion and place in the footwell. When the cushion is removed, a
small washer, which is bonded to the bottom of the seat frame, will be exposed.
Figure 6 - 1
3. Using a string with a plumb bob attached to it, run the string over the gas strut door flange
between the flange ball and the point where the gas strut attaches to the ball, and tie the string
off around the front seatbelt bracket. See Figure 6 - 1.
4. Using the two jack method (Raising Both Wings) discussed in Chapter 7 of the maintenance
manual, position the two main tires and the nose tire of the airplane on three scales. Ensure the
brakes are set before raising the airplane off the floor. When all of the airplane’s weight is on
the three scales, move the jacks to a location that is not under the wings. The pointed end of the
plumb bob, in a resting state, will be near a 3/16-inch washer bonded into the seat frame.
5. It will be necessary to either deflate the nose tire or strut and/or main tires to center the plumb
bob point over the washer. When the pointer of the plumb bob is over any part of the washer,
the airplane is level.
6. Once the airplane is level, be sure to release the brakes.


Section 6
USING THE PERMANENT REFERENCE POINT

1. To determine the empty weight center of gravity of the airplane, it is more convenient to work
with the permanent reference. The permanent reference point on the airplane is located at the
forward part of the wing bottom, in the center of the wing saddle and is 97.05 inches aft of the
datum. The location is shown in Figure 6 - 2. There is a pronounced seam at the point where
the fuselage is attached to the wing, and the leading edge of the wing bottom is easy to
identify. Suspend a plumb bob from the permanent reference point in the exact center as shown
in Figure 6 - 2 through Figure 6 - 4.
Reference
Point 97.05
Figure 6 - 2
2. Determine the center point on each tire, and make a chalked reference mark near the bottom
where the tire touches the floor. On the main gear tires, the mark should be on the inside, near
where the arrows point in Figure 6 - 3.


Section 6
NOSE GEAR TIRE
(MEASUREMENT B)
LATERAL REFERENCE
LINE BETWEEN MARKS
ON THE MAIN GEAR
TIRES FUSELAGE STATION 97.05
LOCATION OF PLUMB BOB
(MEASUREMENT A)
MAIN GEAR TIRES

CHALK MARKS
Figure 6 - 3
3. Create a lateral reference line between the two main gear tires. This can be accomplished by
stretching a string between the two chalk marked areas of the tires, snapping a chalk line
between these two points, or laying a 7.3 foot board between the points.
B A
Measmnt. Measmnt.
Figure 6 - 4


Section 6
MEASUREMENTS
Measure the distance along the longitudinal axis from the permanent reference point (tip of the
plumb bob) to the lateral reference line between the main gear tires. This is Measurement A in
Figure 6 - 3 and Figure 6 - 4. Measure the distance along the longitudinal axis between the plumb
bob to the mark on nose tire. This is Measurement B in Figure 6 - 3 and Figure 6 - 4.
CONVERTING MEASUREMENTS TO ARMS

To convert Measurement A and B distances to an arm, use the formulas shown in Figure 6 - 5 and
Figure 6 - 6, respectively.
MAIN GEAR
Measurement A Distance + 97.05 inches = Main Gear Arm
Figure 6 - 5
NOSE GEAR
97.05 inches - Measurement B Distance = Nose Gear Arm
Figure 6 - 6
WEIGHTS AND COMPUTATIONS

Each main gear scale should be capable of handling weight capacities of about 1200 lbs., while the
nose gear scale needs a capacity of at least 750 lbs. Computing the total weight and moments
requires seven steps or operations. These seven operations are discussed below and also shown in
Figure 6 - 7.
Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 No. 5
Scale Weight Reading Tare or Scale Corrected Arm Moments
(lbs.) Error Weight (lbs.) X =
Location (Inches) (lbs.- inches)
Right Main Right Scale Right Scale Wt. Main Gear Right Gear
Scale Error X =
Gear Reading ± Error Arm Moments
Left Main Left Scale Left Scale Wt. Main Gear Left Gear
Scale Error X =
Gear Reading ± Error Arm Moments
Nose Scale Nose Scale Wt. Nose Gear Nose Gear
Nose Gear Scale Error X =
Reading ± Error Arm Moments
Total Corrected Total Moments
Total Empty Weight and Empty Moments Weight
Operation No. 7
Operation No. 6
Figure 6 - 7
1. Operation No. 1 - Enter the weight for each scale into the second column.
2. Operation No. 2 - Enter the scale error. The scale error is sometimes referred to as the tare
and is entered in the third column for each scale.
3. Operation No. 3 - Add or subtract the respective tare for each scale, and enter the result into
the fourth column. This is the correct weight.


Section 6
4. Operation No. 4 - Using the formulas shown in Figure 6 - 5 and Figure 6 - 6, determine the
arm for the main gear and nose gear. Enter this information into the fifth column.
5. Operation No. 5 - Multiply the corrected scale weights times their respective arms to
determine the moments for each location. Enter the moments for each computation in the
sixth column.
6. Operation Nos. 6 and 7 – Sum the weights in the fourth column and the moments in the
sixth column. Note: The areas of primary calculations have a double outline.
7. The final step, which is to determine the empty center of gravity, is to divide the total
moments by the total corrected weight. A detailed example of this computation is shown in
Figure 6 - 9.
EXAMPLE OF EMPTY CENTER OF GRAVITY (CG) DETERMINATION

The following is offered as an example problem to aid in understanding the computation process. It
is important to remember that the weights, arms, and moments used in the example problem are for
demonstration purposes only and do not apply to a specific airplane. For the example problem,
assume the following.
1. Scale Weights
a. Right Main Gear – 992 pounds
b. Left Main Gear – 991 pounds
c. Nose Gear – 502 pounds
2. Scale Error (Tare)
a. Right Main Gear Scale is –1 pounds
b. Left Main Gear Scale is –2 pound
c. Nose Gear Scale is + 3 pounds
3. Measurements
a. Measurement Distance A is 24.05 inches
b. Measurement Distance B is 56.15 inches
c. These uncorrected scale weights and tares are shown in Figure 6 - 8. Note that after
correcting for scale error, the right, left, and nose gear weights are 991, 989, and 505
pounds, respectively.
d. The arm for the main gear is computed as follows using the formula in Figure 6 - 5.
Measurement distance A + 97.05 inches = Main Gear Arm (MGA)

or
24.05 inches + 97.05 inches = 121.1 inches MGA
4. The arm for the nose gear is computed as follows using the formula in Figure 6 - 6.
97.05 inches – Measurement Distance B = Nose Gear Arm (NGA)

or
97.05 inches – 56.15 inches = 40.9 inches NGA
5. The main and nose gear arms, as computed, are shown in Figure 6 - 8.
6. The corrected weights of 992 and 991 pounds are then multiplied with the 121.1 inch main
gear arm, which produces total moments of 120,010.1 lbs.-inches and 119,767.9 lbs.-inches,
respectively. It is not uncommon for the right and left gear weights to vary a few pounds.
7. Next, the corrected 502 pound nose gear weight is multiplied times its 40.9 inch arm, which
produces a moment value of 20,654.5 lbs.-inches.
8. Finally, the total moments and corrected weights are summed. In the example below, the total
weight is 2,485 pounds and the total moments are 260,432.5 lbs.-inches. All this information


Section 6
is summarized in Figure 6 - 8. All required data for determining the empty center of gravity
are now available.
Scale Weight Tare or Scale Corrected Arm Moments
Reading (lbs.) Error Weight (lbs.) X =
Location (Inches) (lbs.- inches)
Right Main
Gear 992 -1 991 X 121.1 = 120,010.1
Left Main
Gear 991 -2 989 X 121.1 = 119,767.9
Nose Gear 502 +3 +505 X 40.9 = +20,654.5
Total Empty Weight and Empty Moments 2485.0 260,432.5
Figure 6 - 8
9. The formula for determining empty weight center of gravity is shown in Figure 6 - 9; in the
example below, the empty center of gravity of the airplane is at fuselage station (FS) 104.8.
Total Moments Center 260,432.5 lbs.-inches

= of or 2695 = 104.8
Empty Weight Gravity
Figure 6 - 9
CHANGES IN THE AIRPLANE’S CONFIGURATION

1. Determining Location (FS) of Installed Equipment in Relation to the Datum – If
equipment is installed in the airplane, the weight and balance information must be updated.
Individuals and companies who are involved with equipment installations and/or
modifications are generally competent and conversant with weight and balance issues. These
individuals or companies must be aware that the fixed reference point is located at fuselage
station (FS) 97.05. Please see Figure 6 - 2 on page 6-6 for more information.
2. Weight and Balance Forms – There is a form that is inserted after Appendix A of Chapter 6
of the AFM/POH that is used to track changes in the configuration of the airplane. When
equipment is added or removed, these pages or an appropriate approved form must be
updated. In either instance the required information is similar.
3. Updating the Form – Fill in the date the item is added or removed, a description of the item,
the arm of the item, its weight, and the moment of the item. Remember, multiply the weight
times the arm of the item to obtain the moment. Finally, compute the new empty weight and
empty moment by adjusting the running totals. If an item is removed, subtract the weight and
moment of the item from the running totals. If an item is added, add the weight and moment
of the item to the running totals.


Section 6
PROCEDURES FOR DETERMINING GROSS WEIGHT

AND
LOADED CENTER OF GRAVITY (CG)
USEFUL LOAD AND STATIONS

The useful load is determined by subtracting the empty weight of the airplane from the maximum
allowable gross weight of 3600 pounds. The current information obtained from the Weight &
Balance Record in the previous discussion contains the empty weight and empty moments for this
airplane. The useful load includes the weight of pilot, passengers, usable fuel, and baggage.
The objective in good weight and balance planning is to distribute the useful load in a manner that
keeps the loaded center of gravity within prescribed limits and near the center of the CG range. The
center of gravity is affected by both the amount of weight added and the arm or distance from the
datum. The arm is sometimes expressed as a station. For example, if weight is added at station 110,
this means the added weight is 110 inches from the datum or zero reference point. The drawing
below, Figure 6 - 10, shows the location of passenger and baggage loading stations. The fuel is
loaded at station 118 and is not shown in the figure. These loading stations are summarized in Figure
6 - 12.
Figure 6 - 10
BAGGAGE
The space between the rear seat and the aft bulkhead is referred to as the main baggage area, and the
shelf aft of this area is called the hat rack or simply the shelf. In Figure 6 - 10 and Figure 6 - 12 there
are listings for three main area baggage stations, which are labeled A, M, and B. Area A is the
forward baggage zone and area B is the aft baggage zone. Point M is the middle point of the
baggage compartment. The arm for the shelf is measured from the datum point to the center portion
of the shelf.
Since the main baggage area, exclusive of the hat rack, is about three and one half feet in length,
consideration must be given to the arm of weights placed within this area. The use of multiple
baggage loading stations contribute to more precise center of gravity computations and facilitate
redistribution of baggage when the aft CG limit is exceeded. If no weight is placed on the hat rack,
then up to 120 lbs. can be placed in either zone or distributed evenly over the main baggage area.
This, of course, assumes that the placement of such weight does not exceed the maximum gross
weight or the center of gravity limitations.


Section 6
The floor attachment points define the physical limits of each zone. That is, the area between the
forward and middle cross strap defines Zone A, and the middle cross strap and aft attachment points
define Zone B. There is a cargo net in the airplane that secures the contents in the baggage
compartment in three basic configurations. The table below, Figure 6 - 11, summarizes the three
different arrangements. The term “bubble” refers to the shape of the cargo net.
BAGGAGE CONFIGURATION TABLE

NO. ZONE CONFIGURATION OF CARGO NET APPLICABLE ARM
Single forward bubble, anchored at the

1. A Only 155.7 inches
forward and middle attachment points.
Double bubble, anchored at forward, middle, 155.7 and 177.4 inches

2. A and B
and aft attachment points times respective weights
Weight is evenly distributed over the main

Main baggage area. There can be one or two
3. 166.6 inches
Area bubbles depending on the shape of the
baggage.
Figure 6 - 11
Baggage is always loaded in the forward area first (Zone A). Heavier items, of course, should be
placed near the floor, regardless of loading area, and never load the baggage compartment to a level
higher than the top of the hat rack. If only Zone A is utilized, the computations are based on an arm
of 155.7 inches. If both Zones A and B are utilized, with defined weights in each area as shown in
Configuration No. 2 in Figure 6 - 11, two computations will be made to determine the total baggage
weight and moments.
In this situation, each zone will have a significantly different quantifiable weight. For example,
assume that 100 lbs. are loaded in Zone A and 20 lbs. in Zone B. These combined weights and
respective arms produce a baggage CG of 159.3, over seven inches forward of the middle point of
the baggage area. Conversely, if the respective Zone A and B weights are 55 and 65 lbs., the
baggage CG moves less than one inch from the middle CG point. As a general rule, if the weights
placed in Zones A and B do not vary more than 15%, then the middle CG arm of 166.6 can be used
to compute the main baggage area moment.
BAGGAGE NETS
The airplane has two baggage nets. The hat rack net secures items placed on the hat rack. The floor
net secures items in the main baggage area. A summary of the two nets follows.
1. The floor net provides a total of four anchoring points. The points are all on the floor with
two behind the back seat and two just below the hat rack bulkhead. In addition, the floor net
can be adjusted at any one of the four straps at the attachment points by pressing on the cinch
and sliding the strap. The net can be removed by releasing each of the four attachments by
pressing down and holding on the button on the top of the attachment and sliding it out of its
mount. The net can be reinstalled by reversing the removal process. The floor net must be
used any time baggage is carried in the main baggage compartment area.
2. The hat rack net is attached at four points, two in the overhead and two on the face of the
hat rack bulkhead. The net is not adjustable. To remove the net, unhook each of the four
hook attachments from the mounting slot. To attach the net, hook each of the four hook
attachments into the mounting slot. This net must be used anytime items are stored in the hat
rack area.


Section 6
SUMMARY OF LOADING STATIONS
Arm
Description Maximum Weight
(Inches From Datum)
Front Seat Pilot and Passenger 110.0 inches N/A
Rear Seat Passenger(s) 141.4 inches N/A
Fuel 118.0 inches 588 Lbs. (98 Gallons)*
Forward Baggage Area (Zone A) 155.7 inches 120 Lbs.
Middle of Baggage Area (Point M) 166.6 inches 120 Lbs.
Aft Baggage Area (Zone B) 177.4 inches 120 Lbs.
Center Rear Baggage Shelf 199.8 inches 20 Lbs.†
*Usable Fuel (The 8 gallons of unusable fuel is included in the empty weight.)
†The maximum total allowed baggage weight is 120 lbs., and only 20 lbs. of this total
allowable weight can be placed on the rear baggage shelf. The weight of items placed
on the rear shelf must be subtracted from 120 lbs. of total allowable baggage weight.
Figure 6 - 12
COMPUTING THE LOADED CENTER OF GRAVITY (CG)

All information required to compute the center of gravity as loaded with passengers, baggage, and
fuel is now available. Refer to the sample-loading problem in Figure 6 - 13. This table is divided
into two sections; the first section contains a sample-loading problem with computations, and the
second section provides space for actual calculations. It is recommended that the second section of
this table be copied or otherwise duplicated so that the pilot has an unmarked document with which
to perform the required calculations.
In the sample problem, multiplying the weight of a particular item, i.e., pilot, passengers, baggage
and fuel, times its arm, computes the moment for that item. The moments and weight are then
summed with the basic empty weight and the empty moment of the airplane. In the example, these
totals are 3,450 pounds and 377,788 moments. The loaded center of gravity of 109.5 inches is then
determined by dividing the total moments by the gross weight.


Section 6
CALCULATOR METHOD
Sample Problem Actual Calculation

Calculator Method For This Airplane
WT. ARM MOMENTS WT. ARM MOMENTS
ITEM ITEM
(Lbs.) (Inches) (lbs.-in.) (Lbs.) (Inches) (lbs.-in.)
Basic Empty Wt.** 2,485 260,433 Basic Empty Wt.
Front Seat Wts. 380 110.0 41,800 Front Seats 110.0
Rear Seats Wts. 175 141.4 24,745 Rear Seats 141.4
Baggage (Main) 50 166.6 8,330 Baggage (Main)* 166.6
Baggage (Zone A) 0 155.7 0 Baggage (Zone A)* 155.7
Baggage (Zone B) 0 177.4 0 Baggage (Zone B)* 177.4
Baggage (Shelf) 0 199.8 0 Baggage (Aft) 199.8
Fuel (At 6 lbs./gal.) 360 118.0 42,480 Fuel (At 6 lbs./gal.) 118.0
Totals 3,450 377,788 Totals
377,788 lbs. − in. lbs.−in.

=109.5 inches = inches
3,450 lbs. lbs.
*When computing baggage moment, use the arm for either the Main Baggage Area, Zone A, or Zones A and B as
applicable. Refer to the Baggage discussion on page 6-76 for more information. In this example, the weight is
evenly distributed over the main baggage area.
**NOTE
The basic empty weight used in this example will vary for each airplane. Refer to the
Weight and Balance Record, which follows Appendix A of this section.
Figure 6 - 13
GRAPHICAL METHOD
The multiplying graphs, which begin on page 6-17, can be used to determine the moments for each
weight location. The answer is not as accurate as doing the calculation with a calculator; however,
the margin of error is not significant and within acceptable parameters of safety. The example
arrows in the graphs on pages 6-17 and 6-18 use the data from the sample problem in Figure 6 - 13.
When using the multiplying graphs, it is more convenient to divide the moments on the Y or vertical
axis by 1000. For example, 70,000 lbs.-in. is read as 70.0 (x 1000) lbs.-in. Once all the calculations
are made, the answer can then be multiplied by 1000. The numbers shown in Figure 6 - 14 are
moment values obtained by reading directly from the graphs and are expressed as 1000 lbs.-in. It
should be noted that there is a nominal difference in center of gravity location between the two
procedures.


Section 6
SAMPLE PROBLEM GRAPHICAL METHOD

(Using moments obtained from the Graphs)*
ITEM WT. (Lbs.) MOMENTS (1000 lbs.-in. )
Basic Empty Wt. 2,485 260.4 (Figure 6 - 8)
Front Seat Wts. 380 42.0* (Figure 6 - 15)
Rear Seats Wts. 175 25.0* (Figure 6 - 17)
Baggage (Main) 50 8.3* (Figure 6 - 19)
Baggage (Shelf) 0 0.0* (Figure 6 - 19)
Fuel (At 6 lbs./gal.) 360 42.0* (Figure 6 - 18)
Totals 3,450 377.7 x 1000 = 377,700
377,700 lbs. − in,

=109.5 inches
3,450 lbs.
Figure 6 - 14
WEIGHT AND BALANCE LIMITATIONS

As its name suggests, weight and balance limitations have two components, a weight limitation and
a balance or center of gravity limitation. The maximum gross weight of the airplane is 3600 pounds.
This is the first limitation that must be considered in weight and balance preflight planning. If the
gross weight is more than 3600 pounds, then fuel, baggage, and/or passenger weight must be
reduced. Once the gross weight is at or below 3600 pounds, consideration is then made for
distribution of the weight.
The objective in dealing with the balance limitation is to ensure that the center of gravity is within
prescribed ranges at the specified gross weight. The center of gravity range is referred to as the
“envelope.” The center of gravity envelope graph on page 6-19 shows the envelope for the Columbia
400 (LC41-550FG). Using data from the sample problem in Figure 6 - 14, a CG of 109.5 inches at
3450 lbs. gross weight indicates the airplane, as loaded, is within the envelope.
If the center of gravity is outside the envelope, the airplane is not safe to fly. If the range is exceeded
to the left of the envelope, then the airplane is nose heavy and weight must be redistributed with
more to the aft position. Conversely, if the range is exceeded to the right of the envelope, then the
airplane is tail heavy and weight must be redistributed with more to the forward position. Notice that
the range of the envelope decreases as weight increases. At 3600 lbs. maximum gross weight, the
range of the envelope is 108.8 inches to 112 inches, a range of 3.2 inches. At 2900 lb. gross weight,
the range increases to 7 inches.


Section 6
OTHER WEIGHT LIMITATIONS
TYPE OF WEIGHT FORWARD DATUM AFT DATUM POINT VARIATION

LIMITATION POINT AND WEIGHT AND WEIGHT
Minimum Flying Weight 105 inches and 2600 lbs. 112 inches and 2900 lbs. Straight Line
Maximum Zero Fuel Weight 107.2 inches and 3300 lbs. 112 inches and 3300 lbs. Straight Line
Reference Datum: The reference datum is located one inch aft of the tip of the propeller spinner. As
distance from the datum increases, there is an increase in weight for each of the two limitation categories.
The variation is linear or straight line from the fore to the aft positions.
Figure 6 - 15
MAXIMUM EMPTY WEIGHT

The maximum empty weight of the Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG) is 2708 pounds. The FAA
requires the determination of this weight for FAA certification. For airplanes certified in the IFR
utility category, a passenger weight of 190 pounds for each seat plus the fuel weight for 45 minutes
of flight are used for this computation. This equates to 132 pounds of fuel and 760 pounds of
passenger weight for a total of 892 pounds. For the purpose of this discussion, the 892 pounds is
referred to as the minimum useful load. Subtracting the minimum useful load from the maximum
gross weight of 3600 pounds produces the maximum empty weight of 2708 pounds.
The maximum empty weight is not an abstract concept as it has practical applications. For example,
assuming an empty weight of 2485 pounds, the 223 pound difference between the empty weight and
the maximum empty weight defines the maximum additional weight of optional equipment that can
be added to the airplane.


Section 6
Front Seat Moment Computations

50000
40000
Moments (lbs.-in.)
30000
20000
10000
0
100 150 200 250 300 350 400
Weight (lbs.)
Figure 6 - 16
Rear Seat Moment Computations

60000
50000
Moments (lbs.-in.)
40000
30000
20000
10000
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450
Weight (lbs.)
Figure 6 - 17


Section 6
Fuel Moment Computations

80000
80 Gals.
70000
Moments (lbs.-in.)
60000 60 Gals.
50000
40000
30000
20000
10000 40 Gals.
0
100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
Weight (lbs.)
Figure 6 - 18
Baggage Moment Computations

25000
20000 Zone B Baggage

Moments (lbs.-in.)
15000
Zone A
Baggage
10000
Shelf Main Baggage

5000
0
0 25 50 75 100
Weight (lbs.)
Figure 6 - 19


Section 6
COLUMBIA 400 (LC41-550FG) WEIGHT AND BALANCE ENVELOPE
WEIGHT AND CG ENVELOPE LC41-550FG
3900
3800
3700
3600
3500
Max. Landing Weight
3400
2 Max Zero Fuel Weight
3300
WEIGHT (LBS)
3200 3
3100
3000
2900
M.E.W.
2800
2700 1
M.F.W.
2600
2500
2400
2300
103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114
CG FS (INCH)
Figure 6 - 20
1. Airplane basic empty weight must be below Maximum Empty Weight (M.E.W.).
2. Weight must be below Maximum Landing Weight (M.L.W.) for landing. (If overweight
landing occurs, see maintenance manual for required inspection prior to further flight.)
3. Weight and Center of Gravity (CG) without fuel must be below the Maximum Zero Fuel
Weight (M.Z.F.W.) line.
4. See Section 2 for a listing of weight limitations.


Section 6


(APPENDIX A) Section 6 (Appendix A)
Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG) Equipment – Types of Operation
EQUIPMENT FOR TYPES OF OPERATION
Install Code – The following pages contain a listing of equipment that can be installed in the
airplane; this is indicated in the Install Code column by the letters B and O. The meaning of each
letter code follows.
• B (Basic Equipment) – The equipment is installed in all airplanes.

• O (Optional Equipment) – This equipment can be installed at the factory at the option of the
purchaser.
Chapter Numbers – The chapter numbers listed in the equipment list correspond to the
maintenance manual chapter where information regarding the maintenance of the part can be found.
Flight Operation Requirements – There is certain minimum equipment for IFR and night
operations. Some equipment is required for all flight operations, while other items are optional.
Columns four through seven, under the subheading Flight Operation Requirements, identifies which
equipment must be installed and functioning for the various flight conditions.
Headsets – Use of the communications equipment requires a headset with a boom mike. Headsets
are optional items and not provided by the manufacturer since personal preference is a significant
issue. The pilot should add the actual weight of the headset to his or her weight and, when
applicable, to each passenger’s weight for weight and balance calculations.

Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006 6A-1

Section 6 (Appendix A) (APPENDIX A)
Equipment – Types of Operation Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG)

6A-2 Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006

EQUIPMENT FOR TYPES OF OPERATION LIST

Columbia 400
A shaded box in one of the four Flight Operation
All – Required for all flight operations IFR – Required for IFR flight operations Requirements columns indicates the requirement

for that item.
Night – Required for night flight Opt. – Optional, not required for flight
operations operations
Item Install Item Flight Operation Requirements
No. Code All Night IFR Opt.
CHAPTERS 21-24
21-01 B Front Seat Eyeball Vents
21-02 B Rear Seat Eyeball Vents
21-03 B ECS Cabin Fan
21-04 B ECS Heat Box
21-05 B ECS Servomotor
21-06 O Automatic Climate Control System Control Panel/ECS Control Panel
21-07 O Compressor Belt Guard
21-08 O Compressor to Firewall Refrigerant Hoses
21-09 O Compressor Assembly (Engine Driven)
21-10 O Compressor Assembly (Electrically Driven)
21-11 O Fuselage Wire Harness


Columbia 400

for that item.
CHAPTERS 21-24
21-12 O Evaporator Assembly
21-13 O A/C Bay Access Panel
21-14 O Firewall to Condenser and Evaporator Hoses
21-15 O Condenser to Expansion Valve Hoses
21-16 O Condenser Assembly and Seals
21-17 O ECU/Blower Module
21-18 O Rear Mounted Relays
21-19 O Interlock Assembly
21-20 O Receiver Dryer and associated hoses
21-21 O Cabin Temperature Sensor and Wiring
21-22 O Outside Temperature Sensor
21-23 O Defog/Floor Vent Valve Assembly


Columbia 400

for that item.
CHAPTERS 21-24
21-24 O ECS Shut-off Valve Assembly
22-01 O GSM 85 Pitch Servo Mount
22-02 O GSA 81 Pitch Servo
22-03 O GSM 85 Roll Servo Mount
22-04 O GSA 81 Roll Servo
22-05 O GTA 82 Pitch Trim Adapter
23-01 B Static Wicks Ailerons/Wings (4)
23-02 B Static Wicks Elevator/Horizontal Stabilizer (4)
23-03 B Static Wick Rudder (1)


Columbia 400

for that item.
23-04 B GMA 1347 Audio Panel See1
23-05 B GMA 1347 Mounting Rack with Connector
23-06 B G1000 Fan Rack, (2) (Each)
23-07 B GCF 328 Cooling Fan (2) (Each)
23-08 B GCF 328 Cooling Fan (Avionics)
24-01 B Belt-driven Alternator 65 Amp 28 Volt
24-02 B Gear-driven Alternator 52 Amp 28 Volt
24-03 O Accessories Alternator
24-04 B Batteries 28 Volt, 7.5 Amp-hour, Lead-acid (2) (Each)
24-05 B Voltage Regulators, 28 Volt (2) (Each)
24-06 B Ground Power Plug Relay
1 If an ILS approach will be used during IFR operations, then the audio panel and PFD must be operative.


Columbia 400

for that item.
CHAPTERS 21-24
24-07 B Ground Power Plug Socket
24-08 B Ground Power Plug Wiring
24-09 B Power Grid Panel
CHAPTERS 25
25-01 B Artex ELT-200 Emergency Locator Transmitter Unit
25-02 B Artex ELT-ME406 Emergency Locator Transmitter Unit
25-03 B ELT Antenna
25-04 B Circuit Breaker Panel
25-05 B Flap/Rocker Switch Panel
25-06 B Ignition Switch/Primer Switch Panel


Columbia 400

for that item.
25-07 B Light Dimmer Switch Panel
25-08 B GCU 476 Keypad Controller
25-09 B Pilot’s Adjustable Seat
25-10 B Copilot’s Adjustable Seat
25-11 B Rear Seat Cushion
25-12 B Rear Seatback Cushion
25-13 O Oregon Aero Pilot’s Seat w/Thin Bottom Cushion2
25-14 O Oregon Aero Pilot’s Seat w/Medium Bottom Cushion2
25-15 O Oregon Aero Pilot’s Seat w/Thick Bottom Cushion2
25-16 O Oregon Aero Copilot’s Seat w/Thin Bottom Cushion2
2 If installed, must be installed via STC SA01597SE. Only one pilot’s and copilot’s seat assembly per aircraft.


Columbia 400
for that item.

2
25-17 O Oregon Aero Copilot’s Seat w/Medium Bottom Cushion
25-18 O Oregon Aero Copilot’s Seat w/Thick Bottom Cushion2
25-19 O Oregon Aero Rear Seat Cushion (2) (Each) 2
25-20 O Oregon Aero Rear Seatback Cushion (2) (Each) 2
25-21 B Pilot’s and Copilot’s Three-Point Restraint (Each)
25-22 B Rear Seat Passengers’ Three-Point Restraint (Each)
25-23 B Baggage Tie Downs and Restraining Net See3 See3
25-24 B POH and FAA AFM (Stowed in Copilot’s Seatback)
25-25 B Garmin G1000 Cockpit Reference Guide (Latest Revision)
25-26 O Carbon Monoxide Detector
25-27 B Instrument Panel
3 Baggage tie downs and a restraining net are required if baggage is carried in the baggage compartment.


Columbia 400
for that item.

25-28 B G1000 System Racks (2) (Each)
25-29 B CHIPS Harness Assembly (2) (Each)
25-30 B Sandia Relay
CHAPTER 26-31
27-01 B Pilot’s Control Stick
27-02 B Pilot’s Rudder Pedals (2) (Each)
27-03 B Copilot’s Control Stick See 4
27-04 B Copilot’s Rudder Pedals (2) (Each) See 4
30-01 O Propeller Heat Module with Harness
30-02 O Brush Block Assembly
4 The right side controls may be removed provided permanent-type covers are placed over all openings from which the controls were removed and
the procedure is approved and documented in the airframe logbooks by an appropriately certificated A & P mechanic.


Columbia 400
for that item.

30-03 O Blade Heaters and Hardware
31-01 B Flight Hour Meter
CHAPTER 32
32-01 B Main Wheel, Brake and Tire 15x6.00-6 (6-Ply)/Side
32-02 B Main Gear Fairings (Each)
32-03 B Main Wheel Fairings (Each)
32-04 B Main Wheel Fairings Mounting Plate (2) (Each)
32-05 B Nose Strut Fairing
32-06 B Nose Wheel Fairing
32-07 B Nose Gear Assembly
32-08 B Nose Wheel, Tire and Tube 5.00-5 (10-Ply)
CHAPTER 33
33-01 B Flip Lights


Columbia 400
for that item.

33-02 B Step Lights
33-03 B Overhead Reading Lights (4)
33-04 B Strobe Lights/ Position Lights
33-05 B Whelen Landing Light See 5
33-06 O Xenon Landing Light See 5
33-07 O Xenon Landing Light Ballast See 5
33-08 B Taxi Light
5 A landing light is required if the airplane is used to carry passengers for hire.


Columbia 400

for that item.
CHAPTER 34
34-01 B Garmin GPS Antenna (2) (Each) See 6 See 6
34-02 B Marker Beacon Antenna See 6 See 6
34-03 B COMM 1 Antenna
34-04 B COMM 2 Antenna
34-05 B NAV Antenna
34-06 B Transponder Antenna
34-07 B Magnetic Compass
6 If an ILS approach will be used during IFR operations, then the GMA 340 audio panel and remote marker beacon lights must be operative.


Columbia 400

for that item.
34-07 B Magnetic Compass
34-08 B Stall Warning Lift Transducer
34-09 B Stall Warning Horn
34-10 B Heated Pitot Tube
34-11 B Precise Flight Speed Brake 2000 System – Wing Units ( 2) (Each)
34-12 B Precise Flight Speed Brake 2000 System – Computer
34-13 O TCAD Processor
34-14 O TCAD Transponder Coupler
34-15 O TCAD Top Antenna
34-16 O TCAD Bottom Antenna
34-17 B GTP 59 OAT Probe


Columbia 400

for that item.
34-18 B GRS 77 mounting rack and connectors
34-19 B GRS 77 AHRS
34-20 B GMU 44 Magnetometer with mounting and connectors
34-21 B GDU 1040 PFD with connector
34-22 B GDU 1042 MFD with connector
34-23 B GIA 63 Mounting Rack with connectors (2) (Each)
34-24 B GIA 63 No. 1 Comm/Nav/GPS/AP Computer See 7 See 7
34-25 B GIA 63 No. 2 Comm/Nav/GPS/AP Computer See 7 See 7
34-26 B GDC 74A Mounting Rack with Connectors
34-27 B GDC 74A Air Data Computer
7 A single GIA 63 is acceptable for VFR operations, however the autopilot will not be functional unless both units are operating.


Columbia 400

for that item.
34-28 B GEA 71 Mounting Rack with Connectors
34-29 B GEA 71 Engine Airframe Unit
34-30 B GDL 69A Mounting Rack with Connectors
34-31 B GDL 69A Data Link
34-32 B GA 55 XM Antenna
34-33 B GTX 33 Mounting Rack with Connectors
34-34 B GTX 33 Transponder
34-35 B Standby Airspeed Indicator See 8
34-36 B Standby Altimeter See 8
34-37 B Standby Electric Attitude Indicator
8 At least one airspeed indicator and altimeter must be operational, i.e., either the PFD or the standby indicator.


Columbia 400

for that item.
CHAPTER 35
35-01 B Regulator Valve Assembly See 9 See 9 See 9 See 9
35-02 B Cabin Distribution Manifold Assembly See 9 See 9 See 9 See 9
35-03 B Face Mask (Rear Passengers) (2) See 9 See 9 See 9 See 9
35-04 B Face Mask with microphone (1) See 9 See 9 See 9 See 9
35-05 B Face Mask (Front Passenger) (1) See 9 See 9 See 9 See 9
35-06 B Bottle 1 with manifold See 9 See 9 See 9 See 9
9 Oxygen is required for the pilot above 12,500 ft for flight time exceeding 30 minutes and above 14,000 ft for the duration of the flight above 14,000
ft. Oxygen is required for passengers above 15,000 ft.


Columbia 400

for that item.
CHAPTER 52-77
53-01 B Cabin Entry Steps (Each) 10
53-02 O Cabin Entry Handles (Each)
61-01 B Propeller
61-02 B Propeller Spinner
61-03 B Propeller Governor
71-01 B Starter Motor
71-02 B Engine Intake Filter
77-01 B TSIO-550-C TCM Engine Complete
10 The step is included in the basic package; however, some owners/operators elect to not have it installed since it lowers cruise speed slightly.

(APPENDIX B) Section 6 (Appendix B)
Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG) Installed Equipment List
INSTALLED EQUIPMENT LIST (IEL)

Equipment List NXXXX ─ S/N 41XXX ─ Date A/C was weighed ─ XXXX
Item
Installed Item Weight Arm
No

21-01 9 Front Seat Eyeball Vents (2) (Each) 0.22 79.0
21-02 9 Rear Seat Eyeball Vents (2) (Each) 0.18 130.4
21-03 9 ECS Cabin Fan 2.05 63.43
21-04 9 ECS Heat Box 2.44 63.43
21-05 9 ECS Servomotor 0.26 63.43
21-06 Automatic Climate Control System Control Panel 0.30 84.0
21-07 Compressor Belt Guard 0.33 60.0
21-08 Compressor to Firewall Refrigerant Hoses 2.26 60.0
21-09 Compressor Assembly (Engine Driven) 14.92 56.5
21-10 Compressor Assembly (Electrically Driven) 14.2 194.02
21-11 Fuselage Wire Harness 3.52 109.48
21-12 Evaporator Assembly 10.68 186.0
21-13 A/C Bay Access Panel 2.04 174.0
21-14 Firewall to Condenser and Evaporator Hoses 3.69 125.56
21-15 Condenser to Expansion Valve Hoses 0.62 164.2
21-16 Condenser Assembly and Seals 11.14 174.0
21-17 ECU/Blower Module 0.44 188.0

Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006 6B-1
Section 6 (Appendix B) (APPENDIX B)
Installed Equipment List Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG)

Item
No

21-18 Rear Mounted Relays 0.28 188.0
21-19 Interlock Assembly 8.1 195.44
21-20 Receiver Dryer and associated hoses 1.7 149.0
21-21 Cabin Temperature Sensor and Wiring 0.08 82.0
21-22 Outside Temperature Sensor 0.2 168.0
21-23 Defog/Floor Vent Valve Assembly 0.83 69.0
21-24 ECS Shut-off Valve Assembly 0.93 68.0
22-01 GSM 85 Pitch Servo Mount 1.41 206.0.
22-02 GSA 81 Pitch Servo 2.23 206.0
22-03 GSM 85 Roll Servo Mount 1.41 133.0
22-04 GSA 81 Roll Servo 2.23 133.0
22-05 GTA 82 Pitch Trim Adapter 1.3 83.5
23-01 9 Static Wicks Ailerons/Wings (4) (Each) .018 140
23-02 9 Static Wicks Elevator/Horizontal Stabilizer (4) (Each) .018 279.4
23-03 9 Static Wick Rudder (1) .018 301.3
23-04 9 GMA 1347 Audio Panel 1.7 80.84
23-05 9 GMA 1347 Mounting Rack with Connector 0.7 80.84

6-B2 Latest Revision Level/Date: C/10-10-2006

Item
No

23-06 9 G1000 Fan Rack, (2) (Each) 0.58 79.48
23-07 9 GCF 328 Cooling Fan (2) (Each) 1.40 79.48
23-08 9 GCF 328 Cooling Fan (Avionics) 0.70 84.0
24-01 9 Belt-driven Alternator 65 amp 28 volt 13.02 22.6
24-02 9 Gear-driven Alternator 52 amp 28 volt 12.8 28.0
24-03 Accessories Alternator 18.16 57.87
24-04 9 Batteries 28 Volt, 7.5 Amp-hour, Lead-acid (2) (Each) 18.0 204.5
24-05 9 Voltage Regulator, 28 Volt (2) (Each) 3.0 70.0
24-06 9 Ground Power Plug Relay 0.9 159.0
24-07 9 Ground Power Plug Socket 0.8 153.0
24-08 9 Ground Power Plug Wiring 1.2 156.0
24-09 9 Power Grid Panel 10.6 159.20
25-01 9 Artex ELT-200 Emergency Locator Transmitter Unit 2.47 215
25-02 9 Artex ELT-ME406 Emergency Locator Transmitter Unit 2.46 215
25-03 9 ELT Antenna 0.11 217.1
25-04 9 Circuit Breaker Panel 3.9 89.5
25-05 9 Flap/Rocker Switch Panel 0.7 89.50


Item
No

25-06 9 Ignition Switch/Primer Switch Panel 0.5 89.0
25-07 9 Light Dimmer Switch Panel 0.14 110.36
25-08 9 GCU 476 Keypad Controller 0.72 99.75
25-09 Pilot’s Adjustable Seat 24.0 106.6
25-10 Copilot’s Adjustable Seat 24.0 106.6
25-11 Rear Seat Cushion (2) (Each) 5.7 134.9
25-12 Rear Seatback Cushion (2) (Each) 11.3 150.2
25-13 Oregon Aero Pilot’s Seat w/Thin Bottom Cushion* 27.25 106.6
25-14 Oregon Aero Pilot’s Seat w/Medium Bottom Cushion* 28.07 106.6
25-15 Oregon Aero Pilot’s Seat w/Thick Bottom Cushion* 28.62 106.6
25-16 Oregon Aero Copilot’s Seat w/Thin Bottom Cushion* 27.25 106.6
25-17 Oregon Aero Copilot’s Seat w/Medium Bottom Cushion* 28.07 106.6
25-18 Oregon Aero Copilot’s Seat w/Thick Bottom Cushion* 28.62 106.6
25-19 Oregon Aero Rear Seat Cushion (2) (Each)* 6.15 134.9
25-20 Oregon Aero Rear Seatback Cushion (2) (Each)* 12.25 150.2
* If installed, must be installed via STC SA01597SE. Only one
Pilot’s and copilot’s seat assembly per aircraft


Item
No

25-21 9 Pilot’s and Copilot’s Three Point Restraint (2) (Each) 1.82 128.5
25-22 9 Rear Seat Passengers’ Three Point Restraint (2) (Each) 1.76 145.7
25-23 9 Baggage Tie Downs and Restraining Net 1.51 175.0
25-24 9 POH and FAA AFM (Stowed in Copilot’s Seatback) 1.34 128.5
25-25 9 Garmin G1000 Cockpit Reference Guide (Latest Revision) 1.6 128.5
25-26 9 Carbon Monoxide Detector 0.22 68.19
25-27 9 Instrument Panel 8.94 87.0
25-28 9 G1000 System Racks (2) (Each) 0.84 80.86
25-29 9 CHIPS Harness Assembly (2) (Each) 1.60 79.87
25-30 9 Sandia Relay 1.38 84.25
26-01 9 Fire Extinguisher Unit 3.56 88.0
26-02 9 Fire Extinguisher Mounting Bracket 0.32 89.8
27-01 9 Pilot’s Control Stick 1.59 91.4
27-02 9 Pilot’s Rudder Pedals (2) (Each) 1.0 71.6
27-03 9 Copilot’s Control Stick 1.59 91.4
27-04 9 Copilot’s Rudder Pedals (2) (Each) 1.0 71.6
30-01 Propeller Heat Module with Harness 0.97 75.0


Item
No

30-02 Brush Block Assembly 0.25 22.6
30-03 Blade Heaters and Hardware 1.0 14.0
31-01 9 Flight Hour Meter 0.13 78.0
32-01 9 Main Wheel, Brake and Tire 15x6.00-6 (6-Ply)/Side 18.4 122.1
32-02 9 Main Gear Fairings (2) (Each) 2.4 131.7
32-03 9 Main Wheel Fairings (2) (Each) 3.9 122.1
32-04 9 Main Wheel Fairings Mounting Plate (Each) 0.4 122.1
32-05 9 Nose Strut Fairing 0.76 40.89
32-06 9 Nose Wheel Fairing 1.89 40.89
32-07 9 Nose Gear Assembly 12.0 40.89
32-08 9 Nose Wheel, Tire, and Tube 5.00-5 (10-ply) 14.8 40.89
33-01 9 Flip Lights (2) (Each) .02 116.0
33-02 9 Step Lights (2) (Each) 0.05 150.0
33-03 9 Overhead Reading Lights (4) (Each) 0.12 102.62
33-04 9 Strobe Lights/ Position Lights 0.54 135.9
33-05 Whelen Landing Light 0.29 102.4
33-06 9 Xenon Landing Light 0.52 102.4


Item
No

33-07 9 Xenon Landing Light Ballast 0.84 111.08
33-08 9 Taxi Light 0.29 102.4
34-01 9 Garmin GPS Antenna (2) (Each) 0.36 226.4
34-02 9 Marker Beacon Antenna 0.45 120.5
34-03 9 COMM 1 Antenna 0.56 164.0
34-04 9 COMM 2 Antenna 0.56 199.0
34-05 9 NAV Antenna 0.41 276.5
34-06 9 Transponder Antenna 0.3 111.5
34-07 9 Magnetic Compass 0.75 76.0
34-08 9 Stall Warning Lift Transducer 0.24 99.5
34-09 9 Stall Warning Horn 0.19 129.74
34-10 9 Heated Pitot Tube 0.39 117.7
34-11 9 Precise Flight SpeedBrakeTM 2000 System - Wing Units (2) (Each) 4.0 124.0
34-12 9 Precise Flight SpeedBrakeTM 2000 System – Computer 0.5 147.0
34-13 TCAD Processor 6.8 153.42
34-14 TCAD Transponder Coupler 0.5 75.0
34-15 TCAD Top Antenna 0.66 142.87


Item
No

34-16 TCAD Bottom Antenna 0.75 129.74
34-17 9 GTP 59 OAT Probe 0.23 119.5
34-18 9 GRS 77 mounting rack and connectors 0.63 70.0
34-19 9 GRS 77 AHRS 2.40 70.0
34-20 9 GMU 44 Magnetometer with mounting and connectors 0.50 118.0
34-21 9 GDU 1040 PFD with connector 6.70 83.82
34-22 9 GDU 1042 MFD with connector 6.70 83.82
34-23 9 GIA 63 Mounting Rack with connectors (2) (Each) 1.80 77.92
34-24 9 GIA 63 No. 1 Comm/Nav/GPS/AP Computer 4.90 77.92
34-25 9 GIA 63 No. 2 Comm/Nav/GPS/AP Computer 4.90 77.92
34-26 9 GDC 74A Mounting Rack with Connectors 0.35 78.25
34-27 9 GDC 74A Air Data Computer 1.69 78.25
34-28 9 GEA 71 Mounting Rack with Connectors 0.78 78.38
34-29 9 GEA 71 Engine Airframe Unit 1.75 78.38
34-30 9 GDL 69A Mounting Rack with Connectors 0.97 78.38
34-31 9 GDL 69A Data Link 1.86 78.38
34-32 9 GA 55 XM Antenna 0.36 226.4


Item
No

34-33 9 GTX 33 Mounting Rack with Connectors 0.8 77.73
34-34 9 GTX 33 Transponder 3.10 77.73
34-35 9 Standby Airspeed Indicator 1.00 82.55
34-36 9 Standby Altimeter 0.81 82.40
34-37 9 Standby Electric Attitude Indicator 1.75 78.38
35-01 Regulator Valve Assembly 2.07 119.0
35-02 Cabin Distribution Manifold Assembly 0.54 130.6
35-03 Face Mask (Rear Passengers) (2) 0.23 140.0
35-04 Face Mask with Microphone (1) 0.58 140.0
35-05 Face Mask (Front Passenger) (1) 0.12 140.0
35-06 Bottle 1 (Fwd) with Manifold 7.2 111.0
35-07 Bottle 2 (Center) with Manifold 7.1 116.5
35-08 Bottle 3 (Aft) with Manifold 7.2 122.0
53-01 9 Cabin Entry Step (2) (Each) 2.15 160.2
53-02 9 Cabin Entry Handle (2) (Each) .05 162.0
61-01 9 Propeller 70.0 15.0
61-02 9 Propeller Spinner 7.3 14.0


Item
No

61-03 9 Propeller Governor 2.80 28.0
71-01 9 Starter Motor 6.4 58.0
71-02 9 Engine Intake Filter 0.80 28.0
77-01 9 TSIO-550-C TCM Engine Complete 565.5 44.45

The use of this page is optional and is provided for listing items that were added to the airplane via a Supplemental Type Certificate (STC)
or other FAA approved procedures. This page is included in this section as a convenience to provide consistency in presentation. The page
does not replace or amend any required documentation attendant with the after-market installation and/or modification.

Columbia 400

ATA Weight Arm
Item No. Serial/Part No. Item
Chapter (lbs.) (ins.)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Columbia 400
ATA Weight Arm
Item No. Serial/Part No. Item
Chapter (lbs.) (ins.)
14.

15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
WEIGHT & BALANCE RECORD
(Continuing History of Changes in Structure or Equipment Affecting Weight and Balance)
SERIAL NUMBER: 1
AIRPLANE MODEL: COLUMBIA 400 (LC41-550FG) Date Airplane Weighed – May 21, 1927(Initial) PAGE NO. 1
ITEM WEIGHT /MOMENT CHANGE RUNNING

DATE TOTALS
DESCRIPTION OF ARTICLE OR
MOVED WEIGHT ADDED WEIGHT REMOVED
MODIFICATION
MOVED

IN OUT (Lbs.) (Inches) (Lbs. – in.) (Lbs.) (Inches) (Lbs. – in.) (Lbs.) (Lbs. – in.)
N/A N/A BASIC AIRPLANE AS DELIVERED N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 2,268.0 244,241.00
WEIGHT & BALANCE RECORD
(Continuing History of Changes in Structure or Equipment Affecting Weight and Balance)
SERIAL NUMBER: 1
AIRPLANE MODEL: COLUMBIA 400 (LC41-550FG) Date Airplane Weighed – May 21, 1927(Initial) PAGE NO. 2
ITEM WEIGHT /MOMENT CHANGE RUNNING

DATE TOTALS
DESCRIPTION OF ARTICLE OR
MOVED WEIGHT ADDED WEIGHT REMOVED
MODIFICATION
MOVED
IN OUT (Lbs.) (Inches) (Lbs. – in.) (Lbs.) (Inches) (Lbs. – in.) (Lbs.) (Lbs. – in.)

Section 7
Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG) Description of the Airplane and Systems
Section 7
Description of Airplane and Systems
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................... 7-5
AIRFRAME AND RELATED ITEMS.......................................................................................... 7-6

Basic Construction Techniques ............................................................................................. 7-6
Fuselage ........................................................................................................................ 7-6
Wings and Fuel Tanks .................................................................................................. 7-6
Horizontal Stabilizer..................................................................................................... 7-6
Flight Controls ....................................................................................................................... 7-6
Ailerons......................................................................................................................... 7-6
Aileron Servo Tab......................................................................................................... 7-6
Elevator ......................................................................................................................... 7-6
Rudder........................................................................................................................... 7-7
Flight Control System Diagram.................................................................................... 7-7
Control Lock ................................................................................................................. 7-7
Trim System........................................................................................................................... 7-7
Elevator and Aileron..................................................................................................... 7-7
Trim System Diagram .................................................................................................. 7-8
Hat Switches ................................................................................................................. 7-8
Simultaneous Trim Application ................................................................................... 7-8
Trim Position Indicator................................................................................................. 7-8
Autopilot/Trim Master Switch (A/P Trim) .................................................................. 7-9
Rudder Trim.................................................................................................................. 7-9
Instrument Panel and Cockpit Layout Diagram..................................................................7-10
Wing Flaps ...........................................................................................................................7-11
Landing Gear .......................................................................................................................7-11
Main Gear ...................................................................................................................7-11
Nose Gear ...................................................................................................................7-11
Seats .....................................................................................................................................7-12
Front Seats (General)..................................................................................................7-12
Front Seat Adjustment ................................................................................................7-12
Rear Seats ...................................................................................................................7-12
Seat Belts and Shoulder Harnesses......................................................................................7-12
Doors....................................................................................................................................7-13
Gull Wing Cabin Doors..............................................................................................7-13
Latching Mechanism ..................................................................................................7-13
Door Locks .................................................................................................................7-13
Door Seal System .......................................................................................................7-14
Baggage Door .............................................................................................................7-14
Step (Installed)............................................................................................................7-14
Step (Not Installed).....................................................................................................7-14
Handles .......................................................................................................................7-15
Brake System .......................................................................................................................7-15
Parking Brake .............................................................................................................7-15
Steering .......................................................................................................................7-15


Section 7
Description of the Airplane and Systems Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG)
ENGINE........................................................................................................................................ 7-16
Engine Specifications .......................................................................................................... 7-16
Turbochargers ...................................................................................................................... 7-16
Engine Controls ................................................................................................................... 7-16
Throttle........................................................................................................................ 7-16
Propeller...................................................................................................................... 7-16
Mixture ....................................................................................................................... 7-16
Engine Sub-systems 7-16
Starter and Ignition ..................................................................................................... 7-16
Propeller and Governor .............................................................................................. 7-17
Induction ..................................................................................................................... 7-17
Cooling ....................................................................................................................... 7-18
Engine Oil................................................................................................................... 7-18
Exhaust ....................................................................................................................... 7-19
INSTRUMENTS .......................................................................................................................... 7-20

Garmin G1000 Integrated Cockpit System 7-20
System Description..................................................................................................... 7-20
GDU 1040 PFD and GDU 1042 MFD....................................................................... 7-20
Reversionary Mode ................................................................................................ 7-21
MFD Map Scale...................................................................................................... 7-21
MFD Holding Pattern Depiction ............................................................................ 7-21
VOR Frequency Display on the MFD.................................................................... 7-21
GMA 1347 Audio Panel............................................................................................. 7-21
GCU 476 Remote Keypad.......................................................................................... 7-21
GIA 63 ........................................................................................................................ 7-21
GDL 69A Data Link Receiver.................................................................................... 7-23
GRS 77........................................................................................................................ 7-22
GMU 44 ...................................................................................................................... 7-23
GDC 74A .................................................................................................................... 7-24
GEA 71 ....................................................................................................................... 7-24
GTX 33 ....................................................................................................................... 7-25
Annunciations and Alerts ........................................................................................... 7-26
Annunciation Window............................................................................................ 7-26
Alerts Window........................................................................................................ 7-26
ALERTS Softkey Annunciation............................................................................. 7-26
System Annunciations ............................................................................................ 7-26
Alert Level Definitions........................................................................................... 7-26
Aircraft Alerts......................................................................................................... 7-27
Audio Alert/Voice Message ................................................................................... 7-28
AFCS Alerts ........................................................................................................... 7-29
TAWS Alerts .......................................................................................................... 7-30
TAWS System Status Annunciations..................................................................... 7-30
Other Annunciations............................................................................................... 7-30
Flight Instruments 7-31
Magnetic Compass ..................................................................................................... 7-31
Backup Airspeed Indicator ......................................................................................... 7-31
Backup Attitude Indicator .......................................................................................... 7-31
Picture of Attitude Indicator....................................................................................... 7-31
Backup Altimeter........................................................................................................ 7-32
Hour Meter........................................................................................................................... 7-32
Pitot-Static System............................................................................................................... 7-32
ENGINE RELATED SYSTEMS ................................................................................................. 7-32

Fuel System.......................................................................................................................... 7-34


Section 7
Fuel Quantity Indication............................................................................................. 7-34

Fuel Selector ............................................................................................................... 7-34
Fuel System Diagram ................................................................................................. 7-35
Fuel Low Annunciation Messages ............................................................................. 7-35
Fuel Vents................................................................................................................... 7-36
Fuel Drains and Strainer............................................................................................. 7-36
Backup Fuel Pump and Vapor Suppression............................................................... 7-36
Primer ......................................................................................................................... 7-36
Fuel Injection System ................................................................................................. 7-36
Environmental Control System (ECS) ................................................................................ 7-36
Airflow........................................................................................................................ 7-37
Floor Vent System...................................................................................................... 7-37
Defrosting System ...................................................................................................... 7-37
Individual Eyeball Vents ............................................................................................ 7-37
Environmental Control System Diagram and Panel .................................................. 7-38
ELECTRICAL AND RELATED SYSTEMS.............................................................................. 7-39

Electrical System ................................................................................................................. 7-39
General Description.................................................................................................... 7-39
Avionics Bus............................................................................................................... 7-39
Left Bus ...................................................................................................................... 7-39
Right Bus .................................................................................................................... 7-39
Essential Bus............................................................................................................... 7-39
Battery Bus ................................................................................................................. 7-39
Master Switches.......................................................................................................... 7-39
Crosstie Switch ........................................................................................................... 7-40
Avionics Master Switch ............................................................................................. 7-40
Summary of Buses...................................................................................................... 7-41
Electrical System Diagram......................................................................................... 7-42
Airplane Interior Lighting System ...................................................................................... 7-43
Flip and Access Lights ............................................................................................... 7-43
Overhead Reading Lights........................................................................................... 7-43
Instrument Flood Bar.................................................................................................. 7-43
Upper Instrument and Master Switches Panels.......................................................... 7-43
Lower Instrument and Circuit Breaker Panels ........................................................... 7-43
Summary of Interior Lights and Switches ................................................................. 7-44
Press-to-Test PTT Button........................................................................................... 7-44
Interior Light Protection............................................................................................. 7-44
Airplane Exterior Lighting System ..................................................................................... 7-45
Position and Anti-collision Lights.............................................................................. 7-45
Taxi and Landing Lights ............................................................................................ 7-45
Stall Warning System .......................................................................................................... 7-45
Stall Warning.............................................................................................................. 7-45
Stall Warning System (Electrical).............................................................................. 7-45
Ground Power Plug ............................................................................................................. 7-45
12 VDC Auxiliary Power Outlets ....................................................................................... 7-46
STANDARD AVIONICS INSTALLATION.............................................................................. 7-47

Control Stick Switches and Headset Plug Positions ........................................................... 7-47
Autopilot Disconnect /Trim Interrupt Switch (A/P Disc).......................................... 7-47
Push-to-Talk (PTT) Switch ........................................................................................ 7-47
Plug Positions ............................................................................................................. 7-47
Headsets...................................................................................................................... 7-48


Section 7
MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS........................................................................................................ 7-49

Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT)............................................................................... 7-49
General........................................................................................................................ 7-49
Artex 200 ELT............................................................................................................ 7-49
Switches ................................................................................................................. 7-49
Testing and Reset Functions .................................................................................. 7-49
Artex ME406 ELT...................................................................................................... 7-50
Accuracy ................................................................................................................ 7-50
Switch Operation.................................................................................................... 7-50
Self Test Mode ....................................................................................................... 7-51
Testing.................................................................................................................... 7-51
Fire Extinguisher ................................................................................................................. 7-52
General........................................................................................................................ 7-52
Temperature Limitations ............................................................................................ 7-52
Operation and Use ...................................................................................................... 7-53
Lightning Protection/Static Discharge ................................................................................ 7-53
Precise Flight Fixed Oxygen System .................................................................................. 7-53
Oxygen Flow Controls ............................................................................................... 7-54
Oxygen Display .......................................................................................................... 7-54
Oxygen Annunciation Messages ................................................................................ 7-54
Breathing Devices (Masks and Cannulas) ................................................................. 7-55
Flowmeter ................................................................................................................... 7-55
Filler Port .................................................................................................................... 7-56
Preflight Testing ......................................................................................................... 7-56
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT .......................................................................................................... 7-57

Precise Flight SpeedBrake™ 2000 System......................................................................... 7-57
System Overview........................................................................................................ 7-57
CO Guardian Carbon Monoxide Detector........................................................................... 7-57
XM Weather (Wx) Data System ......................................................................................... 7-58
Ryan Model 9900BX TCAD (Traffic and Collision Alerting Device) .............................. 7-58
General........................................................................................................................ 7-58
Advisory Levels.......................................................................................................... 7-59
Audible Advisories ..................................................................................................... 7-60
TCAD Display on the G1000 ..................................................................................... 7-60
Automatic Climate Control System (ACCS) ...................................................................... 7-61
General........................................................................................................................ 7-61
System Operation ....................................................................................................... 7-61
System Operation Using Ground Power Supply........................................................ 7-62
Control Buttons........................................................................................................... 7-63
General Hints for ACCS Operation............................................................................ 7-66
Garmin GFC 700 Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS)............................................. 7-66
Flight Director ............................................................................................................ 7-66
Autopilot ..................................................................................................................... 7-66
GIA 63 Integrated Avionics Units.............................................................................. 7-67
GSA 81 AFCS Servos (2)........................................................................................... 7-67
GSM 85 Servo Mounts (2) ......................................................................................... 7-67
GTA 82 Trim Adapter ................................................................................................ 7-68
Dedicated AFCS Controls .......................................................................................... 7-68
Additional AFCS Controls ......................................................................................... 7-69


Section 7
Section 7
Description of Airplane and Systems
INTRODUCTION
Section 7 provides a basic understanding of the airplane’s airframe, powerplant, systems, avionics,
and components. The systems include: electrical and lighting system; flight control system; wing
flap system; fuel system; braking system; heating and ventilating system; door sealing system; pitot
pressure system; static pressure system; and the stall warning system. In addition, various non-
system components are described. These include: doors and exits; baggage compartment; seats, seat
belts and shoulder harnesses; and the instrument panel.
Terms that are not well known and not contained in the definitions in Section 1 are explained in
general terms. The description and discussion on the following pages assume a basic understanding
of airplane nomenclature and operations.


Section 7
AIRFRAME AND RELATED ITEMS
The Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG) is a pre-molded, composite built, semi-monocoque, four seat,
single engine, low wing, tricycle design airplane. The airplane is certified in the utility category and
is used primarily for transportation and related general aviation uses.
BASIC CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES

The construction process used to build the shell or outer surfaces of the fuselage, wing, and most
control surfaces involves creating a honeycomb sandwich. The sandwich consists of outer layers of
pre-preg fiberglass around a honeycomb interior. The term “pre-preg fiberglass” means the
manufacturer impregnates the fibrous material with catalyzed epoxy resin. This process ensures
consistency in surface thickness and strength. The honeycomb sandwich is assembled in molds of
the wing, fuselage, and control surfaces. Air pressure is used during the heat curing procedure to
ensure a tight bond. Other structural components of the airplane, like ribs, bulkheads, and spars, are
constructed in the same manner. In areas where added structural strength is needed, such as the wing
spars, carbon fibers are added to the honeycomb sandwich.
Fuselage – The fuselage is built in two halves, the left and right sides; each side contains the area
from the firewall back to and including the vertical stabilizer. The bulkheads are inserted into the
right side of the fuselage through a process known as bonding. The two fuselage halves are bonded
together, and the floors are bonded in after fuselage halves are joined. Before the fuselage is
assembled into one unit, cables, control actuating systems, and conduits are added because of the
ease in access. To prevent damage to the leading edge of the vertical stabilizer, anti-erosion tape
may be installed.
Wings and Fuel Tanks – The bottom of the wing is one continuous piece. The spars are placed in
the bottom wing and bonded to the bottom inside surface. Next, the ribs are inserted and bonded to
the inside surfaces of the bottom wing and to the spars. Finally, after wires, conduits, and control
tubes are inserted, the two top wing halves are bonded to the bottom wing and all the spars and ribs.
The airplane has integral fuel tanks, commonly referred to as a “wet wing.” The ribs, spars, and
wing surfaces are the containment walls of the fuel tanks. All interior seams and surfaces within the
fuel tanks are sealed with a fuel impervious substance. The wing cuffs (specially shaped pieces of
composite material) are bonded to the outboard leading edge of the wing to increase the camber, or
curvature, of the airfoil. This improves the slow-flight and stall characteristics of the wing. To
prevent damage to the leading edge of the wing, anti-erosion tape may be installed.
Horizontal Stabilizer – The horizontal stabilizer is two separate halves bonded to two horizontal
tubes that are bonded to the fuselage. The shear webs and ribs are bonded into the inside surface of
the lower skin and the upper skin is then bonded to the lower assembly. To prevent damage to the
leading edge of the horizontal stabilizer, anti-erosion tape may be installed.
FLIGHT CONTROLS
Ailerons – The ailerons are of one-piece construction with most of the stresses carried by the control
surface. The end caps and drive rib that are used to mount the control’s actuating hardware provide
additional structural support. The aileron control system is operated through a series of actuating
rods and bellcranks that run between the control surface and the control stick in the cockpit. See
Figure 7 – 1 for an illustration of the flight control systems.
Aileron Servo Tab – The aileron servo tab on the trailing edge of the left aileron assists in
movement of the aileron. The servo tab is connected to the aileron in a manner that causes the tab to
move in a direction opposite the movement of the aileron. The increased aerodynamic force applied
to the tab helps to move the aileron and reduces the level of required force applied to the control
stick.


Section 7
Elevator – The elevator is a two part control surface with each half connected by a torque tube. Like
the ailerons, most of the stresses are carried by the control surface. The end caps and drive rib used
to mount the control’s actuating hardware provide additional structural support. The elevator control
system is operated through a series of actuating rods and bellcranks that run between the control
surface and the control stick in the cockpit. See Figure 7 – 1 for an illustration of the flight control
systems.
Rudder – The rudder is of one-piece construction with most of the stresses carried by the control
surface. The drive rib that is used to mount the control’s actuating hardware provides additional
structural support. The rudder control system is operated through a series of cables and mechanical
linkages that run between the control surface and the rudder pedals in the cockpit. See Figure 7 – 1.
Flight Control System Diagram
Rudder Pedals
Control
Sticks Right Aileron
Elevator Crossover
Control Rod Control Rod
Control Rod Guide
Rudder Cables
Left Side
Aileron
Control Rod
Left
Elevator Right Side
Control Rod Aileron
Control
Rod
Aileron
Torque Elevator
Tube Actuating
Bellcrank Elevator Control Rod
Interconnect
Assembly
Figure 7 – 1
Control Lock – The airplane is not equipped with a control lock. There are several types of
aftermarket devices or techniques that some customers have used on the airplane; none of these are
recommended or endorsed by Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing Corporation. The
devices/techniques have a number of disadvantages including, but not limited to, excessive weight
and storage inconvenience. Certain techniques require external limitation of the controls, which is
never desirable and is not recommended.
TRIM SYSTEM
Elevator and Aileron – The airplane has a two axis trimming system. The elevator trim tab is
located on the right side of the elevator, and the aileron trim tab is on the right aileron. A hat switch
on each control stick electrically controls both tabs, and the trim position is annunciated on various


Section 7
pages of the MFD. The trim servos are protected by two-amp circuit breakers. See Figure 7 – 2 for
an illustration of the trim system.
Trim System Diagram
Control Stick Autopilot/Trim System

Hat Switch Master Switch in
LEFT BUS
Overhead console
Aileron Trim Aileron Trim

Elevator Trim Elevator Trim
ESSENTIAL BUS
Press-To-Test
Autopilot Disconnect /Trim Switch
Interrupt Switch
Note: Elev. Aileron

Pushing the Autopilot Servo Servo
Disconnect /Trim Interrupt
Switch stops trim
Push-Pull
Push-Pull
Rods
Rod
Elev. Trim Tab Ail. Trim Tab
Figure 7 – 2
The trim surfaces are moved by push rods connected between each tab and a servomotor. The
aileron tab has one actuating rod and the elevator tab has two. The second actuating rod on the
elevator is a redundant system and is provided for the more critical tab in the system. The frictional
device installed on the aileron tab should never be lubricated.
Hat Switches – The trim tabs are controlled through use of a hat switch on the top portion of the
pilot and copilot’s control stick. Moving the switch forward will correct a tail heavy condition, and
moving it back will correct a nose heavy condition. Moving the hat switch left or right will correct
right wing heavy and left wing heavy conditions, respectively.
Simultaneous Trim Application – If both switches, pilot’s and copilot’s, are moved in the same
direction at the same time, the trim will operate in the direction selected. For example, nose down
trim is selected on both hat switches. If the switches are simultaneously moved in opposite
directions, e.g., pilot’s is nose down and copilot’s is nose up, the trim will not move. Finally, if trim
is simultaneously selected in different directions, e.g., elevator trim is input by one pilot and aileron
trim is input by the other, each trim tab will move in the direction selected.
Trim Position Indicator – The trim position is displayed in the Trim Group on the System page of
the MFD. Other pages on the MFD also display the elevator trim position. The vertical mark
indicates the position of the elevator trim and the horizontal mark shows the position of the aileron
trim. The green band for each axis indicates the approved takeoff ranges.


Section 7
Autopilot/Trim Master Switch (A/P Trim) – The autopilot/trim master switch, to the right of the
avionics master switch in the overhead console, turns off power on all the trim tabs. This switch is
used if a runaway trim condition is encountered. The switch can be cycled to reset or restore normal
trim operations. See page 3-19 for an expanded discussion of this issue.
Rudder Trim – The airplane has a manually adjustable tab on the lower portion of the rudder. The
tab is adjusted at the factory to produce near neutral rudder pressures at typical cruise altitude and
power settings. At other power settings and/or altitudes a slight amount of rudder pressure or aileron
trim may be required. The owner or operator of the airplane may wish to adjust this tab to
accommodate the most frequently used cruise configuration. The procedures for adjusting the
manual tab are contained in Chapter 27 of the Columbia 400 Airplane Maintenance Manual.
NOTE
Do not adjust the manual rudder tab by hand since this can produce an
uneven deflection or warping of the tab. Refer to the procedures in
Chapter 27 of the Maintenance Manual for adjustment of the manual tab.


Section 7
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND COCKPIT LAYOUT DIAGRAM
16 17 18 19
15
14
4
13
12
9 9
8 1
10
7 2
11
6 3
Instrument Panel and Cockpit

1. Flap Panel – Flap Switch and Annunciator
2. Engine Controls
3. Environmental Control System (ECS) Panel or Automatic Climate Control
System (ACCS) Panel
4. ELT Remote Switch
5. Heated Induction Air
6. Alternate Static Air
7. Go Around Switch
8. Rocker Switches: Backup Fuel Pump and Vapor Suppression
9. Air Vents
10. Primer Switch
11. Ignition Switch
12. Altimeter
13. Pitot Heat, Door Seals, and Optional Switches
14. Attitude Indicator
15. Airspeed Indicator
16. Primary Flight Display (PFD)
17. Audio Panel
18. Multi-Function Display (MFD)
19. Autopilot Controls
Figure 7 – 3

Section 7
WING FLAPS
The airplane is equipped with electric Fowler-type flaps. During flap extension, the flaps move out
from the trailing edge of the wing, which increases both the camber and surface area of the wing. A
motor located under the front passenger’s seat and protected by a 10-amp circuit breaker powers the
flaps. A flap-shaped switch located in the flap switch panel, which is to the right of the engine
controls, operates the flaps.
The flap switch is labeled with three positions: UP (0°), T/O (12°), and LANDING (40°). Rotating
the flap switch clockwise retracts the flaps, and moving it counterclockwise extends the flaps. A
light bar on the flap knob flashes, at approximately 2 hertz, while the flaps are in motion. When the
flaps reach the selected position the flashing light stops. When landing flaps is selected, the in-transit
light will not extinguish until the airspeed drops below 100 KIAS. The load caused by the higher
airspeed prevents the flaps from going past approximately 37° until the speed drops below 100
KIAS, and thus the load on the flaps is reduced. The illumination of the flaps switch does not change
with adjustments to the dimmer switch. Controlling light intensity and testing of the lights is
discussed later in this section on page 7-44. See Figure 7 – 3 for a drawing of the instrument panel
and cockpit layout.
When the flaps are in the up position, the knob is in a position parallel to the floor and points to the
UP label on the panel overlay. When flaps are in the takeoff position the knob is rotated 30°
counterclockwise from UP, and pointed to the T/O label. When flaps are in the down position, the
knob is rotated 30° more and points to the LANDING label. Flap extension speed placards are
posted on the flap switch panel overlay. See Figure 7 – 4 for a drawing of the flap panel.
Figure 7 – 4
LANDING GEAR
Main Gear – The airplane has tricycle landing gear with the two main wheels located behind the
center of gravity (CG) and a nose wheel well forward of the CG point. The main gear is made from
high quality rod steel that has been gun-drilled (drilled through the center like the bore of a gun
barrel). The main gear is attached to a tubular steel gearbox that is bolted to the bottom of the
fuselage, just aft of the wing saddle. There are 15x6.00-6 tires (tire width and rim diameter in inches)
that are inflated to 55 psi and mounted to the gear with Cleveland disc brakes. Composite wheel
fairings are mounted over each tire to reduce drag.
Nose Gear – The nose gear has a nitrogen and oil-filled oleo-type strut that is bolted to the engine
mount and serves as a shock absorber. Forcing oil through orifices in the piston and an internal plug
or barrier absorbs landing or vertical impact. A rotation key or vane working within an oil-filled
pocket contains rotational movements (shimmy dampening). Both of these movements, vertical and
rotational, are fully contained within the main cylinder body and under normal usage will require
little maintenance. Pressurized (250 psi) nitrogen supports the aircraft weight, absorbs small shocks
from taxiing, and returns the oleo to full extension.


Section 7
When the airplane is on the ground, with pressure on the nose strut, the nose wheel is free castoring
and has rotational travel through about 120º, 60° to the left and 60° to the right. When the airplane is
in flight with pressure off the nose strut, the nose wheel will self-center, which is accomplished by a
key in the cylinder rod and a fixed cam. The nose tire is 5.00-5 and should be filled to 88 psi.
SEATS
Front Seats (General) – Two individual, adjustable, tubular frame seats provide the front seating
for the pilot and passenger. The base of the tubular seat frame is covered with sheet aluminum, and
the seat cushions are attached to the aluminum through a series of Velcro strips. The seatbacks on
the front seats fold forward to permit access to the aft seating area. The seat cushions and seatbacks
are foam filled and covered with natural leather and ultra-leather. For added protection, both the
front and rear seats incorporate a special rigid, energy absorbing foam near the bottom of the
cushion. The cushion is designed for the loads applied by a seated passenger, and it is possible to
damage the seat if concentrated loads are applied. Care must be taken to avoid stepping on the seats
with high-heeled shoes or placing heavy objects on the seat that have small footprints.
Front Seat Adjustment – The front seats are adjustable fore and aft through a range of
approximately seven inches. The adjustment control for the seats is located below the seat cushion at
the front. To adjust the position of either seat, move the control lever towards the middle until the
seat unlocks from the seat track, and adjust the seat to the desired position. Release the adjustment
control when the seat is in the desired position, and test for positive seat locking by applying a slight
fore and aft movement to the seat cushion. The tilt of the front seat backs is adjustable on the ground
by loosening the jam nut on the coarse-threaded bolts on each side of the seatback and then raising
or lowering the bolts that control the tilt of the seat. See Chapter 25 in the maintenance manual for
specific limitations.
Rear Seats – The rear seats are a split bench-type design and are nonadjustable. The bench seat
frame is composite construction and bolted to the interior of the fuselage. The foam-filled seat and
seatback cushions are covered with natural leather and ultra-leather and attached to the seat bench
with Velcro fasteners. The seatbacks are attached to a metal crossbar and secured with quick release
pins; however, removal of the rear seat back is not permitted for normal operations.
SEAT BELTS AND SHOULDER HARNESSES

The seat belts and shoulder harnesses are an integrated three-point restraint type of design. With this
type of restraint, the lap belt and diagonal harness are incorporated using one continuous piece of
belt webbing. The webbing is anchored on each side of the seat for the lap belt restraint and then in
the overhead for the harness restraint.
Use of the three-point restraint system is accomplished by grasping the male end of the buckle,
drawing the lap webbing and diagonal harness across the lower and upper torso, and inserting it into
the female end of the buckle. There is a distinctive snap when the two parts are properly connected.
Adjusting two devices in the lap-webbing loop varies the length of the lap belt. One end of the
adjustment loop contains a dowel, and the other has a small strap. Draw the dowel and strap together
to enlarge the lap belt size, and draw them apart to tighten the lap belt. To release the belt, press the
red button on the female portion of the buckle. The torso part of the webbing is on inertial reels that
permit the freedom of movement required for piloting operations and passenger comfort. In case of
rapid deceleration, the inertial reel will engage a locking mechanism and provide positive restraint.


Section 7
DOORS
WARNING
Do not open any of the airplane doors in flight. The doors are not designed to be
opened in flight; subsequent airloads on an opened door will forcefully pull it
completely open and detach it from the airplane.
Gull Wing Cabin Doors – The airplane has entrance doors on each side, which permits easy access
to front and rear seat positions. The doors are hinged at the top and open to an almost vertical
position above the fuselage. The doors are part of the fuselage contour and when both are fully
opened, have a gull wing type of appearance. In the full up or full open position, each door is
supported and kept open by a gas strut. The strut will only hold the door open when the door is in the
vertical or near vertical position.
The hinges, in conjunction with the dual slide bolts of the door latching mechanism, which extend
through the fore and aft door jam, keep the door secure with four points of contact. A distinction is
made here between the latching mechanism and the security door locks. The latching mechanism
ensures that the doors will remain secured during flight. The door locks are primarily antitheft
devices and restrict use of the latching mechanism.
The aircraft should never be taxied while the doors are in the full up position. The doors may be
opened 6 to 8 inches during taxi, which can be controlled by grasping the armrest or use of the door
strap.
Latching Mechanism – From the exterior, the latching mechanism on each cabin door is operated
through movement of the exterior door handle. The handle is mounted on the side of the door in the
bottom-aft position and has two ranges of movement. The handle is recessed into the door with
adequate room for a handhold. A safety release on the handle must be disengaged before the door
will open. Pulling the handle away from the door activates the release. Moving the forward end of
the handle from its normal middle position to the six o’clock position disengages the latching
mechanism. To secure the door, return the handle to the middle position.
From the interior, both latching mechanisms are engaged and disengaged through use of a handle
near the bottom-aft position of the interior door. Again, pulling the handle away from the door
disengages the safety release. To activate the latching mechanism, move the door handle down from
its near horizontal position until the slide bolts are fully engaged and the curved end of the handle is
resting in the safety detent. There are placards on the interior doors labeled “Open” and “Closed”
with direction arrows. When both doors are properly closed with the latching mechanism and the
baggage door is secured and locked, the “DOOR OPEN” annunciation on the PFD will not be
displayed. If the “DOOR OPEN” annunciation is present, an associated aural warning will be heard
when the engine RPM exceeds 1800.
WARNING
If the red “Door Open” annunciation message on the PFD is displayed or the
aural warning is playing, then one or more doors are not properly secured, and
the airplane is unsafe to fly.
Door Locks – There are door locks for each door that restrict use of the latching mechanism and are
intended as antitheft devices. The door lock on the pilot’s side is a tube-type lock and is operated
with a key. On the passenger’s side, there is an interior latch control for locking the door. The keyed
lock and the latch are moved counterclockwise to lock the door.


Section 7
To lock the airplane, first engage the door latching mechanism on the passenger side, and then
activate the door lock by moving the interior latch. Next, close and latch the pilot’s door, and use the
key to activate the door lock. Ensure that the baggage door is locked.
CAUTION
The passenger’s door must not be locked during flight operations. Locking the
door would inhibit rescue operations in case of an emergency.
Door Seal System – The airplane is equipped with a pneumatic door seal system that limits air
leakage and improves soundproofing. An inflatable gasket around each main door expands when the
door seal system is turned on. An electric motor near the pilot’s rudder pedals operates the system,
which maintains a differential pressure of 12 to 15 psi. The system is activated by a switch to the left
of the PFD labeled “Door Seals” and is protected by a five-amp circuit breaker. The cabin and
baggage doors must be closed for the door seal system to operate. The latching mechanism of each
door moves a microswitch, which clears the “DOOR OPEN” annunciation message. The “DOOR
OPEN” annunciation message must be cleared for the door seal system to operate.
The cabin door latching mechanism also controls the dump door seal valve. When either cabin door
latching mechanism is moved more than a half inch towards the open position, the dump valve is
engaged, and the pressure in the seals is dumped. This prevents inadvertent operation of the doors
when they are sealed; however, setting the door seal switch to the off position after landing is
recommended.
NOTE
It is difficult to open a door with the door seal inflated. If rapid egress is
necessary, turn the door seal off.
Normally, the door seal switch remains in the On position for the entire flight. If the system pressure
drops below 12 psi, the air pump will cycle on until pressure is restored. If the pump runs
continuously, it is an indication that a seal is damaged and incapable of holding pressure. In this
situation, the door seal system should not be operated until repairs are made.
Baggage Door – The baggage access door is located on the left side of the airplane, approximately
two and one half feet from the left cabin entrance door. The door has Ace type locks on each side of
the door, and both locks are used to secure and unsecure the door. There is a piano hinge at the top,
and the door is held open by a gas strut during loading and unloading operations.
To open the baggage door, insert the key into each lock and rotate 90º clockwise. The key cannot be
removed from the forward baggage door lock when unlocked; hence, when opening it, release the aft
lock first. Once the aft lock is unlatched, remove the key and open the forward lock. This design
reduces the possibility of taking off with the baggage door open, provided the ignition and baggage
door keys are on the same key ring. When the second lock is unlatched, the gas strut will raise the
door. The baggage door is part of the door annunciation system. If the baggage door is not properly
closed and the forward latch secured, the “Door Open” annunciation message on the PFD will
display and the aural warning will sound at engine RPM greater than 1800 RPM.
Step (Installed) – On each side of the airplane there is an entrance step mounted to the fuselage and
located aft of the flaps. The entrance step is used for access to the airplane; however, the flaps cannot
be stepped on during ingress and egress operations. Placing weight on the top of the flaps imposes
unnatural loads on the control’s surface and hardware and may cause damage. Both flaps are
placarded with the words “No Step.”
Step (Not Installed) – Some owners prefer to not have the step installed since it lowers cruise speed
by about two knots. Some of these owners may prefer to carry a small step ladder/stool to assist


Section 7
passengers in entering and exiting the airplane. The pilot must, in this instance, enter and exit the
airplane without the use of a portable device. If a portable step is not used, it is recommended that
entering and exiting the airplane be made from the front of the wing. The easiest method of ingress
or egress is to sit on the wing facing forward and then stand up.
Handles – Optional fuselage handles are available with some aircraft to assist entering the aircraft.
The handles are located behind the passenger windows. Do not hang or otherwise put your full
weight on the handles.
BRAKE SYSTEM
The airplane braking system is hydraulically operated by a dedicated braking system. Each rudder
pedal has a brake master cylinder built into it. Depressing the top portion of the rudder pedals
translates this pressure into hydraulic pressure. This pressure is transmitted through a series of hard
aluminum and steel grade Teflon lines to pistons in the brake housing of each brake. The piston
activates the brake calipers that apply friction to the chrome steel discs. Each disc is connected to a
wheel on the main landing gear, and when the caliper clamps onto the disc, it creates friction, which
impedes its rotation. Since the disc is part of the wheel, the friction on the disc slows or stops the
forward momentum of the airplane.
Parking Brake – The parking brake is near the floor, forward of the circuit breaker panel on the
pilot’s side of the airplane. When disengaged, the handle is flush with the side panel. The black
handle is placarded with the red lettered statement, “Brake Engaged,” which is only visible when the
brake is engaged. To operate, apply and maintain brake pressure to both brakes, and move the
parking brake control 90° inboard by grasping the forward portion of the handle. Once the parking
brake handle is set, release pressure on the brake pedals.
Moving the parking brake control to the “On” position causes a valve to close the line between the
master cylinders and the parking brake. The pressure introduced by the foot pedals before the brake
was set is maintained in the system between the parking brake handle and the brake housing. To
release the parking brake, apply pressure to the brake pedals, and move the parking brake selector
back to the flush position. When the parking brake is on, the position of the handle restricts access to
the left rudder pedal and limits inadvertent operation with the parking brake system engaged.
Steering – Directional control of the airplane is maintained through differential braking. Applying
pressure to a single brake introduces a yawing moment and causes the free castoring nose wheel to
turn in the same direction. As is the case with most light aircraft, turning requires a certain amount of
forward momentum. Once the airplane is moving forward, applying right or left brake will cause the
airplane to steer in the same direction. There are two important considerations. First, use enough
power so that forward momentum is maintained, otherwise the differential braking will stop the
airplane. Second, avoid the tendency to ride the brakes since this will increase wear. Some
momentary differential braking may be required for takeoff until the control surfaces become
effective.


Section 7
ENGINE
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
The airplane engine is a Teledyne Continental Motors Aircraft Engine Model TSIO-550-C. It is a
twin-turbocharged, horizontally opposed, six-cylinder, fuel injected, air-cooled engine that uses a
high-pressure, wet-sump type of oil system for lubrication. There is a full flow, spin-on, disposable
oil filter. The engine has top air induction, an engine mounted throttle body, and a bottom exhaust
system. On the front of the engine, accessories include a hydraulically operated propeller governor, a
gear driven alternator, and a belt driven alternator. Rear engine accessories include a starter, gear-
driven oil pump, gear-driven fuel pump, and dual gear-driven magnetos.
TURBOCHARGERS
The TSIO-550-C has twin turbochargers, which use exhaust gas flow to provide high pressure air to
the engine for increased power. There is one turbocharger on each side of the engine. The hot
gas flow from the left side exhaust drives the left turbocharger and the hot gas flow from the right
side exhaust drives the turbocharger on the right side. The turbocharger compresses and raises the
temperature of the incoming air before going to the intercoolers. The compressed air is then run
through the intercoolers where it is cooled down before entering the throttle body and cylinders. The
dual turbochargers are lubricated from external oil lines supplied from a source at the bottom of the
oil cooler. There is one mechanical wastegate on the left side of the engine. The wastegate controls
the amount of high pressure air to the engine by automatically sensing manifold pressure. An
overboost valve in the induction system provides protection from too much pressure.
ENGINE CONTROLS
Throttle – The throttle controls the volume of air that enters the cylinders. The control has a black
circular knob and is located below and to the left of the flap switch. The control has a vernier
feature, which permits small adjustments by rotating the knob either clockwise (increase) or
counterclockwise (decrease). Changes in throttle settings are displayed on the manifold pressure
indicator. Moving the throttle forward increases engine power and manifold pressure, while moving
it back will reduce power and manifold pressure.
Propeller – The propeller control allows the pilot to vary the speed or RPM of the propeller. The
control has a blue knob with large raised ridges around the circumference and is located between the
throttle and the mixture controls. The control has a vernier feature, which permits small adjustments
by rotating the knob either clockwise (increase) or counterclockwise (decrease). Large adjustments,
such as “exercising the prop” (moving the control to the full aft position), can be made by pressing
in the locking button in the center of the knob and moving the control as desired. The high-speed
position is with the control full forward.
Mixture – The mixture control allows the pilot to vary the ratio of the fuel-air mixture. The control
has a red knob with small raised ridges around the circumference and is located below the flap
switch. The control has a vernier feature, which permits small adjustments by rotating the knob
either clockwise (increase) or counterclockwise (decrease). Large adjustments, such as when the
control is set to idle cutoff (moving the control to the full aft position), can be made by pressing in
the locking button in the center of the knob and moving the control as desired. The richest position is
with the control full forward.
ENGINE SUB-SYSTEMS
Starter and Ignition – Turning the keyed ignition switch, which is located by the pilot’s left knee,
activates the starter. The key rotates in a clockwise direction and is labeled: “Off” – “R” – “L” –
“R/L” – “Start.” The “R” and “L” items of this label relate to which magneto (left or right) is turned
on or not grounded. Turning the key to “R/L” will cause both magnetos to be ungrounded or “Hot.”


Section 7
The airplane engine is equipped with Slick 6320, pressurized magnetos with impulse couplings on
each magneto. The left magneto fires the three upper left and lower right set of spark plugs, and the
right magneto fires the three upper right and lower left set of spark plugs. Turning the switch to the
“L” or left magneto grounds the right magneto and makes it non-functioning. Conversely, turning
the switch to the “R” or right magneto position grounds the left magneto and makes it non-
functioning.
The key will turn with minimum resistance to the “R/L” position and is spring-loaded (provides
greater resistance) from the “R/L” to the “Start” position. Starting is initiated from the “R/L”
position with the master switch on. Rotating the key to the start position will engage the starter.
Once the engine starts, release the key, and the spring loading mechanism will return it to the “R/L”
position. A geared right-angle drive starter adapter and a direct current starter motor accomplish
engine cranking.
Propeller and Governor – The airplane is equipped with a Hartzell three-bladed constant speed
propeller with a McCauley governor. In a constant speed propeller system, the angle of the propeller
blade changes automatically to maintain the selected RPM. For this to happen the angle of the
propeller blade must change as power, air density, or airspeed changes. A decrease in blade angle
decreases the air loads on the propeller, while an increase in blade angle increases air loads. If, for
example, the manifold pressure is reduced, the angle of the blade will decrease (decreased air loads)
to maintain a constant RPM. When operating at high altitudes with reduced air resistance, the blade
angle will increase (increased air loads) to maintain a constant RPM.
An oil-driven piston in the propeller hub uses oil from the engine oil system to operate the propeller
governor. If a greater blade angle is needed to maintain a constant RPM, the valve in the governor
pumps oil into the propeller hub to increase the propeller blades’ angle of attack. If a smaller blade
angle is needed to maintain a constant RPM, the governor diverts oil away from the piston. With oil
pressure removed, spring pressure and a centrifugal blade twisting moment cause the propeller
blades’ angle of attack to decrease. The propeller is connected directly to the drive shaft of the
engine; hence, propeller and engine RPM indications are the same.
There are limits at which the propeller can no longer maintain a constant RPM. As power is reduced,
the blade angle decreases to maintain a constant RPM. When the propeller reaches its lowest angle
of attack position, approximately 16.5°, further reductions in power will result in decreased RPM.
There is a theoretical high angle position, approximately 42.0°, at which further applications of
power and speed will cause an increase in RPM. However, this latter condition is only theoretical
since a high manifold pressure setting, in conjunction with a low RPM setting, can cause engine
damage.
The sequence in which power changes are made is important. The objective is to not have a high
manifold pressure setting in conjunction with a low RPM setting. When increasing power settings,
increase RPM first with the propeller control, and then increase manifold pressure with the throttle.
When decreasing power settings, decrease the manifold pressure first and then decrease the RPM
setting.
Induction – The induction system routes outside air through an air filter to the left and right side
turbocharger and then to each individual cylinder where fuel from the injector nozzle of the cylinder
is mixed with the induction air. The components of the induction system include the air filter and the
left and right heated induction air valves. Ram air enters through both the left and right intake holes
in the front of the cowling and passes through the air filter where it is sent on to the compressors and
then the intake manifold.
In the event the normal induction system is obstructed by ice, there is a control, which permits
introduction of heated air into the induction system. This control is below the rocker switch panel
near the pilot’s right knee and labeled “Induction Heat.” Heated induction air is routed through the


Section 7
induction system when the knob is pulled out. The heated induction air valves are located next to the
right and left side turbochargers. When the induction heat control is pulled out, it moves a butterfly
inside the valves that opens the airflow for heated air from the lower engine area. There is no need
for an air-to-air heat exchanger manifold. The ambient air that circulates around the engine provides
a sufficient temperature rise for the heated induction air. If the filter is not clogged, alternate
induction air can be used any time. If the filter is clogged and alternate induction air is selected, the
engine is drawing hot air into the induction system. This increases the chance for engine detonation.
To limit the chance for engine detonation, set the mixture to full rich and do not use more than 85%
power if the outside air temperature is greater than 32°F.
Cooling – The airplane has a pressure cooling system. The basic principle of this design is to have
high pressure at the intake point and lower pressure at the exit point. This type of arrangement
promotes a positive airflow since higher pressure air moves towards the area of low pressure. The
high pressure source is provided by ram air that enters the left and right intake openings in the front
of the cowling. The low pressure point is created at the bottom of the cowling near the engine
exhaust stacks. The flared cowl bottom causes increased airflow, which lowers pressure.
Within the cowling, the high-pressure intake air is routed around and over the cylinders through an
arrangement of strategically placed baffles as it moves towards the lower pressure exit point. In
addition, fins on the cylinders and cylinder heads, which increase the surface area and allow greater
heat radiation, promote increased cooling. The system is least efficient during ground operations
since the only source of ram air is from the propeller or possibly a headwind.
Engine Oil – The TSIO-550-C has a wet sump, high pressure oil system. The system provides
lubrication for the moving parts within the engine and is the oil source for operation of the propeller
governor. In addition, a squirt nozzle that directs a stream of oil on the inner dome of each piston
cools each piston. The engine has an oil cooler with a pressure-temperature bypass. The oil bypasses
the oil cooler if the oil temperature is below 170°F (77°C) or a pressure differential greater than 18
psi is detected. If the oil temperature is above 170°F (77°C), oil is sent through the oil cooler before
entering the engine. This type of arrangement keeps the oil at constant temperature of about 180°F
(82°C). Ram air for the oil cooler is provided by the engine’s pressure cooling system.
The term “wet sump” means the oil is stored within the engine sump as opposed to a separate oil
tank. The oil is drawn out of the sump by the engine-driven oil pump where it is sent to a full flow
oil filter, i.e., a filter that forces all the oil to pass through the filter each time it circulates. The
system pressure is kept constant by a spring-loaded pressure relief valve that is between the pump
and the filter. From the oil filter, the oil flows into the oil cooler if the temperature is high enough
and then is routed to the left oil gallery (an oil dispersal channel or passage). The oil in the left
gallery flows forward to the front of the engine and a portion of the flow is sent to the propeller
governor. The oil flow is then directed to the right engine gallery and flows towards the rear of the
engine and back to the oil sump.
Oil within the left and right galleries is injected onto the crankshaft, camshaft, propshaft bearing,
accessory drive bearings, cylinder walls, and other various parts within the engine. After lubricating
the engine, gravity causes the oil to flow downward through transfer tubes and drain holes where it is
returned to the oil sump.
If the filter becomes clogged and prevents oil from moving through the system, a bypass valve
reroutes the oil around the filter. In this event, the lubricating oil is, of course, unfiltered. However,
rerouting the oil will prevent engine failure. It is important to note that the pilot will have no
indication that the oil filter has clogged, and this situation compounds the problem. Since the filter
failure was most likely caused by contaminated oil, the oil system will be lubricated with
contaminated oil. The best solution is timely and frequent oil changes.


Section 7
The dipstick and oil filler cap access door are located on the top left engine cowl about two feet from
the propeller hub. The engine should not be operated with less than six quarts of oil and must not be
filled above eight quarts. For extended flights, the oil should be brought up to full capacity.
Information about oil grades, specifications, and related issues are covered in Section 8 of this
handbook.
Exhaust – Gases that remain after combustion flow from the cylinders through the exhaust valves
and into the exhaust manifold (a series of connected pipes) and are expelled into the outside
atmosphere. There is an exhaust manifold on each side of the engine, and each of the manifolds is
connected to three cylinders. The manifolds are connected to a turbocharger and tail pipe that extend
out the bottom of the engine cowling. A crossover pipe allows the exhaust gas from the right side to
flow to the left side wastegate.


Section 7
INSTRUMENTS
GARMIN G1000 INTEGRATED COCKPIT SYSTEM
The following is a general description of the Garmin G1000 Integrated Cockpit System. For
operating instructions on the features of the G1000 system, refer to the Garmin G1000 Cockpit
Reference Guide for the Columbia 400, document number 190-00567-00.
NOTE
The G1000 may provide erroneous messages indicating to the pilot that
airspace has been penetrated when the airplane is only close to that airspace.
This generally occurs when there is a substantial difference between GPS
altitude and baro-corrected altitude. Ensure your baro-correction is accurate
to the nearest reporting station.
WARNING
In the event of an AHRS failure where heading information is no longer

provided on the G1000, it is recommended that the pilot make use of the digital
TRK readout in the waypoint data field - located at the top center of the PFD,
and the information on the moving map display to supplement the wet
compass heading information. This will reduce the need for excessive head and
eye movement and aid in the prevention of spatial disorientation of the pilot.
System Description – The Garmin G1000 includes the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GDU 1040 Primary Flight Display (PFD)
• GDU 1042 Multi function display (MFD)
• GCU 476 Remote Keypad
• GIA 63 Integrated Avionics Units (2)
• GDL 69A Data Link Receiver
• GEA 71 Engine/Airframe Unit
• GDC 74A Air Data Computer (ADC)
• GRS 77 Attitude & Heading Reference System (AHRS)
• GMU 44 Magnetometer
• GMA 1347 Audio System with Integrated Marker Beacon Receiver
• GTX 33 Mode S Transponder
All LRUs have a modular design, which greatly eases troubleshooting and maintenance of the
G1000 system.
GDU 1040 PFD and GDU 1042 MFD – The GDU 1040 and GDU 1042 each have a 10.4-in. LCD
display with 1024x768 resolution. The displays are located side-by-side, with the GMA 1347 Audio
Panel located in the middle. Both displays provide control and display of nearly all functions of the
G1000 integrated cockpit system. They communicate with each other through a High-Speed Data
Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection. Each display is also paired with an Ethernet connection to a GIA
63 Integrated Avionics Unit. See Figure 7 – 5.


Section 7
Reversionary Mode – Should a system detected failure occur in either display, the G1000
automatically enters reversionary mode. In reversionary mode, critical fight instrumentation
is combined with engine instrumentation on the remaining display. Minimal navigation
capability is available on the reversionary mode display.
Reversionary display mode can also be manually activated by the pilot if the system fails to
detect a display problem. The reversionary mode is activated manually by pressing the red
DISPLAY BACKUP button on the bottom of the audio panel (GMA 1347). Pressing the red
DISPLAY BACKUP button again deactivates reversionary mode.
MFD Map Scale – The MFD map scale shown in the lower right corner of the display
represents the total distance from the bottom of the moving map to the top of the map. It
does not represent the distance from the airplane symbol to the top of the moving map.
MFD Holding Pattern Depiction – The depiction of the holding pattern on the MFD is
sized according to the airplanes’ groundspeed. The G1000 will calculate the appropriate size
of the hold to provide 1 minutes legs in the hold. Changes in the airplanes’ groundspeed will
cause the size of the holding pattern to change in size.
VOR Frequency Display on the MFD – If the Nearest VOR page is selected, the fields on
the page may be highlighted to select data. The VOR frequency displayed may be selected
and changed on the page. However, changing this field will not replace the information in
the database and subsequent use of the VOR data page will show the correct database
frequency.
Figure 7 – 5
GMA 1347 Audio Panel – The GMA 1347 integrates NAV/COM digital audio, intercom system,
and marker beacon controls. The GMA 1347 also controls manual display reversionary mode (red
DISPLAY BACKUP button) and is installed between the MFD and the PFD. The GNA 1347
communicates with both GIA 63s using a RS-232 digital interface. See Figure 7 – 5.


Section 7
GCU 476 Remote Keypad – The GCU 476 interfaces with the GDU 104x PFD/MFD. The GCU
476 Remote Keypad provides alphanumeric, softkey, and flight planning function keys used to
interface with the G1000. In addition to alphanumeric, softkey, and flight planning function keys the
GCU 476 provides COM/NAV tuning capabilities. The GCU 476 mounts on the center console
using a single jackscrew. See Figure 7 – 6.
Figure 7 – 6
GIA 63 – The GIA 63 is the Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) of the G1000 system. The GIA 63 is
the main communications hub, linking all LRUs with the PFD and the MFD displays. Each GIA 63
contains a GPS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers, and system integration microprocessors.
Each GIA 63 is paired with either the 1040 GDU or the 1042 GDU, respectively. GIAs do not
communicate with each other directly. See Figure 7 – 7.
Figure 7 – 7


Section 7
GDL 69A Data Link Receiver – The GDL 69A is an XM Satellite Radio data link
receiver with the addition of XM Satellite Radio audio entertainment. For display of
weather information and control of audio channel and volume, the GDL 69A is interfaced
to the GDU 1042 via an Ethernet link. Audio volume and channel changes may also be
controlled with remotely mounted switches located in the center console. The GDL 69A
is also interfaced to a Garmin audio panel for amplification and distribution of the audio
signal. The GA 55 XM Satellite Radio antenna receives the XM Satellite Radio data
signal and passes it to the GDL 69A. See Figure 7 – 8.
Figure 7 – 8
GRS 77 – The GRS 77 is an Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) that provides aircraft
attitude and heading information to both the G1000 displays and the GIA 63s. The unit contains
advanced sensors, accelerometers, and rate sensors. In addition, the GRS 77 interfaces with the GDC
74A Air Data Computer and the GMU 44 Magnetometer. The GRS 77 also utilizes two GPS signal
inputs sent from the GIA 63s. Attitude and heading information is sent using an ARINC 429 digital
interface to the GDU 1040, GDU 1042, and the GIA 63s. See Figure 7 – 9.
Figure 7 – 9


Section 7
GMU 44 – The GMU 44 Magnetometer measures local magnetic field information. Data is sent to
the GRS 77 AHRS for processing to determine aircraft magnetic heading. This unit receives power
directly from the GRS 77 and communicates with the GRS 77 using a RS-485 digital interface. See
Figure 7 – 10.
Figure 7 – 10
GDC 74A – The GDC 74A Air Data Computer processes information received from the pitot/static
system and the outside air temperature (OAT) sensor. The GDC 74A provides pressure altitude,
airspeed, vertical speed, and OAT information to the G1000 system. The GDC 74A communicates
with both GIA 63s, GDU 1040, GDU 1042, and GRS 77 using an ARINC 429 digital interface. See
Figure 7 – 11.
Figure 7 – 11


Section 7
GEA 71 – The GEA 71 receives and processes signals from engine and airframe sensors. Sensor
types include engine temperature and pressure sensors as well as fuel measurement and pressure
sensors. The GEA 71 communicates with both GIA 63s using a RS-485 digital interface. See Figure
7 – 12.
Figure 7 – 12
GTX 33 – The GTX 33 is a solid-state Mode S transponder providing Modes A, C, and S operation.
The GTX 33 is controlled through the PFD, and communicates with both GIA 63s through a RS-232
digital interface. See Figure 7 – 13.
Figure 7 – 13


Section 7
Annunciations and Alerts

For a more detailed description of annunciations and alerts displayed on the PFD and/or MFD, refer
to the Garmin G1000 Cockpit Reference Guide for the Columbia 400, document number 190-
00567-00.
Annunciation Window: The annunciation window displays abbreviated annunciation text.

The annunciation window is located to the right of the Altitude and Vertical Speed windows
on the PFD display (or the MFD if system is in reversionary mode). Up to 12 annunciations
can be displayed simultaneously. A white horizontal line separates annunciations that are
acknowledged from annunciations that are not yet acknowledged. Acknowledged
annunciations are always above the line. Annunciations are displayed in order of priority from
top to bottom. The highest priority annunciation is displayed at the top of the annunciation
window.
Alerts Window: The Alerts window displays alert text messages. Up to 64 alerts can be
displayed in the Alerts window. New alerts are placed on top of the stack and older ones are
pushed down. Alerts that are no longer valid are grayed out and then subsequently removed
after the window is refreshed. Pressing the ALERTS softkey displays the Alerts window.
Pressing the ALERTS softkey again removes the Alerts window from the display. When the
Alerts window is displayed, the pilot may use the large FMS knob to scroll through the alert
list. Higher priority alerts are displayed at the top of the window. Lower priority alerts are
displayed at the bottom of the window.
ALERTS Softkey Annunciation: When the Alerting System issues an alert, the ALERTS
softkey is used as a flashing annunciation to accompany an alert. During the alert, the
ALERTS softkey assumes a new label consistent with alert level (WARNING, CAUTION, or
ADVISORY). Pressing the softkey annunciation acknowledges that the pilot is aware of the
alert. The softkey then returns to the previous ALERTS label. The pilot can then press the
ALERTS softkey again to view alert text messages.
System Annunciations: Typically, a large red ‘X’ appears in a window when a related LRU
fails or detects invalid data.
Alert Level Definitions – The G1000 Alerting System, as installed in Columbia 400 aircraft,
uses three alert levels.
WARNING: This level of alert requires immediate pilot attention. A warning alert is
accompanied by an annunciation in the annunciation window. Warning text appearing in
the annunciation window is RED. A warning alert is also accompanied by a flashing
WARNING softkey annunciation. Pressing the WARNING softkey acknowledges the
presence of the warning alert and stops the aural tone, if applicable.
CAUTION: This level of alert indicates the existence of abnormal conditions on the
aircraft that may require pilot intervention. A caution alert is accompanied by an
annunciation in the annunciation window. Caution text appearing in the annunciation
window is YELLOW. A caution alert is also accompanied by a flashing CAUTION
softkey annunciation. Pressing the CAUTION softkey acknowledges the presence of the
caution alert.
MESSAGE ADVISORY: This level of alert provides general information to the pilot. A
message advisory alert does not issue annunciations in the annunciation window. Instead,
message advisory alerts only issue a flashing ADVISORY softkey annunciation. Pressing
the ADVISORY softkey acknowledges the presence of the message advisory alert and
displays the alert text message in the Alerts window.


Section 7
Aircraft Alerts
1. WARNING Alerts
a. If the DOOR OPEN message is displayed, one or more of the airplane’s doors is
not properly secured.
b. If the FUEL VALVE message is displayed, the fuel selector is not set to either the
left or right tank, or is not properly seated in the detent of the selected tank.
c. If the L BUS OFF or R BUS OFF message is displayed, the electrical bus is either
not turned on or is damaged.
d. If the CO LVL HIGH message is displayed, the carbon monoxide level has
reached 50 parts per million by volume or greater.
e. If the OIL PRES LOW message is displayed, the engine oil pressure is less than 5
psi.
Annunciation Window Text Alerts Window Message Audio Alert/Voice Message

(Repeating)
DOOR OPEN Door not secured Chime/“Door Open”
FUEL VALVE Fuel tank is not correctly selected Chime/“Fuel Valve”
or is in the OFF position
L BUS OFF No power on the left bus Chime
R BUS OFF No power on the right bus Chime
CO LVL HIGH Carbon Monoxide level is too high Chime/“Carbon Monoxide”
OIL PRES LOW Low oil pressure Chime/“Oil Pressure Low”
2. CAUTION Alerts
a. If the L ALT OFF or R ALT OFF message is displayed, then either the alternator
is not turned on, the alternator was tripped off-line by an over voltage condition, or
low voltage conditions exist. In either case, the corresponding battery is in a state of
discharge.
b. If the FUEL PUMP message is displayed, the engine driven fuel pump has
malfunctioned and the fuel pressure is less than about 5.5 psi.
c. If either the L LOW FUEL or R LOW FUEL message is displayed, the indicated
tank has less than eight gallons of usable fuel remaining in that tank.
d. The STARTER ENGD message is displayed, when the starter is activated.
e. If the OXYGEN message is displayed, the system has not been activated above
approximately 12,000 ft PA, there is inadequate quantity of oxygen, or the oxygen
outlet pressure is not within range for proper operation.
f. The OXYGEN QTY message is displayed when the oxygen quantity is below 250
psi.
g. If the OXYGEN PRES message is displayed, pressure altitude is above 12,000 ft
and the oxygen system is off.

L ALT OFF Left Alternator offline Single Chime/
“Left Alternator Out”
R ALT OFF Right Alternator offline Single Chime/
“Right Alternator Out”
FUEL PUMP Fuel pump is operating Single Chime/
“Fuel Pump On”
L LOW FUEL Low fuel in the left tank Single Chime/None
R LOW FUEL Low fuel in the right tank Single Chime/None
STARTER ENGD Starter relay has power applied Single Chime/None
OXYGEN Oxygen system needs attention or is off Single Chime/None
OXYGEN QTY Oxygen quantity below 250 psi Single Chime/None
OXYGEN PRES Pressure above 12000 ft and oxygen Single Chime/None
system off


Section 7
3. Annunciation Advisory
a. If the OXYGEN ON message is displayed, this is a reminder to turn off oxygen.
b. If the SPEED BRAKES message is displayed, the speedbrakes are deployed. When
deploying the speedbrakes, the message stays off until they are full deployed. When
retracting the speedbrakes, the message stays on until fully retracted.

OXYGEN ON Reminder: Turn off oxygen None
SPEED BRAKES Speed brakes are active None
4. Message Advisory Alerts

c. If the PFD FAN FAIL message is displayed, the cooling fan for the PFD is
inoperative.
a. If the MFD FAN FAIL message is displayed, the cooling fan for the MFD is
inoperative.
b. If the AVIONICS FAN message is displayed, the cooling fan for the remote
avionics is inoperative.
c. If the TIMER ZERO message is displayed, the timer has counted down to zero.
d. If the FUEL IMBAL message is displayed, fuel imbalance is greater than 10
gallons.
e. If the LOW MAN PRES message is displayed, pressure altitude is above 18,000 ft
and the manifold pressure is below 15 in.
f. If the VAPOR SUPPR message is displayed, turn on vapor suppression.
Alerts Window Message Audio Alert

PFD FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the PFD is inoperative None
MFD FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the MFD is inoperative None
AVIONICS FAN – the cooling fan for remote avionics is inoperative None
TIMER ZERO – Timer has counted down to zero “Timer Expired”
FUEL IMBAL – Fuel imbalance is greater than 10 gallons None
LOW MAN PRES – Manifold pressure is below 15 in. None
VAPOR SUPPR – Turn on Vapor Suppression None
Audio Alert/Voice Message – The audio alert/voice message warning system activates in
coordination with some of the annunciation messages. The audio alert/voice message warnings
consist of a female voice speaking in English and/or a chime. If the Ryan TCAD is installed,
the audio alert/voice message system will provide a traffic advisory for aircraft detected in the
vicinity. Additionally, a voice message will provide a reminder when the count down timer
reaches zero.
The audio alert/voice message system operates when the avionics master is on and there is
engine oil pressure. This feature prevents the warning system from going through all the
commands when power is first applied. There is also a two second delay to allow fuel tank
selection without a nuisance warning.
The audio alert/voice message will be played over the cabin speaker and the headsets
regardless of the audio panel switch positions. The voice message warnings that play are:
1. Door Open – this warning is activated when any of the doors are unlatched and the
engine RPM is over 1800 RPM.
2. Fuel Valve – this warning is activated when the fuel valve is not in the left or right tank
detents.
3. Carbon Monoxide – this warning is activated by the carbon monoxide detector.
4. Oil Pressure Low – this warning is activated when oil pressure is less than 5 psi.
5. Left Alternator Out or Right Alternator Out – this warning is activated when any of the
following occur:
a. The left or right alternator is switched off.


Section 7
b. The over voltage relay has been activated.

c. The bus voltage is below 24.0 volts.
d. The left or right alternator has failed.
6. Fuel Pump On – this warning is activated when the fuel pressure is less than 5.5 psi.
7. Traffic:
With TCAD installed – This warning phrase is always preceded by a tone and then
begins as “Traffic.” The clock position, relative altitude, and range of the intruder is
then announced. Refer to Audible Advisories on page 7-60 for a more detailed
description.
With TIS only installed – The warning phrase is either “Traffic” when TIS traffic
alert is received or “Traffic Not Available” when TIS service is not available or out
of range.
8. Timer Expired – this annunciation is activated by the G1000 Count Down timer and is
programmed by the pilot.
AFCS Alerts –The following alert annunciations appear in the AFCS System Status Field on
the PFD.
Condition Annunciation Description

Pitch Failure Pitch axis control failure. AP is inoperative.
Roll Failure Roll axis control failure. AP is inoperative.
Pitch Trim Axis Control If annunciated when AP is engaged, take control

Failure of the aircraft and disengage the autopilot.
System Failure AP is unavailable. FD may still be available.
Elevator Mistrim Up A condition has developed causing the pitch

servo to provide a sustained force. Be prepared
to apply nose up control wheel force upon
autopilot disconnect.
Elevator Mistrim Down A condition has developed causing the pitch
servo to provide a sustained force. Be prepared
to apply nose down control wheel force upon
autopilot disconnect.
Aileron Mistrim Left A condition has developed causing the roll servo
to provide a sustained left force. Ensure the
slip/skid indicator is centered and observe any
maximum fuel imbalance limits.
Aileron Mistrim Right A condition has developed causing the roll servo
to provide a sustained right force. Ensure the
slip/skid indicator is centered and observe any
maximum fuel imbalance limits.
Preflight Test Performing preflight system test. Upon
completion of the test, the aural alert will be
heard.
Preflight system test has failed.


Section 7
TAWS Alerts –Annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. Pop-up alerts appear only on the
MFD.
PFD/MFD MFD Map

Alert Type TAWS Page Page Aural Message
Annunciation Pop-Up Alert
Excessive Descent “Pull Up”
Rate Warning (EDR)
Reduced Required “Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Terrain Clearance or
Warning (RTC) “Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
Imminent Terrain Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
Impact Warning (ITI) or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Reduced Required “Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Obstacle Clearance or
Warning (ROC) “Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
Imminent Obstacle “Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
Impact Warning (IOI) or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Reduced Required “Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
Terrain Clearance or
Caution (RTC) “Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
Imminent Terrain “Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
Impact Caution (ITI) or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
Reduced Required “Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
Obstacle Clearance or
Caution (ROC) “Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
Imminent Obstacle “Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
Impact Caution (IOI) or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
Premature Descent
“Too Low, Terrain”
Alert Caution (PDA)
Altitude Callout “500” None None “Five-Hundred”
Excessive Descent
“Sink Rate”
Rate Caution (EDR)
Negative Climb Rate “Don’t Sink”
Caution (NCR) or
“Too Low, Terrain”
TAWS System Status Annunciations
PFD/MFD
MFD
Alert Type TAWS Page Aural Message
Pop-Up Alert
Annunciation
“TAWS System
TAWS System Test Fail None
Failure”
TAWS Alerting is disabled None None
No GPS position or excessively degraded
None “TAWS Not Available”
GPS signal
System Test in progress None None
“TAWS System Test

System Test pass None None
OK”
Other Annunciations – For Garmin G1000 system annunciations and message advisories
related to the PFD, MFD, LRUs, and databases refer to the Garmin G1000 Cockpit Reference
Guide for the Columbia 400, document number 190-00567-00.


Section 7
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
The backup attitude, airspeed, and altitude indicators are located in a column next to the PFD. The
discussion that follows will identify each instrument. A drawing of the airplane cockpit is shown on
page 7-10.
Magnetic Compass – The airplane has a conventional aircraft, liquid filled, magnetic compass with
a lubber line on the face of the window, which indicates the airplane’s heading in relation to
magnetic north. The instrument is located on the top of the windshield and is labeled at the 30°
points on the compass rose with major increments at 10° and minor increments at 5°. A compass
correction card is on the compass and displays compass error at 30° intervals with the engine, radios,
and strobes operating.
Backup Airspeed Indicator – The backup airspeed indicator is part of the pitot-static system, which
is discussed on page 7-32. The instrument measures the difference between total pressure and static
pressure and, through a series of mechanical linkages, displays an airspeed indication. The source of
the ram pressure is from the pitot tube, and the source of the static pressure is from the static air vent.
The instrument shows airspeed in knots on the outer circumference of the instrument, which ranges
from 0 to 260 knots with 10-knot increments. Airspeed limitations in KIAS are shown on colored
arcs as follows: white arc – 60 to 117 knots; green arc – 73 to 181 knots; yellow arc – 181 to 230
knots; and red line – 230 knots.
Backup Attitude Indicator – The backup attitude indicator is electrically powered and protected by
a three-amp circuit breaker. The instrument uses a self-contained vertical gyroscope mounted on a
pitch gimbal that is mounted on a roll gimbal. The gyro provides information relating to movement
around the pitch and roll axes. The indicator has no restriction on operation through 360 degrees of
aircraft pitch and roll displacement. The instrument has a caging knob that provides simultaneous
erection of the pitch and roll axes. The instrument has a power warning flag on the lower left side of
the instrument. When the flag is in view, power is off. When retracted, normal operation is indicated.
To cage the instrument pull the “PULL TO CAGE” knob to the fully extended position until the
display stabilizes, then carefully allow the knob to quickly return to the inward position avoiding a
snap release. The instrument does not normally need to be caged prior to takeoff. If necessary, the
instrument may be caged prior to takeoff. In the event of excessive attitude errors caused by
extended bank, acceleration or deceleration, the indicator should be momentarily caged after the
aircraft is returned to level flight.
Picture of the Attitude Indicator
Figure 7 - 14


Section 7
The roll is indicated by displacement from a fixed white index at the top of the instrument. The
displacement indications range left and right between 0° and 90° with major indexes of 30° and
minor indexes of 10° between the 0° to 30° ranges. Roll is also indicated by the relationship between
the airplane-like bar in the foreground and horizon-like display in the background. The background
horizon display is a painted disc with a white horizontal line through the diameter. The upper portion
of the disc is blue to represent the sky, and the lower ground portion is brown. Pitch is indicated by
displacement of the orange airplane-like bar above and below the horizon line. There are white lines
above and below the horizon line indexed in increments of 5° with a label at the 10° and 20º points.
The position of the orange bar may be adjusted for parallax using a 5/64” Allen wrench on the
adjustment bolt to the left of the cage knob.
Backup Altimeter – The backup altimeter is part of the pitot-static system, which is discussed on
page 7-32. The instrument measures the height above sea level and is correctable for variations in
local pressure. The pressure source for the instrument is from the static air vent. An aneroid or
diaphragm within the instrument either expands or contracts from changes in air pressure, and this
movement is transferred, through a series of mechanical linkages, into an altitude reading.
Adjustments for variations in local pressure are accounted for by setting the station pressure
(adjusted to sea level) into the pressure adjustment window, most commonly known as the Kollsman
Window. The altimeter has one Kollsman Window calibrated in inches of mercury (labeled inches
Hg). The adjustment knob for the window is at the seven o’clock position on the dial.
HOUR METER
The hour meter is located on the pilot’s side of the center console. Two conditions are required for
the hour meter to operate. The airplane must have an indicated speed of approximately 60 knots to
activate the air switch, and oil pressure must be present at a sufficient level to activate the oil
pressure switch. The oil pressure switch is integrated to preclude inadvertent operation of the hour
meter when the airplane is secured on the ground during extremely high wind conditions.
The hour meter will run even if the master switches are turned off during flight operations. The hour
meter is provided to record time in service, which is the basis for routine maintenance, maintenance
inspections, and the time between overhaul (TBO) on the engine and other airplane components.
PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM
The pitot-static system, as the name suggests, has two components, ram air from the pitot tube and
ambient air from the static air vent. The amount of ram compression depends on air density and the
rate of travel through the air. The ram air, in conjunction with static air, operates the airspeed
indicator. The static system also provides ambient uncompressed air for the altimeter, and the
Garmin GDC 74A air data computer. (See page 7-31 for a discussion of the static system
instruments.)
The pitot tube is located in the pitot housing on the right wing of the airplane, and the static air vent
is on the right side of the fuselage between the cabin door and horizontal stabilizer. The pitot
housing contains a heating element to heat the pitot tube in the event icing conditions are
encountered. The heating element is protected by a 7.5-amp circuit breaker, which is located in the
cockpit circuit breaker panel. If the normal static source becomes blocked, an alternate static source,
which uses pressure within the cabin, can be selected. The alternate static source is located on the
pilot’s side of the tower under the instrument panel. To access the alternate static source, rotate the
knob clockwise from the NORM to the ALT position.
Water accumulation in the static line reservoirs is a possibility, and certain precautions should be
taken to prevent excessive accumulation. Normal accumulation is anticipated in the system, which is
why a reservoir is incorporated. The reservoir is designed to collect this accumulation, but excessive
accumulation can result in errors to the instruments and equipment connected with the pitot-static
system causing erroneous flight instrument indications that may affect the autopilot. At 100-hour and


Section 7
annual inspections, a routine inspection is performed. Asking your mechanic how much fluid there
was in the reservoir after an inspection can give you an idea of how well the airplane has been
protected from excessive water accumulation. To prevent water accumulation, be sure to cover the
pitot tube and static port inlet when washing the airplane. When these items are covered, they MUST
be removed prior to flight. Leaving the airplane exposed to strong wind and rainstorms may also
cause accumulation. If at all possible, hangar the airplane or ensure the aircraft cover protects the
static port.


Section 7
ENGINE RELATED SYSTEMS

FUEL SYSTEM
The fuel system has two tanks that gravity feed to a three-position (Left, Right, and Off) fuel
selector valve located in the forward part of the armrest between the pilot and copilot seats. The fuel
flows from the selected tank to the auxiliary fuel pump and then to the strainer. From this point it
goes to the engine-driven pump where, under pressure, it is sent to the throttle/mixture control unit
and then to the fuel manifold valve for distribution to the cylinders. Unused fuel from the continuous
flow is returned to the selected fuel tank. The diagram in Figure 7 - 15 shows a general layout of the
fuel system.
Each fuel tank contains a slosh box near the fuel supply lines. A partial rib near the inboard section
of the fuel tank creates a small containment area with a check valve that permits fuel flow into the
box but restricts outflow. The slosh box is like a mini-fuel tank that is always full. Its purpose, in
conjunction with the flapper valves, is to ensure short-term positive fuel flow during adverse flight
attitudes, such as when the airplane is in an extended sideslip or subject to the bouncing of heavy
turbulence.
Fuel Quantity Indication – The airplane has integral fuel tanks, commonly referred to as a “wet
wing.” Each wing has two internal, interconnected compartments that hold fuel. The wing’s slope or
dihedral produces different fuel levels in each compartment and requires two floats in each tank to
accurately measure total quantity.
The floats move up and down on a pivot point between the top and bottom of the compartment, and
the position of each float is summed into a single indication for the left and right tanks. The
positions of the floats depend on the fuel level; changes in the float position increases or decreases
resistance in the sending circuit, and the change in resistance is reflected as a fuel quantity indication
on the MFD.
The pilot is reminded that the fuel calculation group of the MFD System page provides approximate
indications and are never substitutes for proper planning and pilot technique. Always verify the fuel
onboard through a visual inspection, and compute the fuel used through time and established fuel
flows.
Fuel Selector – The fuel tank selector handle is between the two front seats, at the forward part of
the armrest. The selector is movable to one of three positions: Left, Right, and Off. The fuel tank
selector handle is connected to a drive shaft that moves the actual fuel valve assembly, which is
located in the wing saddle. Moving the fuel tank selector handle applies a twisting force to move the
fuel selector valve.
When the fuel tank selector handle is moved to a particular position, positive engagement occurs
when the fuel selector valve rests in one of the three available detents: Left, Right, and Off. Rotating
the handle to the desired tank position changes the left and right tanks; initially, a small amount of
additional pressure is required to move the valve out of its detent.


Section 7
Fuel System Diagram
FUEL
CALCULATION FUEL FLOWS FROM
GROUP ON EITHER LEFT OR
THE MFD RIGHT TANK
SYSTEM PAGE DEPENDING ON THE
TANK SELECTED
LOW FUEL
ANNUNCIATION
SWITCHES
FILLER CAP FILLER CAP
FUEL FUEL
VENT VENT
SLOSH
FUEL LEVEL BOXES FUEL LEVEL
SENDING UNIT SENDING UNIT
FUEL DRAIN FUEL DRAIN

Fuel
Selector
Valve
AUX FUEL VAPOR SUPPRESS SWITCH

PUMP BACKUP BOOST ARM
FUEL VAPOR
RETURN TO PRIMER SWITCH
SELECTED TANK FS FUEL STRAINER
ENG. FUEL MIXTURE CONTROL

FUEL VALVE PUMP
MANIFOLD PRESS.
ANNUNCIATOR GAUGE & FUEL
FFT FLOW GAUGE ON
FUEL FLOW TRANSDUCER
FFT MFD SYSTEM PAGE
FUEL STRAINER
INTERNAL BYPASS THROTTLE
THROTTLE AND
LINE TAMU
METERING UNIT
TRANSDUCER
AND
FUEL LATCHING RELAY
MANIFOLD
TO INJECTOR
NOZZLES
Figure 7 - 15
A spring-loaded release knob in the selector handle prevents inadvertent movement beyond the right
and left tank positions. To move to the Off position, pull up on the fuel tank selector, and rotate the
handle until the pointer is in the Off position and the fuel valve is seated in the detent. To move the
handle from the Off position to the left or right tank, pull up on selector, and rotate the handle to the
desired tank.
When a tank is selected and the selector is properly seated in its detent, one of two blue lights on the
fuel calculation group on the MFD System page will illuminate to indicate which tank is selected. If
a tank is selected, and a blue light is not illuminated, then the selector handle is not properly seated
in the detent. In addition, if the fuel selector is not positively seated in either the left or right detent,
or is in the Off position, the PFD annunciation window will display a red FUEL VALVE message.
Fuel Low Annunciation Messages – There is a separate system, independent of the fuel quantity
indicators, which displays a low fuel state. A fuel level switch in each tank activates a L LOW


Section 7
FUEL or R LOW FUEL message in the PFD annunciation window when there is less than 8 gallons
(30 L) of usable fuel remaining in that tank. The fuel warning annunciation message has a 30 second
delay switch, which limits false indications during flight in turbulent air conditions.
Fuel Vents – There is a ventilation source for the fuel tank in each wing. The vents are wedge-
shaped recesses built into the access panel. They are located under the wing approximately five feet
inboard from the wing tip and positioned to provide positive pressure to each tank. The vents should
be open and free of dirt, mud, and other types of clogging substances. When fuel expands beyond a
tank’s capacity, it is sent out the fuel vent if both tanks are full. An internal tank pressure of more
than two to three psi will allow fuel to drain from the vents.
Fuel Drains and Strainer – The inboard section of each tank contains a fuel drain near the lowest
point in each tank. The fuel drain can be opened intermittently for a small sample or it can be locked
open to remove a large quantity of fuel. The gascolator or fuel strainer is located under the fuselage,
on the left side, near the wing saddle. Open the accessory door in this area for access to the
gascolator. There is a conventional drain device that operates by pushing up on the valve stem.
There is an internal bypass in the strainer that routes fuel around the filter if it becomes clogged.
Backup Fuel Pump and Vapor Suppression – The auxiliary fuel pump is connected to two
switches located in the flaps panel, just to the left of the flaps switch. One switch is labeled
BACKUP PUMP with red letters, and the other is labeled VAPOR SUPPRESS with amber letters.
The vapor suppression switch, which uses the low power function of the auxiliary pump, is used
primarily to purge the system of fuel vapors that form in the system at high altitudes or atypical
operating conditions. The vapor suppression must be turned on before changing the selected fuel
tank. If proper engine operations are observed, turn off the pump.
The positions on the backup pump switch are placarded with the terms BACKUP PUMP, ARMED,
and OFF. The switch is normally in the ARMED position for takeoff and climb to cruise altitude and
in the OFF position for cruise, descent, and approach to landing. If the engine driven pump
malfunctions and the backup pump is in the ARMED position, the backup fuel pump will turn on
automatically when the fuel pressure is less than about 5.5 psi (±0.5 psi). This condition will also
activate a yellow FUEL PUMP message in the PFD annunciation window. Please see an amplified
discussion on page 3-16.
Primer – The primer is a push-button switch located next to the ignition switch. Depressing the
primer button activates the backup fuel pump and sends raw gasoline, via the fuel manifold, to the
cylinders. The mixture must be rich and throttle partially opened for the primer to work properly.
Fuel Injection System – The engine has a continuous-flow fuel injection system. This system
meters fuel flow as a function of engine speed, throttle position, and the mixture control. Metered
flow is passed to pressurized, continuous flow nozzles at individual intake ports. The engine is
equipped with a speed-sensing fuel pump. The continuous-flow system uses a rotary vane pump.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEM (ECS)

The aircraft is equipped with the environmental control system (ECS) or the optional Automatic
Climate Control System (ACCS). The ACCS utilizes much of the valves, vents, and ducting of the
ECS. For information on the ACCS see page 7-61.
The ECS incorporates the use of bleed air, ram intake air, and an electric fan to distribute heated and
outside air to various outlets within the cabin. The ECS essentially consists of two subsystems,
heated air and the fresh air. Heated air is sent to the floor vent system and defroster, and fresh air is
ducted through the eyeball vents. The system demand affects the volume of flow to a particular vent.
As more vents are opened, the airflow to each vent is decreased.


Section 7
Airflow – Ram air enters through a duct on the right side of the engine cowling and flows to the
fresh air manifold. Cabin heat is produced using heated air off the bleed air valves (sonic nozzles)
located on the back of each intercooler. Heated air next passes through the ECS valve and onto a fan
unit before entering the distribution system. Operating the fan will increase the airflow through the
system (not including the eyeball vents). Fresh air flows directly from the manifold to the eyeball
vents. A diagram of the ECS system is shown in Figure 7 - 16.
Floor Vent System – The floor vent system provides mixed air to vents under both knee bolsters in
the front seat area and to an eyeball vent in the back lower portion of the front seat center storage
console. Rotating the vents clockwise and counterclockwise controls the airflow to the rear floor
eyeball vents, while the front vents have fixed grates. The ECS control panel is used to adjust the
temperature of the air and the amount of airflow. Additional airflow is provided by operating the
ECS fan. In flight, under most conditions, the ram air provides sufficient airflow, and use of the fan
is unnecessary. However, the fan is useful for ground operations when the ram air source is limited.
Defrosting System – The defrosting system is operated by adjustment of the ECS control panel.
Individual Eyeball Vents – Outside, unheated ram air is ducted to the eyeball vents. Individual
eyeball vents are located at each of the four seating positions. The pilot’s vent is below the Garmin
G1000 flight displays to the left of the flap panel, and the copilot’s vent is positioned in a similar
location to the right of the flap panel. The two rear vents are behind the left and right cabin doorsills.
Each vent is adjustable in terms of airflow volume and direction. Turning the adjustment ring on the
vent counterclockwise opens the vent and increases airflow; turning the vent clockwise closes the
vent and decreases airflow. In most situations, the eyeball vents are for fresh air, and the floor vents
are for heated air. On warmer days, during taxi operations, some additional circulation is available
from the floor vent system by operating the cabin fan with the heat control set to the lowest setting.


Section 7
Environmental Control System Diagram and Panel
COLD AIR
HEATED AIR OUTSIDE
RAM
MIXED AIR AIR
AIR BLEED NOZZLE

OFF
INTERCOOLER
MANIFOLD
ECS
VALVE
FRONT SEAT FRONT SEAT
EYEBALL VENT EYEBALL VENT
DEFROSTER
FAN
CONTROL
PANEL
REAR SEATING
EYEBALL VENTS
FRONT FRONT
FLOOR VENT FLOOR VENT
REAR EYEBALL
FLOOR VENT
Figure 7 - 16


Section 7
ELECTRICAL AND RELATED SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
General Description – The electrical system in this aircraft consists of two independent buses,
which are referred to as the left bus and right bus. The left and right (continuous output) alternators
are 65 amp and 52 amp, respectively, and provide charging power for the two 28 volt lead-acid
batteries, as well as system power. The batteries will also provide additional power in the event of an
over demand situation where the requirements on the system are greater than what can be provided
by the alternator. The left and right buses in turn feed the avionics and essential buses. Please refer to
Figure 7 – 18 for a diagram of the electrical system. A summary of the buses and related circuit
breaker protection is shown in Figure 7 – 17.
Five current limiters protect the alternators and bus outputs. In addition, the left and right buses are
physically isolated at the aft end of the avionics bay. Left and right bus controls, grounds, and
outputs are routed through separate holes, connectors, and cable runs so any failure on one bus will
not affect the operation of the other bus.
Control of the buses is via the master switch panel located on the overhead. There is also a crosstie
switch on this panel, which will restore power in the event of failure of the right or left systems. For
example, if the alternator or some other component on the left side should fail, the crosstie switch
will restore power to the electrical items on the left bus by connecting the left bus to the right bus.
As its name may suggest, power to the essential bus is never affected, provided power from at least
one bus (left or right) is available. The essential bus is diode fed, i.e., current will only flow in one
direction, from both the right bus and the left bus allowing the essential equipment to have two
sources of power.
Avionics Bus – The avionics bus provides power to the Audio/MKR, Integrated Avionics #2, Com
#2, Transponder, Avionics Fan, Traffic, Autopilot, MFD, and Weather.
Left Bus – The left bus provides power for the Aileron Trim, Pitot Heat, SpeedBrakes, Position
Lights, Landing Light, Left Voltage Regulator, and Fan.
Right Bus – The right bus provides power for the Strobe Lights, Taxi Light, Right Voltage
Regulator, Door Seal/Power Point, Carbon Monoxide Detector, Oxygen, Display Keypad, and Air
Conditioning.
Essential Bus – The essential bus is diode fed from either the right or the left bus and provides
power for the PFD, Attitude Horizon, Elevator Trim, Panel Lights, Air Data Computer, Engine
Airframe, Integrated Avionics #1, Com #1 Left Bus Relays, Fuel Pump, Stall Warning, Flaps,
Standby Attitude Horizon, and the Right Bus Relays.
Battery Bus – The Hobbs Meter, ELT, and courtesy lights/flip lights are connected to the battery
bus. These items will operate even if the left and right buses are turned off since the Hobbs meter
and ELT are directly connected to right battery, and the courtesy lights/flip lights are directly
connected to the left battery. A 3-amp fuse protects each component and is not accessible from the
cockpit.
Master Switches – The system’s two master switches are located in the master switch panel in the
overhead console. This manual refers to each of the left and right split-rocker switches as a master
switch (left master switch and right master switch). Although these switches are not technically
“master” switches, as they do not control the entire system, it is a common term used to prevent
confusion. Each switch is a split-rocker design with the alternator switch on the left side and the
battery switch on the right side. Pressing the top of the alternator portion of the split-switch turns on


Section 7
both switches, and pressing the bottom of the battery portion of the split-switch turns off both
switches. The battery side of the switch is used on the ground for checking electrical devices and
will limit battery drain since power is not required for alternator excitation. The alternator switches
are used individually (with the battery on) to recycle the system and are turned off during load
shedding. See the discussion on page 3-23.
Crosstie Switch – The crosstie switch is the white switch located between the left and right master
switches. This switch is to remain in the OFF position during normal operations. The crosstie switch
is only closed, or turned on, when the aircraft is connected to ground power or in the event of an
alternator failure. This switch will join the left and right buses together for ground operations when
connected to ground power. In the event of a left or right alternator failure, this switch will join the
two buses allowing the functioning alternator to carry the load on both buses and charge both
batteries. If the crosstie switch is turned on during normal operations, the system will operate
normally, however, the two main buses will not be isolated and they will function as a single bus.
Avionics Master Switch – The avionics master switch is located in the right side in the master
switch panel. The switch is a rocker-type design and connects the avionics distribution bus to the
primary distribution bus when the switch is turned on. The purpose of the switch is primarily for
protection of delicate avionics equipment when the engine is started. When the switch is turned off,
no power is supplied to the avionics distribution bus.


Section 7
Summary of Buses
SUMMARY OF BUSES
Bus Bus Component Circuit Breaker
• Audio/MKR 5 amp
• Com #2 5 amp
AVIONICS
• Transponder 5 amp
BUS
• Avionics Fan 3 amp
• Traffic 3 amp
• Autopilot 5 amp
• MFD 5 amp
• Weather 3 amp
• Aileron Trim 2 amp
• Pitot Heat 7.5 amp
LEFT BUS
• SpeedBrakes 3 amp
• Position Lights 5 amp
• Landing Light 5 amp
• Left Voltage Regulator 5 amp
• Fan 5 amp
• Strobe Lights 5 amp
• Taxi Light 2 amp
RIGHT BUS
• Right Voltage Regulator 5 amp

• Door Seal/Power Point 5 amp
• Carbon Monoxide Detector 2 amp
• Oxygen 3 amp
• Display Keypad 2 amp
• Air Conditioning 15 amp
• Attitude Horizon 5 amp
• Elevator Trim 2 amp
• Panel Lights 7.5 amp
• Air Data Computer 5 amp
• PFD 5 amp
ESSENTIAL BUS
• AHRS 5 amp
• Engine Airframe 5 amp
• Com #1 5 amp
• Left Bus Relays 1 amp
• Fuel Pump 5 amp
• Stall Warning 2 amp
• Flaps 10 amp
• Standby Attitude Horizon 3 amp
• Right Bus Relays 1 amp
BATTERY
• Hobbs Meter 3 amp

BUS
• ELT 3 amp
• Courtesy Lights 3 amp
Figure 7 – 17


Section 7
Electrical System Diagram
RIGHT BATTERY BUS

RIGHT RIGHT
ALTERNATOR
BATTERY
Hobbs Meter
ELT
Strobe Lights
Taxi Light
RIGHT BUS JUNCTION

Right Voltage Regulator
Door Seal/Power Point
RIGHT BUS
GROUND CO Detector
POWER Oxygen Attitude Horizon
PLUG Display Keypad Elevator Trim
ESSENTIAL BUS CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Air Conditioning Panel Lights
Air Data Computer
PFD
AHRS
CROSSTIE SWITCH
Engine Airframe
Integrated Avionics #1
Com #1
Left Bus Relays
STARTER Fuel Pump
MOTOR
Stall Warning
Flaps
Standby Attitude Horizon
Right Bus Relays
Aileron Trim
LEFT BUS JUNCTION
LEFT BUS
Pitot Heat
SpeedBrakes
Position Lights
Landing Light
LEFT BATTERY BUS
Left Voltage Regulator Courtesy Light
Fan
LEFT LEFT
ALTERNATOR Audio/MKR
BATTERY
Integrated Avionics #2
AVIONICS BUS
Com #2
Transponder
Avionics Fan
Traffic
Autopilot
MFD
Weather
Figure 7 – 18


Section 7
AIRPLANE INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM

The interior lighting system is one of the more sophisticated systems available for single-engine,
general aviation airplanes. A good understanding of the following discussion is important to
properly use all the features of the interior lighting system. The salient features of this system are
summarized in Figure 7-19, on page 7-44.
Flip and Access Lights – The flip lights are rectangular shaped fixtures located in the middle of the
overhead panel and in the baggage compartment. The lights bypass the system master switch and
operate without turning on power to the system. Rotating or flipping the lens right or left turns on
the two flip lights. In the center position, they are used as part of the airplane’s access lighting
system.
When either entrance door is unlatched, a switch in the door latching mechanism activates the two
flip lights and two lights that illuminate each entrance step. The access lights are on a ten-minute
timer and turn off automatically unless reset by activating both main door-latching mechanisms
when all the doors are closed.
This design has two advantageous features. First, opening either of the main cabin doors provides an
immediate light source for preflight operations, passenger access, and baggage loading. Second, the
flip lights, when rotated either left or right, serve as emergency lighting in situations, which
necessitate turning off the master switch. The only disadvantage is that the flip lights can
inadvertently be left on, depleting battery power. To prevent this from happening, ensure the flip
lights are in the centered or flush position when securing the airplane at the end of a flight.
Overhead Reading Lights – There are four overhead reading lights, two between the front seats
and two between the backseat positions. Each light is on a swivel that can be adjusted to an infinite
number of positions. The intensity of the lights can be adjusted by moving the left slide-type dimmer
switch located in the center of the overhead panel, just aft of the master switches. The dimmer has
an on-off switch at the extreme forward position, and moving the slide aft increases the light
intensity.
Instrument Flood Bar – There is a tube array of LEDs inserted under the glare shield. The intensity
of the lights can be adjusted by moving the right slide-type dimmer switch located in the center of
the overhead panel, just aft of the master switches. The dimmer has an on-off switch at the extreme
forward position, and moving the slide aft increases the light intensity.
Upper Instruments – The brightness of the PFD, MFD, audio panel, and keypad are controlled by
photo cells located on the devices. The brightness of backlighting for the backup flight instruments
is controlled by the left slide dimmer switch at the front of the center console. The dimmer has an
on-off switch at the extreme up position, and moving the slide down increases the light intensity.
Lower Instruments, Circuit Breaker, and Master Switches Panels – Backlighting of the pitot
heat, door seals, and optional equipment switches, flap panel, lighted position bar, slide dimmer
labels, master switches and circuit breaker panel is controlled by the right slide switch at the front of
the center console. Backlighting of the fuel pump “armed” light is controlled by the position lights
switch. The backlighting illuminates the placards on or next to the breaker, switch or control, and the
internally lighted switches. The dimmer has an on-off switch at the extreme up position, and moving
the slide down increases the light intensity. Backlighting of the pitot heat, door seals, and optional
items switches will dim down to a preset value while all other lighting controlled by this switch will
dim to zero.

Section 7
NOTE
The slide dimmer switches are “alive” at all times. During daylight
operation they should be slid to “off” to increase bulb life.
Summary of Interior Lights and Switches
LIGHT LOCATION OF LIGHTS LOCATION OF SWITCH REMARKS

♦ If all doors are latched, flip-
light is activated by flipping Door switch activates
• Front and rear flip lights in
Courtesy
the lens from the neutral timer that turns off access
Lights
overhead console
position. lights after 10 minutes.
• Exterior lights near the
♦ If a door is unlatched, a switch Operates with master
right and left entrance steps
activates flip-lights when the switch on or off
lens is in the neutral position.
• Two overhead swivel lights Master switch and

Overhead
♦ The left slide-type dimmer

Swivel
Lights
in the front seat area navigation lights must be

switch is in the overhead
• Two overhead swivel lights on for the system to
panel.
in the rear seat area operate.
• Flood bar under the glare

Flood Bar
♦ The right slide-type dimmer

Shield
Master switch must be on

Glare
shield which lights the

switch is in the overhead
flight instruments and front for the system to operate.
panel.
panel areas
Upper Instrument
♦ The left slide-type dimmer

• Master switch must be on
Panel
Provides backlighting for

switch is on the front of the
the flight instruments for the system to operate.
center console.
Circuit Breaker
Lower Inst. &
• Provides backlighting for

♦ The right slide-type dimmer
Panels
switches, or placards next Master switch must be on

switch is on the front of the
to switches, circuit for the system to operate.
center console.
breakers, and controls
Figure 7 – 19
Press-to-Test PTT Button – The Press-to-Test PTT button is located to the right of the master
switches in the overhead console. Pushing the test button verifies the operation of all the LEDs or
indicators associated with the flaps panel, pitot heat, door seals, and optional equipment switches.
When the test position is selected, all related LEDs illuminate in the bright mode. A light that fails to
illuminate should be replaced.
When the position lights are on, these lights operate in the dim mode. When the position lights are
off, the lights operate in the bright mode. The degree of luminance is set at the factory and cannot be
adjusted manually. In the daytime, during periods of reduced ambient light, the position lights can
be turned on if the illumination of the LEDs is distracting.
Interior Light Protection – With the exception of the flip lights, all interior lights are connected to
the essential bus and will only operate when the master switches are on. The light systems are
protected by circuit breakers in the circuit breaker panel.

Section 7
AIRPLANE EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM

Aircraft position and anti-collision or strobe lights are required to be lighted whenever the aircraft is
in operation. Anti-collision lights, however, need not be lighted when the pilot-in-command
determines that, because of operating conditions, it would be in the interest of safety to turn off the
lights. For example, strobe lights shall be turned off on the ground if they adversely affect ground
personnel or other pilots and in flight when there are adverse reflections from clouds.
The exterior lighting system includes the position lights, the strobe or anti-collision lights, the
landing light, and the taxi lights. These lights are activated through use of switches located on the
center console. The light system is protected by circuit breakers in the circuit breaker panel.
Position and Anti-collision Lights – The left and right position lights (red and green) are mounted
on each wing tip. Each wing position light contains the required aft or rearward projecting white
lights. The anti-collision lights are on each wingtip and contained within the same light fixture as the
position lights.
Taxi and Landing Lights – The taxi and landing lights are contained in the leading edge of the left
wing. The outboard bulb in the light housing is the taxi light that provides a diffused light in the
immediate area of the airplane. The inboard bulb is the landing light, which has a spot presentation
with a slight downward focus. The taxi and landing lights are sized for continuous duty and can be
left on for operations in high-density traffic areas.
STALL WARNING SYSTEM

Stall Warning – The aural stall warning buzzer in the overhead console is actuated by a vane-type
switch located on the leading edge of the left wing. Under normal flight conditions, the angle of
relative wind flow keeps the vane in the down position. The vane is connected to an electrical switch
that is open under normal flight operations. When the airplane approaches its critical angle of attack,
the relative wind pushes the vane up and closes the switch. The switch is set to activate
approximately five to ten knots above the actual stall speed in all normal flight configurations.
NOTE
The audio entertainment from the GDL 69A is inhibited automatically
when the stall horn is active.
Stall Warning System (Electrical) – Operation of the stall warning system requires the master
switch to be on since the stall warning is connected to the left and right buses. Breakers in the circuit
breaker panel protect the stall warning indicator. The stall warning is protected by a 2-amp circuit
breaker.
GROUND POWER PLUG

The ground power plug allows external power to be connected to the aircraft. The ground power
plug is located below and aft of the baggage door. The plug allows connection to a 24-volt power
source for maintenance and allows the engine to be started from a ground power cart. The aircraft
power must be off when the plug is connected or disconnected to the power source. Once connected,
turning the BATT switches on will charge the batteries.
CAUTION
The battery should be carefully monitored while charging. Do not exceed
28 volts DC.
During normal operation of the ground power plug, the crosstie switch should be on to energize the
left and right buses, and the BATT and ALT switches should be off to keep from overheating the
battery.

Section 7
The procedure for starting the engine using the ground power plug and a power cart is contained on
page 4-8 of this manual.
12 VDC AUXILIARY POWER OUTLETS

There are two 12 VDC auxiliary power outlets. One located in the front of the center console and the
other located in the back of the center console. These outlets have a 2 amp continuous, 5 amp
intermittent, limit.
CAUTION
Use of 12 VDC power exceeding 2 amps for more than 5 minutes may
over heat the regulator causing it to shut down.

Section 7
STANDARD AVIONICS INSTALLATION
NOTE
The Garmin G1000 Cockpit Reference Guide for the Columbia 400,
document number 190-00567-00 is the primary source document for
operation of the airplane’s avionics and autopilot. This manual describes
operation as well as G1000 system integration with other standard and
optional systems.
CONTROL STICK SWITCHES AND HEADSET PLUG POSITIONS

As discussed on page 7-8, there is a hat switch on the top portion of the pilot’s and copilot’s control
stick for operation of the trim tabs. In addition, both sticks have a Push-to-Talk (PTT) microphone
transmitter switch, and an autopilot switch (A/P DISC). A control wheel steering switch (CWS) is
on the pilot’s stick only. Please see Figure 7 – 20 for a drawing of the pilot’s control stick grip.
Autopilot Disconnect/Trim Interrupt Switch (A/P DISC) – The A/P DISC is a spring-loaded
push button switch on the top left side of the control stick. Pressing the switch will disengage the
autopilot and trim. Operating the elevator trim switch will also disconnect the autopilot.
Push-to-Talk (PTT) Switch – The PTT is a trigger switch on the forward side of the grip and, on
the pilot’s side, is engaged with the index fingertip of the left hand. There is a PTT switch on the
copilot’s stick that is normally operated with the index fingertip of the right hand. The PTT switches
are used in conjunction with headsets that have a small, adjustable, boom-type microphone.
Autopilot
Disconnect/Trim
Interrupt Switch
Control Wheel Steering Trim Switch

Switch (CWS)
Push To Talk Switch
Figure 7 – 20
Plug Positions – The airplane has four headset plug positions, two at the front of the center console
and two in the backseat area under each fresh air vent. The headsets, in conjunction with voice
activated microphones, are normally used for communications and intercom functions. See page 7-
20 for a discussion of the audio panel and intercom. However, either the pilot or copilot’s plug can
be used to add a hand-held microphone if desired. The airplane has special Bose headset plugs,
which are designed to operate with the active noise reduction (ANR) headsets. The Bose headsets


Section 7
provide a significant reduction in cabin noise. The Bose headset jacks for the pilot and copilot are
located under the entertainment center panel in the back of the center console.
Headsets – It is suggested that the owner or operator purchase headsets for use in the airplane, as
opposed to use of a hand-held microphone and cabin speaker. Pilot and passenger comfort is
enhanced in terms of noise fatigue, and the use of headsets facilitates both radio and intercom
communications. Moreover, in situations involving extended over water operations, where two
microphones are required, a second headset with a boom microphone will fulfill this requirement
and eliminate the purchase of a seldom-used, hand-held microphone.


Section 7
MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER (ELT)

General – The Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) is installed in the airplane as required by
Federal Aviation Regulations to aid in search and rescue operations. It is located aft of the baggage
compartment hat rack or storage shelf. There is an access panel in the vertical partition of the storage
shelf with the following placard: EMERGENCY LOCATION TRANSMITTER LOCATED AFT
OF THIS POINT. IT MUST BE MAINTAINED IN ACCORDANCE WITH FAR PART 91. In this
instance, the ELT battery must be replaced every two years (Artex 200) or every 5 years (Artex
ME406). The batteries must also be replaced when the transmitter has been in use for more than one
cumulative hour; or when 50 percent of their useful life has expired. The access panel is secured
with Velcro strips and is removable.
Artex 200 ELT – The ELT is automatically activated from the ARM setting when subjected to a
change in velocity of more than 3.5 feet per second. When activated, the unit will transmit a signal
on 121.5 and 243.0 MHz for about 50 hours depending on the age and condition of the battery. The
range of the ELT depends on weather and topography. Transmission can be received up to 100 miles
distant depending on the altitude of the search aircraft. In case of a forced landing in which the ELT
is not activated, the unit can be turned on with either the remote switch or the switch on the ELT. Do
not turn the ELT off even at night, as search aircraft may be en route 24 hours per day. Turn off the
unit only when the rescue team arrives at the landing site.
Switches – There is a two-position remote ELT switch located to the right of the MFD which is
used to arm, test, and reset the transmitter. In addition, there is a three-position switch on the ELT
that is used to arm, test, reset, and turn off the unit. Under normal conditions, the switch on the
ELT is set to the ARM position, and accessing the unit is unnecessary since most functions are
accomplished with the remote switch. The one exception is the ELT cannot be turned off with the
remote switch. In the event the ELT remains on during normal operations and cannot be reset,
moving the three-position toggle switch on the ELT to neutral turns off the transmitter.
Since there are three selectable switch positions on the ELT and two positions on the remote
panel, a total of six switch combinations exist. The table below, Figure 7-21, summarizes the six
possible combinations and describes how the unit will work with each switch combination.
ELT Unit Switch Remote Switch

How ELT Will Function
Setting Setting
ARM (Normal) ARM (Normal) ELT G-switch is activated by 3.5 ft/sec. change in velocity
ON ARM
Overrides G-switch and activates ELT. Normally this setting is used
ARM ON
for maintenance and emergencies when the ELT is not activated.
ON ON
OFF ARM
WARNING, the ELT will not operate under any of these conditions.
OFF ON
Figure 7 – 21
Testing and Reset Functions – If the ELT is tested while installed in the airplane, use the
following procedures. First, the test shall be conducted only during the first 5 minutes after any
hour unless special arrangements are established with the controlling ATC entity. Next, place the
remote switch in the ON position and verify that the red light on the remote switch flashes. Also,
verify that the ELT is heard on the airplane’s communication radio, which shall be set to 121.5
MHz. Limit the test period to about three bursts or three flashes of the remote red light, and then


Section 7
move the remote switch to the ARM position. Verify that a signal is no longer audible on 121.5
MHz and that the red light on the remote switch is not flashing.
If desired, a system function test is possible using the switch combinations in with verification
that the appropriate function is displayed. Remember that the functional check does not verify the
condition of system components such as antenna, G-switch, cabling, and battery condition.
During post flight shutdown operations, monitoring 121.5 MHz on the communications radio will
verify the absence of an ELT transmission. If an ELT tone is heard, reset the unit by moving the
remote switch to the ON position for one second and then moving the switch back to the ARM
position. The ELT, if it is functioning properly, should be reset. If this procedure does not reset
the ELT and a tone is still audible on the communication radio, the ELT must be turned off by
moving the switch on the transmitter to the neutral position. The problem with the ELT shall be
corrected in a timely manner. Refer to FAR 91.207 for additional information.
Artex ME406 ELT – In the event of a crash, the ME406 activates automatically, and transmits the
standard swept tone on 121.5 MHz lasting until battery power is gone. This 121.5 MHz signal is
mainly used to pinpoint the beacon during search and rescue operations.
NOTE
In October 2000 the International Cospas-Sarsat Program, announced at its 25th
Council Session held in London, UK that it plans to terminate satellite processing
of distress signals from 121.5 and 243 MHz emergency beacons on February 1,
2009.
In addition, for the first 24 hours of operation, a 406 MHz signal is transmitting at 50- second
intervals. This transmission lasts 440 ms and contains identification data programmed into the
beacon and is received by Cospas-Sarsat satellites. The transmitted data is referenced in a database
(maintained by the national authority responsible for ELT registration) and used to identify the
beacon and owner.
Accuracy – Doppler positioning is employed using both 121.5 MHz and 406 MHz signals.
Position accuracy of the 121.5 MHz signal is within an area of approximately 15-20 km radius
about the transmitter. Due to the better signal integrity of the 406 MHz, its location accuracy is
within about a 3 km radius.
Switch Operation – An acceleration activated crash sensor (G-switch) turns the ELT ‘on’
automatically when the ELT experiences a change in velocity (or deceleration) of 4.5 fps ±0.5
fps. Activation is also accomplished by means of the remote switch located to the right of the
MFD or the panel (local) switch on the ELT. To deactivate the ELT set either switch to the
‘ON’ position, then back to ‘ARM’. The ELT does not have an ‘OFF’ position. Instead, a
jumper between two pins on the front D-sub connector must be in place for the G-switch to
activate the unit. The jumper is installed on the mating half of the connector so that when the
connector is installed, the beacon is armed. This allows the beacon to be handled or shipped
without ‘nuisance’ activation (front connector removed).
NOTE
The ELT can still be manually activated using the local switch on the front of the
ELT.
Care should be taken when transporting or shipping the ELT not to move the switch or allow
packing material to become lodged such as to toggle the switch.


Section 7
Self Test Mode – Upon turn-off, the ELT automatically enters a self-test mode that transmits a
406 MHz test coded pulse that monitors certain system functions before returning to the
‘ARM’ed mode. The 406 MHz test pulse is ignored by any satellite that receives the signal, but
the ELT uses this output to check output power and correct frequency. If the ELT is left
activated for approximately 50 seconds or greater, a distress signal is generated that is accepted
by one or more SAR satellites. Therefore, when the self-test mode is required, the ELT must be
activated, then, returned to ‘ARM’ within about 45 seconds otherwise a “live” distress message
will be transmitted.
NOTE
All activations of the ELT should be kept to a minimum. Local or national
regulations may limit testing of the ELT or special requirements or conditions to
perform testing. For the “self test”, Artex recommends that the ELT be “ON” for
no more than 5 seconds during the first 5 minutes after the hour.
In addition to output power of the 121.5/406 MHz signals and 406 MHz frequency, other
parameters of the ELT are checked and a set of error codes generated if a problem is found.
The error codes are displayed by a series of pulses of the ELT LED, remote LED and alert
buzzer. See below.
Testing – Always perform the tests within the first 5 minutes of the hour. Notify any nearby
control tower of your intensions, in accordance with AC 43.13-1B, Section 12-22, Note 3. If
outside of the US, always follow all local or national regulations for testing of ELT’s.
WARNING
Do not allow test duration to exceed 5 seconds.
Any time the ELT is activated it is transmitting a 121.5 MHz distress signal. If the unit
operates for approximately 50 seconds, a “live” 406 MHz distress signal is transmitted and is
considered valid by the satellite system. Any time that the ELT is cycled from “ARM” to “ON”
and then back to “ARM”, a 406 MHz signal is transmitted, however it is specially coded as a
“self test” signal that is ignored by the COSPAS-SARSAT satellites.
Self Test – Artex recommends that the ELT be tested every 1-2 months. Follow the steps
outlined below.
NOTE
The self-test time is accumulated in a register on the battery pack. The register
records activation time in 30 second increments so all activations will count as at
least 30 seconds, even if the actual time is much less. Total allowable time is 60
minutes as determined by FAR 91.207 and RTCA DO-204. After this time has
been accumulated a 7- flash error will be presented after the self test. The battery
must be replaced at this point for the ELT to remain in compliance. Always
follow ELT testing requirements per local or national authorities.
Tune a receiver (usually the aircraft radio) to 121.5 MHz. Turn the ELT aircraft panel
switch “ON” for about 1 second, then back to the “ARM” position. The receiver should
voice about 3 audio sweeps. At turn-off (back to ‘ARM’ state) the panel LED and buzzer
should present 1 pulse. If more are displayed, determine the problem from the list below.
Codes displayed with the associated conditions are as follows:
1 Flash – Indicates that the system is operational and that no error conditions were
found.


Section 7
3 Flashes – Bad load detect. Detects open or short condition on the antenna output
or cable. These problems can probably be fixed by the installer.
• Check that the RF cable is connected and in good condition. Perform

continuity check of center conductor and shield. Check for a shorted
cable.
• Check for intermittent connection in the RF cable.
• If this error code persists there may be a problem with the antenna
installation. This can be checked with a VSWR meter. Check the
antenna for opens, shorts, resistive ground plane connection.
4 Flashes – Low power detected. Occurs if output power is below about 33 dBm (2
watts) for the 406 signal or 17 dBm (50 mW) for the 121.5 MHz output. Also may
indicate that 406 signal is off frequency. For this error code the ELT must be sent
back for repair or replacement.
5 Flashes – Indicates that the ELT has not been programmed. Does not indicate
erroneous or corrupted programmed data.
6 Flashes – Indicates that G-switch loop between pins 5 and 12 at the D-sub
connector is not installed. ELT will not activate during a crash.
• Check that the harness D-sub jumper is installed by verifying less than 1
ohm of resistance between pins 5 and 12.
7 Flashes – Indicates that the ELT battery has too much accumulated operation
time (> 1hr). Battery may still power ELT; however, it must be replaced to meet
FAA specifications. May also indicate damage to the battery circuit.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
General – The airplane fire extinguisher is located below the copilot’s seat in a metal bracket and is
mounted parallel to the lateral axis. The extinguisher is stored with the top of the unit near the
middle of the airplane so that it is accessible from the pilot’s seat.
The extinguisher is filled with a 1211/1301 Halon mixture (commonly called Halonaire) that
chemically interrupts the combustion chain reaction rather than physically smothering the fire. The
hand extinguisher is intended for use on Class B (flammable liquids, oil, grease, etc.) and Class C
(energized electrical equipment) type fires.
Temperature Limitations – The fire extinguisher has temperature storage limitations that may need
to be considered depending on the operating environment of the airplane. If it is anticipated that the
cabin temperature will exceed the extremes shown in the table below Figure 7 – 22 the extinguisher
must be removed and stored in a more temperate location.
Temperature Maximum/Minimum Temperatures

Extremes
Lowest Cabin Temperature -40ºF (-40ºC)
Highest Cabin Temperature 120ºF (49ºC)
Figure 7 – 22


Section 7
Operation and Use – To operate the fire extinguisher, use the following procedures after securing
the ventilation system:
1. Remove the fire extinguisher from its mounting bracket by pulling up on the bracket release
clamp.
2. With the unit in an upright position, remove the retaining pin from the handle.
3. Discharge the extinguisher by pushing down on the top handle. For best results, direct the
discharge towards the base of the fire, near the edge. Use a small side-to-side sweeping motion
while moving towards the back of the fire. The extinguisher has a continuous discharge
capability of approximately eight seconds. Do not direct the initial discharge at the burning
surface at close range since the high velocity stream may scatter the burning materials.
4. Short bursts from the extinguisher of one or two seconds are more effective than a long
continuous application.
5. When the fire is extinguished, open all ventilation and return the fire extinguisher to its
mounting bracket. Do not lay it on the floor or in a seat.
6. Have the fire extinguisher replaced or recharged before the next flight.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION/STATIC DISCHARGE

While composite construction provides both strength and low air resistance, it does have high
electrical resistance and, hence, very little electrical conductivity. Conductivity is necessary for
lightning protection, since it is important that all parts of the airplane have the same electrical
potential. Moreover, in the event of a lightning strike, the energy is distributed to and absorbed by all
the skin area, rather than to an isolated location. One method of lightning protection, which is used
in this airplane, is achieved by integrating aluminum and copper mesh as part of the composite
sandwich. The depth of the mesh varies from 10 to 30 thousandths of an inch below the surface of
the paint and encompasses most surfaces of the airplane. The various parts of the airplane are then
interconnected through use of metal fasteners inserted through several plies of mesh, mesh overlaps,
and bonding straps.
WARNING
The thickness of the surface paint is important for lightning protection
issues, and the color is important because of heat reflection indices. The
owner or operator of the airplane must only repaint the airplane
according to the specifications for Columbia 400 LC41-550FG as shown
in the airplane maintenance manual.
Static wicks are used to bleed an accumulated static electrical charge off the airplane’s surface and
discharge it into the air. An airplane that does not properly dissipate static build-ups is susceptible to
poor or inoperative radio navigation and communication. The wick is made of carbon, enclosed in a
plastic tube. One end of the wick is connected to the trailing edge of the airplane’s surface, and the
other end sticks out into the air. As the airplane flies through the air, static electricity builds up on
the surfaces, travels through the mesh to the static wicks, and discharges into the air. The over
application of wax increases the generation of static electricity. See page 8-19 in Section 8 for
instructions about the care of the airplane’s surfaces. Also refer to page 4-17 in Section 4 for more
information about the static wicks.
PRECISE FLIGHT FIXED OXYGEN SYSTEM
The Precise Flight fixed oxygen system is installed to provide supplemental oxygen for the pilot and
passengers. The system consists of three, 14 cu ft oxygen bottles located in the right wing, a
regulator/valve assembly, a filler port in the aft baggage compartment, an overpressure protection
device, a guarded overhead emergency manual valve, an overhead distribution manifold, and
associated lines, fittings, valves, and sensors. The oxygen bottles are located in the right hand wing
locker between WS 25.0 and WS 46.0 wing rib, and between the forward and aft spars. The total
oxygen capacity of the system is 42 cu. ft (1189 L). The maximum oxygen cylinder pressure is 2000
psi. The low pressure operating pressure is 20 to 33 psi. The bottles are interconnected by bottle


Section 7
fittings and the high-pressure stainless steel lines to the high-pressure manifold of the regulator valve
assembly mounted to the inboard side of the root rib. Also attached to this high-pressure manifold
are the stainless steel lines connected to the filler port located in the baggage compartment and to the
remote overpressure burst assembly located in the belly of the wing. The regulator/valve assembly
includes a regulator to reduce the bottle pressure to the low-pressure manifold for distribution. This
assembly also includes a valve, on the low-pressure side, that is activated by a latching solenoid to
turn on and off the flow of oxygen to the cabin distribution (low pressure) manifold. The low-
pressure lines are then routed into the cabin area, behind the interior, to a manual valve, and then to
the low-pressure distribution manifold where the dispensing systems are attached to deliver the
supplemental oxygen to the pilot and passengers. Attached to both the high pressure manifold and
the low-pressure distribution manifold are electronic pressure transducers to measure the oxygen
pressure at the respective locations. These values are sent to the Oxygen Quantity Gauge and the
Oxygen Outlet Pressure Gauge displayed on the MFD System page.
Oxygen is required to be used by the pilot above 12,500 ft for flight time exceeding 30 minutes and
above 14,000 ft for the duration of the flight above 14,000 ft. If climbing to an altitude where
oxygen will be required, it is recommended that at approximately 10,000 ft, the pilot should begin
using the oxygen. Passengers are required to be supplied with oxygen above 15,000 ft.
Oxygen Flow Controls – Four manually operated oxygen flow controls can be connected to the
oxygen distribution manifold. The flow controls are calibrated and adjustable for altitude by the user.
The flow controls can be one of the following:
• A4 Flowmeters and Oxygen Conserving Cannulas – Up to 18,000 ft
• A4 Flowmeters and Masks (Standard and Microphone) – Up to 25,000 ft.
The flow controls provide the means to distribute the appropriate amount of oxygen for the pressure
altitude of flight and indicate the presence of flowing oxygen to the pilot or passenger(s). The
flowmeter or flow indicator and the oxygen quantity gauge should be checked periodically
(approximately every 10 minutes). The flow control should be reset with each change in pressure
altitude or as required by the user for physiological requirements.
Oxygen Display – Oxygen system information is provided on the Oxygen Quantity Gauge and the
Oxygen Outlet Pressure Gauge of the MFD System page. The Oxygen Quantity Gauge displays the
amount of remaining oxygen in terms of pressure. The Oxygen Outlet Pressure Gauge displays the
oxygen outlet pressure at the distribution manifold in psi.
The pilot may choose at this time to connect a flow control and breathing device to the oxygen
distribution manifold as required. Pressing the OXYGEN softkey on the MFD turns the oxygen
system on or off. Higher outlet pressures will be indicated at lower altitudes and with fewer users,
whereas increasing the altitude and/or number of users will cause a normal decrease in the indicated
outlet pressure. Outlet pressure in the green band indicates normal outlet pressure with the system
ON. If the outlet pressure is in the red area, it is an indication of a malfunction and the system should
be checked. Problems with oxygen distribution as indicated through low pressure, or low flow
indications on the breathing stations due to leaks or due to constrictions must be identified and must
be corrected. Normally there will be an annunciation that oxygen should be used if the pressure
altitude is above 12,000 ft. and the oxygen is not turned on. There will not be an annunciation if the
oxygen is turned on but the flow is turned off at the flow meter.
Oxygen Annunciation Messages – There are four annunciation messages that may be displayed on
the PFD. They are as follows:
1. OXYGEN – Altitude is at or above 12,000 ft. PA and the oxygen system has not
been turned on.
2. OXYGEN QTY – Low oxygen quantity pressure.
3. OXYGEN PRES – Low oxygen pressure on the distribution manifold.


Section 7
4. OXYGEN ON – Reminder that the oxygen system is still turned on and the aircraft
is on the ground.
When the OXYGEN annunciation displays, the pilot should confirm the altitude and use oxygen as
required.
Breathing Devices (Masks and Cannulas) – The breathing devices have attached placards
indicating the proper method for donning, use, and safety precautions. When using nasal cannula
devices, breathing exclusively through the mouth, extremely light breathing, or nasal blockage will
inhibit oxygen flow.
NOTE
Breathing through the nose, and limiting conversation is required for the user to
achieve proper oxygenation when using nasal cannulas.
WARNING
Do not use oxygen when utilizing lipstick, chapstick, petroleum jelly, or any
product containing oil or grease. These substances become highly flammable in
oxygen rich conditions.
NOTE
If the pilot has nasal congestion, or other breathing conditions, a mask with
microphone should be used.
Flowmeter – The oxygen flowmeters (see Figure 7 – 23) are simple devices to regulate the flow of
oxygen and provide flow indication to the pilot and passengers. Connect the flowmeters to the
distribution manifold and while holding the flowmeter vertical, adjust the ball so that the center of
the ball rests on the line for the planned cruise altitude for the type of breathing device used. If
changing altitude or requiring more oxygen for physiological reasons, adjust the flowmeter as
required. Periodically check the flowmeter (approximately every 10 min.) to ensure oxygen is
flowing and at the correct amount for the conditions.
Flexible Line
Flowmeter
Altitude Flowmeter Valve
Scale
Flowmeter Flexible Line
Figure 7 – 23


Section 7
Filler Port – The filler port for refilling the oxygen bottles is located on the pilot’s side of the hat
rack in the aft portion of the baggage compartment. The port is placarded “Oxygen Fill Port Do Not
Exceed 2000 p.s.i.” Refer to page 8-8 for details on servicing the oxygen system.
Preflight Testing – Prior to any flight that may require the use of the oxygen system, the pilot
should verify the oxygen valve opens and the system retains pressure (low pressure will be indicated
as an annunciation on the PFD). This test may be accomplished on the MFD System page. The pilot
should also verify the proper flow of oxygen to each mask plugged into the oxygen manifold prior to
departure. At the conclusion of the test the pilot may close the main oxygen valve.


Section 7
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
PRECISE FLIGHT SPEEDBRAKE™ 2000 SYSTEM
System Overview – Precise Flight SpeedBrake™ 2000 System is installed to provide expedited
descents at low cruise power, glide path control on final approach, airspeed reduction, and an aid to
the prevention of excessive engine cooling in descent. The SpeedBrakes™ can be extended at
aircraft speeds up to VNE.
WARNING
If icing is encountered with the SpeedBrakes™ extended, retract the
SpeedBrakes™ immediately. Do not extend the SpeedBrakes™ when flying in
areas of potential structural icing.
The Series 2000 SpeedBrake™ option consists of wing mounted electric SpeedBrake™ cartridges.
A central logic-switching unit interconnects each SpeedBrake™ cartridge electronically and a panel
mounted SpeedBrake™ actuator switch controls SpeedBrake™ deployment. The SpeedBrake™
cartridges receive electrical power from the aircraft electrical bus through a disconnect type circuit
breaker.
The SpeedBrake™ rocker switch is located next to the throttle in the center of the instrument panel.
The switch is positioned UP/ON to fully deploy and is positioned DOWN/OFF to retract the
SpeedBrakes™. A message will display in the PFD annunciations window to indicate SpeedBrake™
deployment, if and only if, both SpeedBrake™ units are deployed. A failure of a single cartridge
drive unit will prevent the annunciation.
If both brakes do not extend after the switch is toggled on, it indicates a failure of one or both
SpeedBrake™ cartridge(s) and the SpeedBrake™ switch should be toggled off. The system can be
checked again for proper operation, but after the second attempt the SpeedBrake™ switch should be
left off. When the SpeedBrake™ switch is toggled OFF, the annunciation message will clear when
both brakes are fully stowed in the wing.
The SpeedBrakes™ will not automatically re-extend and must be recycled after the following
conditions:
1. Circuit Breaker Pull
2. Automatic Stowage Due to Asymmetric Deployment or Low Voltage
3. Automatic Stowage Due to Stall Warning Activation
CO GUARDIAN CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTOR

The Model 452-201 Series Carbon Monoxide Detector is designed to detect, measure, and provide a
visual and aural alert to the pilot before the level of carbon monoxide (CO) reaches a critical level.
The installation consists of a single carbon monoxide detector installed behind the instrument panel
that activates a red message in the PFD annunciations window, a flashing red annunciation in the
lower left of the MFD System page, and an aural warning. The aircraft supplied power and aircraft
wiring is protected by a 2 amp circuit breaker. There is a reset softkey labeled CO RST located on
the MFD System page.
The carbon monoxide alarm level is calibrated to alert the pilot within five minutes or less whenever
the carbon monoxide level reaches 75 parts per million (PPM) by volume or above. The warning
time is shortened at higher levels of CO concentrations and becomes approximately instant should
the CO level reach 400 parts per million by volume (PPM) or above.
In case of a CO alert, the red annunciation message will display, the CO level will display on the
MFD, and the aural warning will state “Carbon Monoxide” every two seconds. The visual alert will

Section 7
remain until the CO level is again reduced below the alert level. The aural warning may be silenced
by pressing the alert softkey on the PFD. The indicator is automatically reset when the CO level
drops below 75 PPM.
On initial power up, the detector goes through a self-test. There will be a three minute warm-up time
before the detector is operational. To reset the system, press the reset softkey on the MFD. If the
detector sensor fails, a message will be displayed on the PFD indicating the detector has failed.
XM WEATHER (WX) DATA SYSTEM

The Garmin GDL 69A Data Link Receiver receives broadcasts from XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
through one or both of the two geosynchronous satellites which transmit over the contiguous 48-
states of the USA. Broadcast weather information received is displayed on the MFD. For additional
information on the Garmin GDL 69A see page 7-23. For operating instructions on the system, refer
to the Garmin G1000 Cockpit Reference Guide for the Columbia 400, document number 190-
00567-00.
The tear-drop style antenna receives “line-of-site” transmissions from the satellites. The antenna
consists of a LH circular polarized, hemispherical element with an integrated low noise amplifier
(LNA). This LNA is powered by a +5VDC offset from the receiver through the coax cable.
RYAN MODEL 9900BX TCAD (TRAFFIC AND COLLISION ALERT DEVICE)

General – The Ryan Model 9900BX TCAD is an on-board air traffic display system used to
identify potential collision threats. The TCAD, within defined limits, creates a shield of airspace
around the aircraft, whereby detected traffic cannot penetrate without generating an alert. The
TCAD will display multiple aircraft threats. TCAD information is displayed through integration
with the Garmin G1000 system. See Figure 7 – 24 for a schematic of TCAD, Traffic Information
System (TIS), and G1000 integration.
CAUTION
The intruder bearing information provided by the traffic system is only accurate
to within 45 degrees of true intruder track. Take this into account when visually
acquiring system reported traffic.
Keep in mind that intruder traffic can maneuver at any time, and the displayed
intruder track direction does not guarantee the intruder will continue along that
track.
WARNING
The 9900BX TCAD (Traffic and Collision Alert Device) does not detect all
aircraft. It is designed as a backup to the See and Avoid concept and the ATC
Radar environment.
It is dangerous to rely on the 9900BX as your sole source of data for collision
avoidance.
Maneuver your aircraft based only on ATC guidance or positive acquisition of

conflicting traffic. It is your duty as pilot in command to See and Avoid.
The system is comprised of a processor, a transponder coupler, and two antennas (one antenna
mounted to the top of the aircraft and the other mounted to the bottom). The processor is located on
the avionics shelf and the transponder coupler is located in the foot well of the passenger seats.
The TCAD monitors the altitude difference and range, and warns the pilot when the calculated time
to closest approach (CPA) of the intruder meets a certain threshold (15 to 30 seconds, depending on

Section 7
aircraft configuration). The altitude data from the intruder is referenced to pressure altitude (29.92
inches or 1013mb). The range is determined using radar time of arrival technique. Bearing to the
traffic is determined using the dual directional antennas, on the top and bottom of the aircraft.
The TCAD actively interrogates transponders from nearby aircraft to identify and track intruders.
The vertical separation of the host and intruder is determined by comparing the decoded altitude
replies to the host’s altitude (from the ADC). The TCAD computes relative altitude and range of
threats from nearby Mode C and Mode S equipped aircraft. Aircraft with non-Mode C transponders
can provide range, bearing and horizontal closure information only. The TCAD will not detect
aircraft without operating transponders. Use of the TCAD is advisory only, and is a back up to the
See and Avoid Concept, and the ATC radar environment.
Additional functions provided by the TCAD are:

Data and Altitude – The TCAD will display the identity, transponder code (when
available), and N-number (Mode S traffic) of detected aircraft.
Airspeed Flap switch

switch
TCAD
9900BX
MFD
GMA 1347 ARINC 429

Audio Panel
GIA #2
ARINC 429
GTX 33 TIS
- Traffic Audio → from TCAD only.

- When ‘Airspeed’ switch is grounded (aircraft speed less than 60 kts), TCAD system
turns to Ground mode, all advisory audio muted.
- When Flap switch is ‘Down’, TA is Sensitivity Level A (SL A). See Figure 7 – 25.
- When Flap switch is ‘Up’, TA is in Sensitivity Level B (SL B). See Figure 7 – 26.
Figure 7 – 24
Advisory Levels – There are three advisory levels: Traffic Advisories (TA), Proximate Advisories
(PA), and Other Traffic (OT). A TA is audibly announced, a PA is displayed traffic within defined
display parameters, and OT is defined as intruders that are not TAs or PAs.

Section 7
A TA is generated and an initial TA announcement is issued when an intruder’s tau (time to closest
approach) value and/or range and altitude separation is less than the TA threshold. A TA is also
generated if the processor detects that the current track of the intruder could result in a near miss or
collision. A TA remains in effect until the range between the host aircraft and the intruder begins to
diverge or for 8 seconds, whichever is longer. See Figure 7 – 25 for TA thresholds (SL A) when the
TCAD is in Approach or Departure Mode (automatically activated when flaps are deployed). See
Figure 7 – 26 for TA thresholds (SL B) for all other flight conditions.
Approach or Departure Mode TA Thresholds
Host to Intruder
Intruder Type
Altitude
Tau Range
Separation
(seconds) (nm)
(ft.)
Altitude reporting
< 20 < 0.20 < 600
intruders
Non-altitude
< 15 < 0.20 < N/A
reporting intruders
Figure 7 – 25
All Other Flight Condition TA Thresholds
Host to Intruder
Intruder Type
Altitude
Tau Range
Separation
(seconds) (nm)
(ft.)
Altitude reporting
< 30 < 0.55 < 800
intruders
Non-altitude
< 25 < 0.20 < N/A
reporting intruders
Figure 7 – 26
Audible Advisories – When an intruder generates a TA, the TCAD creates an audible voice
annunciation. The announced phrase is always preceded by a tone and then begins as “Traffic.” The
clock position, relative altitude, and range of the intruder is then announced. If the intruder is more
than 200 feet above or below the host aircraft, the relative altitude is announced as “High” or “Low.”
If the intruder’s relative altitude is within 200 feet, “Same Altitude” is announced. The TCAD
announces “Altitude Unavailable” for non-Mode C TAs.
TCAD Display on the G1000 – Refer to the Garmin G1000 Cockpit Reference Guide for the
Columbia 400, document number 190-00567-00.

Section 7
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (ACCS)

General – The Automatic Climate Control System (ACCS), incorporating an R-134a Air
Conditioning System in coordination with the aircraft’s Environmental Control System (ECS), is
fully automatic and designed to cool and heat the aircraft cabin to desired temperature settings
during all phases of flight operations. See Figure 7 – 27. The ACCS cools cabin air temperature,
establishes the humidity level of the cabin at a comfortable level and reduces dust and pollen
particles from the cabin air. The system may be used during any phase of the flight, offering a
choice of fully automatic or mode override.
The air conditioning system components of the ACCS consist of an engine driven or electrically
driven compressor, a condenser with fans, a receiver-dryer with trinary pressure switch, an
evaporator with an expansion valve, and an evaporator coil temperature sensor.
OUTSIDE
RAM
AIR
ECS
CONTROL
FRONT SEAT
VALVE
EYEBALL VENTS
DEFOG
DEF/HTR
FAN REAR SEAT
EYEBALL VENTS
ECS SHUT FRONT SEAT

OFF VALVE OVERHEAD OVERHEAD
EYEBALL VENTS FLOOD DUCTS
DEFOG/FLOOR
SELECTOR
VALVE
REAR SEAT
OVERHEAD
EYEBALL VENTS EVAPORATOR
FRONT FRONT WITH INTAKE
FLOOR VENT FLOOR VENT
CABIN AIR
OUTLET VENTS
REAR EYEBALL
FLOOR VENT
Figure 7 – 27
System Operation – Electric fan, forced air, directed through the condenser coil, located beneath
the baggage compartment floor, cools the hot, high pressure R-134a refrigerant. The condenser
intake air is taken from two screen covered ducts on the belly of the aircraft. Condenser exhaust air

Section 7
exits through four screen covered ducts on the belly of the aircraft, aft of the two condenser intake
ducts. Control of the refrigeration temperature cycle is done with a computer controlled thermostatic
cycling switch. The switch senses evaporator temperature and cycles the engine driven compressor
to regulate the evaporator coil temperature and to prevent the coil from “freezing up”.
Outside air can be introduced into the cabin through the eyeball vents on the side interior panels of
the aircraft by opening the instrument panel and rear side wall vents at any time.
During warm cabin temperatures the ACCS operates in the air conditioning mode, supplying cooled,
dehumidified air to the ceiling console vents and the flood ducts above the rear seats. When the
system switches to “heating” operation during cool cabin temperatures, heated, outside air will be
delivered to the front and rear floor vents and/or the windshield based on temperature conditions and
the mode of operation settings.
In the rare occurrence of a refrigeration “overpressure” condition, a high/low pressure trinary safety
switch, located on the receiver/dryer, will disengage the compressor to allow pressures to return to a
safe level. This same switch senses a low pressure condition in the system and disengages the
compressor to prevent damage. The trinary safety switch automatically resets once refrigerant
pressures have returned to a safe level.
The ACCS can be left on in any mode at the time of aircraft shut-down and will resume the
previously selected temperature and mode when reactivated. The system will be active once both
electrical buses are on and the voltage annunciation clears.
For safety purposes the ACCS will deactivate if the voltage annunciation message displays or either
bus voltage falls below a predetermined threshold.
In the event that the Air Conditioning portion of the ACCS does not seem to be functioning
correctly, the ACCS should be switched to the “Compressor Off” mode by pressing the button
until the adjacent indicator light is out. An air conditioning performance evaluation should be
performed by an authorized Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing Corporation Service Center to
determine and correct the problem prior to resuming the use of the air conditioning portion of the
ACCS.
NOTE
If the air conditioning system is turned off, on aircraft equipped with the
electric compressor, wait at least 3 minutes before turning it on again.
This ensures the electric compressor will start, otherwise the compressor
may not start until the system stabilizes.
System Operation Using Ground Power Supply – Only 28 Volt ACCS equipped with electrically
driven compressor may be used to pre-cool the aircraft cabin using a ground power supply. After
connecting a ground power source and switching the unit on, the ACCS can be activated by pushing
the external switch found near the ground power receptacle. When activated the aircraft power grid
is disabled and the electric compressor and evaporator blower will run continuously while the
condenser fans automatically cycle as needed. The external ACCS switch does not function when a
battery master is on. The ACCS control panel is disabled during external power air conditioning
operation and the ACCS cools at max capability. External power ACCS operation can be
deactivated by pushing the external switch, removing the ground power source, or turning on either
battery master switch. With a battery master on, the ACCS will be fully functional except the
electric compressor will be off.

Section 7
NOTE
Ground power operation of the air conditioning will require a 24 V
ground power source that can deliver 100 amps during use.
NOTE
If the air conditioning system is turned off, wait at least 3 minutes before
turning it on again. This ensures the electric compressor will start,
otherwise the compressor may not start until the system stabilizes.
Control Buttons – The system is operated by control buttons. See Figure 7 – 28 and Figure 7 – 29.
A small LED indicator light will glow next to the “ -AIR CONDITIONING”, “ -DEFOG”
and “AUTO” buttons to indicate which of those operating modes has been selected. The selected
temperature is displayed in the control panel. A list of the control buttons and their use and functions
follows:
AUTO-All Season Standard Setting – Air temperature, air delivery and air distribution are
regulated automatically to achieve and maintain the desired interior temperature as quickly as
possible. The system automatically compensates for any variations in outside temperature. In
cold outside temperatures, heated air will flow from the front and rear floor vents along with a
small amount from the windshield defog duct. In warmer outside temperatures, cooled air will
flow from the vents on the ceiling console and the overhead flood ducts above the rear seats. A
panel light adjacent to the “AUTO” button indicates when this mode is active.
Defogging the Windshield – Use this setting to defog the windshield. Maximum air
volume is directed towards the windshield. A panel light adjacent to the button indicates
when this mode is active. Press the button again to cancel the defog mode.
Compressor on/off – When maximum aircraft performance is desired the compressor

can be switched off. In this case the system no longer provides full climate control. If the cabin
becomes too warm, press the switch again to activate the compressor to provide cooling and
dehumidification. A panel light adjacent to the button indicates when “compressor on”
mode is active. Pressing the button alternately will “toggle” the compressor selection On
and Off.
NOTE
If maximum aircraft performance is desired, the Automatic Climate
Control System should be switched to the “Compressor Off” mode by
pressing the button until the adjacent indicator light is out.
Temperature Setting (+) or (-)– The desired interior temperature can be preset within a range
from 55°F (13°C) to 95°F (35°C). Within this range, the temperature will be automatically
adjusted. The settings selected prior to the shutdown of the aircraft will be restored upon
restart.
Fan (+) or (-) – The automatically selected fan speed (volume of air delivery) can be reduced
or increased manually by operating these buttons. This mode overrides the automatic fan speed
control feature. Incremental fan speeds up or down in 11 steps are available. The digital
display indicates the fan speed as a percentage or “HI” when the maximum fan speed is
reached or “LO” when the minimum fan speed is reached. The digital display returns to the
normal mode of interior temperature selection 5 seconds after either fan speed button is

Section 7
depressed. The selected fan speed is maintained until it is changed or the “AUTO” button is
depressed.
OAT (Outside Air Temperature) – When depressed, the outside air temperature is displayed
as measured by the outside air temperature sensor. The outside air temperature will be
displayed for a duration of 5 seconds then return to the normal mode of interior temperature
selection. The sensor is mounted in the condenser bay and will often indicate a higher
temperature than the ship OAT.
WARNING
The outside temperature display is not to be considered an indicator for
possible icing conditions. Ice formation can occur at indicated
temperatures above freezing and in a multitude of conditions.
OFF – When the OFF button is depressed, the entire climate control system is switched off. In
this mode of operation the heater/ECS mixing valve closes the hot air supply from the engine
heat exchanger. This mode does NOT need to be selected prior to aircraft shutdown.
ON – This switches on the climate control system. The LED numeric display will show the
current interior temperature and mode selections.
WARNING
At lower engine RPM operations of the air conditioning, the “BATT”
mode of the ammeter must be monitored. The electrical load must be
reduced, or the RPM increased, to prevent a discharge of the batteries.

Section 7
Figure 7 – 28
Turns the compressor On or Off in

Temperature Display any Mode. Pressing this button
“toggles” the compressor
selection On and Off.
Displays outside
air temperature Raises cabin
for 5 seconds. temperature in 1°
increments.
Raises fan speed.
Possible in all Mode
selections. Speed is
indicated as a
percentage in the
display for 5 seconds
after the selection is
made.
Lowers fan speed. Lowers cabin

Toggles into manual temperature in 1°
mode. increments.
Turns ACCS
off.
-Defog Mode-
Blower runs at highest speed but can
Turns ACCS on.
be regulated. The majority of the air is
Resumes present
directed to the windshield. Pressing
mode and
this button “toggles” the defog mode
temperature.
On and Off.
-Automatic Mode-
All functions are controlled
automatically. All previously selected
manual settings are cancelled.
Figure 7 – 29

Section 7
General Hints for ACCS Operation

• At low outside air temperatures the air conditioning compressor will shut off
automatically.
• When the air conditioning is operating, the interior temperatures and humidity will be
reduced. This helps to reduce the possibility of windshield and side window fog up.
• For the quickest cooling of a hot cabin, leave cabin doors open for a few minutes prior to
startup to allow the hot air to escape.
• When it is very hot and humid, condensed water can drip from the evaporator drain tube
onto the surface beneath the aircraft for an extended period of time. This is normal and
does not indicate a leak.
• For maximum ACCS performance during air conditioning or heating modes of operation,
assure that the instrument panel vents and the rear side wall fresh air vents are closed.
• The condenser should be checked periodically for cleanliness. If clogged with dirt or
debris, the condenser should be cleaned with compressed air and/or water.
• Should you suspect that the air conditioning system has been damaged through outside
influences (i.e. by debris, “FOD”); the system should be checked immediately by an
authorized Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing Corporation Service Center.
• If there is a defect in the refrigerant circuit of the air conditioner, a safety switch switches
the compressor off temporarily or completely. In this case contact your authorized
Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing Corporation Service Center.
• Repairs or maintenance to the air conditioning system requires trained personnel and
special tools. If there should be any malfunction in the system, contact your nearest
authorized Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing Corporation Service Center.
GARMIN GFC 700 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM (AFCS)

The GFC 700 is a digital Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) which is fully integrated within
the G1000 system avionics architecture. For operating instructions on the features of the GFC 700
system, refer to the Garmin G1000 Cockpit Reference Guide for the Columbia 400, document
number 190-00567-00.
The GFC 700 AFCS is made up of the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GDU 1040 Primary Flight Display (PFD)

• GDU 1042 Multi-Function Display (MFD)
• GIA 63 Integrated Avionics Units (2)
• GSA 81 Servos (2)
• GSM 85 Servo Mounts (2)
• GTA 82 Trim Adapter
The GFC 700 AFCS system can be divided into Two main operating functions:
Flight Director – Flight Director operation takes place within the #1 GIA 63 and the GDU 1040
PFD. The Flight Director provides the system with:
• Command Bars showing Pitch/Roll Guidance

• Pitch/Roll Mode Selection & Processing
• Autopilot Communication
Autopilot – Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch, roll, and pitch trim GSA 81 servos and
provides:
• Automatic Flight Control

• Servo Monitoring

Section 7
WARNING
When using GPS autopilot mode in the terminal area, care should be
exercised when selecting Vectors to Final on the G1000. When VTF mode
is selected without selecting HDG or another autopilot roll mode first, the
airplane will turn to a 45 degree intercept to the final approach course
regardless of the airplanes position relative to the airport or the
approach.
WARNING
The G1000 cannot command the autopilot to fly procedure turns or
holding patterns automatically. Use HDG mode to accomplish both of
these tasks. Generally, switching to HDG upon receipt of the holding
pattern entry or procedure turn message is appropriate. Failing to use
HDG mode will cause the airplane to navigate away from the hold or
procedure turn.
GIA 63 Integrated Avionics Units – Each GIA 63 contains the AFCS software which controls the
Flight Director. During normal operation, the GRS 77 AHRS and GDC 74A Air Data Computer
send attitude and air data information to the GIA 63s. This information, combined with GPS and
other system data, is used by the Flight Director and Autopilot. Flight Director commands are
calculated within the #1 GIA 63 and are sent to the PFD for display and mode annunciation. Flight
information is also sent to the GSA 81 servos for Autopilot operation. A GIA #1 failure results in the
loss of the AFCS system. Any GIA 63 failure results in loss of the Autopilot, and Manual Electric
Trim functions.
GSA 81 AFCS Servos (2) – Two GSA 81 servos are used for automatic control of the aircraft flight
control surfaces. One servo is used for the each of the following:
• Pitch
• Roll
Each servo moves its respective aircraft control surface in response to commands generated by
internal servo calculations. For pitch trim, the servo positions the aircraft pitch trim surface in
response to commands generated by automatic and manual electric pitch trim calculations.
Calculations are performed using data sent through the common serial data bus from the GIA 63.
Manual electric pitch trim is also provided in response to the Manual Electric Trim (MET) switch.
See Figure 7 – 30.
GSM 85 Servo Mounts (2) – The GSM 85 servo mounts are used to connect the servos to the
aircraft control system. They contain a spiral capstan which connects via a bridle cable to the main
aircraft control cables. There is also a slip clutch to limit overpower forces in the unlikely event of a
mechanical jam. An engage clutch is used to disconnect the capstan from the servo when the AFCS
is disengaged. See Figure 7 – 30.

Section 7
Figure 7 – 30
GTA 82 Trim Adapter – The GTA 82 Trim Adapter is a remote mounted device that is used to
allow the GFC 700 to drive a trim actuator. The GTA 82 interfaces with two GIA 63 Integrated
Avionics units through serial communication on separate RS-485 ports. See Figure 7 – 31.
Figure 7 – 31
Dedicated AFCS Controls –The GDU 1042 MFD has the following dedicated AFCS keys located
on the lower left side of the bezel (See Figure 7 - 32):
• AP Key – Engages/disengages the Autopilot

• FD Key – Activates/deactivates the Flight Director only
Pressing the FD key turns on the Flight Director in the default vertical and
lateral modes. Pressing the FD key again deactivates the Flight Director and
removes the command bars, unless the Autopilot is engaged. If the Autopilot is
engaged, the FD key is disabled.
• NAV Key – Selects/deselects the Navigation mode

• ALT Key – Selects/deselects the Altitude Hold mode
• VS Key – Selects/deselects the Vertical Speed mode
• FLC Key – Selects/deselects the Flight Level Change mode
• HDG Key – Selects/deselects the Heading Select mode

Section 7
• APR Key – Selects/deselects the Approach mode

• NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys – Controls the active pitch reference for the Pitch Hold,
Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes
Figure 7 - 32
Additional AFCS Controls – The following buttons and switches used by the AFCS are located in
the cockpit separately from the PFD and MFD:
• A/P DISC (Autopilot Disconnect) Button – Disengages the Autopilot and interrupts
pitch trim operation.
This button may be used to mute the aural alert associated with an Autopilot
disconnect. The A/P DISC button is colored red and is located on the pilot’s and
copilot’s control stick. The A/P DISC button mutes AP disconnect alerting if
pressed during an alert.
• CWS (Control Wheel Steering) Button – Momentarily disengages the Autopilot and
synchronizes the Flight Director’s command bar to the current aircraft attitude.
The CWS button is located on the pilot’s control stick. Upon release of the CWS
button, the Flight Director may establish new reference points, depending on the
current pitch and roll modes.
• GO AROUND Button – Disengages the Autopilot and selects the Go Around pitch and
roll modes on the Flight Director.
The GO AROUND button is located on the flap panel.
Before using Go Around Mode, review the missed approach procedure in the Garmin
G1000 Cockpit Reference Guide carefully and then determine the best sequence of
autopilot modes to be used to execute the missed approach as published. Upon selection
of Go Around mode, the autopilot will automatically disconnect. The pilot should apply
go around power, select flaps up when sufficient airspeed is achieved, and then select the
appropriate autopilot roll and pitch modes. The autopilot may be coupled to the flight
director after the airplane has been cleaned up and trimmed appropriately.
Go Around mode will automatically capture the missed approach altitude selected on the
altitude preselector on the G1000 (ALT in white). FLC is recommended for missed
approach climbout using Vx or Vy as appropriate. Depending upon the missed approach

Section 7
procedure, autopilot HDG mode may be required for initial maneuvering if the missed
approach sequence requires a heading to be flown to a particular altitude.
When the aircraft is in position to fly direct to the missed approach hold point, the pilot
should select GPS data on the HSI, then unsuspend the GPS waypoint sequencing
enabling GPS navigation to the missed approach hold waypoint. GPS autopilot mode
may then be used to fly to the missed approach hold waypoint. The airplane must be in a
position to intercept the magenta GPS course to capture the course using GPS autopilot
mode. Navigating the holding pattern must be accomplished using autopilot HDG mode.

Section 8
Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG) Handling, Servicing, and Maintenance
Section 8
Handling, Servicing,
and
Maintenance
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................... 8-3

General................................................................................................................................... 8-3
Fuselage Identification Plate ........................................................................................ 8-3
Publications .................................................................................................................. 8-3
Address Information..................................................................................................... 8-3
SERVICES AND SERVICING ..................................................................................................... 8-4

Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing Corporation Advisory Service ....................................... 8-4
Customer Delivery Package .................................................................................................. 8-4
Fuel Servicing........................................................................................................................ 8-4
Recommended Fuel Grades.......................................................................................... 8-4
Fuel Capacities ............................................................................................................. 8-4
Approved Fuel Additives ............................................................................................. 8-4
Fuel Additive Mixture Table........................................................................................ 8-5
Grounding During Refueling and Defueling................................................................ 8-6
Fuel Contamination ...................................................................................................... 8-6
Oil Servicing.......................................................................................................................... 8-7
Oil Grades Recommended for Various Temperature Ranges...................................... 8-7
Sump Capacity.............................................................................................................. 8-7
Oil Filter ....................................................................................................................... 8-7
Brakes and Tire/Nose Strut Pressures ................................................................................... 8-7
Tire Considerations................................................................................................................ 8-7
Battery Replacement Cycles.................................................................................................. 8-8
Oxygen System Servicing ..................................................................................................... 8-8
MAINTENANCE AND DOCUMENTATION........................................................................... 8-10

Maintenance......................................................................................................................... 8-10
Airplane Inspection Periods ....................................................................................... 8-10
Airworthiness Directives ............................................................................................ 8-10
Preventive Maintenance ............................................................................................. 8-10
Alterations or Repairs................................................................................................. 8-10
Required Oil Changes and Special Inspections ......................................................... 8-10
Recommended Oil Changes and Special Inspections ................................................ 8-10
Warranty Work .......................................................................................................... 8-11
Airplane Documentation ..................................................................................................... 8-11
ADLOG™ Maintenance Recordkeeping System (MRS) ................................................... 8-11
HANDLING AND STORAGE .................................................................................................... 8-13

Ground Handling ................................................................................................................. 8-13
Towing........................................................................................................................ 8-13
Parking........................................................................................................................ 8-13
Securing the Airplane ................................................................................................. 8-14
Windshield Cover....................................................................................................... 8-14

Section 8
Handling, Servicing, and Maintenance Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG)
Jacking and Leveling ........................................................................................................... 8-14

Jacking ........................................................................................................................ 8-14
Leveling ...................................................................................................................... 8-15
Storage ................................................................................................................................. 8-15
Flyable Storage (7 to 30 days).................................................................................... 8-15
Temporary Storage (up to 90 days)............................................................................ 8-15
Return to Service from Temporary Storage ............................................................... 8-15
Indefinite Storage (over 90 days) ............................................................................... 8-16
Return to Service from Indefinite Storage ................................................................. 8-16
Airframe Preservation for Temporary and Indefinite Storage................................... 8-17
Airframe Preservation Return to Service ................................................................... 8-17
Inspections During Temporary Storage ..................................................................... 8-17
Inspections During Indefinite Storage........................................................................ 8-18
AIRFRAME AND ENGINE CARE ............................................................................................ 8-19

Airframe............................................................................................................................... 8-19
Exterior ....................................................................................................................... 8-19
Anti-Erosion Tape and Leading Edge Tape............................................................... 8-19
Windshield and Windows........................................................................................... 8-19
Interior Cleaning and Care ......................................................................................... 8-20
Engine and Propeller ........................................................................................................... 8-21
Engine Cleaning and Care .......................................................................................... 8-21
Propeller Cleaning and Care....................................................................................... 8-21

Section 8
Section 8
Handling, Servicing,
and
Maintenance
INTRODUCTION
This section contains procedures for ground handling of the Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG), as well
as recommendations and techniques for routine care of the airplane’s interior and exterior. In
addition, maintenance intervals and procedures are addressed. Finally, publications, the Columbia
Aircraft Manufacturing Corporation Advisory Service, and servicing information are discussed.
GENERAL
The owner or operator of the airplane is responsible for ensuring the airworthiness of the airplane is
maintained. The responsibility extends to maintaining the airplane logbooks, ensuring the required
inspections are performed in a timely manner, and ensuring that mandatory service directives and
part replacements are accomplished within the specified period.
While the owner or operator is responsible for the continued airworthiness of the airplane, the use of
an authorized dealer or certified service station will facilitate compliance. It is recommended that the
owner or operator of the airplane contact a dealer or a certified service station for service
information. All correspondence regarding the airplane should include the airplane serial number.
Fuselage Identification Plate – The airplane serial number, make, model, Type Certificate (TC)
number, year of manufacture, and Production Certification (PC) number is contained on the
Fuselage Identification Plate on the tail cone of the airplane. The serial number is also listed on the
cover page of the Pilot’s Operating Handbook and FAA Approved Flight Manual.
Publications – Owners and noncommercial operators may do preventive maintenance as described

in part 43 of the Federal Aviation Regulations. To do this requires the use of an authorized
maintenance manual. In some instances, the owner or operator may wish to maintain a copy of the
maintenance manual to assist other appropriately certified individuals in maintaining the airplane’s
continued airworthiness. In either event, a maintenance manual, and other related documentation can
be obtained by contacting:
Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing Corporation

Attn: Customer Service
22550 Nelson Road
Bend Municipal Airport
Bend, Oregon 97701-9710
Phone: (541) 318-1144
Fax: (541) 318-1177
Email: [email protected]

Section 8
SERVICES AND SERVICING

COLUMBIA AIRCRAFT MANUFACTURING CORPORATION ADVISORY SERVICE
Changes that affect the Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG), including the maintenance and operation of
the airplane, are provided to all registered owners free of charge. The Columbia Aircraft
Manufacturing Corporation Advisory will contain two basic types of data, compulsory and
informational. Compulsory items must be accomplished within a specified time to maintain the
continued airworthiness of the airplane. Informational items are non-binding and usually contain
details and tips that enhance the use of the airplane.
Domestic owners, unless otherwise instructed, will receive information at the address listed in the
FAA database. However, it is important that all owners and particularly international airplane
owners advise Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing of any address changes. This will ensure
uninterrupted advisory information. Individuals who are not registered owners can obtain the
advisory service on a subscription basis by contacting the manufacturer at the address listed on page
8-3.
CUSTOMER DELIVERY PACKAGE

The items listed below are provided with the airplane when it is delivered to the owner. If any of the
items are lost or damaged, replacements can be purchased by contacting the manufacturer at the
address shown on page 8-3. Publications are also available for purchase by non-owners.
• Pilot’s Operating Handbook and FAA Approved • Normal Procedures

Flight Manual (1) Checklist (1)
• Garmin G1000 Cockpit Reference Guide for the • Emergency Procedures

Columbia 400,Document No. 190-00567-00 Checklist (1)
• Columbia 400 Electrical Manual • ADLOG MRS (1)
• Columbia Aircraft
• Columbia 400 Passenger Briefing Card (4) Manufacturing Corporation
Warranty Program (1)
• Columbia 400 Maintenance Manual
In addition to the items listed above, the owner will receive a number of other items including
but not limited to: tie-down rings, jack points, pitot tube cover, and an assortment of other
manufacturer’s pilot guides, owner guides, operator manuals, software, video tapes, etc.
FUEL SERVICING
Recommended Fuel Grades
Fuel Capacities
Total Capacity: 106 US Gallons (401 L)
Total Capacity Each tank: 53 US Gallons (201 L)
Total Usable Fuel: 49 US Gallons (185 L) in each tank - 98 US Gallons (371 L) Total
Approved Fuel Additives – Under certain ambient conditions of temperature and humidity, water
can be supported in the fuel in sufficient quantities to create restrictive ice formation along various
segments of the fuel system. To alleviate the possibility of this occurring, it is permissible to add

Section 8
Isopropyl Alcohol to the fuel supply in quantities not to exceed 3% of the total. In addition, ethylene
glycol monomethyl ether (EGME) and diethylene glycol monomethyl ether (DiEGME) compounds
to military specification MIL-I-27686E may be added for this purpose. The ethylene glycol
monomethyl ether and diethylene glycol monomethyl ether compounds must be carefully mixed
with fuel concentrations not to exceed 0.15 percent by volume.
FUEL ADDITIVE MIXTURE TABLE
Isopropyl EGME & Di- Isopropyl EGME & Di-

Fuel Fuel
Alcohol (3%) EGME (0.15%) Alcohol (3%) EGME (0.15%)
Gal. (L) Gal. (L)
Fluid Ounces Fluid Ounces Fluid Ounces Fluid Ounces
1 (3.8) 3.8 0.2 27 (102.2) 103.7 5.2
2 (7.6) 7.7 0.4 28 (106.0) 107.5 5.4
3 (11.4) 11.5 0.6 29 (109.8) 111.4 5.6
4 (15.1) 15.4 0.8 30 (113.6) 115.2 5.8
5 (18.9) 19.2 1.0 31 (117.3) 119.0 6.0
6 (22.7) 23.0 1.2 32 (121.1) 122.9 6.1
7 (26.5) 26.9 1.3 33 (124.9) 126.7 6.3
8 (30.3) 30.7 1.5 34 (128.7) 130.6 6.5
9 (34.1) 34.6 1.7 35 (132.5) 134.4 6.7
10 (37.9) 38.4 1.9 36 (136.3) 138.2 6.9
11 (41.6) 42.2 2.1 37 (140.1) 142.1 7.1
12 (45.4) 46.1 2.3 38 (143.8) 145.9 7.3
13 (49.2) 49.9 2.5 39 (147.6) 149.8 7.5
14 (53.0) 53.8 2.7 40 (151.4) 153.6 7.7
15 (56.8) 57.6 2.9 41 (155.2) 157.4 7.9
16 (60.6) 61.4 3.1 42 (159.0) 161.3 8.1
17 (64.4) 65.3 3.3 43 (162.8) 165.1 8.3
18 (68.1) 69.1 3.5 44 (166.5) 169.0 8.4
19 (71.9) 73.0 3.6 45 (170.3) 172.8 8.6
20 (75.7) 76.8 3.8 46 (174.1) 176.6 8.8
21 (79.5) 80.6 4.0 47 (177.9) 180.5 9.0
22 (83.3) 84.5 4.2 48 (181.7) 184.3 9.2
23 (87.1) 88.3 4.4 49 (185.5) 188.2 9.4
24 (90.8) 92.2 4.6 50 (189.3) 192.0 9.6
25 (94.6) 96.0 4.8 51 (193.0) 195.8 9.8
26 (98.4) 99.8 5.0 52 (196.8) 199.7 10.0
Figure 8 - 1

Section 8
It is important that the approved fuel additives are mixed in correct proportions. Consideration is
required to ensure the appropriate concentration levels are achieved when the tank is filled. For
example, adding 40 gallons (151 L) of fuel with a 0.15 percent concentration of EGME to a tank
with 10 gallons (38 L) of untreated fuel will produce a mixture of something less than 0.15 percent.
Consideration must also be made for the unusable fuel in the tank since it will be combined with the
total mixture.
The additives shall be added as the fuel is introduced to the fuel tank so that the mixture is properly
combined. Alternatively, the additive can be mixed with a small amount of fuel in a separate
container, such as a five-gallon can, and added to the fuel tank before normal fueling. The table in
Figure 8 - 1 lists the number of ounces of each additive for a given fuel quantity.
WARNING
Mixing of ethylene glycol monomethyl ether and diethylene glycol monomethyl
ether compounds is extremely important because concentrations more than
the 0.15 percent by volume can have a harmful effect on engine components.
Grounding During Refueling and Defueling – The high-speed characteristics of the airplane make
generation of static electricity more likely, so it is important for the airplane to be grounded to the
fuel source during refueling and defueling operations. Place the fuel source grounding clamp on the
right or left exhaust stack of the airplane before touching the filler neck of the fuel tanks with metal
parts of the ground refueling equipment. Remember that refueling is often done at the conclusion of
a flight and the exhaust stacks may still be hot, so care must be used when attaching the clamp.
Some defueling is possible using the defueling feature on the delivery system of the Avgas fuel
supplier. This procedure is usually adequate for removing fuel when gross takeoff weight is an issue.
To completely defuel the airplane, refer to Chapter 12 in the Columbia 400 Airplane Maintenance
Manual.
Fuel Contamination – To test for fuel contamination, fuel samples must be taken from each of the
wing drains and from the gascolator before each flight and after the airplane is refueled. There are
three types of contaminants that can inadvertently be introduced to the fuel system: (1) sediment
such as dirt and bacteria, (2) water, and (3) the improper grade of fuel.
1. The accumulation of sediments is an inherent issue with most aircraft and can never be
completely eliminated. Refueling the airplane at the conclusion of each flight and using fuel
from a supplier who routinely maintains the filtration of the refueling equipment will lessen the
problem somewhat. If specks are observed in the fuel sampler, continue the sampling operation
until no debris is observed. Be sure the sampling device is clean before using it.
2. The two more common sources of water contamination are condensation of water from the air
within a partially filled fuel tank and water-contaminated Avgas from a fuel supplier. Again,
refueling after each flight and proper filtration of the fuel delivery system will mitigate water
contamination. Water, which is heavier than Avgas, will collect near the bottom of the
sampling device. If water is observed in the fuel sampler, take additional fuel samples until all
the water is removed.
3. Aviation fuel is dyed according to its grade, and on new aircraft like the Columbia 400 (LC41-
550FG), the filler neck is sized to only accept fuel of the proper grade. Still, the color of the
fuel shall be verified according to the specifications on page 8-4, since the fuel truck might
have been refilled improperly. If fuels of two different grades are mixed, the fuel sample will
be clear. If an inferior, improper grade of fuel is noted, completely defuel both tanks, and
refuel with the proper grade of Avgas.
Persistent fuel contamination is a serious problem. If repeated fuel sampling is ineffective or there is
chronic contamination, approved personnel must inspect the airplane, and it is unsafe to fly. Two

Section 8
final thoughts about refueling and contamination: First, remember that fuel service personnel are
people of unknown training and background. It is always a good idea to personally observe refueling
operations. Second, if it is necessary to operate in areas where there is questionable fuel delivery, the
use of a portable fuel filter is recommended.
NOTE
There are a number of fuel additives on the market that are formulated for
automotive use. While the additives may be beneficial for cars, trucks, etc.,
they are not approved for aircraft use.
OIL SERVICING
The oil grades shown below are recommended after the initial engine break-in period. Refer to the
Required Oil Changes and Special Inspections heading on page 8-10 for additional details about oil
grades during the engine break-in period. Only lubricant oils conforming to Teledyne Continental
Motors Specification MHS-24 can be used.
NOTE
Oil is added to the engine through the filler neck that contains the dipstick. To
remove the dipstick, rotate it counterclockwise to unseat it; raise the dipstick
approximately six to eight inches or until a slight resistance is felt; rotate the
dipstick 90º clockwise and remove from the filler neck.
Oil Grades Recommended for Various Average Air Temperature Ranges

Above 40°F (4°C) ⎯ SAE 50, 15W50, or 20W50
Sump Capacity – The system has a wet type oil sump with a drain-refill capacity of eight quarts.
Oil Filter – A full flow, spin-on type, 20-micron oil filter is used.
NOTE
There are a number of oil additives on the market that are formulated
for automotive use; however, they are not approved for aircraft
operations.
BRAKES AND TIRE/NOSE STRUT PRESSURES

Proper inflation of the tires reduces tire external damage and heat, which reduces tire wear. Proper
inflation of the nose strut ensures a smoother ride. Maneuverability on the ground is enhanced when
tire and strut pressures are at proper levels. Figure 8 - 2 summarizes the recommended pressures and
types of tires.
Tire Considerations – The airplane is normally delivered with Goodyear tires. These tires have a
profile that provides about ⅜ in. (0.95 cm) clearance between the tire and wheel pants. Other brands
of tires with similar specifications and TSOs may have slightly larger profiles. Tires with larger
profiles are not recommended since damage to the tire or wheel pant is possible, particularly during
landing. If other brands of tires are used, the profile of the tire must be precisely measured and
compared with the Goodyear tire.

Section 8
CAUTION
The profile of replacement tires that are not a recommended brand
should be measured precisely to ensure they are the same height and
width. The use of tires that have slightly larger profiles can cause damage
to the tire and to the wheel pant, particularly during landing operations.
ITEM SPECIFICATIONS PRESSURE TYPE OF GAS

Nose Strut N/A 250 psi Nitrogen
Nose Gear Tire 5.00-5 (10 ply) 88 psi Air
Main Gear Tires 15x6.00-6 (6-ply) 55 psi Air
Figure 8 - 2
Normally, a trained mechanic adds brake fluid. However, this is an approved item of preventive
maintenance, and servicing by a private pilot who is the owner or operator is permitted. The brake
fluid levels shall be serviced according to instructions contained in the Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG)
Maintenance Manual with MIL-H-5606 hydraulic fluid.
BATTERY REPLACEMENT CYCLES

The Columbia 400 has three separate batteries that require periodic replacement. While the system
batteries indicate their charge on the installed voltmeter and ammeter, the ELT battery does not have
a positive test to indicate its charge. The table below summarizes the replacement cycles.
BATTERY REPLACEMENT CYCLES
BATTERY TYPE BATTERY LOCATION REPLACEMENT CYCLE
Every 2 years (Artex 200),

Aft of the baggage
every 5 years (Artex ME406),
Emergency Locator compartment hat rack –
or when the battery had been
Transmitter (ELT) Battery Please see page 7-49 for
used for more than one hour or
more information.
used 50% if its power
Alternate replacement every
two years – First replace the
right battery, after two more
System – Dry Sealed Lead- Under the left side of the
years replace the left battery.
Acid Type Battery (Two hat rack in the baggage
Alternate replacement every
each) compartment.
two years. However, if the
battery fails to hold a charge, it
must be replaced.
Figure 8 - 3
OXYGEN SYSTEM SERVICING

When servicing the oxygen, only the following approved oxygen may be used:
Oxygen per Mil-O-27210 – Aviators Breathing Oxygen
To refill the oxygen supply use the following steps:
1. Set the Right Bus switch to ON
2. Set the Avionics Master to ON.

Section 8
3. Unscrew the filler port safety cap, and connect the service line to the Oxygen Service
fitting located in the aft baggage on the left hand side of the aircraft.
4. Slowly fill the oxygen supply. By filling slowly, the temperature rise due to the
compressed gas in the oxygen supply bottles will be kept to a minimum.
5. Monitor the cockpit oxygen display to ensure that the oxygen supply is filled.
NOTE
This fixed oxygen system has a maximum bottle pressure of 2,000 psi.
6. When the system is filled to the intended capacity, turn the oxygen system on using the
OXYGEN softkey on the MFD.
7. Ensure that the Outlet Pressure Display is in the green band. Outlet pressure in the green
or amber bands is normal unless the amber indication remains on with multiple flow
devices plugged in, and flowing oxygen.
8. Turn the oxygen system off using the OXYGEN softkey on the MFD.
9. Set the Avionics Master to OFF.
10. Set the Right Bus switch to OFF.
11. Ensure safety cap is installed over the filler port.
See the Columbia 400 Maintenance Manual for additional maintenance instructions if oxygen
quantity drops faster than the duration charts in Chapter 5 indicate or there is either very high or
very low outlet pressure.

Section 8
MAINTENANCE AND DOCUMENTATION

MAINTENANCE
Airplane Inspection Periods – Part 91, Subpart E of the Federal Aviation Regulations requires that
each U.S. civil registered airplane not used for hire be inspected every 12 calendar months in
accordance with Part 43. If the airplane is used for hire, the regulations require that it must be
inspected before or at each 100 hours of time in service.
Airworthiness Directives – The FAA may issue notifications known as Airworthiness Directives
(ADs) that are applicable to the airplane or one of its components. The directives specify what action
is required and normally have a compliance period. It is the responsibility of the owner/operator of
the airplane to ensure compliance with all applicable ADs.
Preventive Maintenance – A certificated pilot who owns or operates an airplane not used as an air
carrier is authorized by FAR Part 43 to perform limited preventive maintenance on his or her
airplane. Appendix A of Part 43 of the Federal Aviation Regulations is specific as to what items
constitute preventive maintenance. Only the certificated pilot who owns or operates the airplane can
perform the specific items listed in FAR Part 43. The work must be performed according to
procedures and specifications in the applicable handbook or maintenance manual. Appropriately
licensed personnel must perform all other maintenance items not specifically identified in Appendix
A of Part 43. For more details regarding authorized maintenance, contact the factory or a service
center.
Alterations or Repairs – All alterations or repairs to the airplane must be accomplished by licensed
personnel. In addition, an alteration may violate the airworthiness of the airplane. Before alterations
are made, the owner or operator of the airplane should contact the FAA for approval.
Required Oil Changes and Special Inspections – During the engine break-in period, Non-
dispersant mineral oil conforming to SAE J1966 shall be used. However, if the engine is flown less
than once a week, a straight mineral oil with corrosion preventative MIL-C-6529 for the first 25
hours is recommended. After the first 25 hours of the airplane’s time in service, the oil and oil filter
must be changed and a new supply of Teledyne Continental Motors specification MHS-24 (latest
revision) ashless dispersant oil must be used. At 50 hours of time in service, the oil and oil filter
shall be changed and the filter and discarded oil checked for evidence of metal particles. Thereafter,
the oil and oil filter must be changed at every 50 hours of time in service.
At the first oil change, the engine and related accessories including the magnetos, starter, alternator,
engine driven fuel and oil pumps, oil cooler, and propeller governor, should be inspected for oil
leaks and security. Spark plug leads and other electrical circuits should be checked for proper
routing, abrasion, chafing, and security. Check engine controls and linkages for proper operation.
Finally, check the intake and exhaust system for security and evidence of cracking.
Recommended Oil Changes and Special Inspections – At approximately every 50 hours of time
in service it is recommended the engine oil be changed. Since the cowling is removed for an oil
change, a cursory inspection of other engine systems is possible, and the engine can be cleaned and
degreased if necessary. The airplane’s engine is the single most expensive component in the airplane
and arguably the most important. The comparative nominal expense and time involved in doing 50-
hour oil changes are more than offset by the long-term benefits and peace of mind.

Section 8
Warranty Work – The Columbia 400 warranty covers basic airframe items manufactured by The
Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing Corporation, but does not include tires, batteries, filters, and other
consumables. In addition, the engine and its components, avionics, and other replaceable units carry
their own separate warranties from their respective manufacturers. For example, if an owner or
operator has a warranty issue with the engine, autopilot, or GPS, the application for reimbursement
must be submitted to the appropriate manufacturer.
Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing Corporation will submit the initial application for warranty of
installed items that are warranted by other manufacturers. A list of these manufacturers, as well as
all the phone numbers, is included at the beginning of the ADLOG MRS, which is part of the
Customer Delivery Kit discussed on page 8-4.
Warranty work must be performed at the Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing Corporation factory or at
one of the Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing Corporation Sales and Service Centers (SSC),
including other maintenance providers that are approved by a particular SSC. Warranty work by a
non-approved maintenance facility may be permitted, but the owner or operator of the airplane must
obtain permission from Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing Corporation prior to engaging a non-
approved facility. Warranty work by a non-approved maintenance provider must be obtained for
each warranty incident. That is, an approval by Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing Corporation for a
specific issue does not constitute blanket permission.
AIRPLANE DOCUMENTATION
There are certain items required to be in the airplane at all times. Moreover, some of the items must
be displayed near the cabin or cockpit door. The required items are provided with the airplane when
it is delivered to the new owner. A description of all required documentation is summarized in the
table below in Figure 8 - 4.
Must be
Item Location
Displayed
Aircraft Airworthiness Certificate Yes In display pocket
on the copilot’s
Aircraft Registration Yes side near the
rudder pedals
Pilot’s Operating Handbook and FAA No
Approved Flight Manual
Garmin G1000 Cockpit Reference Guide No All these items are

located in the front
Weight & Balance documentation (FAA No passenger seatback
Form 337 if applicable) pocket.
Equipment List (Section 6, Appendix B of the No

POH/AFM)
Figure 8 - 4
TM
ADLOG MAINTENANCE RECORDKEEPING SYSTEM (MRS)
The ADLOGTM MRS is included in the airplane’s delivery package. Its color-coded, indexed
sections simplify, organize, and centralize all relevant airplane maintenance data. The ADLOGTM
MRS also includes a one-year airworthiness directive (ADs) revision service for the applicable
equipment, instruments, and components for the airplane based on its serial number. Thereafter, the
owner of the airplane can continue the subscription at a fairly nominal cost.

Section 8
This system is the best available and ensures that the maintenance history of the airplane and all
applicable ADs are precisely documented in a logical format. The system has been in use for more
than 20 years and is revered by both mechanics and Part 135 operators. The ADLOGTM service also
includes ADs for STC equipment that the owner may add to the airplane.

Section 8
HANDLING AND STORAGE

GROUND HANDLING
Towing – A locking, hand-held tow bar is provided with the airplane and stored in the baggage
compartment. The tow bar is inserted into two small holes in the nose wheel fairing, forward of the
nose wheel axle. The tow bar must be locked in place before attempting to move the airplane.
Removing the locking pin in the bottom of the sleeve and pulling up on the tow-handle extends the
tow bar handle. When the hole at the end of the tow-handle is aligned with the hole in the sleeve,
reinsert the locking pin to keep the tow-handle in place. To collapse the tow bar, reverse the
previous steps. Attach the tow bar to the airplane using the following steps:
1. Open the towing fork by pushing on the expansion handle until it is locked in place, past the
over-centering point.
2. Insert one of the two fork tips into one of the nose wheel pant holes.
3. Carefully close the fork so that the remaining fork tip is inserted into the other wheel pant
hole.
CAUTION
When attaching the tow bar to the nose wheel pant, care must be taken
when closing the fork. Maintain a good amount of forward pressure on
the expansion handle when inserting the second fork tip into the wheel
pant hole. Once the expansion handle is released past the over-centering
point, the fork can close quickly and scratch the wheel pant.
It is recommended that the airplane only be maneuvered during towing by use of the hand-held tow
bar. If it is necessary to tow with a vehicle, extreme care is required to ensure the rotation limits of
the nose wheel (60° left and right) are not exceeded. Since the rotation of the nose gear is limited by
physical stops, rotating the gear beyond 60° will damage the airplane.
It is always a good idea to have another person serve as a spotter when moving the airplane.
Remember that the airplane has vertical limitations as well as horizontal restrictions. The vertical
stabilizer is frequently overlooked as an airplane is being pushed into a hanger with most of the
attention directed towards the wingtips. When moving the airplane over uneven surfaces, remember
that small up and down oscillations of the nose strut result in amplified movement of the vertical
stabilizer. Finally, keep in mind that inflation levels of both the nose tire and strut affect the height
of the vertical stabilizer. A flat tire or low nose strut will increase the height of the vertical stabilizer.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to move the airplane by pushing or pulling on the
propeller. This a common practice for airplanes with fixed pitch
propellers; however, it is not recommended for constant speed propellers,
since pressures applied to the propeller blades are transmitted to moving
parts within the propeller hub. Over time, these forces could cause
damage to the propeller.
Parking – During parking operations, it is best to head the airplane into the wind if possible.
Normally, setting the parking brake is recommended; however, there are two situations where doing
so is not a good idea.
1. If the brakes are overheated, which might result from a short field landing or extensive
taxiing, it is best to not set them until they have had a sufficient cooling period. A brake pad
clamped to a hot chrome disc can cause uneven cooling of the brake disc, which has the
potential of warping it.

Section 8
2. It is also not a good idea to set the brakes in cold weather. Accumulations of freezing rain,
ice, and snow can freeze-weld the brake pad to the disc. Landing or taxiing in standing water
at near freezing temperatures can cause similar problems if the brakes are set when the
airplane is parked.
Securing the Airplane – In any event, whether the brakes are set or not set, the airplane should be
chocked and the following items should be accomplished to secure the airplane.
1. Chock the main gear tires with chocks on both sides of each tire.
2. Attach a rope or chain to each tie-down point, and secure the rope or chain to a ramp tie-down
point. There are three tie-down points, one on each wing and one on the tail. The ropes or
chains should have a tensile strength of at least 750 lbs.
3. Install the pitot tube cover.
WARNING
Do not use any device except approved tie-down rings to secure the airplane.
While the proper size eyebolt from a hardware store will fit in the threaded tie-
down socket, the eyebolt length is critical. A tie-down bolt of incorrect length
could cause jamming or interfere with proper movement of the ailerons.
Windshield Cover – The use of a windshield cover is an often-debated issue and is a decision the
owner or operator of the airplane must make. Windshield covers have both positive and negative
benefits. Ultimately, a number of factors must be weighed, including (1) the geographical area of
operations, (2) the time of year, (3) the specific parking location, and (4) the integrity of the
covering device.
1. From a positive standpoint, the cover limits the intrusion of ultraviolet (UV) light. Over time,
UV rays significantly accelerate the aging process, which makes the windshield and windows
more brittle and impregnates them with an irremovable yellowish tinge.
2. On the negative side, dust and dirt can accumulate between the cover and the windshield.
When the wind blows, the whipping action of the cover beats the dust and dirt into the
windshield.
JACKING AND LEVELING

Jacking – There are two jack points under each wing proximate to the wing saddle. The points are
near the center of mass of the longitudinal axis, and great care must be used when jacking the
airplane. The tailskid is used as a third point of stabilization. The following points should be
considered when the airplane is raised by jacks.
1. If the airplane is simultaneously lifted by both jacks, then specific procedures established in
Chapter 7 of the maintenance manual must be followed. This procedure is fairly involved. It
requires special equipment to stabilize the airplane, sandbags for tail ballast, and three or four
people to operate the jacks and keep the airplane steady.
2. If only one jack is used, as when changing a single tire, the airplane can be safely jacked by
one person using the following procedure:
a. The operation must be performed in a level area, such as an airplane hangar.
b. Set the parking brake and chock the nose tire and the main gear tire that is not raised.
c. Place 50 pounds of ballast (usually sandbags) on the engine cowling, near the propeller.
d. Place a jack under the jack point of the wing to be lifted and raise the jack up to the
wing jack point. Take extra precaution to ensure the jack is properly stabilized, the base
is locked in position, and the jack is lifting vertically. Be sure the raising point of the
jack is properly inserted into the jack point on the wing.
e. Slowly raise the jack until the desired ground clearance is achieved. However, the
clearance between the bottom of the tire and lifting surface (ground or hangar floor)
must not exceed three inches.

Section 8
Leveling – Please see page 6-5 for information about leveling the airplane.
STORAGE
The storage of an airplane mostly deals with engine related items. Very little needs to or can be done
to preserve the airframe, particularly for flyable and temporary storage. The best protection for the
exterior is, of course, to hangar the airplane, if possible. If the airplane cannot be hangared, then a
coat of wax using the material and techniques described on page 8-19 should be applied to all
exterior surfaces. In addition, all typical items associated with securing the airplane should be done.
These include: (1) installing the pitot tube cover, (2) chocking all wheels and tying the airplane
down with the parking brakes released, (3) installing the control lock, (4) topping off the fuel tanks,
(5) cleaning the bolts and nuts on the brakes and applying a non-stick preservative like graphite or a
silicone, and (6) installing other owner-option protection devices. There are three types of storage
categories, flyable, temporary, and indefinite. The time period and applicable storage procedure for
each type is discussed below.
Flyable Storage (5 to 30 days) – If the airplane is to be maintained in flyable storage, then it should
be flown for a minimum of 30 minutes every 30 days; ground running the engine is not a substitute
for flying the airplane. During flyable storage, the propeller should be rotated by hand every seven
days. This operation should include at least six complete revolutions of the engine. Stop the
propeller 45º to 90º from its original position. For maximum safety use the following procedures:
1. Ensure that the ignition switch is set to the OFF position.
2. Set the throttle to the CLOSED position.
3. Set the mixture to IDLE CUTOFF.
4. Set the parking brake, and chock the wheels.
5. Ensure that airplane tie-downs are secure.
6. Open cabin door on the pilot’s side of the airplane.
7. Always assume the propeller could start when moving it manually, and use an appropriate
technique for hand turning the propeller.
8. Release the parking brake when the operation is completed.
WARNING
Always assume that the engine could start when rotating the propeller by
hand. Remain clear of the arc of the propeller blades at all times.
Temporary Storage (up to 90 days) – Use the following procedures to preserve the engine for
temporary storage. See the Airframe Preservation for Temporary and Indefinite Storage heading on
page 8-17 for airframe preservation items.
1. Remove the top spark plug from each of the six cylinders, and apply an atomized injection of
preservation oil, MIL-L-46002, Grade 1 at room temperature through the upper spark plug
hole of each cylinder with the piston in approximately the bottom dead center position. Rotate
the crankshaft as opposite cylinders are sprayed. Stop the crankshaft with none of the pistons
at top dead center.
2. When Step 1 is complete, and with none of the pistons at dead center, re-spray each cylinder
thoroughly making sure to cover all interior surfaces.
3. Install spark plugs.
4. Spray approximately two ounces of preservation oil through the oil filler tube.
5. Seal all engine openings exposed to the atmosphere with suitable plugs or moisture resistant
tape.
6. Tag engine, cowling, and other appropriate areas with the statement, “Do not turn propeller,
engine preserved.”
Return to Service from Temporary Storage – To return an airplane that has been in temporary
storage to active service, perform the following steps:

Section 8
1. Remove seal plugs, tape, and all methods of tagging the airplane, including items tagged on
the airframe.
2. Remove the bottom spark plug from each of the six cylinders, and rotate the propeller several
times to remove the preservation oil.
3. Reinstall the spark plugs according to manufacturer’s recommendations.
4. Conduct a normal engine start, and idle the engine for several minutes until oil temperature is
within normal limits. Monitor engine instruments to ensure they are within normal operating
ranges.
5. Stop the engine and inspect the entire airplane before test flying.
Indefinite Storage (Over 90 Days) – If the airplane is to be stored for a long period, follow the
procedures listed below to preserve the engine. See the Airframe Preservation for Temporary and
Indefinite Storage heading on page 8-17 for airframe preservation items.
1. Drain the engine oil and refill with MIL-C-6529 Type II preservation oil. Start the engine and
operate until normal temperature ranges are achieved. Fly the airplane for about 30 minutes
and then allow the engine to cool to the ambient temperature.
2. Follow Steps 1, 2, and 4 for Temporary Storage.
3. Install dehydrator plugs MS27215-1 or -2, in each of the top spark plug holes. Ensure the
dehydrator plug is blue when installed. Protect and support the spark plug leads with AN-
4060 protectors.
4. Place a bag of desiccant in the exhaust pipes, and seal the openings with moisture resistant
tape.
5. Seal the induction system with moisture resistant tape.
6. Seal the engine breather by inserting a dehydrator plug, M527215-2, in the breather hose and
clamping in place.
7. Tag engine, cowling, and other appropriate areas with the statement, “Do not turn propeller,
engine preserved.”
8. Install plugs in the engine cowl inlets and all other openings. Do not plug or seal tank vents
on the bottom of each wing.
NOTE
During the various storage periods, FAA Airworthiness Directives and
manufacturer’s service bulletins may apply which require action based
on calendar dates, not operating hours. These items must still be
completed even though the airplane is in storage.
NOTE
The dehydrator plugs must be visually checked every 15 days to verify
that the color has not changed. Bad dehydrator plugs should be
replaced. If more than half of the plugs change color, the bad plugs and
all the desiccant bags on the engine should be replaced. Every six
months the dehydrator plugs should be replaced and the cylinders re-
sprayed with preservation oil. When removing the plugs, check the
cylinder interior. If rust stains are noted, spray the cylinder with
preservation oil, turn the prop through six revolutions, and then re-
spray all cylinders.
Return to Service from Indefinite Storage – To return an airplane that has been in indefinite
storage to active service, perform the following steps:
1. Remove all dehydrator plugs, seal plugs, tape, and all methods of tagging the airplane
including items tagged on the airframe.
2. Drain the preservation oil, and service the engine with the recommended lubricating oil.

Section 8
3. Remove the bottom spark plugs from each of the six cylinders, and rotate the propeller
several times to remove the preservation oil.
4. Apply Champion® thread lubricant to spark plugs in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions. Install and torque the spark plugs 300 to 360 in-lbs.
5. Rotate the propeller by hand through the compression strokes of all the cylinders to check for
possible liquid lock.
6. Conduct a normal engine start, and idle the airplane for several minutes until oil temperature
is in within normal limits. Monitor all engine instruments to ensure they are within normal
operating ranges.
7. Stop the engine and inspect the entire airplane before test flying.
8. Test fly the airplane.
Airframe Preservation for Temporary and Indefinite Storage – If the airplane is to be stored for
over 30 days, some or all the procedures below may be applicable, depending on the anticipated
storage time period.
1. Ensure the tires are free of grease, oil, tar, and gasoline. The presence of these items
accelerates the aging process. Sunlight and static electricity convert oxygen to ozone, a
substance that accelerates the aging process. Special tire covers can be installed which retard
the erosion process.
2. It is best if the weight of the airplane is removed from the tires to prevent flat spots. If the
airplane cannot be blocked or set on jacks, then every 30 days each wheel should be rotated
about 90º to expose a new tire pressure point.
3. If the airplane does not have a recent coat of wax, a new coat should be applied as discussed
on page 8-19.
4. Lubricate exposed exterior metal fittings, hinges, push rods, etc. Use plugs or moisture
resistant tape to seal all openings except fuel vent holes and drain holes.
5. Remove the batteries and store in a cool, dry location. The batteries may need periodic
servicing and recharging depending on the storage period.
6. Prominently tag areas where tape and plugs are installed.
Airframe Preservation Return to Service – To return the airframe portion of an airplane that has
been in temporary or indefinite storage to active service, perform the following steps, as applicable:
1. Remove all methods of tagging and sealing including any items on or in the engine area.
2. Remove tire covers or other protection devices. Check the condition of the tires and service to
proper pressures. Cracked, deformed, and desiccated tires should be replaced.
3. Thoroughly clean the exterior of the airplane including the transparencies. If necessary, renew
the protective wax coat. See page 8-19 for instructions on care of the airframe.
4. Check the condition and charge of the batteries. If the batteries are still serviceable, reinstall
them in the airplane; otherwise, install new batteries.
NOTE
When an airplane has been in storage for a long period, the date of the
required annual inspection may have passed. There is no requirement to
perform this inspection during the temporary or indefinite storage
period. However, the inspection must be completed before than airplane
is returned to service.
Inspections During Temporary Storage – The following inspections should be performed while
the airplane is in temporary storage:
1. Check the cleanliness of the airframe as frequently as possible, and remove any dust that has
collected.
2. Check the condition and durability of the protective wax coat, and renew as required.
3. Every 30 days, check the interior of at least one cylinder for evidence of corrosion.

Section 8
Inspections During Indefinite Storage – The following inspections should be performed while the
airplane is in indefinite storage:
1. Check the condition of the dehydrator plugs every 15 days to verify that the color has not
changed. Bad dehydrator plugs should be replaced. If more than half of the plugs change
color, the bad plugs and all the desiccant bags on the engine should be replaced.
2. Every six months the dehydrator plugs should be replaced and the cylinders re-sprayed with
preservation oil. When removing the plugs, check the cylinder interior. If rust stains are
noted, spray the cylinder with preservation oil, turn the prop through six revolutions, and then
re-spray all cylinders.

Section 8
AIRFRAME AND ENGINE CARE

AIRFRAME
Exterior – The exterior painted surfaces are cleaned by washing with a mild soap and water and
drying with a soft towel or chamois. The seal coats that are applied to the painted surface, in most
instances, will provide adequate protection from moisture and the sun. Some additional protection is
provided by waxing the painted surface and facilitates washing the airplane since bugs and dirt will
not adhere as tightly to a waxed surface. A wax with a high concentration of carnauba is
recommended. There are several commercial boat waxes available that are ideal for this use. Be sure
to read the label with an eye for the percentage of carnauba in the compound.
CAUTION
Do not wax the airplane with silicone-based wax for at least 60 days from
the date of purchase. The paint curing process involves the expulsion of
certain substances within paint. A coat of wax can impede or stop the
curing process, which inhibits adhesion of the paint to the composite
surface.
The exterior paint color on the upper fuselage area and the top of the wings has a good heat
reflection index. This good index is required to ensure the continued bonding and integrity of the
composite material. Only approved Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing Corporation paint colors are
permitted in these areas. Care must be taken to not lay dark, heat absorbing material on the top area
of the wings and fuselage.
Anti-erosion Tape and Leading Edge Tape – The anti-erosion tape is located on the leading edges
of the wings, horizontal tail, vertical tail, and gear fairings. Leading edge tape is located on the
leading edges of the wings and horizontal tail only. Care should be taken to prevent damage to the
tape on the wing when entering the aircraft. People who sit on the wing by lifting themselves up
over the leading edge should take care not to drag their legs over the tape when sliding on or off the
wing. If the tape is starting to fray, detach, crack, crinkle, etc., it should be replaced using the
instructions in the maintenance manual.
Windshield and Windows – The proper care of the windshield and windows (sometimes referred to
as transparencies) is one of the more important exterior care items on the airplane and often the least
understood. The cardinal rule is never do anything that will scratch the surface of the acrylic plastic.
The following points for cleaning and caring for the transparencies will help to keep windows
looking and performing like new.
1. First, when cleaning the windows, it is recommended that rings and watches be removed as
they can cause deep scratches. In this vein, long sleeve shirts should be turned up a few rolls
to hide exposed buttons.
2. When removing bugs and dirt, avoid touching the surface. If possible, remove most of the dirt
by flushing the windows and windshield with water and a mild dish soap mixture. Allow the
accumulation of dirt and/or bugs to soak for a few minutes. If rubbing is required, a bare hand
is best. When all the debris on the surface of the window is loosened, apply a second water
flush and then dry with a 100% cotton cloth.
3. Use a good quality non-abrasive cleaner/polish specifically intended for acrylic windows, and
apply per the manufacturer’s instructions. Use up and down or side to side movements when
polishing. Never use a circular movement as this can cause glare rings.
4. The best polishing cloth is the softest cotton available. One hundred percent cotton flannel is
ideal and available in yard goods stores. Never use any type of paper product or synthetic
material. In particular, never use shop rags or shop towels. Be sure the polishing cloth is clean
and dry. Reserve polishing cloths should be stored in a plastic bag to limit dirt accumulation.

Section 8
5. Small scratches, the type that can be seen but cannot be felt with a fingernail, should be filled
with a polishing compound that has scratch filling properties. The cleaner/polisher mentioned
in paragraph 3 frequently has scratch filling properties and is satisfactory for regular use.
Some scratches are not correctable with a scratch-filling product. While the scratches cannot
be felt, they are still visible, particularly when flying into the sun. In this instance, a mildly
abrasive scratch removal cream can be used per manufacturer’s recommendations. Scratches
of greater magnitude require the use of high abrasives and removal of some of the window’s
surface around the greatest depth of the scratch. This procedure requires considerable
expertise and frequently makes areas where the scratch was removed more objectionable than
the original scratch.
6. As mentioned previously in this section, the use of canopy or window covers can grind dirt
particles into the acrylic and are virtually impossible to remove.
CAUTION
Do not use anything containing ammonia, aromatic solvents like methyl
ethyl ketone, acetone, lacquer thinner, paint stripper, gasoline, benzene,
alcohol, anti-ice fluid, hydraulic fluid, fire extinguisher solutions, or
window cleaner on the acrylic window surfaces. The use of these
substances may cause the surface to craze.
NOTE
To remove difficult substances such as tape residue, oil, and grease, the
safest solvents are 100% mineral spirits or kerosene. Some alcohols are
safe, such as isopropyl alcohol.
Interior Cleaning and Care – The useful life of the airplane’s interior can be extended through
proper care and cleaning. One of the major elements in the aging process is the interior’s exposure to
sunlight. If possible, the airplane should be hangared. Routine vacuuming is another item that helps
extend the life of the airplane’s interior. A general rule for spills is to blot the affected area with firm
pressure for a few seconds. Never rub or pat an area to remove a spill.
Portions of the airplane’s seats are covered with leather. The leather is treated with a sealant, which
provides a protective cover. Do not attempt to feed the leather in any way. In particular, the use of
spray polishes, saddle soaps, waxes, and so-called hide foods create a sticky surface, which attracts
dirt and can cause irreversible damage.
The leather and ultra-leather seats, seatbacks, knee bolsters, and the like, should be routinely wiped
with a moist soft cotton cloth after vacuuming. Use a mild non-detergent soap such as Neutrogena.
Wipe the leather and ultra-leather using a light circular motion taking care not to soak the surface.
Once the seats and other areas are clean, repeat the process using clean water and then wipe the
surfaces with a dry cloth. For ink stains, use a special application available through Douglas Interior
Products known as a D.I.P. Stick. Since the D.I.P. Stick application must be used within 24 hours,
one should be held in reserve at all times.
The carpet can be cleaned with a mild foam product, but care must be used not to over saturate.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions regarding use of the foam cleaner. Small spots can be
cleaned with a commercial spot remover; however, this must be done with care. Again, follow the
recommended procedure of the manufacturer, and try a test application in an area of limited
exposure.

Section 8
ENGINE AND PROPELLER

Engine Cleaning and Care – If necessary, the engine is normally cleaned at the recommended 50-
hour oil change interval since the cowling is removed to change the oil. In addition, the air filter
should be replaced at every 100 hours of time in service or if the filter element is more than 50%
covered with dirt and debris; it may require more frequent cleaning depending on the operating
environmental conditions. If the engine is cleaned at the 50 or 100-hour oil change intervals, this
should be adequate under most operating conditions.
In any event, the engine must be kept relatively clean for all flight operations. It is difficult to
establish a precise time in service recommendation since much depends on the environmental
conditions and the types of airplane operations. Engine cleaning, air filter cleaning and replacement,
and lubrication of the engine controls is permitted as an item of preventive maintenance and can be
performed by the owner or operator if that person possesses a private pilot or higher level of
certification.
It is best to clean the engine with a spray type cleaner, preferably under pressure. There are a
number of approved commercial solvents specifically designed for this use. Care must be exercised
to ensure that application of the solvent does not damage other components in the engine area. Refer
to the Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG) Approved Maintenance Manual for additional instructions.
Propeller Cleaning and Care – It is important to keep the propeller clean since it facilitates
detection of cracks and other problems. The propeller must be cleaned with a non-oil based
substance such as Stoddard Solvent. The solvent must only be applied to the surface of the blades
with a soft brush or cloth; care must be used to avoid contact with the propeller hub and seals. Do
not use any type of spray application, pressurized or unpressurized, since over-spray particles could
contact the propeller hub and seals. The use of water and a mild soap is also acceptable; however,
never use any alkaline-based products.
Nicks on the leading edge of the propeller blade, particularly towards the blade’s tip should be
dressed out as soon as possible. Undressed nicks, over time, can lead to problems that are more
serious. The repair of the airplane’s propeller, including propeller nicks, can only be performed by
authorized maintenance personnel and is not an item of authorized preventive maintenance.
When the propeller is clean, dry the surface with a soft cloth and wax the blades with a good quality
automobile paste wax. The major issue with propeller care is corrosion control. Frequent cleaning
and applications of paste wax will significantly retard the erosion process. These procedures are
particularly applicable in geographical areas of high humidity and salt particles. Never try to remove
corrosion pitting with an abrasive material such as steel wool or sandpaper since this accelerates the
corrosion process.

Section 8

Section 9
Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG) Supplements
Section 9
Supplements
GENERAL
This section contains information about optional equipment that is installed in the airplane as a
Supplemental Type Certificate (STC). A log for STC equipment is provided on page 9-2. Each STC
installation will have an FAA approved supplement that must be included in this section of the FAA
Approved Airplane Flight Manual and Pilot’s Operating Handbook (AFM/POH).
Each Supplement is designed as a self-contained miniature AFM/POH and contains the same first
five sections as the primary AFM/POH. Each supplement has its own table of contents and series of
unique page numbers. This arrangement makes locating a particular supplement somewhat more
difficult since the page numbers are restarted for each supplement.
In the Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing Corporation Information Manual for the Columbia 400, the
actual supplements provided by the holder of the STC are not included. However, to assist the reader
in understanding the special equipment that is installed through an STC, a discussion of these
components is included on the following pages. A generic format is used for each supplemental
section, since this will provide a consistent form of presentation for the reader. The formats of each
supplement in the airplane’s AFM/POH may differ significantly.
The intent of the AFM/POH is to be a self-contained document. That is, the goal was to provide
enough information about operating the airplane and its special equipment in a single publication.
Detailed and advanced techniques are not included in the supplements since this information is
available in the respective pilot/owner operating publications. The instructions in the various
supplements, for the most part, are copied directly from the manufacturer’s documentation.
However, the format was changed, and a few spelling, grammatical, and typographical errors were
corrected.

Section 9
Supplements Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG)
LOG OF SUPPLEMENTS
The table below is for tabulating the installation of equipment and/or devices that are installed as
supplemental equipment. Such equipment and/or devices must have their own Supplemental Type
Certificate (STC) number. Some equipment may be installed at the Columbia Aircraft
Manufacturing Corporation factory, in which case, the STC information will be logged in this
section. The installation of after-market supplemental items is totally at the discretion of the owner
or operator of the airplane. Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing Corporation neither endorses nor
opposes after-market installations; however, such an installation can limit or invalidate the warranty
on the airplane. Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing Corporation does not provide technical support or
documentation for after-market installations. The holder of the STC normally provides these
services.
This log is provided as a service to the owner or operator of the airplane so that after-market
supplemental installations are documented in a consistent format. It is suggested that when an after-
market product is installed in the airplane, the appropriate information be entered in the log below,
and the supporting documentation inserted at the end of the Pilot’s Operating Handbook.
Supp. Date Revision

Manufacturer/Type of Equipment
No. Installed No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.


400 Poh

Uploaded by

Copyright:

400 Poh

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

400 Poh

Uploaded by

Copyright:

PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK

Columbia 400 (LC41-550FG)

Columbia Aircraft Manufacturing Corporation

Type Certificate No. A00003SE

THIS HANDBOOK INCLUDES THE MATERIAL REQUIRED TO BE FURNISHED TO THE PILOT

This Handbook meets GAMA Specification No. 1, Specification for Pilot's

By: E. P. Kolano Title: Manager. Seattle Area Certification Office

Date: 31 Mar 06 Initial Issue: _09 Dec 05__ Revised: 10 Oct 06

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

PILOT OPERATING HANDBOOK

Title Page, iii, vii to xvi,

See Narrative Discussion of Shaun Ripple

Initial Issue of Manual: December 9, 2005 RC050005

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

RC050005 Initial Issue of Manual: December 9, 2005

PILOT OPERATING HANDBOOK

Initial Issue of Manual: December 9, 2005 RC050005

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

RC050005 Initial Issue of Manual: December 9, 2005

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Initial Issue of Manual: December 9, 2005 RC050005

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

RC050005 Initial Issue of Manual: December 9, 2005

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

5-34 C 6-A1 C 6-A11 C

5-35 C 6-A2 C 6-A12 C

5-36 C 6-A3 C 6-A13 C

Initial Issue of Manual: December 9, 2005 RC050005

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

RC050005 Initial Issue of Manual: December 9, 2005

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Initial Issue of Manual: December 9, 2005 RC050005

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

RC050005 Initial Issue of Manual: December 9, 2005

NARRATIVE DISCUSSION OF REVISIONS

Initial Issue of Manual: December 9, 2005 RC050005

NARRATIVE DISCUSSION OF REVISIONS

RC050005 Initial Issue of Manual: December 9, 2005

NARRATIVE DISCUSSION OF REVISIONS

Initial Issue of Manual: December 9, 2005 RC050005

NARRATIVE DISCUSSION OF REVISIONS

RC050005 Initial Issue of Manual: December 9, 2005

NARRATIVE DISCUSSION OF REVISIONS

Initial Issue of Manual: December 9, 2005 RC050005

NARRATIVE DISCUSSION OF REVISIONS

RC050005 Initial Issue of Manual: December 9, 2005

NARRATIVE DISCUSSION OF REVISIONS

Initial Issue of Manual: December 9, 2005 RC050005

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

RC050005 Initial Issue of Manual: December 9, 2005

THREE-VIEW DRAWING OF THE AIRPLANE ....................................................................... 1-2

INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................... 1-3

DESCRIPTIVE DATA .................................................................................................................. 1-4

ABBREVIATIONS, TERMINOLOGY, AND SYMBOLS ......................................................... 1-6

REVISIONS AND CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL ............................................1-11

CONVERSION CHARTS ...........................................................................................................1-11

Initial Issue of Manual: December 9, 2005 RC050005

THREE-VIEW DRAWING OF THE AIRPLANE

*Note: Wingspan is 36 ft.± with position lights.